2023 Ford Explorer Owners Manual Version 1 Om en-US

FORD EXPLORER Owner's Manual 2023
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of release. In the interest of continuous
development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time without
notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval
system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors
and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2022
All rights reserved.

Part Number: -202209-20220907112020
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which
are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To
minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your
vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and

related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling.
Table of Contents
Introduction Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator

Chime .............................................................41
About This Manual ..........................................9
Seatbelt Reminder ........................................42
Symbols Glossary ............................................9
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Perchlorate ........................................................12 Maintenance ...............................................43
Ford Credit ........................................................12 Seatbelt Extensions .....................................44
Replacement Parts Recommendation
............................................................................12
Personal Safety System™
Special Notices ...............................................13
Personal Safety System™ .........................45
Mobile Communications Equipment
...........................................................................1 4
Export Unique Options ................................14 Supplementary Restraints
System
Data Privacy Principle of Operation .................................46
Data Privacy .....................................................15 Driver and Passenger Airbags ...................47
Service Data .....................................................16 Front Passenger Sensing System ...........48
Event Data ........................................................16 Side Airbags ....................................................50
Settings Data ...................................................17 Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags ........51
Connected Vehicle Data ..............................17 Safety Canopy™ .............................................51
Mobile Device Data .......................................18 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator .......52
Emergency Call System Data ....................18 Airbag Disposal ..............................................53
Environment Pedestrian Protection - Hybrid

Electric Vehicle (HEV)
Protecting the Environment .......................19
Pedestrian Alert System ............................54
At a Glance
911 Assist
At a Glance - ST ............................................20
What Is 911 Assist ..........................................55
Instrument Panel ............................................21
How Does 911 Assist Work .........................55
Child Safety Emergency Call Requirements ................55
Emergency Call Limitations ......................56
General Information .....................................23
Installing Child Restraints ..........................25
Keys and Remote Controls
Booster Seats .................................................33
General Information on Radio
Child Restraint Positioning ........................35 Frequencies .................................................57
Child Safety Locks ........................................36 Remote Control ..............................................57
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
Seatbelts ..........................................................................6 3
Principle of Operation .................................38
Fastening the Seatbelts .............................39 MyKey™
Seatbelt Height Adjustment ......................41 Principle of Operation .................................64
2023 Explorer (CTW) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202209, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Creating a MyKey ..........................................65 Lighting

Clearing All MyKeys ......................................66 General Information ....................................86
Checking MyKey System Status .............66 Lighting Control .............................................86
Using MyKey With Remote Start Autolamps .......................................................87
Systems ........................................................67
Instrument Lighting Dimmer .....................87
MyKey – Troubleshooting ..........................67
Headlamp Exit Delay ...................................87
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Doors and Locks Configurable Daytime Running Lamps
Locking and Unlocking ...............................68 ..........................................................................88
Keyless Entry ....................................................71 Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .........88
Liftgate Front Fog Lamps ...........................................88
Power Liftgate .................................................73 Adaptive Headlamps ..................................89
Direction Indicators ......................................89
Security Interior Lamps ................................................90
Passive Anti-Theft System .........................77 Ambient Lighting - Vehicles With: 8 Inch
Center Display Screen ............................90
Anti-Theft Alarm ............................................77
Ambient Lighting - Vehicles With: 10.1
Inch Center Display Screen ....................91
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles Automatic High Beam Control
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column ..........................................................79
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles What Is Automatic High Beam Control
With: Power Adjustable Steering ..........................................................................9 2
Column ..........................................................79 Switching Automatic High Beam Control
Audio Control ...................................................81 On and Off ...................................................92
Voice Control ...................................................81 Automatic High Beam Control Indicators
..........................................................................9 3
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise
Control ...........................................................81 Overriding Automatic High Beam Control
..........................................................................9 3
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Stop and
Go ....................................................................82
Windows and Mirrors
Information Display Control ......................82
Power Windows ............................................94
Heated Steering Wheel ...............................82
Global Opening ..............................................95
Horn ....................................................................82
Exterior Mirrors - Excluding: ST ................95
Wipers and Washers Exterior Mirrors - ST .....................................96
Windshield Wipers .......................................83 Interior Mirror ..................................................98
Autowipers ......................................................83 Sun Visors ........................................................98
Windshield Washers ....................................84 Sun Shades .....................................................99
Rear Window Wiper and Washers ..........85 Moonroof .........................................................99
Table of Contents
Instrument Cluster Head Restraints ...........................................144

Gauges - Vehicles With: 6.5 Inch Manual Seats ................................................146
Instrument Cluster Display Screen Power Seats ...................................................147
..........................................................................101 Memory Function ........................................150
Gauges - Vehicles With: 12.3 Inch Rear Seats .......................................................151
Instrument Cluster Display Screen
.........................................................................102 Heated Seats ................................................156
Gauges - Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch Ventilated Seats ...........................................157
Instrument Cluster Display Screen
........................................................................104 Rear Occupant Alert System
Warning Lamps and Indicators ..............105
Audible Warnings and Indicators ..........109 What is the Rear Occupant Alert System
.........................................................................158
Information Displays How Does the Rear Occupant Alert
General Information - Vehicles With: 6.5 System Work .............................................158
Inch Instrument Cluster Display Screen Rear Occupant Alert System Precautions
..........................................................................110 .........................................................................158
General Information - Vehicles With: 12.3 Rear Occupant Alert System Limitations
Inch Instrument Cluster Display Screen .........................................................................158
..........................................................................112 Switching Rear Occupant Alert System
General Information - Vehicles With: 4.2 On and Off .................................................158
Inch Instrument Cluster Display Screen Rear Occupant Alert System Indicators
..........................................................................115 .........................................................................159
Personalized Settings ..................................117 Rear Occupant Alert System Audible
Information Messages ................................119 Warnings .....................................................159
Climate Control Garage Door Opener

Automatic Climate Control ......................137 What Is the Garage Door Opener .........160
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate How Does the Garage Door Opener Work
.........................................................................139 ........................................................................160
Rear Passenger Climate Controls .........140 Garage Door Opener Precautions ........160
Heated Windshield ......................................141 Garage Door Opener Limitations ..........160
Heated Rear Window .................................142 Programming the Garage Door Opener
Heated Exterior Mirrors ..............................142 to Your Hand-Held Transmitter ..........161
Remote Start .................................................142 Programming the Garage Door Opener
to Your Garage Door Opener Motor
..........................................................................161
Interior Air Quality Programming the Garage Door Opener
What Is the Cabin Air Filter ......................143 to Your Gate Opener Motor .................162
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter ..................143 Clearing the Garage Door Opener .........162
Reprogramming the Garage Door Opener
Seats .........................................................................163
Sitting in the Correct Position .................144 Garage Door Opener Radio Frequencies
.........................................................................163
Table of Contents
Auxiliary Power Points Refueling - Excluding: Hybrid Electric

Vehicle (HEV) ...........................................185
Auxiliary Power Points ...............................164
Refueling - Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
........................................................................188
Wireless Accessory Charger Fuel Consumption ........................................191
What Is the Wireless Accessory Charger
........................................................................166
Engine Emission Control
Wireless Accessory Charger Precautions
........................................................................166 Emission Law ................................................192
Locating the Wireless Accessory Charger Catalytic Converter .....................................193
........................................................................166
Charging a Wireless Device .....................166 High Voltage Battery
General Information - Hybrid Electric
Storage Compartments Vehicle (HEV) ...........................................196
Cup Holders ...................................................167
Overhead Console .......................................167 Transmission
Automatic Transmission ...........................197
Starting and Stopping the
Engine Four-Wheel Drive
General Information ...................................168 Principle of Operation ...............................203
Ignition Switch ..............................................168 Using Four-Wheel Drive ...........................203
Keyless Starting ...........................................169
Starting a Gasoline Engine ......................169 Rear Axle
Starting a Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Limited Slip Differential ...........................209
..........................................................................172
Engine Block Heater ....................................174 Brakes
General Information ...................................210
Unique Driving Characteristics Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
..........................................................................211
Auto-Start-Stop ...........................................176 Electric Parking Brake ..................................211
Hybrid Vehicle Operation - Hybrid Hill Start Assist .............................................213
Electric Vehicle (HEV) ...........................178 Auto Hold ........................................................214
Hybrid Vehicle Frequently Asked
Questions - Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(HEV) ..........................................................180 Reverse Braking Assist
What Is Reverse Braking Assist ..............216
Fuel and Refueling Reverse Braking Assist Precautions ......216
Safety Precautions ......................................181 Switching Reverse Braking Assist On and
Off ..................................................................217
Fuel Quality - E85 ........................................181
Overriding Reverse Braking Assist .........217
Fuel Quality - Gasoline ..............................183
Reverse Braking Assist Indicators ..........217
Fuel Filler Funnel Location .......................183
Reverse Braking Assist –
Running Out of Fuel ...................................183 Troubleshooting .......................................218
Table of Contents
Traction Control Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions -

Vehicles With: Lane Centering ............241
Principle of Operation ...............................220
Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions -
Using Traction Control ..............................220 Vehicles With: Stop and Go .................241
Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations -
Stability Control Vehicles With: Lane Centering ...........242
Principle of Operation ................................221 Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations -
Using Stability Control ..............................222 Vehicles With: Stop and Go ................243
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
and Off .......................................................245
Hill Descent Control
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
What Is Hill Descent Control ..................224 Speed ..........................................................245
Switching Hill Descent Control On and Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Gap
Off ................................................................224 ........................................................................246
Setting the Hill Descent Speed .............224 Canceling the Set Speed .........................247
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................224 Resuming the Set Speed .........................247
Overriding the Set Speed .........................247
Parking Aids Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators -
Principle of Operation ...............................225 Vehicles With: Intelligent Adaptive
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................225 Cruise Control ..........................................248
Front Parking Aid .........................................227 Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators -
Vehicles With: Lane Centering ..........248
Side Sensing System .................................229
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators -
Active Park Assist .......................................230 Vehicles With: Stop and Go ...............248
Rear View Camera ......................................234 Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control
360 Degree Camera ...................................237 to Cruise Control .....................................248
Switching Lane Centering On and Off
Cruise Control ........................................................................249
What Is Cruise Control ..............................239 Switching Intelligent Mode On and Off
........................................................................250
Switching Cruise Control On and Off
........................................................................239 Adjusting the Set Speed Tolerance ......250
Setting the Cruise Control Speed .........239 Adaptive Cruise Control –
Troubleshooting .....................................250
Canceling the Set Speed .........................240
Resuming the Set Speed ........................240
Driving Aids
Cruise Control Indicators .........................240
Driver Alert .....................................................254
Lane Keeping System ...............................255
Adaptive Cruise Control
Blind Spot Information System ............259
How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With
Stop and Go Work ...................................241 Cross Traffic Alert .......................................263
What Is Adaptive Cruise Control With Speed Sign Recognition ..........................266
Lane Centering .........................................241 Steering ..........................................................268
What Is Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Pre-Collision Assist ...................................268
Control .........................................................241
Table of Contents
Drive Mode Control Customer Assistance

What Is Drive Mode Control ....................273 Getting the Services You Need .............298
How Does Drive Mode Control Work In California (U.S. Only) ...........................299
.........................................................................273 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Selecting a Drive Mode .............................273 Line Program (U.S. Only) ....................300
Drive Modes ...................................................273 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only) .......................301
Load Carrying Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada ........................................................301
Ordering Additional Owner's Literature
Rear Under Floor Storage ........................275 ........................................................................303
Cargo Nets .....................................................276 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)
Roof Racks and Load Carriers ................276 ........................................................................303
Load Limit .......................................................277 Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)
........................................................................303
Towing
Towing a Trailer ...........................................283 Fuses
Trailer Sway Control ..................................284 Fuse Specification Chart .........................305
Recommended Towing Weights ..........284 Changing a Fuse ...........................................313
Essential Towing Checks .........................285
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels .....287 Maintenance
Driving Hints Opening and Closing the Hood ..............315
Reduced Engine Performance ..............288 Under Hood Overview - 2.3L EcoBoost™
.........................................................................316
Cold Weather Precautions ......................288
Under Hood Overview - 3.0L ...................317
Breaking-In ...................................................288
Under Hood Overview - 3.3L ...................318
Driving Economically ................................288
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.3L EcoBoost™
Driving Through Shallow Water ............289 .........................................................................319
Floor Mats .....................................................289 Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.0L .........................319
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.3L ..........................319
Roadside Emergencies Engine Oil Check ..........................................319
Roadside Assistance ..................................291 Oil Change Indicator Reset .....................320
Hazard Flashers ...........................................292 Changing the Engine Air Filter - 2.3L
Fuel Shutoff ..................................................292 EcoBoost™ ................................................321
Jump Starting the Vehicle .......................293 Changing the Engine Air Filter - 3.0L
Collision, Damage or Fire Event ............295 ........................................................................322
Post-Crash Alert System .........................296 Changing the Engine Air Filter - 3.3L ....323
Transporting the Vehicle .........................296 Engine Coolant Check ..............................324
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check
........................................................................328
Brake Fluid Check .......................................328
Table of Contents
Power Steering Fluid Check ....................329 Capacities and Specifications

Changing the 12V Battery - Excluding:
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) ............329 Engine Specifications - 2.3L EcoBoost™
Changing the 12V Battery - Hybrid ........................................................................378
Electric Vehicle (HEV) ..........................332 Engine Specifications - 3.0L, ST ...........378
Adjusting the Headlamps ........................335 Engine Specifications - 3.0L ..................380
Washer Fluid Check ...................................336 Engine Specifications - 3.3L, Gasoline
Fuel Filter .......................................................336 .......................................................................380
Checking the Wiper Blades ....................336 Engine Specifications - 3.3L, Hybrid
Changing the Front Wiper Blades ........336 Electric Vehicle (HEV) ...........................381
Changing the Rear Wiper Blades ..........337 Motorcraft Parts - 2.3L EcoBoost™ .....382
Changing a Bulb ..........................................337 Motorcraft Parts - 3.0L .............................382
Motorcraft Parts - 3.3L .............................383
Vehicle Care Vehicle Identification Number ...............383
General Information ..................................339 Capacities and Specifications - 2.3L
EcoBoost™ ..............................................384
Cleaning Products ......................................339
Capacities and Specifications - 3.0L
Cleaning the Exterior ................................340 .........................................................................391
Waxing .............................................................341 Capacities and Specifications - 3.3L,
Cleaning the Engine ....................................341 Gasoline .....................................................398
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades Capacities and Specifications - 3.3L,
........................................................................342 Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) ...........405
Cleaning the Interior ..................................342 Bulb Specification Chart ...........................412
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens ......................343 Connected Vehicle
Cleaning Leather Seats ............................343 What Is a Connected Vehicle ..................414
Repairing Minor Paint Damage .............344 Connected Vehicle Requirements ........414
Cleaning the Wheels .................................344 Connected Vehicle Limitations ..............414
Vehicle Storage ...........................................344 Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Body Styling Kits ........................................346 Network ......................................................414
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Wheels and Tires Network - Vehicles With: SYNC 3 ......414
General Information ..................................347 Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting -
Vehicles With: Modem ..........................415
Tire Care .........................................................349
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting -
Using Summer Tires ..................................362 Vehicles With: SYNC 3 ..........................416
Using Winter Tires ......................................362
Using Snow Chains ....................................363 Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Tire Pressure Monitoring System .........364 Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot ..........418
Changing a Road Wheel ..........................370 Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Technical Specifications ..........................376 Name or Password .................................418
Table of Contents
Audio System
Audio Unit ......................................................419
Digital Radio .................................................420
Satellite Radio .............................................422
USB Port ........................................................425
SYNC™ 3
Using Voice Recognition ..........................429
Entertainment .............................................435
Climate ...........................................................445
Phone ..............................................................447
Navigation .....................................................449
Electric Vehicle Information ...................454
Apps ................................................................455
Settings ..........................................................458
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting ....................460
Accessories
Accessories ...................................................473
Ford Protect
Ford Protect ..................................................474
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information .......476
Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........479
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance ............................................482
Customer Information
Rollover Warning ........................................485
Radio Frequency Certification Labels
.......................................................................485
Warranty Information ...............................529
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility ..............531
End User License Agreement ................534
Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING: Driving while

distracted can result in loss of vehicle
E154903
control, crash and injury. We strongly
recommend that you use extreme
caution when using any device that may A Right-hand side.
take your focus off the road. Your B Left-hand side.
primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated These are some of the symbols you may
systems when possible. Make sure you see on your vehicle.
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic Airbag
devices while driving. E67017
Note: This manual describes product Air conditioning system

E162384
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It Air conditioning system lubricant
may describe options not fitted to the E231157 type
vehicle you have purchased.
Anti-lock braking system
Note: Some of the illustrations in this E67020
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
to you on your vehicle. E139220
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle

in line with all applicable laws and Battery
regulations. E67021
Note: Pass on this manual when selling

your vehicle. It is an integral part of your Battery acid
E139227
vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a Blower motor
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
Introduction
Brake fluid - non petroleum Explosive gas

E139209 based E139221
Brake system Fan warning

E67024 E139228
Brake system Fasten seatbelt

E270480 E71880
Cabin air filter Flammable

E139223
E231160
Check fuel cap Front fog lamps
Child safety door lock or unlock Fuel pump reset
Child seat lower anchor Fuse compartment

E139211 E139214
Child seat tether anchor Hazard flashers

E141128 E75790
Cruise control Headlamp high beams

E67019
E332905
Do not open when hot Headlamps on

E139219
E270968
Electric Parking brake Heated rear window

E139212
Engine air filter Hill descent control

E163171
Engine coolant Horn control

E270945
Engine coolant temperature Interior luggage compartment

E103308 release
Engine oil Jack

E67022 E139231
10
Introduction
Keep out of reach of children Requires registered technician

E231159
E161353
Lighting control Safety alert

E65963
Low fuel level See Owner's Manual

E72021
Low tire pressure warning See Service Manual

E139232 E231158
Maintain correct fluid level Side airbag

E139229
Malfunction Indicator Lamp Shield the eyes

E67028
(MIL)
E167012
Note operating instructions Stability control

E72343
E138639
Panic alarm Stability control off
E130458
Parking aid Trail control
E139213 E332910
Parking lamps E67018 Turn Signal

E71341
Passenger airbag activated Windshield defrosting system

E73953
E270849
Passenger airbag deactivated Windshield wiping system
E270850 E270969
Power steering fluid Windshield wash and wipe

E270967
Power windows front/rear

E139216
Power window lockout

E139225
11
Introduction
PERCHLORATE Scheduled Maintenance and

Mechanical Repairs
Certain components in your vehicle such
One of the best ways for you to make sure
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
that your vehicle provides years of service
and remote control batteries may contain
is to have it maintained in line with our
perchlorate material. Special handling
recommendations using parts that
may apply for service or vehicle end of life
conform to the specifications detailed in
disposal.
this Owner’s Manual.
For more information visit: Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet
or exceed these specifications.
Web Address
Collision Repairs
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents happen sometimes.
FORD CREDIT Genuine Ford replacement collision parts

meet our stringent requirements for fit,
US Only finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing vehicle development we validate that
and lease plans to help you acquire your these parts deliver the intended level of
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your protection as a whole system. A great way
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for to know for sure you are getting this level
your business. of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
For assistance call 1-800-727-7000, or for
more information about Ford Credit and Warranty on Replacement Parts
access to the online Account Manager tool,
visit www.ford.com/finance. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
The Ford Warranty may not cover damage
RECOMMENDATION caused to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts.
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We For additional information, refer to the
recommend that you demand the use of terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
12
Introduction
SPECIAL NOTICES Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link

Connector (DLC) that is used in
New Vehicle Limited Warranty conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for
vehicle diagnostics, repairs and
For a detailed description of what is reprogramming services. Installing an
covered by your New Vehicle Limited aftermarket device that uses the DLC
Warranty, see your warranty guide that is during normal driving for purposes such as
available online. For more information, remote insurance company monitoring,
refer to our website and download your transmission of vehicle data to other
copy of the warranty guide. devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
Special Instructions interference with or even damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted or endorse the use of unapproved
with sophisticated electronic controls. aftermarket plug-in devices. The vehicle
Warranty will not cover damage caused
WARNING: You risk death or by an aftermarket plug-in device.
serious injury to yourself and others if you Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks
do not follow the instruction highlighted and Utility Type Vehicles
by the warning symbol. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
WARNING: NEVER use a rearward significantly higher rollover rate than
facing child restraint on a seat protected other types of vehicles.
by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it,
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD Before you drive your vehicle, please read
can occur. this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle
is not a passenger car. As with other
vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
On Board Diagnostics Data Link vehicle correctly may result in loss of
Connector vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not connect Using Your Vehicle With a
wireless plug-in devices to the data link Snowplow
connector. Unauthorized third parties
could gain access to vehicle data and Do not use this vehicle for
impair the performance of safety related snowplowing.
systems. Only allow repair facilities that Your vehicle does not have a snowplowing
follow our service and repair instructions package.
to connect their equipment to the data
link connector. Using Your Vehicle as an
Ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an
ambulance.
13
Introduction
Your vehicle does not have the Ambulance EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
Preparation Package.
For your particular global region, your
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
EQUIPMENT and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
WARNING: Driving while complements this book. By referring to the
distracted can result in loss of vehicle market unique supplement, if provided,
control, crash and injury. We strongly you can properly identify those features,
recommend that you use extreme recommendations and specifications that
caution when using any device that may are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
take your focus off the road. Your Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
primary responsibility is the safe Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
operation of your vehicle. We listed as standard may be different on units
recommend against the use of any built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
hand-held device while driving and Manual for all other required
encourage the use of voice-operated information and warnings.
systems when possible. Make sure you
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment

is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
14
Data Privacy
• Events or errors in essential systems,

WARNING: Do not connect for example headlamps and brakes.
wireless plug-in devices to the data link • System responses to driving situations,
connector. Unauthorized third parties for example airbag deployment and
could gain access to vehicle data and stability control.
impair the performance of safety related • Environmental conditions, for example
systems. Only allow repair facilities that temperature.
follow our service and repair instructions
to connect their equipment to the data Some of this data, when used in
link connector. combination with other information, for
example an accident report, damage to a
We respect your privacy and are vehicle or eyewitness statements, could
committed to protecting it. The be associated with a specific person.
information contained in this publication
Services That We Provide
was correct at the time of release, but as
technology rapidly changes, we If you use our services, we collect and use
recommend that you visit the local Ford data, for example account information,
website for the latest information. vehicle location and driving characteristics,
Your vehicle has electronic control units that could identify you. We transmit this
that have data recording functionality and data through a dedicated, protected
the ability to permanently or temporarily connection. We only collect and use data
store data. This data could include to enable your use of our services to which
information on the condition and status of you have subscribed, with your consent or
your vehicle, vehicle maintenance where permitted by law. For additional
requirements, events and malfunctions. information, see the terms and conditions
The types of data that can be recorded are of the services to which you have
described in this section. Some of the data subscribed.
recorded is stored in event logs or error For additional information about our
logs. privacy policy, refer to the local Ford
Note: Error logs are reset following a service website.
or repair.
Services That Third Parties
Note: We may provide information in Provide
response to requests from law enforcement,
other government authorities and third We recommend that you review the terms
parties acting with lawful authority or and conditions and data privacy
through a legal process. Such information information for any services equipped with
could be used by them in legal proceedings. your vehicle or to which you subscribe. We
take no responsibility for services that third
Data recorded includes, for example: parties provide.
• Operating states of system
components, for example fuel level,
tire pressure and battery charge level.
• Vehicle and component status, for
example wheel speed, deceleration,
lateral acceleration and seatbelt
status.
15
Data Privacy
SERVICE DATA you, where permitted by law. For Canada

only, for more information, please review
Service data recorders in your vehicle are the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
capable of collecting and storing www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
diagnostic information about your vehicle. storage and use of service providers in
This potentially includes information about other jurisdictions who may be subject to
the performance or status of various legal requirements in Canada, the United
systems and modules in the vehicle, such States and other countries applicable to
as engine, throttle, steering or brake them, for example, lawful requirements to
systems. In order to properly diagnose and disclose personal information to
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company governmental authorities in those
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service countries.
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic EVENT DATA
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when This vehicle is equipped with an event data
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle. recorder. The main purpose of an event
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford data recorder is to record, in certain crash
of Canada, in Canada) may, where or near crash-like situations, such as an
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic airbag deployment or hitting a road
information for vehicle improvement or obstacle; this data will assist in
with other information we may have about understanding how a vehicle’s systems
you, for example, your contact information, performed. The event data recorder is
to offer you products or services that may designed to record data related to vehicle
interest you. Data may be provided to our dynamics and safety systems for a short
service providers such as part suppliers period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
that may help diagnose malfunctions, and
who are similarly obligated to protect data. The event data recorder in this vehicle is
We retain this data only as long as designed to record such data as:
necessary to perform these functions or to • How various systems in your vehicle
comply with law. We may provide were operating.
information where required in response to
• Whether or not the driver and
official requests to law enforcement or
passenger seatbelts were
other government authorities or third
buckled/fastened.
parties acting with lawful authority or court
order, and such information may be used • How far (if at all) the driver was
in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if depressing the accelerator and/or the
equipped), if you choose to use connected brake pedal.
apps and services, you consent that certain • How fast the vehicle was traveling.
diagnostic information may also be • Where the driver was positioning the
accessed electronically by Ford Motor steering wheel.
Company and Ford authorized service
facilities, and that the diagnostic This data can help provide a better
information may be used to provide understanding of the circumstances in
services to you, personalizing your which crashes and injuries occur.
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
16
Data Privacy
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded Entertainment Data

by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the Data recorded includes, for example:
event data recorder under normal driving • Music, videos or album art.
conditions and no personal data or • Contacts and corresponding address
information (for example name, gender, book entries.
age, and crash location) is recorded.
However, parties, such as law enforcement, • Navigation destinations.
could combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying data CONNECTED VEHICLE DATA
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation. The modem has a SIM. The
To read data recorded by an event data modem was enabled when your
recorder, special equipment is required, vehicle was built and periodically
and access to the vehicle or the event data sends messages to stay connected to the
recorder is needed. In addition to the cell phone network, receive automatic
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such software updates and send vehicle-related
as law enforcement, that have such special information to us, for example diagnostic
equipment, can read the information if they information. These messages could
have access to the vehicle or the event include information that identifies your
data recorder. vehicle, the SIM and the electronic serial
number of the modem. Cell phone network
service providers could have access to
SETTINGS DATA additional information, for example cell
phone network tower identification. For
Your vehicle has electronic control units additional information about our privacy
that have the ability to store data based policy, visit www.FordConnected.com or
on your personalized settings. The data is refer to your local Ford website.
stored locally in the vehicle or on devices
that you connect to it, for example, a USB Note: The modem continues to send this
drive or digital music player. You can delete information unless you disable the modem
some of this data and also choose whether or stop the modem from sharing vehicle
to share it through the services to which data by changing the modem settings. See
you subscribe. See Settings (page 458). Connected Vehicle (page 414).
Note: The service can be unavailable or
Comfort and Convenience Data interrupted for a number of reasons, for
Data recorded includes, for example: example environmental or topographical
conditions and data plan coverage.
• Seat and steering wheel position.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has a
• Climate control settings. modem, visit www.FordConnected.com.
• Radio presets.
17
Data Privacy
MOBILE DEVICE DATA The cell phone profile, media device index
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
If you connect a mobile device to your unless you delete them and are generally
vehicle, you can display data from your accessible only in your vehicle when you
device on the touchscreen for example, connect your cell phone or media device.
music and album art. You can share your If you no longer plan to use the system or
vehicle data with mobile apps on your your vehicle, we recommend you use the
device through the system. See Apps master reset function to erase the stored
(page 455). information. See Settings (page 458).
The mobile apps function operates by your System data cannot be accessed without
connected device sending data to us in the special equipment and access to your
United States. The data is encrypted and vehicle's module.
includes, for example, the vehicle For additional information about our
identification number of your vehicle, the privacy policy, refer to the local Ford
SYNC module serial number, odometer, website.
enabled apps, usage statistics and
debugging information. We retain it only Note: To find out if your vehicle has
as long as necessary to provide the service, connectivity technology, visit
to troubleshoot, for continuous www.FordConnected.com.
improvement and to offer you products
and services that may be of interest to you EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
according to your preferences and where
allowed by law. DATA
If you connect a cell phone to the system, When the emergency call system is active,
the system creates a profile that links to it may disclose to emergency services that
that cell phone. The cell phone profile your vehicle has been in a crash involving
enables more mobile features and efficient the deployment of an airbag or activation
operation. The profile contains, for of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions
example data from your phonebook, read or updates to the emergency call system
and unread text messages and call history, may also be capable of electronically or
including history of calls when your cell verbally disclosing to emergency services
phone was not connected to the system. operators your vehicle location or other
If you connect a media device, the system details about your vehicle or crash to assist
creates and retains a media device index emergency services operators to provide
of supported media content. The system the most appropriate emergency services.
also records a short diagnostic log of If you do not want to disclose this
approximately 10 minutes of all recent information, do not activate the emergency
system activity. call system.
Note: You cannot deactivate emergency
call systems that are required by law.
18
Environment
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You can take significant steps toward
protecting the environment with correct
vehicle usage and the authorized disposal
of waste, cleaning and lubrication
materials.
For additional information about our
sustainability progress and initiatives, visit
www.sustainability.ford.com.
19
At a Glance
AT A GLANCE - ST • Optional ST braking system includes

363 mm diameter vented front rotors
Exterior with heavy duty two-piston calipers
and low-dust linings; 350 mm diameter
• Front and rear fascias feature unique vented rear rotors with heavy-duty
ST grille and unique finish. single-piston brake calipers and
• ST badging in front grille and on rear electric integrated park brake with
liftgate. low-dust linings; system requires 21 x
• Trim features unique ST gloss black 9-inch wheels and P275/45R21
finish. all-season tires.
• E-X-P-L-O-R-E-R lettering across • Optional low-metallic brake linings are
hood. included with optional P275/45R21
summer tire (late availability).
• Blackout treatment on headlight and
taillight lenses. • ST-tuned electric power assist steering
rack and pinion.
Interior
• AdvanceTrac with stability
• Unique ST interior trim. enhancement system with four modes:
• Ford Performance sill plates. Default, Traction Control Off, Sport and
• ST flat-bottom steering wheel with Disabled.
integrated transmission shift paddle • Aluminum ST 20 in (50.8 cm) x 8.5 in
controls. (21.6 cm) wheels standard; 21 in
• Selectable Drive Mode controller with (53.3 cm) x 9 in (22.9 cm) wheels
7 settings (Normal, Eco, Sport, Trail, optional.
Slippery, Deep Snow/Sand and • P255/55R20 all-season tires or
Tow/Haul). optional P275/45R21 all-season tires.
• Unique electronic sound enhancement Powertrain
in Sport Selectable Drive Mode. • 3.0L V6 DOHC GTDI engine, 400
Chassis horsepower, 415 lb-ft.
• Unique ST-tuned suspension featuring • 10R60 10-speed automatic
32 N/mm front coil springs and a 34 transmission with SelectShift manual
mm hollow front stabilizer bar and 106 shift mode.
N/mm rear coil springs and a 21.7 mm • 3.58 axle ratios.
hollow rear stabilizer bar.
• Unique transmission calibration in
• Standard ST brake system consists of Sport Selectable Drive Mode.
345 mm diameter vented front rotors
with two piston calipers and low-dust • Dual exhaust with quad-tip outlets.
linings; 326 mm solid rear rotors with
single-piston brake calipers and
electric integrated park brake with low
dust linings.
20
At a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL
E282065
A Air vents.
B Direction indicator. See Direction Indicators (page 89).
C Cruise control. See Cruise Control (page 81). Audio control. See Audio
Control (page 81).
D Information display. See General Information (page 115).
E Information display control. See Information Display Control (page 82).
F Wiper lever. See Windshield Wipers (page 83).
G Ignition switch. See Keyless Starting (page 169).
H Information and Entertainment display.
I Hazard flasher switch. See Hazard Flashers (page 292).
J Climate control. See Automatic Climate Control (page 137).
K Horn.
21
At a Glance
L Steering wheel adjustment. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 79).
M Lighting control. See Lighting Control (page 86). Power liftgate release. See
Power Liftgate (page 73).
22
Child Safety
GENERAL INFORMATION (CPST) to make sure that you properly

install the child restraint in your vehicle
See the following sections for directions and that you consult your pediatrician to
on how to properly use safety restraints make sure you have a child restraint
for children. appropriate for your child. To locate a
child restraint fitting station and CPST,
contact NHTSA toll free at
WARNING: Always make sure your 1-888-327-4236 or go to
child is secured properly in a device that www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
is appropriate for their height, age and Transport Canada toll free at
weight. Child safety restraints must be 1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca
bought separately from your vehicle. to find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your
Failure to follow these instructions and area. Failure to properly restrain children
guidelines may result in an increased risk in child restraints made especially for
of serious injury or death to your child. their height, age and weight, may result
in an increased risk of serious injury or
WARNING: All children are shaped death to your child.
differently. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration and other safety WARNING: On hot days, the
organizations, base their temperature inside the vehicle can rise
recommendations for child restraints on very quickly. Exposure of people or
probable child height, age and weight animals to these high temperatures for
thresholds, or on the minimum even a short time can cause death or
requirements of the law. We recommend serious heat related injuries, including
that you check with a NHTSA Certified brain damage. Small children are
Child Passenger Safety Technician particularly at risk.
23
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child Child Size, Height, Weight, or Age Recommended Restraint

Type
Use a child restraint

Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (sometimes called an
toddlers (generally age four or younger). infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child restraint (generally
children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less Use a belt-positioning
Small children
than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg) booster seat.
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer).
Children who have outgrown or no longer Use a vehicle seatbelt
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster having the lap belt snug
seat (generally children who are at least and low across the hips,
Larger children 57 in (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb shoulder belt centered
(36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended across the shoulder and
by child restraint manufacturer). chest, and seat backrest
upright.
• You are required by law to properly use • When possible, properly restrain
child restraints for infants and toddlers children 12 years of age and under in a
in the United States, Canada and rear seating position of your vehicle.
Mexico. Accident statistics suggest that
• Many states and provinces require that children are safer when properly
small children use approved booster restrained in the rear seating positions
seats until they reach age eight, a than in a front seating position. See
height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb Front Passenger Sensing System
(36 kg). Check your local and state or (page 48).
provincial laws for specific • When installing a rear facing child
requirements about the safety of restraint, adjust the vehicle seats to
children in your vehicle. avoid interference between the child
restraint and the vehicle seat in front
of the child restraint.
24
Child Safety
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS WARNING: Depending on where
you secure a child restraint, and
Child Seats depending on the child restraint design,
you may block access to certain seatbelt
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, make sure occupants only use
seating positions where they are able to
be properly restrained.
When installing a child restraint with

combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
E142594 • Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
Use a child restraint (sometimes called an
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
fastened in the buckle.
seat) for Infants, toddlers and children
weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally • Keep the buckle release button
four-years-old or younger). pointing up and away from the child
restraint, with the tongue between the
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts child restraint and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat in the upright
WARNING: Do not place a position before you install the child
rearward facing child restraint in front of restraint.
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
• For second row seating positions,
instruction could result in personal injury
adjust the recliner slightly to improve
or death.
child restraint fit. If needed, remove the
head restraints.
WARNING: Properly secure
children 12 years old and under in a rear • For third row seating positions, stow
seating position whenever possible. If the head restraints to improve child
you are unable to properly secure all restraint fit. See Head Restraints
children in a rear seating position, (page 144).
properly secure the largest child on the • Put the seatbelt in the automatic
front seat. If you must use a forward locking mode. See Step 5 in the
facing child restraint on the front seat, procedure that follows. This vehicle
move the seat as far back as possible. does not require the use of a locking
Failure to follow these instructions could clip.
result in personal injury or death.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
25
Child Safety
Note: Although the child restraint

illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
the steps are the same for installing a rear
facing child restraint.
Note: Follow all instructions provided by
the manufacturer of the child restraint
regarding the necessary and proper use of
the lock-off device. In some instances, the
manufacturer provides these devices only
for use in vehicles with seatbelt systems
that would otherwise require a locking clip.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt

portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Make sure you do not twist
the belt webbing.
E142528
1. Position the child restraint in a seat

with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper

buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure that you securely latch the tongue
by pulling on it.
E142529
2. After positioning the child restraint in

the proper seating position, pull down
on the shoulder belt and then grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
26
Child Safety
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.

Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint as you
pull up on the shoulder belt to force
slack from the belt. This is necessary
to remove the remaining slack that
exists once you add the extra weight
of the child to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper snugness
of the child restraint to your vehicle.
Sometimes, a slight lean toward the
E142875 buckle provides extra help to remove
5. To put the retractor in the automatic remaining slack from the belt.
locking mode, grasp the shoulder 9. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
portion of the belt and pull downward attach it now.
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode. You should
not be able to pull more belt out. If the E142534
retractor did not lock, unbuckle the belt
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure you have the seat
securely held in place. To check this,
grab the seat at the belt path and
attempt to move it side to side and
forward and back. There should be
no more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of
movement for proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make sure you properly
installed the child restraint. In Canada,
E142533 check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
27
Child Safety
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers Second Row Bucket Seats and Third
for CHildren (LATCH) Row Seats
WARNING: Do not attach two child

safety restraints to the same anchor. In
a crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
WARNING: Depending on where

you secure a child restraint, and
depending on the child restraint design, E319061
you may block access to certain seatbelt
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower Second Row Bench Seats and Third
anchors, rendering those features Row Seats
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, make sure occupants only use
seating positions where they are able to
be properly restrained.
The LATCH system has three vehicle

anchor points: two lower anchors where
the seat backrest and seat cushion meet
(called the seat bight) and one top tether
anchor behind that seating position.
LATCH compatible child restraints have
two rigid or webbing mounted E325445
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use seatbelts to attach the child
restraint. However, you can still use the
seatbelt to attach the child restraint. For
forward-facing child restraints, you must
also attach the top tether strap to the
proper top tether anchor if one came with
your child restraint.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child restraint installation at the seating E144054
positions marked with the child restraint
symbol.
28
Child Safety
The LATCH anchors are at the rear section Each time you use the child restraint, check
of the rear seat between the cushion and that you properly attached the seat to the
seat backrest below the symbols as lower anchors and tether anchor, if
shown. Follow the child restraint applicable. Tug the child restraint from side
manufacturer's instructions to properly to side and forward and back where you
install a child restraint with LATCH secured it to your vehicle. The child
attachments. restraint should move less than 1 in
(2.5 cm) if you properly install the seat.
Follow the instructions on attaching child
restraints with tether straps. See Using If you do not properly anchor the child
Tether Straps later in this chapter. restraint, the risk of injury to a child greatly
increases in a crash.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child restraint only to the anchors shown. Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Restraints
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center When used in combination, you can attach
Seating Use) either the seatbelt or the LATCH lower
anchors first, provided you achieve a proper
installation. Attach the tether strap
WARNING: The standardized afterward, if included with the child
spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in restraint.
(280 mm) center to center. Do not use
LATCH lower anchors for the center Using Tether Straps
seating position unless the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions permit and Many forward-facing child
specify using anchors spaced at least as
E141128restraints include a tether strap
far apart as those in this vehicle. which extends from the back of
the child restraint and hooks to an
The lower anchors at the center of the anchoring point called the top tether
second row bench seat are spaced 20.5 in anchor. Tether straps are available as an
(52 cm) apart. The standardized spacing accessory for many older child restraints.
for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (28 cm)
Contact the manufacturer of your child
center to center. You cannot install a child
restraint for information about ordering a
restraint with rigid LATCH attachments at
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
the center seating position. You can only
strap if the tether strap on your child
use LATCH compatible child restraints with
restraint does not reach the appropriate
attachments on belt webbing at this
top tether anchor in your vehicle.
seating position provided that the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions Once you install the child restraint using
permit use with the anchor spacing stated. either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of
Do not attach a child restraint to any lower the LATCH system, or both, you can attach
anchor if you have an adjacent child the top tether strap.
restraint attached to that anchor. The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
29
Child Safety
Second Row Bucket Seats and Third For second row outermost seating
Row Seats positions, route the child restraint tether
strap over the seat backrest, under the
head restraint and between the head
restraint posts. If needed, remove the head
restraint to improve the fit of the child
restraint or tether strap.
For the second row center seating position,
route the child restraint tether strap over
the top of the head restraint. If needed,
remove the head restraint to improve the
fit of the child restraint or tether strap. See
Head Restraints (page 144).
E319055
For third row seating positions, route the
Second Row Bench Seats and Third child restraint tether strap over the seat
Row Seats backrest, under the head restraint and
between the head restraint posts. If
needed, fold the head restraint down to
improve the fit of the child restraint or
tether strap. See Head Restraints (page
144).
1. Route the tether strap.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown. The tether hook may be
twisted ½ turn to improve installation.
E319047
If you clip the tether strap incorrectly,
the child restraint may not be retained
Perform the following steps to install a
properly in the event of a crash.
child restraint with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child restraint
off your vehicle seat cushion when the child
is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child restraint.
Keeping the child restraint just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
E190833
30
Child Safety
4. Tighten the child restraint tether strap If your child restraint system has a tether
according to the manufacturer's strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
instructions. recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.
If you do not properly anchor the child
restraint, the risk of injury to a child
increases greatly in a crash.
Second Row Bucket Seats
E251594
31
Child Safety
Second Row Bench Seats
E251593
Third Row Seats
E286303
Note: The cargo tie downs at the rear edge

of the floor are not tether anchors.
32
Child Safety
BOOSTER SEATS • Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder shoulder and chest?
section of the seatbelt or allow the child • Can the child stay seated like this for
to put the shoulder section of the the whole trip?
seatbelt under their arm or behind their Always use booster seats in conjunction
back. Failure to follow this instruction with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or Types of Booster Seats
death in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for

children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety restraint
(generally children who are less than 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age 4 and
less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg)
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach
E68924
age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or
80 lb (36 kg). • Backless booster seats
Booster seats should be used until you can If your backless booster seat has a
answer YES to ALL of these questions removable shield, remove the shield. If a
when seated without a booster seat: vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat backrest
or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back

against their vehicle seat backrest with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
33
Child Safety
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot

find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
E70710 the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
• High back booster seats shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
E142596
E142597
34
Child Safety
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle and warnings provided by your vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a manufacturer. A safety seat that is
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet improperly installed or utilized, is
liner under the booster seat may improve inappropriate for your child's height, age,
this condition. Do not introduce any item or weight or does not properly fit the
thicker than this under the booster seat. child may increase the risk of serious
Check with the booster seat injury or death.
manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING: Do not allow a
CHILD RESTRAINT passenger to hold a child on their lap
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to
POSITIONING follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of WARNING: Do not use pillows,
an active airbag. Failure to follow this books or towels to boost your child's
instruction could result in personal injury height. Failure to follow this instruction
or death. could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure WARNING: Properly secure child

children 12 years old and under in a rear restraints or booster seats when they are
seating position whenever possible. If not in use. They could become projectiles
you are unable to properly secure all in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to
children in a rear seating position, follow this instruction could result in
properly secure the largest child on the personal injury or death.
front seat. If you must use a forward
facing child restraint on the front seat, WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
move the seat as far back as possible. section of the seatbelt or allow the child
Failure to follow these instructions could to put the shoulder section of the
result in personal injury or death. seatbelt under their arm or behind their
back. Failure to follow this instruction
WARNING: Always carefully follow could reduce the effectiveness of the
the instructions and warnings provided seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or
by the manufacturer of any child death in a crash.
restraint to determine if the restraint
device is appropriate for your child's size, WARNING: Do not leave children
height, weight, or age. Follow the child or pets unattended in your vehicle.
restraint manufacturer's instructions and Failure to follow this instruction could
warnings provided for installation and result in personal injury or death.
use in conjunction with the instructions
35
Child Safety
Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children

Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X
Combined LATCH LATCH Seatbelt Seatbelt Seatbelt

Weight of (Lower (Lower and Top and LATCH Only
Restraint Anchors Anchors Tether (Lower
Child and
Type and Top Only) Anchor Anchors
Child
Restraint Tether and Top
Anchor) Tether
Anchor)
Rear facing
Up to 65 lb
child X X
(29.5 kg)
restraint
Rear facing
Over 65 lb
child X
(29.5 kg)
restraint
Forward
facing Up to 65 lb
X X X
child (29.5 kg)
restraint
Forward
facing Over 65 lb
X X
child (29.5 kg)
restraint
Note: The child restraint must rest tightly

against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
144).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
WARNING: You cannot open the

rear doors from inside if you have put the
child safety locks on.
36
Child Safety
E287259
A child safety lock is on the rear edge of

each rear door. You must set the child
safety lock separately on each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn the key clockwise to switch the child
lock on and counter clockwise to switch it
off.
Right-Hand Side
Turn the key counter clockwise to switch
the child lock on and clockwise to switch
it off.
Note: To make sure the child safety lock is
on, pull the inside door handle twice to verify
the door does not open.
Note: To open the rear doors from inside
the vehicle when the child lock is engaged,
roll down the rear window and use the
outside door handle. Or have someone
outside the vehicle open the door.
37
Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Each seating position
in your vehicle has a specific seatbelt
WARNING: Always drive and ride assembly made up of one buckle and
with your seatback upright and the lap one tongue designed to be used as a pair.
belt snug and low across the hips. Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder
WARNING: Children must always belt under the arm. Never use a single
be properly restrained. seatbelt for more than one person.
WARNING: Do not allow a WARNING: Even with advanced

passenger to hold a child on their lap restraints systems, properly restrain
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to children 12 and under in a rear seating
follow this instruction could result in position. Failure to follow this could
personal injury or death in the event of a seriously increase the risk of injury or
sudden stop or crash. death.
WARNING: All occupants of your WARNING: Seatbelts and seats

vehicle, including the driver, should may be hot in a vehicle that is in the
always properly wear their seatbelts, sunshine. The hot seatbelts or seats may
even when an airbag supplemental burn a small child. Check seat covers and
restraint system is provided. Failure to buckles before you place a child
properly wear your seatbelt could anywhere near them.
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death. All seating positions in your vehicle have
lap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants
WARNING: It is extremely of the vehicle should always properly wear
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside their seatbelts, even when an airbag
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people supplemental restraint system is provided.
riding in these areas are more likely to be The seatbelt system consists of:
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle • Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
that is not equipped with seats and • Shoulder seatbelt with automatic
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your locking mode, (except driver seatbelt).
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a • Height adjuster at the front outermost
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning seating positions.
could result in serious personal injury or
death. • Seatbelt pretensioners at the front
outermost and second row outermost
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an seating positions.
unbelted person is significantly more • Belt tension sensor at the front
likely to die than a person wearing a outermost passenger seating position.
seatbelt.
E71880
• Seatbelt warning light and chime.
38
Seatbelts
E67017
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed
to tighten the seatbelts when activated. In
frontal and near-frontal crashes, the
seatbelt pretensioners may be activated
alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity,
together with the front airbags. The
pretensioners may also activate when a
E142588
Safety Canopy airbag deploys.
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS buckle.
The front outboard and rear safety Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
WARNING: Always ride and drive
with your seatback upright and properly
fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion
of the seatbelt snugly and low across
the hips. Position the shoulder portion of
the seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See
the following figure.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper

buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure that you securely fasten the
tongue in the buckle.
E142590
39
Seatbelts
Pregnant women should always wear their small length of webbing back toward the
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline
combination lap and shoulder belt low the rear seat backrest or push the seat
across the hips below the belly and worn backrest cushion away from the seatbelt.
as tight as comfort allows. Position the Feed a small length of webbing back
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the toward the stowed position.
shoulder and the center of the chest.
Automatic Locking Mode
Seatbelt Locking Modes
In this mode, the shoulder belt
automatically pre-locks. The belt retracts
to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
WARNING: If your vehicle is
The automatic locking mode is not
involved in a crash, have the seatbelts
available on the driver seatbelt.
and associated components inspected
as soon as possible. Failure to follow this When to Use the Automatic Locking
instruction could result in personal injury Mode
or death.
Use this mode any time you install a child
All safety restraints in the vehicle are safety seat, except a booster, in passenger
combination lap and shoulder belts. The front or rear seating positions. Properly
driver seatbelt has the first type of locking restrain children 12 years old and under in
mode, and the front outboard passenger a rear seating position whenever possible.
and rear seat seatbelts have both types of See Child Safety (page 23).
locking modes described as follows:
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Vehicle Sensitive Mode Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the design of the retractor is to
lock if you pull the webbing out too quickly. E142591
If the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt 1. Buckle the combination lap and
to retract. If the retractor does not unlock, shoulder belt.
pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out. Allow the belt to retract. As the
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the seatbelt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
40
Seatbelts
How to Disengage the Automatic

Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and turn on the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
E201573
1. Adjust the height of the shoulder belt

WARNING: Position the seatbelt so the belt rests across the middle of
height adjuster so that the seatbelt rests your shoulder.
across the middle of your shoulder.
Failure to adjust the seatbelt correctly 2. Slide the adjuster up to raise the belt.
could reduce its effectiveness and Press the button and slide it down to
increase the risk of injury in a crash. lower the belt.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP

AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
indicator chime will sound if the
E71880 driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
Conditions of operation
If Then
The driver seatbelt is not buckled before The seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi- the indicator chime sounds for a few
tion... seconds.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator
warning lamp is illuminated and the indic- chime turn off.
ator chime is sounding...
The driver seatbelt is buckled before the The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator
ignition switch is turned to the on position... chime remain off.
41
Seatbelts
SEATBELT REMINDER
WARNING: The system will only

provide protection when you use the
seatbelt correctly.
This system monitors all seating positions

and provides audio and graphic feedback.
This lamp illuminates and a
warning tone sounds if you do E274569
E71880 not fasten your seatbelt when
you switch the ignition on. The lamp and This warning displays and a tone sounds
tone switch off when you fasten your if an occupant unfastens the rear seatbelt
seatbelt or about one minute has elapsed. buckle or it becomes unfastened.
When the initial warning expires for the Note: If a rear seat is unoccupied, or an
driver, more warnings are provided for the occupant never fastens the seatbelt buckle
driver and front outermost passenger. This to begin with, the warning will not display.
lamp illuminates and a warning tone Note: Front seating positions appear in this
sounds if you or your front passenger do warning display. Warnings for unfastened
not fasten the seatbelt buckle and the front seatbelt buckles appear in the initial
vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (9.7 km/h). warning lamp.
To deactivate the warning, see
Deactivating and Activating the Seatbelt Status
Belt-Minder Feature.
To view the seatbelt status, use the
Note: To avoid inadvertent warnings, do information display controls on the
not place large objects on the front steering wheel. See General Information
passenger seat. (page 115).
This lamp illuminates when you
switch the ignition on, identifying
E206718
the number of seating positions
with fastened buckles. It illuminates again
when a seating position changes from
unfastened to fastened.
E274570
42
Seatbelts
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the

engine.
2. Wait until the seatbelt warning lamp
turns off (about one minute). After
Step 2, wait an additional five seconds
before proceeding with Step 3. Once
you start Step 3, you must complete
the procedure within 60 seconds.
E274703
3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
A Seatbelt fastened. seatbelt three times at a moderate
B Seatbelt not fastened. speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the seatbelt warning lamp
C Seatbelt recently unfastened.
turns on.
D Fault 4. When the seatbelt warning lamp is on,
buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt.
Deactivating and Activating the After Step 4, the seatbelt warning lamp
Belt-Minder Feature - Front outermost flashes for confirmation.
seats only
• This switches the feature off if it is
currently on.
WARNING: While the system • This switches the feature on if it is
allows you to deactivate it, this system currently off.
is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an CHILD RESTRAINT AND
accident. We recommend you leave the
system activated for yourself and others SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
who may use the vehicle.
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child
Note: The driver and front passenger safety seat systems periodically to make
warnings switch on and off independently. sure they work properly and are not
When you perform this procedure for one damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
seating position, do not buckle the other restraint seatbelts to make sure there are
position as this terminates the process. no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if
necessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies,
Read Steps 1 - 4 before starting the including retractors, buckles, front seatbelt
procedure. buckle assemblies, buckle support
Make sure that: assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if
• You set the parking brake. equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat
• The transmission is in park (P). backrest (if equipped), child safety seat
• The ignition is off. LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a
• You close all vehicle doors. crash. Read the child restraint
• You unbuckle the driver and front manufacturer's instructions for additional
passenger seatbelts. inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
43
Seatbelts
We recommend that all seatbelt If, because of body size or driving position,
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a it is not possible to properly fasten the
crash be replaced. However, if the crash seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
was minor and an authorized dealer finds extension that is compatible with the
that the belts do not show damage and seatbelts is available free of charge from
continue to operate properly, they do not our dealers. Only use our seatbelt
need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies extensions made by the original equipment
not in use during a crash should also be seatbelt manufacturer with our seatbelts.
inspected and replaced if either damage Ask your authorized dealer if your extension
or improper operation is noted. is compatible with your vehicle restraint
system.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle
Care (page 339).
SEATBELT EXTENSIONS
WARNING: Persons who fit into

the vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
extension. Unnecessary use could result
in serious personal injury in the event of
a crash.
WARNING: Only use extensions

provided free of charge by our dealers.
The dealer will provide an extension
designed specifically for this vehicle,
model year and seating position. The use
of an extension intended for another
vehicle, model year or seating position
may not offer you the full protection of
your vehicle's seatbelt restraint system.
WARNING: Never use seatbelt

extensions to install child restraints.
WARNING: Do not use extensions

to change the way the seatbelt fits
across the torso, over the lap or to make
the seatbelt buckle easier to reach.
44
Personal Safety System™
This system provides an improved overall

level of frontal crash protection to front
seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related
injuries. The system analyzes different
occupant conditions and crash severity
before activating the appropriate safety
devices to help better protect occupants
in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle's Personal Safety System
consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outermost seatbelts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and seatbelt usage sensors.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicators.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, seatbelt pretensioners,
front seatbelt usage sensors, front
passenger sensing system and
indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety

System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a
crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the seatbelt pretensioners, one or
both stages of the dual-stage airbags
based on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
45
Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate supplementary restraint system or
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury associated components. Failure to
from a deploying airbag is the greatest follow this instruction could result in
close to the trim covering the airbag personal injury or death.
module.
WARNING: Several airbag system
WARNING: All occupants of your components get hot after inflation. To
vehicle, including the driver, should reduce the risk of injury, do not touch
always properly wear their seatbelts, them after inflation.
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to WARNING: If a supplementary
properly wear your seatbelt could restraint system component has
seriously increase the risk of injury or deployed, it will not function again. Have
death. the system and associated components
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
WARNING: Even with advanced follow this instruction could result in
restraints systems, properly restrain personal injury or death.
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could The airbags are a supplemental restraint
seriously increase the risk of injury or system and are designed to work with the
death. seatbelts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
WARNING: Do not place your arms body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
on the airbag cover or through the there is a risk of injury from a deploying
steering wheel. Failure to follow this airbag.
instruction could result in personal injury. Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
WARNING: Keep the areas in front airbag deploys. This is normal.
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
covers. Objects could become projectiles upon activation. After airbag deployment,
during airbag deployment or in a sudden it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
stop. Failure to follow this instruction residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
could result in personal injury or death. may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure compounds (for example, baking soda)
a child in a child restraint. Never place a that result from the combustion process
rear-facing child restraint in front of an that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
active airbag. If you must use a sodium hydroxide may be present which
forward-facing child restraint in the front may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
seat, move the seat upon which the child the residue is toxic.
restraint is installed all the way back.
46
While the system is designed to help

reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
E151127
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that The driver and front passenger airbags will
occupants be properly restrained as far deploy during significant frontal and near
away from the airbag module as possible frontal crashes.
while maintaining vehicle control.
The driver and passenger front airbag
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not system consists of:
required.
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
· Crash sensors and monitoring
AIRBAGS system with readiness indicator.
E67017 See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 52).
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the Proper Driver and Front Passenger
steering wheel. Failure to follow this Seating Adjustment
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front WARNING: National Highway

of the airbags free from obstruction. Do Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
not affix anything to or over the airbag recommends a minimum distance of at
covers. Objects could become projectiles least 10 in (25 cm) between an
during airbag deployment or in a sudden occupant's chest and the driver airbag
stop. Failure to follow this instruction module.
could result in personal injury or death.
To properly position yourself away from
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
the airbag:
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an • Move your seat to the rear as far as you
active airbag. If you must use a can while still reaching the pedals
forward-facing child restraint in the front comfortably.
seat, move the seat upon which the child • Recline the seat slightly (one or two
restraint is installed all the way back. degrees) from the upright position.
47
After all occupants have adjusted their FRONT PASSENGER SENSING

seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit SYSTEM
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their WARNING: Even with advanced
feet comfortably extended on the floor. restraints systems, properly restrain
Sitting improperly can increase the chance children 12 and under in a rear seating
of injury in a crash event. For example, if position. Failure to follow this could
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns seriously increase the risk of injury or
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or death.
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
increased. of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat
Children and Airbags cushion and affect the decision of the
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in the event of a
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure crash. Always sit upright against your
a child in a child restraint. Never place a seat back, with your feet on the floor.
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a WARNING: Any alteration or
forward-facing child restraint in the front modification to the front passenger seat
seat, move the seat upon which the child may affect the performance of the front
restraint is installed all the way back. passenger sensing system. This could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
This system works with sensors that are

part of the front passenger seat and
seatbelt to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger frontal airbag should
be enabled (may inflate) or not.
E142846
Children must always be properly E181984

restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained The front passenger sensing system uses
in the rear seating positions than in the a passenger airbag status indicator that
front seating position. Failure to follow illuminates indicating that the front
these instructions may increase the risk of passenger frontal airbag is either on
injury in a crash. (enabled) or off (disabled).
48
The indicators are on the overhead The front passenger sensing system is
console. designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag anytime the
Note: The indicators illuminate briefly when
system senses that a person of adult size
you first switch the ignition on to confirm
is sitting properly in the front passenger
they are functional.
seat.
The front passenger sensing system is
• When the front passenger sensing
designed to disable (will not inflate) the
system enables the front passenger
front passenger frontal airbag when the
frontal airbag (may inflate), the airbag
front passenger seat is unoccupied, or a
on indicator illuminates and remains
rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing
illuminated.
child restraint, or a booster seat is
detected. Even with this technology, If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
parents are strongly encouraged to passenger seat, but the airbag off indicator
always properly restrain children in the rear is lit, it is possible that the person is not
seat. sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• When the front passenger sensing • Switch the vehicle off and ask the
system disables (will not inflate) the person to place the seat backrest in an
front passenger frontal airbag, the upright position.
airbag off indicator illuminates and • Have the person sit upright in the seat,
stays lit to remind you that the front centered on the seat cushion, with the
passenger frontal airbag is disabled. person’s legs comfortably extended.
• If you have installed the child restraint • Restart the vehicle and have the person
and the airbag on indicator illuminates, remain in this position for about two
switch the vehicle off, remove the child minutes. This allows the system to
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall detect that person and enables the
the restraint according to the child passenger frontal airbag.
restraint manufacturer's instructions.
• If the airbag off indicator remains lit
even after this, advise the person to
ride in the rear seat.
Occupant Passenger Airbag Status Passenger Airbag

Indicator
Empty OFF: Lit Disabled

ON: Unlit
Child OFF: Lit Disabled
ON: Unlit
Adult OFF: Unlit Enabled
ON: Lit
49
After all occupants have adjusted their

seats and put on seatbelts, it is very WARNING: Do not lean your head
important that they continue to sit on the door. The side airbag could injure
properly. A properly seated occupant sits you as it deploys from the side of the
upright, leaning against the seat backrest, seatback.
and centered on the seat cushion, with
their feet comfortably extended on the WARNING: Do not attempt to
floor. Sitting improperly can increase the service, repair, or modify the
chance of injury in a crash event. For supplementary restraint system or
example, if an occupant slouches, lies associated components. Failure to
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans follow this instruction could result in
forward or sideways, or puts one or both personal injury or death.
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
greatly increases. WARNING: If a supplementary
Make sure the front passenger restraint system component has
sensing system is operating deployed, it will not function again. Have
E67017 properly. See Crash Sensors the system and associated components
and Airbag Indicator (page 52). inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
Do not attempt to repair or service the personal injury or death.
system. Take your vehicle immediately to
an authorized dealer. The side airbags are on the outermost side
If it is necessary to modify an advanced of the front seat backrests. In certain
front airbag system to accommodate a sideways crashes or rollover events, the
person with disabilities, contact our side airbags will be inflated. The airbag
Customer Relationship Center. See was designed to inflate between the door
Getting the Services You Need (page panel and occupant to further enhance the
298). protection provided to occupants in side
impact crashes.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects

or mount equipment on or near the
airbag cover, on the side of the front or
rear seatbacks, or in areas that may
come into contact with a deploying
airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
E152533
WARNING: Accessory seat covers

not released by Ford Motor Company
could prevent the deployment of the
airbags and increase the risk of injuries
in a crash.
50
The system consists of the following: SAFETY CANOPY™

• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that your vehicle has side
airbags. WARNING: Do not place objects
• Side airbags inside the driver and front or mount equipment on or near the
passenger seat backrests. headliner at the siderail that may come
Crash sensors and monitoring into contact with a deploying curtain
system with readiness indicator. airbag. Failure to follow these
E67017 See Crash Sensors and Airbag instructions may increase the risk of
Indicator (page 52). personal injury in the event of a crash.
The design and development of the side WARNING: Do not lean your head
airbag system included recommended on the door. The curtain airbag could
testing procedures that were developed injure you as it deploys from the
by a group of automotive safety experts headliner.
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended WARNING: Do not attempt to
testing procedures help reduce the risk of service, repair, or modify the
injuries related to the deployment of side supplementary restraint system or
airbags. associated components. Failure to
personal injury or death.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
KNEE AIRBAGS WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should
Driver and passenger knee airbags are always properly wear their seatbelts,
located under or within the instrument even when an airbag supplemental
panel. During a crash, the restraints control restraint system is provided. Failure to
module may activate the driver and properly wear your seatbelt could
passenger knee airbags (individually or seriously increase the risk of injury or
both) based on crash severity and death.
respective occupant conditions. Under
certain crash and occupant conditions, the WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,
driver and passenger knee airbags may do not obstruct or place objects in the
deploy (individually or both) but the deployment path of the airbag.
corresponding front airbag may not
activate. As with front and side airbags, it WARNING: If a supplementary
is important to be properly seated and restraint system component has
restrained to reduce the risk of death or deployed, it will not function again. Have
serious injury. the system and associated components
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
Make sure the knee airbags are follow this instruction could result in
operating properly. See Crash personal injury or death.
E67017 Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 52).
51
The Safety Canopy will deploy during Always properly restrain children 12 years
significant side crashes or when a certain old and under in the rear seats. The Safety
likelihood of a rollover event is detected Canopy will not interfere with children
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy restrained using a properly installed child
is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet or booster seat because it is designed to
metal, behind the headliner, above each inflate downward from the headliner above
row of seats. In certain sideways crashes the doors along the side window opening.
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will The design and development of the Safety
be activated, regardless of which seats are Canopy included recommended testing
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed procedures that were developed by a
to inflate between the side window area group of automotive safety experts known
and occupants to further enhance as the Side Airbag Technical Working
protection provided in side impact crashes Group. These recommended testing
and rollover events. procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND

AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding

equipment to the front of your vehicle
could affect the performance of the
airbag system, increasing the risk of
E75004 injury. This includes the hood, bumper
system, frame, front body structure, tow
The system consists of the following: hooks, hood pins, push bar and
• Safety canopy curtain airbags above snowplows.
the trim panels over the front and rear
side windows identified by a label or Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar occupant sensors which provide
trim. information to the restraints control
• A flexible headliner which opens above module. The restraints control module
the side doors to allow air curtain deploys (activates) the seatbelt
deployment pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, knee airbag(s), seat mounted side
· Crash sensors and monitoring airbags and the Safety Canopy. Based on
system with readiness indicator. the type of crash, the restraints control
E67017 See Crash Sensors and Airbag module deploys the appropriate safety
Indicator (page 52). devices.
52
The restraints control module also The fact that not all the safety devices
monitors the readiness of the above safety activate for all occupants in a crash does
devices plus the crash and occupant not mean something is wrong with the
sensors. The readiness of the safety system. Rather, it means the restraints
system is indicated by a warning indicator control module determined the accident
light in the instrument cluster or by a conditions (crash severity, type of crash,
backup tone if the warning light is not belt usage) were not appropriate to
working. Routine maintenance of the activate these safety devices.
airbag is not required. • The front airbags are designed to
A difficulty with the system is indicated by activate only in frontal and near-frontal
one or more of the following: crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
E67017 • The seatbelt pretensioners are
• The readiness light will not illuminate designed to activate in frontal,
immediately after you switch the near-frontal and side crashes, and in
ignition on. rollovers.
• The readiness light either flashes or • The knee airbag(s) may deploy based
stays lit. on crash severity and occupant
• A series of five beeps is heard. The tone conditions.
pattern repeats periodically until the • The side airbags are designed to inflate
problem, the light or both are repaired. in certain side impact crashes or
rollover events. Side airbags may
If any of these things happen, even
activate in other types of crashes if your
intermittently, have the supplemental
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
restraint system serviced at an authorized
motion or deformation, or a certain
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
likelihood of rollover.
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash. • The Safety Canopy is designed to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
The restraint system is designed to or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
activate when the vehicle sustains may activate in other types of crashes
conditions sufficient to cause the restraint if your vehicle experiences sufficient
control module to deploy a safety device. sideways motion or deformation, or a
certain likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
53
Pedestrian Protection - Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
PEDESTRIAN ALERT SYSTEM

Due to the quiet operation of hybrid and
electric vehicles at low speeds, the system
creates a subtle sound to alert pedestrians.
The system is on when your vehicle is
running and not in park (P). Some sound
may be audible in the passenger
compartment.
54
911 Assist
WHAT IS 911 ASSIST EMERGENCY CALL

REQUIREMENTS
911 Assist is a SYNC system feature that
can call for help.
For more information, visit WARNING: Do not wait for 911
www.owner.ford.com. Assist to make an emergency call if you
can do it yourself. Dial emergency
HOW DOES 911 ASSIST WORK services immediately to avoid delayed
response time which could increase the
If a crash deploys an airbag, excluding knee risk of serious injury or death after a
airbags and rear inflatable seatbelts, or crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within
activates the fuel pump shut-off, your five seconds of the crash, the system or
vehicle may be able to contact emergency phone may be damaged or
services by dialing 911 through a paired and non-functional.
connected Bluetooth® enabled phone.
WARNING: Always place your
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate phone in a secure location in your vehicle
the fuel pump shut-off. If a connected cell so it does not become a projectile or get
phone sustains damage or loses its damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC cause serious injury to someone or
searches for and tries to connect to a damage the phone which could prevent
previously paired cell phone. SYNC then 911 Assist from working properly.
attempts to call the emergency services.
Before making the call: WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist
setting is set on before a crash, the
• SYNC provides about 10 seconds to system will not dial for help which could
cancel the call. If you fail to cancel the delay response time, potentially
call, SYNC attempts to dial 911. increasing the risk of serious injury or
• SYNC says the following, or a similar death after a crash.
message: SYNC will attempt to call 911,
to cancel the call, press Cancel on your • SYNC must be powered and working
screen or press and hold the phone properly at the time of the incident and
button on your steering wheel. throughout feature activation and use.
If you do not cancel the call and SYNC • The 911 Assist feature must be set on
makes a successful call a pre-recorded before the incident.
message plays for the 911 operator. The • You must pair and connect a
occupants in your vehicle are able to talk Bluetooth® enabled and compatible
with the operator. Be prepared to provide cell phone to SYNC.
your name, phone number and location
immediately because not all 911 systems • A connected Bluetooth® enabled
are capable of receiving this information phone must have the ability to make
electronically. and maintain an outgoing call at the
time of the incident.
During an emergency call the system
transmits vehicle data to the emergency
service.
55
911 Assist
• A connected Bluetooth® enabled

phone must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal
strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the
status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
EMERGENCY CALL
LIMITATIONS
The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates
in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which
911 is the emergency number.
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
56
GENERAL INFORMATION ON Note: If you are in range, the remote control

will operate if you press any button
RADIO FREQUENCIES unintentionally.
This device complies with Part 15 of the Note: The remote control contains sensitive
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada electrical components. Exposure to moisture
license-exempt RSS standard(s). or impact may cause permanent damage.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
harmful interference, and (2) This device
The system uses a radio frequency signal
must accept any interference received,
to communicate with your vehicle and
including interference that may cause
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
undesired operation.
of the following conditions are met:
• You activate the front exterior door
WARNING: Changes or handle switch.
modifications not expressively approved • You press the luggage compartment
by the party responsible for compliance button.
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the • You press a button on the transmitter.
radio certification number only signifies If excessive radio frequency interference
that Industry Canada technical is present in the area or if the transmitter
specifications were met. battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
The typical operating range for your use the mechanical key blade in your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m). intelligent access key to open the driver
Vehicles with the remote start feature will door in this situation. See Remote
have a greater range. Control (page 57).
One of the following could cause a
decrease in operating range: REMOTE CONTROL
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
• Structures around the vehicle. Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
• Other vehicles parked next to your unlock or lock the driver door from outside
vehicle. your vehicle. The integrated keyhead
transmitter functions as a programmed
The radio frequency used by your remote ignition key that operates all the locks and
control can also be used by other radio starts your vehicle, as well as a remote
transmitters, for example amateur radios, control.
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
able to use your remote control. You can
lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
57
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)
E151797
Press the button to release the key blade.

Press and hold the button to fold the key
blade back in when not in use.
E305198
E151795
Your remote control operates the power
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a locks and the remote start system. The
security label that provides important key key must be in your vehicle to use the push
cut information. Keep the label in a safe button start.
place for future reference. Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.
Removable Key Blade

Your remote control also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle.
58
WARNING: If the battery

compartment does not securely close,
stop using the remote control and
replace it as soon as possible. In the
meantime, keep the remote control away
from children. Failure to follow this
or death.
A message appears in the information

display when the remote control battery
is low. See Information Messages (page
119).
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
E305199 battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Press the release button and pull the key
blade out. Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. Your
remote control should operate normally.
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery.
Press the button to release the key blade
before beginning the procedure.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a

security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
WARNING: Keep batteries away

from children to prevent ingestion.
Failure to follow this instruction could
E151798
result in personal injury or death. If
ingested, immediately seek medical 1. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
attention. screwdriver, in the position shown and
gently push the clip.
59
2. Press the clip down to release the

battery cover.
E151801
5. Remove the battery.

E151799
6. Install a new battery with the + facing
3. Carefully remove the cover. upward.
7. Reinstall the battery cover.
Intelligent Access Key

The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery.
E151800
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or

the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
4. Insert the screwdriver as shown to
release the battery.
E305199
1. Push the release button and pull the

key blade out.
60
E218402
3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a

screwdriver, in the position shown and
carefully remove the battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
E303824
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden onto the transmitter and install the key
behind the key blade head to remove blade.
the battery cover.
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can use the remote control to recall
memory positions.
If programmed to a pre-set position, the
remote control recalls memory positions
when you unlock your vehicle. If you have
the easy entry and exit feature enabled
and the ignition is off, the seat moves to
the easy entry position. The seat moves
to the driver memory position when you
switch the ignition on.
Linking a Preset Position to Your

Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key
See Memory Function (page 150).
61
Car Finder Check your local and state or provincial

laws for specific requirements regarding
Press the button twice within remote start systems.
three seconds. The horn sounds
E138623 and the direction indicators The system does not work if:
flash. We recommend you use this method • The ignition is on.
to locate your vehicle, rather than using • The anti-theft alarm triggers.
the panic alarm.
• You disable the feature.
Sounding the Panic Alarm • The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button • The battery voltage is below the
E138624 again or switch the ignition on to minimum operating voltage.
turn it off. • The service engine soon light is on.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
the ignition is off. level is low.
Remote Start (If Equipped) Remote Control Feedback (If

Equipped)
An LED on the remote control provides
WARNING: Do not start the engine status feedback of remote start or stop
in a closed garage or in other enclosed commands.
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start
LED Status
the engine. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury Solid green Remote start
or death. successful
The remote start button is on the Solid red Remote stop
remote control. successful
E138625
Blinking red Request failed or
This feature allows you to start your status not received
vehicle from the outside. Your remote
control has an extended operating range. Blinking green Status incomplete
If your vehicle has automatic climate
control, you can configure it to operate Remote Starting Your Vehicle
when you remote start your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 137). A manual Note: You must press each button within
climate control system runs at the setting three seconds of each other. If you do not
it was set to when you switched your follow this sequence, your vehicle does not
vehicle off. start remotely, the direction indicators do
not flash twice and the horn does not sound.
Many states and provinces have
restrictions for the use of remote start.
62
Wait at least five seconds before remote

starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
Press the button once. Your
vehicle and the parking lamps
E138625 turn off.
E138626 You may have to be closer to your vehicle
than when starting due to ground reflection
To remote start your vehicle: and the added noise of your running
1. Press the lock button to lock all the vehicle.
doors. You can switch this feature on or off in the
2. Press the remote start button twice. information display.
The exterior lamps flash twice.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce REMOTE CONTROL
noise. You can switch it on or off in the
information display. Replacement keys or remote controls can
Note: If you have remote started your be purchased from an authorized dealer.
vehicle with an integrated keyhead Authorized dealers can program remote
transmitter, you must switch on the ignition controls for your vehicle.
before driving your vehicle. With an
intelligent access transmitter, you must
press the brake pedal before driving your
vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn
on automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and your
vehicle runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still
running to extend the run time for another
remote start period. If you have the
duration set to 15 minutes, the duration
extends by another 15 minutes. For
example, if the vehicle has run from the
first remote start for five minutes, the
vehicle continues to run now for a total of
30 minutes. You can extend the remote
start up to a maximum of 35 minutes.
63
MyKey™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Standard Settings

Not every vehicle includes the features
MyKey allows you to program keys with
listed below. If your vehicle has this
restricted driving modes to promote good
equipment, then you cannot change the
driving habits. You can program the
following settings when using a MyKey:
restrictions to all keys except one. Any keys
that you did not program are administrator • Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™.
keys or admin keys. MyKey mutes the audio system until
drivers, and in some instances,
You can use admin keys to: passengers, fasten their seatbelts.
• Create a MyKey with certain vehicle Note: If your vehicle includes an
restrictions. AM/FM radio or a very basic audio
• Program certain MyKey settings. system, then the radio may not mute.
• Clear all MyKey restrictions. • Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel
warning activates earlier for MyKey
After you program a MyKey, you can view drivers, giving them more time to refuel.
the following information through the
information display: • Certain driver alerts, stability systems
or parking aids turn on automatically
• The total number of admin keys and when you use the MyKey system. For
MyKeys for your vehicle. example, Blind Spot Information
• The total distance a MyKey driver System (BLIS), cross traffic alert, lane
traveled with your vehicle. departure warning or forward collision
warning. Note: MyKey drivers may be
Note: Every MyKey receives the same
able to turn the lane departure warning
restrictions and settings. You cannot
feature off, but this feature turns back
program them individually.
on automatically with every new key
Note: For vehicles equipped with a cycle.
push-button start switch: When both a • Restricted touchscreen operation in
MyKey and an admin key are present when some markets. For example, MyKey
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes may prevent manual navigation
the admin key only. destination input while the vehicle is in
any gear other than park (P) or when
the vehicle reaches a certain rate of
speed.
• Satellite radio adult content
restrictions, if this feature is available
in your market.
Optional Settings
You can configure certain vehicle feature
settings when you first create a MyKey. You
can also change the settings afterward
with an admin key.
64
MyKey™
Note: Not every feature applies to every • Various vehicle speed reminders so
vehicle in every market. When they are MyKey drivers know when their vehicle
available for your vehicle, then they appear speed approaches the limits. Warnings
in the information display, providing choices appear in the information display and
to switch them on or off, or to select a more a tone sounds when the MyKey drivers
specific setting. exceed the set vehicle speed.
• Various vehicle speed limits so the • The audio system's maximum volume
MyKey driver cannot exceed certain limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can
speeds. The information display shows concentrate on the road. A message
warnings followed by an audible tone appears in the information display
when the MyKey driver reaches the set when MyKey drivers attempt to exceed
speed. You cannot override the set the limited volume. MyKey also
speed by fully depressing the disables the automatic volume control.
accelerator pedal. Note: If your vehicle includes an
AM/FM radio or a very basic audio
system, then the radio may not limit.
WARNING: Do not set MyKey • Always on setting. This setting forces
maximum speed limit to a limit that will certain features to remain on and
prevent the driver from maintaining a active for MyKey drivers. For example,
safe speed considering posted speed E911 or emergency assistance and the
limits and prevailing road conditions. The do not disturb features stay on even if
driver is always responsible to drive in a MyKey driver uses the feature's
accordance with local laws and control to switch it off. When selected,
prevailing conditions. Failure to do so you will not be able to turn off Advance
could result in accident or injury. Trac or traction control (if your vehicle
has this feature).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the touchscreen to create a MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. If your vehicle has a push
button start, place the remote control
into the backup slot. See Starting a
Gasoline Engine (page 169).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Press SETTINGS.
4. Press Vehicle.
5. Press MyKey.
6. Press Create MyKey.
7. Press Yes.
8. Switch the ignition off.
65
MyKey™
You have successfully created a MyKey. 2. Press SETTINGS.

Make sure you label it so you can 3. Press Vehicle.
distinguish it from the admin keys.
4. Press MyKey.
You can also program configurable
settings for the key. 5. Press Clear All MyKeys.
6. Press Yes.
Programming and Changing 7. A confirmation message appears in the
Configurable Settings display after you finish clearing your
Use the touchscreen to access your MyKeys.
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
key or the remote control you want to STATUS
program.
2. Press SETTINGS. You can find information about your
3. Press Vehicle. programmed MyKeys by using the
touchscreen. See Settings (page 458).
4. Press MyKey.
5. Select a setting and configure it by MyKey Distance
following the instructions on the Tracks the distance when drivers use a
touchscreen. MyKey. The only way to delete the
The programmed restrictions apply when accumulated distance is by using an admin
you switch the vehicle off, open and close key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does
the driver door and restart your vehicle with not accumulate as expected, then the
the programmed key or remote control. intended user is not using the MyKey, or an
admin key user recently cleared and then
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
recreated a MyKey.
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you Number of MyKeys
have switched the vehicle off, you need an
admin key to change or clear your MyKey Indicates the number of MyKeys you have
settings. When you make any changes to programmed to your vehicle. Use this
your MyKey settings, you change the feature to detect how many MyKeys you
settings for every MyKey. You cannot make have for your vehicle and determine when
individual changes to apply to specific you have deleted all MyKeys.
MyKeys.
Number of Admin Keys
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS Indicates how many admin keys you have
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
When you clear your MyKeys, you remove feature to determine how many admin
all restrictions and return all MyKeys to keys you have for your vehicle, and detect
their original admin key status at once. To if an additional MyKey has been
clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use programmed.
the touchscreen.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
66
MyKey™
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start

systems. If you choose to install a remote
START SYSTEMS start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MyKey is not compatible with non
MYKEY – TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition Potential Causes
I cannot create a MyKey. The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle
does not have admin privileges.
Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you place
the transmitter into the backup slot. See
Passive Anti-Theft System (page 77).
The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle
is the only admin key. There always has to be
at least one admin key.
The passive anti-theft system is disabled or in
unlimited mode.
I cannot program the configurable The transmitter used to start your vehicle does
settings. not have admin privileges.
There are no MyKeys programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 65).
I cannot clear the MyKeys. The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle
does not have admin privileges.
No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey
(page 65).
I lost the only admin key. Purchase a new key or transmitter from an
authorized dealer.
I lost a key. Program a spare key or transmitter. You may
need to see an authorized dealer. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 77).
The MyKey distance does not accumu- The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
late. An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and
created new MyKeys.
The key system has been reset.
No MyKey functions with the trans- An admin transmitter is present at vehicle start.
mitter. There are no MyKeys programmed to your
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 65).
67
Doors and Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING only unlocks the driver door when you
press the unlock button once. All door
You can use the power door lock control mode unlocks all doors when you press
or the remote control to lock and unlock the unlock button once. The unlocking
your vehicle. mode applies to the remote control,
keyless entry keypad and intelligent
Note: Do not use the door latch assembly access.
to attach any accessory, such as handles or
steps, as this can cause damage to your Locking the Doors
vehicle.
Press the button to lock all
Power Door Locks doors. The direction indicators
E138623 flash.
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels. Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors
close. The doors lock again, the horn
sounds and the direction indicators flash
if all the doors and the liftgate close.
Mislock
If any door or the liftgate is open, or if the
hood is open on vehicles with an anti-theft
alarm or remote start, the horn sounds
E371493
twice and the direction indicators do not
flash.
A Unlock.
Switching Mislock On and Off
B Lock.
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
Remote Control 2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Switch Mislock Chirp on or off.
You can use the remote control at any
time. Opening the Power Liftgate
Unlocking the Doors Press the button twice within

three seconds.
Press the button to unlock the E306276
driver door.
E138629 Opening a Rear Door from the
Press the button again within Inside
three seconds to unlock all doors. The
direction indicators flash. Pull the interior door handle twice to
unlock and open a rear door. The first pull
Press and hold both the lock and unlock unlocks the door and the second pull
buttons on the remote control for three opens the door.
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The direction
indicators flash twice to indicate a change
to the unlocking mode. Driver door mode
68
Doors and Locks
Note: The rear doors do not open using the Unlocking Using Intelligent Access
interior door handles if your vehicle has the
rear door lock disable feature, or with the
child locks enabled.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors

with the Key Blade
E297236
Locking with the Key
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
Turn the top of the key toward the front of (1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock
your vehicle. sensor on the back of the door handle for
a brief period and then pull on the door
Unlocking with the Key handle to unlock, being careful to not
touch the lock sensor at the same time or
Turn the top of the key toward the rear of pulling the door handle too quickly. The
your vehicle. intelligent access system requires a brief
Note: If the child safety locks are on and delay to authenticate your intelligent
you pull the interior handle, you only turn off access key fob.
the emergency locking, not the child safety
lock. You can only open the doors using the Locking Using Intelligent Access
external door handle.
Activating Intelligent Access (If

Equipped)
You can unlock and lock the vehicle

E297235
without taking the keys out of your pocket
or purse when your intelligent access key With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
is within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle. (1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door
Intelligent access uses a sensor on the handle lock sensor for approximately one
back of the door handle for unlocking and second to lock, being careful to not touch
a separate sensor on the face of each door the unlock sensor on the back of the door
handle for locking. handle at the same time. After locking, you
The system does not function if: can immediately pull on the door handle
to confirm locking occurred without
• Your vehicle battery has no charge. inadvertently unlocking.
• The key battery has no charge.
Opening the Liftgate
• The key frequencies jam.
Note: The system may not function if the Press the exterior liftgate release button
key is close to metal objects or electronic on the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle.
devices, for example keys or a cell phone. See Power Liftgate (page 73).
Note: If the system does not function, use Smart Unlocks for Integrated
the key blade to lock and unlock your Keyhead Remote Control (If Equipped)
vehicle. See Remote Control (page 57).
This prevents you from locking yourself out
of your vehicle if the key is still in the
ignition.
69
Doors and Locks
When you open one of the front doors and When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle with the power door lock lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all the doors lock then unlock and control, all doors lock, then unlock if:
the horn sounds twice if the key is still in • The ignition is on.
the ignition.
• The ignition is off and the transmission
You can still lock your vehicle with the key is not in park (P).
in the ignition by either:
• Using the keyless entry keypad with the Autolock (If Equipped)
driver door closed.
Autolock locks all the doors when the
• Pressing the lock button on the remote following occur:
control even if you have not closed the
doors. • All doors close.
• The ignition is on.
If both front doors close, you can lock your
vehicle by any method, regardless of • You shift into any gear putting your
whether the key is in the ignition or not. vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Access Keys (If Equipped)
Autolock repeats when:
This helps to prevent you from locking your • You open then close any door when
key inside the passenger compartment or the ignition is on and your vehicle speed
rear cargo area. is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower.
When you electronically lock your vehicle • Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
with any door open, the transmission in than 12 mph (20 km/h).
park (P) and the ignition off, the system
searches for an intelligent access key in Autounlock
the passenger compartment after you
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when the
close the last door.
following occur:
If the system finds a key, all the doors • You stop your vehicle, place the gear
immediately unlock and the horn sounds selector in park (P), and switch the
twice, indicating that a key is inside. ignition off or to accessory position.
You can override the smart unlock feature • You open the driver door within 10
and intentionally lock the intelligent access minutes of switching the ignition off or
key inside your vehicle. to accessory position.
To override smart unlock, lock your vehicle Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
after you have closed all the doors by: electronically lock your vehicle after you
• Using the keyless entry keypad. switch the ignition off and before you open
• Pressing the lock button on another the driver door.
intelligent access key. Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
• Touching the locking area on the front
of the door handle with another You can enable or disable the autounlock
intelligent access key in your hand. in the information display or an authorized
dealer can do it for you. See General
Information (page 115).
70
Doors and Locks
Illuminated Entry KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry
doors with the remote control. Keypad
The lamps turn off if: The keypad is near the driver window. It
• The ignition is on. illuminates when touched.
• You press the remote control lock Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
button. on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Enter your entry code again more
• More than 25 seconds have elapsed.
slowly.
The lamps do not turn off if:
• You switch them on with the lighting
control.
• Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when all doors close and
you switch the ignition off.
The lamps turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• More than 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You lock your vehicle from the outside.
Battery Saver
E138637
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver You can use the keypad to do the
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch following:
the ignition off. • Lock or unlock the doors.
Battery Saver for Intelligent Access • Program and erase user codes.
Keys (If Equipped) • Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
If you leave the ignition switched on and You can operate the keypad with the
the engine is not running, the battery saver factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
turns the ignition off when it detects a is on the owner's wallet card in the glove
certain amount of battery drain, or after box and is available from an authorized
30 minutes have elapsed. dealer. You can also program up to five of
your own five-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code

1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
71
Doors and Locks
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five The anti-scan feature turns off after any
seconds. of the following occur:
3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You • One minute of keypad inactivity.
must enter each number within five • You press the unlock button on the
seconds of each other. remote control.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save • You switch your vehicle on.
personal code 1.
• You unlock the vehicle using intelligent
The doors lock then unlock to confirm that access.
programming was successful.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat steps 1 through 3, then for Locking All Doors
step 4:
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 on the keypad
• Press 3·4 to save personal code 2.
simultaneously with the driver door closed.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code 3. You do not need to enter a code first.
Unlocking All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
Hints: code, then press 3·4 on the keypad within
• Do not set a code that uses five of the five seconds.
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential Unlocking Only the Driver Door
order. Enter the factory-set or your personal
• The factory-set code works even if you five-digit code. You must press each
have set your own personal code. number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps illuminate.
Erasing a Personal Code
Note: All doors unlock if the two-stage
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code. unlocking feature is turned off. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 68).
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
You must do this within five seconds
of completing step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code works.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times.
This mode turns off the keypad for one
minute and the keypad lamp flashes.
72
Liftgate
POWER LIFTGATE If there is a problem with the open or close

request, a tone sounds for one of the
following reasons:
WARNING: It is extremely • The ignition is on and the transmission
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside is not in park (P).
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people • The battery voltage is below the
riding in these areas are more likely to be minimum operating voltage.
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow • The liftgate is not fully closed and your
people to ride in any area of your vehicle vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph
that is not equipped with seats and (5 km/h).
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a If the liftgate starts to close after it has
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning fully opened, this indicates there may be
could result in serious personal injury or excessive weight on the liftgate or a
death. possible strut failure. A repetitive tone
sounds and the liftgate closes under
WARNING: Make sure that you fully control. If the liftgate continues to close
close the liftgate to prevent exhaust after opening, have the system checked
fumes from entering your vehicle. If you by an authorized dealer. Remove any
are unable to fully close the liftgate, excessive weight from the liftgate.
open the air vents or the windows to
allow fresh air to enter your vehicle. Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING: Make sure all persons
WARNING: Keep keys out of reach are clear of the power liftgate area
of children. Do not allow children to before using the power liftgate control.
operate or play near an open or moving
power liftgate. You should supervise the Note: Make sure the area behind your
operation of the power liftgate at all vehicle is free from obstruction and that
times. there is enough room for you to operate the
liftgate. Objects too close to your vehicle,
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate for example a wall, garage door or another
before operating or moving your vehicle, vehicle may come into contact with the
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or moving liftgate. This could damage the
a parking structure. This could damage the liftgate and its components.
liftgate and its components. Note: Be careful when opening or closing
Note: Do not hang anything, for example the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
could damage the liftgate and its Note: Do not leave the liftgate open when
components. you are driving. This could damage the
Note: Make sure that you fully close the liftgate and its components.
liftgate to prevent cargo from falling out.
The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).
73
Liftgate
Opening from the Instrument Panel Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
With the transmission in park liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
(P), press the button on the detection feature and stop the power
E138633
instrument panel. operation or reverse its direction, replicate
a strut failure, or damage mechanical
Opening with the Remote Control components.
Press the button twice within Closing the Liftgate
three seconds.
E267940
Opening with the Outside Control WARNING: Keep clear of the

Button liftgate when using the rear switch.
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote

control or power door unlock control.
If a passive key is within 3 ft (1 m) of
the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks when
you press the liftgate release button.
E291351
Press and release the liftgate button.
Stopping the Liftgate Movement

Note: Do not apply sudden excessive force
to the liftgate while it is in motion. This
could damage the power liftgate and its
components.
You can stop the liftgate movement by
doing any of the following:
E291352 • Pressing the liftgate control button.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
2. Press the control button to the right of
remote control twice.
the rear view camera.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
• Moving your foot under and away from
the center rear bumper in a single-kick
motion.*
74
Liftgate
*This method only works for vehicles with Obstacle Detection

the hands-free liftgate feature.
Note: Entering your vehicle while the
Setting the Liftgate Open Height liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to
bounce and activate obstacle detection. To
1. Open the liftgate. prevent this, let the power liftgate close
2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressing completely before you enter your vehicle.
the control button on the liftgate when Before driving off, check the instrument
it reaches the desired height. cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or
warning indicator. Failure to do this could
Note: Once the liftgate has stopped result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate
moving, you can also manually move it to open while driving.
the desired height.
3. Press and hold the liftgate control When Closing
button on the liftgate until you hear a The system stops when it detects an
tone, indicating programming is obstacle. A tone sounds and the system
complete. reverses to open. Once you remove the
Note: You can only use the liftgate control obstacle, you can power close the liftgate.
button to program the height.
When Opening
Note: You cannot program the height if the
liftgate position is too low. The system stops when it detects an
The new open liftgate height is recalled obstacle and a tone sounds. Once you
when the power liftgate is opened. To remove the obstacle, you can continue to
change the programmed height, repeat the operate the liftgate.
above procedure. Once you open the
power liftgate, you can manually move it
Switching the Power Liftgate On
to a different height.
or Off
Note: The system recalls the new You can switch the power liftgate on or off
programmed height until you reprogram it, through the vehicle settings on your
even if you disconnect the battery. touchscreen.
When operating the power liftgate after When switched off, the liftgate only
you have programmed a lower height than unlatches and will not power open or close.
fully open, you can fully open the liftgate
by manually pushing it upward to the Hands-Free Feature (If Equipped)
maximum open position. Make sure you have the passive key within
3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate.
1. Stand behind your vehicle, and face the
liftgate.
2. Move your foot, in a single-kick motion,
without pausing, under and away from
the rear bumper detection area.
75
Liftgate
Vehicles With a Trailer Hitch
E300799
E310718
3. The liftgate opens or closes.
Avoid the following actions when using the The detection area is on the left-hand side
hands-free opening feature: and right-hand side of the hitch, between
the exhaust and the hitch.
• Making physical contact with the
bumper. Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
• Holding your foot under the bumper. liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
• Sweeping your foot from side to side, detection feature and stop the power
or kicking at an odd angle. operation or reverse its direction, replicate
a strut failure, or damage mechanical
Detection Zones components.
Vehicles Without a Trailer Hitch Note: Any physical actions that mimic a
kicking motion such as splashing water,
trailer chains or vacuum hoses may cause
the hands-free liftgate to activate. Switch
the power liftgate off through your vehicle
settings or keep the passive key away from
the rear bumper detection area.
E310717
The detection area is in the center of the

rear bumper.
76
Security
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT Replacement Keys

SYSTEM Note: Your vehicle comes with two
integrated keyhead transmitters or two
Note: The system is not compatible with intelligent access keys.
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. The integrated keyhead transmitter
Use of these systems could result in vehicle functions as a programmed ignition key
starting problems and a loss of security that operates all the locks and starts the
protection. vehicle, as well as a remote control.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices The intelligent access key functions as a
or a second coded key on the same key programmed key that operates the driver
chain could cause vehicle starting problems door lock and activates the intelligent
if they are too close to the key when starting access with push button start system, as
the engine. Prevent these objects from well as a remote control.
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all If your programmed transmitters or
objects on the key chain away from the standard SecuriLock coded keys
coded key and restart the engine if a (integrated keyhead transmitters only) are
problem occurs. lost or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and need to erase the key codes from your
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle. vehicle and program new coded keys.
SecuriLock® Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
The system is an engine immobilization any inconveniences. See your authorized
system. It helps to prevent anyone from dealer to purchase additional spare or
starting the engine without using a coded replacement keys.
key programmed to your vehicle. Using the
wrong key could prevent the engine from Programming a Spare Intelligent
starting. A message may appear in the Access Key (If Equipped)
information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a See your authorized dealer to have
correctly coded key, there is a problem with additional keys programmed to your
the system and a message could appear vehicle.
in the information display.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
Automatic Arming
The vehicle arms immediately after you The system will warn you of an
switch the ignition off. unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will
be triggered if any door, the luggage
Automatic Disarming compartment or the hood is opened
without using the key, remote control or
Switching the ignition on with a coded key keyless entry keypad.
disarms the vehicle.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
77
Security
Take all remote controls to an authorized

dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm

The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock
your vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm

Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control
or keyless entry keypad.
• Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle
on within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
78
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING

WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
MANUAL ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING: Do not adjust the

steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the

correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 144).
E279962
3. Lock the steering column.
ADJUSTING THE STEERING

WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN

steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
E279960
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
1. Unlock the steering column. correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 144).
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
79
Steering Wheel
4. When the steering column stops,

continue holding the control for a few
seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position sets. The next
time you tilt or telescope the steering
column, it stops just short of the end of the
column travel.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering
column position with the memory
function. See Memory Function (page
150).
Pressing the adjustment control during a
memory recall cancels the operation.
E261582
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position. The column moves up when you switch
the ignition off. Switch the ignition on to
To adjust:
return the system to its previous settings.
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the You can switch this feature on or off
control. through the touchscreen. See Settings
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of (page 458).
the control. Note: If you press any adjustment or
memory button when in easy exit mode, the
End of Travel Position system cancels the operation.
The steering column stops just short of the Note: Depending on your vehicle, the
end of the column travel to prevent column may move up and in.
damage to the steering column. A new
stopping position sets if it encounters an
object when tilting or telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing
the motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control
again.
Note: The steering column may begin to
move again.
80
Steering Wheel
AUDIO CONTROL Press to access the previous

media selection.
E265045
Press to access the next media

selection.
E265044
VOICE CONTROL
The controls are on the steering wheel.
Press and release to activate
voice recognition.
E142599
E280796
CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLES

WITH: CRUISE CONTROL
E280795
You can operate the following

functions with the control: E280796
Press to decrease volume level. See What Is Cruise Control (page 239).
E280802
Press to increase volume level.

E280803
Press to silence the current

media
E268549
Press to access phone mode or

to answer a phone call.
Press to end a phone call.

E265040
81
Steering Wheel
CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLES Press the button to switch the

E256621 heated steering wheel on and
WITH: STOP AND GO off.
Note: You can use the heated steering
wheel only when the engine is running.
Note: The system uses a sensor and is
designed to control the temperature of the
steering wheel and to prevent it from
overheating.
Note: In warm temperatures, the steering
wheel quickly reaches its maximum
temperature and the system reduces the
current to the heating element. This could
cause you to think that the system has
E289570 stopped working but it has not. This is
normal.
See How Does Adaptive Cruise Control
With Stop and Go Work (page 241).
HORN
INFORMATION DISPLAY Press on the center of the
CONTROL steering wheel near the horn icon
E270945
to activate the horn.
E280795
See Information Displays (page 110).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (IF

EQUIPPED)
The heated steering wheel button is on the

climate controls.
82
Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WIPERS Intermittent Wipe
Push the lever up or down to

operate the windshield wipers.
E270969
E295997
A Shortest wipe interval.

B Intermittent wipe.
C Longest wipe interval.
Use the rotary control to adjust the

intermittent wipe interval.
E295996
Speed Dependent Wipers
A Single wipe. When your vehicle speed increases, the
B Intermittent wipe. interval between wipes decreases.
C Normal wipe.
AUTOWIPERS (IF EQUIPPED)
D High-speed wipe.
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
you switch the windshield wipers on. snow or salty road mist can cause
Note: Make sure that you switch the inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
windshield wipers off before entering a car smearing.
wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
83
Wipers and Washers
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the

windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
Autowipers Settings
Autowipers defaults to on and remains on
until you switch it off in the information
E295997
display. When you switch off autowipers,
the wipers operate in intermittent mode.
A High sensitivity.
B Autowipers On. WINDSHIELD WASHERS
C Low sensitivity.
Use the rotary control to adjust the

sensitivity of the autowipers. When you
select low sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a large amount
of water on the windshield. When you
select high sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a small amount
of water on the windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the E242323
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield. Pull the lever toward you to
In these conditions, you can do the E270967
operate the windshield washers.
following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers When you release the lever, the wipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on operate for a short time. When activated,
the windshield. a courtesy wipe occurs a short time after
the wipers stop to clear any remaining
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe. washer fluid.
• Switch autowipers off. Note: You can switch courtesy wipe on or
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before off in the touchscreen.
you switch the windshield wipers on. Note: Do not operate the washers when
Note: Make sure that you switch the the washer reservoir is empty. This could
windshield wipers off before entering a car cause the washer pump to overheat.
wash.
84
Wipers and Washers
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND Push the lever away from you to operate
the rear window washer. When you release
WASHERS the lever, the wipers operate for a short
time.
Rear Window Wiper
Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This could cause
the washer pump to overheat.
Rear Camera Washer (If Equipped)

Switching on the rear washer also turns on
the rear camera washer.
E242324
A Intermittent wipe.
B Continuous wipe.
C Rear window wiper off.
Depending on your vehicle, when you

switch on the front wipers and move the
gearshift lever to reverse (R), the rear
intermittent wipe may turn on.
Note: Make sure you switch the rear
window wiper off before entering a car
wash.
Rear Window Washer
E242432
85
Lighting
GENERAL INFORMATION Turn the dial to make a selection.

Note: The indicator illuminates next to the
Condensation in the Exterior Front active selection.
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Lamps off.
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
E265031
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure. Parking lamps, instrument panel
E71341 lamps, license plate lamps and
Condensation can be a natural by-product
rear lamps.
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is Autolamps.
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When E281240
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist Headlamps on.
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits E270968
through the vents during normal operation. Note: The lighting control defaults to
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours autolamps every time you switch your
under dry weather conditions. vehicle on.
Examples of acceptable condensation are: Switching High Beam Headlamps
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks, On and Off
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
E248603
dealer.
Push the lever away from you to
LIGHTING CONTROL
E67019
switch the high beam on.
Lighting Control Selections Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
E281337
86
Lighting
Flashing High Beam Headlamps Windshield Wiper Activated

Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
• During a single wipe.
• When using the windshield washers.
E248604
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Pull the lever toward you and release it to Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
flash the high beam headlamps. autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
AUTOLAMPS
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive The instrument lighting dimmer buttons
with due care and attention. You may are on the lighting control.
need to override the system if it does not
turn the headlamps on in low visibility Repeatedly press one of the
conditions, for example daytime fog. buttons to adjust the brightness.
E291299
Autolamps turn the headlamps on in low

light situations or when the wipers operate. E296433
Switch the lighting control to the

autolamps position. HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
E281240
Note: The lighting control defaults to
autolamps each time you switch your After you switch the ignition off, you can
vehicle on. switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You
The headlamps remain on for a period of will hear a short tone. The headlamps will
time after you switch the ignition off. Use switch off automatically after three
the touchscreen to adjust the period of minutes with any door open or 30 seconds
time that the headlamps remain on. after the last door has been closed. You
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you can cancel this feature by pulling the
cannot switch the high beams on until the direction indicator lever toward you again
system turns the low beams on. or switching the ignition on.
87
Lighting
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS - DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS -

VEHICLES WITH: VEHICLES WITH: DAYTIME
CONFIGURABLE DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL)
RUNNING LAMPS
WARNING: The daytime running
WARNING: The daytime running lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps system does not activate the rear lamps and may not provide adequate
lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during low visibility driving
lighting during low visibility driving conditions. Make sure you switch the
conditions. Make sure you switch the headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so may result in a crash.
may result in a crash.
The system turns the lamps on in daylight
Switch the daytime running lamps on or conditions.
off using the touchscreen: Daytime running lamps are always on
1. Select Settings. See Settings (page unless the headlamps are on or your
458). vehicle is in park (P).
2. Select Vehicle.
3. Select Lighting.
FRONT FOG LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
The daytime running lamps turn on when: Using the Front Fog Lamps
1. The lamps are on in the information
display. To switch the lamps on or off:
2. You switch the ignition on. 1. Set the lighting control to the parking
lamps, headlamps or autolamps
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for position.
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or you release the parking brake for Note: When the lighting control is in the
vehicles with manual transmissions. autolamps position, you cannot switch the
fog lamps on unless the low beam
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
headlamps are on.
position.
5. The headlamps are off. 2.
The other lighting control switch positions Press the button on the
do not turn on the daytime running lamps. lighting control to switch the front fog
If the daytime running lamps are off in the lamps on or off.
information display, the lamps stay off in Note: Only switch the front fog lamps on
all switch positions. during reduced visibility.
Note: The brightness of the daytime running
lamps may decrease when the front fog
lamps are on.
88
Lighting
Note: The lights on the front fog lamps turn The system only works with the lighting
off when you switch the high beams on. control in the autolamp position.
Front Fog Lamp Indicator You can switch the system on or off in the
touchscreen.
It illuminates when you switch Note: There is a delay of two to five
the front fog lamps on. seconds before the system operates when
you drive your vehicle.
Note: The system is only active at speeds
ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS (IF above 3 mph (5 km/h).
EQUIPPED)
System Check (If Equipped)
The headlamp beams move in the same The system has a power-up movement
direction as the steering wheel. This check feature. When you start your vehicle,
provides more visibility when driving the lamps track left to right, then back to
around curves. center to alert the driver that the system
A. Without adaptive headlamps. is working properly.
B. With adaptive headlamps.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
Switching the Direction Indicators
On and Off
E242676
Push the lever up or down to switch the

direction indicators on.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times.
Set the lever to the middle position to
switch the direction indicators off.
E161714
89
Lighting
Direction Indicator Interior Lamp Function
E67018 Flashes when you switch the Press to switch the interior lamp
direction indicators on. function on and off.
Note: An increase in the rate of flashing When the interior lamp function is off and
warns of a failed indicator bulb. you open a door, the courtesy and door
lamps stay off.
INTERIOR LAMPS When the interior lamp function is on and
you open a door, the courtesy and door
The lamps turn on under the following lamps turn on.
conditions:
Note: The indicator lamp lights amber
• You open any door. when the door function is off.
• You press a button on the remote
control. Rear Interior Lamps
• You press the all lamps on button on
the overhead console.
Front Interior Lamp
E281230
The front interior lamp switches are on the

overhead console. E281231
Note: The position of each button on the The rear interior lamps may be above the
overhead console depends on your vehicle. rear seat or above the rear windows.
All Lamps On or Off Press to switch the lamps on or

E259649 off.
Press to switch all interior lamps
E259649 on or off. Note: If you switch the rear lamps on
through the overhead console, you cannot
switch them off with the rear lamp switch.
Individual Map Lamps
Press to switch the left-hand AMBIENT LIGHTING -
individual dome lamp on and off.
E262193 VEHICLES WITH: 8 INCH
Press to switch the right-hand CENTER DISPLAY SCREEN
individual dome lamp on and off.
Use the touchscreen to select the
following:
90
Lighting
Select the settings option on the

feature bar.
E280315
Select ambient lighting.

E280617
E280369
Switching Ambient Lighting On

Touch a color once.
Changing the Color

Touch any color once.
E280370
Adjusting the Brightness

Switching Ambient Lighting On
Drag the selected color up or down.
Touch a color once.
Switching Ambient Lighting Off
Changing the Color
Touch the selected color once or drag the
selected color down to zero brightness. Touch any color once.
Adjusting the Brightness

AMBIENT LIGHTING -
Drag the selected color left or right.
VEHICLES WITH: 10.1 INCH
CENTER DISPLAY SCREEN Switching Ambient Lighting Off
Touch the selected color once or drag the
Use the touchscreen to select the
selected color left to zero brightness.
following:
feature bar.
E280315
Select ambient lighting.

E280617
91
Automatic High Beam Control
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC HIGH When active, the high beams turn on if all
the following conditions occur:
BEAM CONTROL
• The ambient light level is low enough.
The system turns on high beams if it is dark • There is no traffic in front of your
enough and no other traffic is present. If it vehicle.
detects an approaching vehicle’s • The vehicle speed is greater than
headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
ahead, the system turns the high beams
off. Low beams remain on. When active, the high beams turn off if at
least one of the following conditions occur:
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle, • The ambient light level is high enough
continuously monitors conditions to turn that you do not require high beams.
the high beams on and off. • The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
SWITCHING AUTOMATIC HIGH • The system detects severe rain, snow
or fog.
BEAM CONTROL ON AND OFF
• A blocked vehicle camera.
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 19 mph (30 km/h).
WARNING: Do not use the system
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy Note: The deactivation speed is lower on
rain, spray or snow. curves.
Note: Certain curvy road situations may
Use the touchscreen to select the delay high beam reactivation.
following:
Note: If you have a blocked sensor, the
1. Select Settings. system may not operate properly. Keep the
2. Select Vehicle. windshield free from obstruction or damage.
3. Select Lighting. Note: The system may not operate properly
in cold or inclement conditions. You can
Activating the Automatic High switch on the high beams by overriding the
Beam Control system.
Switch the lighting control to the Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
autolamps position. See example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
E281240
Autolamps (page 87). or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
until you clear the blockage. If you have a
Note: The lighting control defaults to
blocked camera, a message may appear in
autolamps each time you switch your
the information display.
vehicle on.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.
92
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM

CONTROL INDICATORS
The indicator illuminates to
E146105 confirm when the system is
ready to assist.
OVERRIDING AUTOMATIC
HIGH BEAM CONTROL

relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may
need to override the system if it does not
turn the high beams on or off.
WARNING: You may need to

override the system when approaching
other road users.
WARNING: You may need to

override the system during inclement
weather.
E248603
Push the lever away from you to switch

between high beam and low beam.
93
Windows and Mirrors
POWER WINDOWS 3. Press and hold the window switch until

you fully open the door window.
4. Release the window switch.
WARNING: Do not leave children 5. Lift and hold the window switch until
unattended in your vehicle and do not you fully close the window.
let them play with the power windows. 6. Test for correct window operation by
Failure to follow this instruction could carrying out the one-touch down and
result in personal injury. one-touch up features.
WARNING: When closing the Bounce-Back
power windows, verify they are free of
obstruction and make sure that children The window stops when closing. It reverses
and pets are not in the proximity of the some distance if there is an obstacle in the
window openings. way.
Press the control to open the Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature

window. Lift the control to close
the window.
WARNING: If you override
Note: If you hear a pulsing noise when just bounce-back, the window does not
one of the windows is open. Lower the reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take
opposite window slightly to reduce this care when closing the windows to avoid
noise. personal injury or damage to your
vehicle.
One-Touch Down
Note: One-touch down applies to the front The window stops if you release the switch
windows only. before the window fully closes. Pull up the
window switch and hold within a few
Fully press the switch and release it. Press seconds of the window reaching the
again or lift it to stop the window. bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection.
One-Touch Up
Note: One-touch up applies to the front Window Lock
windows only.
Fully lift the switch and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.
Resetting One-Touch Up
Start the engine.
1. Lift and hold the window switch until
you fully close the door window.
Continue to hold the switch for a few
seconds after you close the window.
E295318
2. Release the window switch.
94
Windows and Mirrors
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear

window controls. It illuminates when you
lock the rear window controls.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for
several minutes after you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.
GLOBAL OPENING E295322
You can use the remote control to open

the windows with the ignition off. A Power-folding mirror control.
Note: You can enable or disable this feature B Window lockout.

in the information display, or see an C Adjustment control.
authorized dealer. See General
D Right-hand mirror.
E Left-hand mirror.
Note: To operate this feature, accessory
delay must not be active. To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle
on with the ignition in accessory mode or
Remote Control Front Windows
the engine running and then:
After you unlock your vehicle with the 1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
remote control, you can open the windows The control light turns on.
for a short period of time. Press and hold
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust
the remote control unlock button to open
the position of the mirror.
the windows. Release the button once
movement starts. Press the lock or unlock 3. Press the mirror control again. The
button to stop movement. control light turns off.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors

EXTERIOR MIRRORS -
Push the mirror toward the door window
EXCLUDING: ST glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
Power Exterior Mirrors original position.
Auto-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)

mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This The exterior mirrors fold in toward the
could result in the loss of control of your glass after you place the transmission into
vehicle, serious personal injury or death. park (P), turn off the vehicle and lock the
vehicle. The exterior mirrors unfold and
return to their driving position after you
unlock the vehicle.
95
Windows and Mirrors
You can switch this feature on and off Auto-dimming Feature (If Equipped)
through the information display. See
General Information (page 115). The driver exterior mirror dims when the
interior auto-dimming mirror turns on.
You can fold the mirrors on demand by
pressing the power-folding mirror control Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
on the door. The control lights and the
mirrors fold in toward the glass. Press the When the vehicle is running, the
control again to unfold the mirrors. The forward-facing portion of the appropriate
control light turns off. mirror housing blinks when you switch on
Note: If you use the power-folding control the direction indicator.
to fold the mirrors on demand with the auto
fold feature on, you must use the control
Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)
again to unfold them. The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
housing light when you use your
Loose Mirror
transmitter to unlock the doors or when
If you manually fold your power-folding you open a door.
mirrors, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to 360-Degree Camera (If Equipped)
reset them if:
See 360 Degree Camera (page 237).
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose. Blind Spot Information System
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or See Blind Spot Information System
unfolded position. (page 259).
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position. EXTERIOR MIRRORS - ST
To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and Power Exterior Mirrors
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud
noise as you reset the power-folding
mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this WARNING: Do not adjust the
process as needed each time you manually mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This
fold the mirrors. could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
See Heated Exterior Mirrors (page 142).
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror

positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 150).
96
Windows and Mirrors
Auto-Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors automatically fold in
toward the glass after you place the
transmission into park (P), switch the
vehicle off, open and close the driver door
and lock the vehicle. The exterior mirrors
automatically unfold and return to their
driving position after you unlock the vehicle
and open and close the driver door.
You can switch this feature on and off
E295322 through the instrument cluster display. See
General Information (page 115).
A Power-folding mirror control. You can fold the mirrors on demand by
pressing the power-folding mirror control
B Window lockout. on the door. The control light turns on and
C Adjustment control. the mirrors fold in toward the glass. Press
the control again to unfold the mirrors. The
D Right-hand mirror.
control light turns off.
E Left-hand mirror.
Note: If you use the power-folding control
To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle to fold the mirrors on demand with the auto
on, with the ignition in accessory mode or fold feature on, you must use the control
the engine running. again to unfold them.
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. Loose Mirror
The control light turns on.
If you manually fold your power-folding
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust mirrors, they may not work properly even
the position of the mirror. after you reposition them. You need to
3. Press the mirror control again. The reset them if:
control light turns off. • The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors (If • The mirrors feel loose.
Equipped) • The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the • One of the mirrors is not in its normal
mirror in its support when returning it to its driving position.
original position. To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud
noise as you reset the power-folding
mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this
process as needed each time you manually
fold the mirrors.
97
Windows and Mirrors
Heated Exterior Mirrors You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
See Heated Exterior Mirrors (page 142). second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
Memory Mirrors side.
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function. Manual Dimming Mirror
See Memory Function (page 150). Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce the effect of bright light from
Auto-dimming Feature (If Equipped) behind.
The driver exterior mirror dims when the Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
interior auto-dimming mirror turns on.
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped) and back of the mirror. A rear center
When the vehicle is running, the passenger or raised rear center head
forward-facing portion of the appropriate restraint may also block light from reaching
mirror housing blinks when you switch on the sensor.
the direction indicator. The mirror dims to reduce the effect of
bright light from behind. It returns to
Puddle Lamps normal when the bright light from behind
is no longer present or if you shift into
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
reverse (R).
housing illuminate when you use your
remote control to unlock the doors or when
you open a door. SUN VISORS
360-Degree Camera (If Equipped)
See 360 Degree Camera (page 237).
Blind Spot Information System

See Blind Spot Information System
(page 259).
INTERIOR MIRROR
E138666
mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This Rotate the sun visor toward the side
could result in the loss of control of your window and extend it rearward for extra
vehicle, serious personal injury or death. shade.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
98
Windows and Mirrors
Illuminated Vanity Mirror MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children

unattended in your vehicle and do not
let them play with the moonroof. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: When closing the

moonroof, verify that it is free of
obstruction and make sure that children
E162197
and pets are not in the proximity of the
roof opening.
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
The moonroof controls are on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
SUN SHADES open and close feature. To stop it during
one-touch operation, press the control a
Rear Side Windows second time.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof

A A
E295253
E74809
A Moonroof open. Press and
Pull the blind up and attach it to the hooks release to open the moonroof.
A. B Moonroof vent or close. Press
and release to vent or close the
moonroof.
99
Windows and Mirrors
C Sunshade open. Press and Rear SunShade Opening and

release to open the sunshade. Closing (If Equipped)
The sunshade opens with the
moonroof. You can also
manually open the sunshade
with the moonroof closed.
D Sunshade close. Press and
release to close the sunshade.
Note: The sunshade stops short of the
fully open position for the comfort of rear
passengers. To fully open the sunshade,
press the control again.
Note: When closing, the sunshade stops
at the first panel for the dual panel E297640
moonroof. Press and release again to

continue to fully close the sunshade. A Sunshade close. Press and
release to close the sunshade.
B Sunshade open. Press and
release to open the sunshade.
The sunshade opens with the
moonroof. You can also
manually open the sunshade
with the moonroof closed.
Note: The rear sunshade open and close
controls can be on the rear console or fold
down armrest bezel.
Note: The sunshade stops short of its fully
opened position for the comfort of rear
passengers. To fully open the sunshade,
press the control again.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof reverses some distance if it
detects an obstacle when closing.
To override this feature, press and hold the
moonroof close control within two seconds
after the roof comes to a stop following a
bounce-back reversal.
100
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES - VEHICLES WITH: 6.5 INCH INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

DISPLAY SCREEN
E282067
A Tachometer.
B Information bar.
C Speedometer.
D Fuel gauge.
E Information display.
F Engine coolant temperature gauge.
Information Bar Information Display

Information that appears depends on your
Displays information related to the
vehicle settings. See General
navigation, outside air temperature,
odometer and distance to empty.
Information Display Fuel Gauge

The fuel gauge indicates about how much
Displays information related to the
fuel is in the fuel tank.
navigation, outside air temperature,
odometer and distance to empty. The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump
symbol indicates on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
101
Instrument Cluster
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly Engine Coolant Temperature
when your vehicle is moving or on a slope. Gauge
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel level reminder displays and WARNING: Do not remove the
sounds when the distance to empty coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi minutes for the cooling system to cool
(40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km) down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
for all vehicle keys. with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
different fuel gauge positions depending on could result in personal injury.
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal. Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
Distance to Empty indicator will be in the normal range. If the
Indicates the approximate distance your engine coolant temperature exceeds the
vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining in normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
the tank. Changes in driving pattern can safely possible, switch off the engine and
cause the value to not only decrease but let the engine cool.
also increase or stay constant for periods
of time. GAUGES - VEHICLES WITH:
12.3 INCH INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER DISPLAY SCREEN
Note: Clusters shown in single gauge view.
Note: Displays may appear slightly different
depending on region.
102
Instrument Cluster
E281475
A Gauge display.
B Speedometer.
C Information bar.
D Information display.
E Fuel gauge.
Gauge Display Fuel Gauge

The fuel gauge indicates about how much
Displays different gauge selections
fuel is in the fuel tank.
depending on supported options. Options
include Tachometer or Engine Coolant The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump
Temperature. symbol indicates on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Information Bar
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
Displays information related to the current when your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
audio source, navigation, outside air
temperature and distance to empty. Low Fuel Reminder
Information Display A low fuel level reminder displays and

sounds when the distance to empty
Information that appears depends on reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for
current gauge view and on-demand MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi
settings. See General Information (page (40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)
115). for all vehicle keys.
103
Instrument Cluster
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at Engine Coolant Temperature
different fuel gauge positions depending on Gauge
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
WARNING: Do not remove the
Distance to Empty coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
Indicates the approximate distance your on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining in minutes for the cooling system to cool
the tank. Changes in driving pattern can down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
cause the value to not only decrease but with a thick cloth to prevent the
also increase or stay constant for periods possibility of scalding and slowly remove
of time. the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At

indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.
GAUGES - VEHICLES WITH: 4.2 INCH INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

DISPLAY SCREEN
E282227
104
Instrument Cluster
A Tachometer.
B Information display.
C Speedometer.
D Fuel gauge.
E Engine coolant temperature gauge.
Information Display
WARNING: Do not remove the
Information that appears depends on your coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
vehicle settings. See General on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
Information (page 115). minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
Fuel Gauge with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
The fuel gauge indicates about how much the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
fuel is in the fuel tank. could result in personal injury.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump
symbol indicates on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler door is located. WARNING LAMPS AND
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly INDICATORS
when your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
The following warning lamps and
Low Fuel Reminder indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
that may become serious. Some lamps
A low fuel level reminder displays and illuminate when you start your vehicle to
sounds when the distance to empty make sure they work. If any lamps remain
reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi respective system warning lamp for further
(40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km) information.
for all vehicle keys.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at the information display and function the
different fuel gauge positions depending on same as a warning lamp, but do not display
fuel economy conditions. This variation is when you start your vehicle.
normal.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge The cruise control system
indicator light changes color to
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At E144524
indicate what mode the system
is in. See How Does Adaptive Cruise
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
Control With Stop and Go Work (page
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
241).
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.
105
Instrument Cluster
On (white light): Illuminates when you Battery

switch on the adaptive cruise control
system. Turns off when you switch the If it illuminates while driving, it
cruise control system off.
E67021
indicates a system error.
Immediately switch off all
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when unnecessary electrical equipment and
you engage the adaptive cruise control have the system checked.
system. Turns off when you disengage the
cruise control system.
Blind Spot Monitor
Anti-Lock Braking System Illuminates when you switch this
feature off or in conjunction with
If it illuminates when you are E151262
a message. See Blind Spot
E67020
driving, this indicates a system Information System (page 259).
error. You continue to have the
normal braking (without ABS) unless the
brake system warning lamp also Brake System Warning Lamp
illuminates. Have the system checked.
WARNING: Driving your vehicle
Automatic High Beam Control with the warning lamp on is dangerous.
Illuminates when this feature is A significant decrease in braking
E146105 on. See What Is Automatic performance may occur. It may take you
High Beam Control (page 92). longer to stop your vehicle. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the
Auto Hold Active parking brake engaged can cause brake
Illuminates when the system failure and the risk of personal injury.
holds your vehicle stationary.
E197933 Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
This lamp is a dual function lamp and
E322410 illuminates when:
• You apply the parking brake with the
Auto Hold Unavailable ignition on.
Illuminates when the system is • Your vehicle has a brake fault or low
on, but unavailable to hold your brake fluid level, regardless of parking
E197934
vehicle stationary. brake position.
If the lamp illuminates when you
E322411
are moving, you may have the
E270480
parking brake applied. Make sure
Auto Start-stop (If Equipped) the parking brake is off. Have
E67024
your vehicle checked as soon as
Illuminates when the engine possible if the lamp continues to
shuts down or in conjunction illuminate.
E121377
with a message.
106
Instrument Cluster
Cruise Control (If Equipped) Engine Oil

Illuminates when you switch this If it illuminates with the engine
feature on. running or when you are driving,
E67022
E71340 this indicates a system error.

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
Direction Indicator do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
E67018Illuminates when you switch on (page 319).
the left or right direction
indicator or the hazard flasher. If Note: Do not resume your journey if it
the indicators stay on or flash faster, check illuminates despite the level being correct.
for a burned out bulb. See Changing a Immediately have the system checked.
Bulb (page 337).
Fasten Seatbelt
Door Ajar Illuminates and a tone sounds
to remind you to fasten your
Illuminates when the ignition is E71880 seatbelt. See Seatbelt
on and any door is not Reminder (page 42).
completely closed.
Fasten Rear Seatbelt
Electric Park Brake
Illuminates and a tone sounds
Note: Indicators vary depending on region. to signal the rear seatbelts are
Illuminates or flashes when the E206718
not fastened.
E146190
electric parking brake has a
system error. See Electric Front Airbag
Parking Brake (page 211).
E67024
If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, continues
E67017 to flash or remains on when the
Engine or Motor Coolant engine is running, this indicates a
Temperature malfunction. Have your vehicle checked
Illuminates when your vehicle as soon as possible.
coolant temperature is high.
E103308
Stop your vehicle as soon as Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)

possible, switch off your vehicle and let it
cool. See Engine Coolant Check (page Illuminates when you switch the
324). front fog lamps on.
High Beam
Illuminates when you switch the
high beam headlamps on. It
E67019
flashes when you use the

headlamp flasher.
107
Instrument Cluster
High Voltage Electric System Low Tire Pressure Warning

Failure (If Equipped)
Illuminates when the tire
It illuminates if your hybrid pressure is low. If the lamp
E139232
electric vehicle has an electrical remains on with the engine

E144693
component fault or failure that running or when driving, check the tire
causes your vehicle to shutdown or enter pressure as soon as possible.
a limited operating mode. A message may It also momentarily illuminates when you
appear in the instrument cluster display. switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
Hill Descent (If Equipped) you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system
Illuminates when you switch hill checked.
descent on.
Low Washer Fluid
Hood Ajar Illuminates when the windshield
Illuminates when the ignition is
E132353 washer fluid is low.
on and the hood is not
E246598 completely closed. Powertrain Fault
Lamps On Illuminates when the system
detects a powertrain or a
Illuminates when you switch the 4WD/AWD fault. Contact an
E71341 low beam headlamps or the authorized dealer as soon as possible.
parking lamps on.
Ready to Drive (If Equipped)
Liftgate Ajar
Illuminates when you have
Illuminates when the liftgate is switched on your hybrid electric
not completely closed. E224090
vehicle and it is ready to drive. A
E162453
corresponding message may appear
stating ready to drive.
Low Beam Warning
Illuminates when the low beam Service Engine Soon
headlamp bulb is not properly
E181350 functioning. It illuminates when you switch
E67028
the ignition on prior to engine
start to check the bulb and to
Low Fuel Level indicate whether your vehicle is ready for
Illuminates when the fuel level Inspection and Maintenance testing.
is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as
possible.
108
Instrument Cluster
Normally, it illuminates until the engine is Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)
cranked and automatically turns off if no
system errors are present. However, if after Sounds the horn twice when you exit your
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this vehicle with the intelligent access key, after
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for the last door is closed and your keyless
Inspection and Maintenance testing. See vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is
Catalytic Converter (page 193). still on.
If it illuminates when the engine is running Headlamps On Warning Chime
this indicates a system error. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected an error Sounds when you remove the key from the
in the vehicle emission control system. ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
If it flashes, engine misfire may be
on.
occurring. Continuing to drive your vehicle
may cause reduced power or the engine Parking Brake On Warning Chime
to stop. Failure to respond to the warning
lamp may cause component damage not Sounds when you have left the parking
covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
your vehicle checked as soon as possible. warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
Stability Control system checked by an authorized dealer
immediately.
It flashes when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated
E138639 or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
system error. During a system error the
system switches off. Immediately have the
system checked. See Using Stability
Control (page 222).
Stability Control Off

system off. It goes out when you
E130458 switch the system back on or
when you switch the ignition off.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND

INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime (If
Equipped)
Sounds when you open the driver's door

and you have left the key in the ignition.
109
Information Displays
GENERAL INFORMATION - Instrument Cluster Display

Controls
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY SCREEN
WARNING: Driving while distracted

can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We E250032
recommend against the use of any
encourage the use of voice-operated A Return button.
systems when possible. Make sure you B OK button.
that may affect the use of electronic C Menu button.
Return Button
You can control various systems on your
Use the return button to go back or to exit.
vehicle using the information display
controls on the steering wheel. OK Button
Corresponding information appears in the
instrument cluster display. Use the OK button to make a selection.
You can also use it to scroll through a
menu.
Menu Button
Use the menu button on the main screen
to display the submenu.
6 Inch Display Menu

This icon indicates a feature's
status. A check in the box
E204495 indicates the feature is on, and
unchecked indicates the feature is off.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Note: Some MyKey menu options only
appear if MyKey is enabled and at least one
MyKey is programmed.
110
Select Screens
Select Screens
Menu options covered in Personalized Settings. See Personalized Settings (page

117).
Audio
Audio
Menu options covered in the SYNC chapter. See General Information (page 427).
Navigation
Navigation
Phone
Phone
Settings
Settings
Brake Coach
Oil Life Percent Oil Life Indication XXX%
Hold Ok to Reset
Tire Monitor Hold Ok to Reset
Neutral Tow Hold Ok to Initialize
Note: Additional vehicle settings are

available through your touchscreen. See
Settings (page 458).
111
Display Setup
Display Setup
Speedometer units
1 Hold Ok to Reset
Driving History
1 Hybrid only
Note: Additional display settings are

available through your touchscreen. See GENERAL INFORMATION -
Hybrid Display Information (If INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Equipped) DISPLAY SCREEN
Unique hybrid vehicle information displays
on your instrument cluster display when
you shut off your vehicle or come to a stop. WARNING: Driving while distracted
Brake Coach and injury. We strongly recommend that
Appears after the vehicle has come to a device that may take your focus off the
stop. It coaches you to brake in a manner road. Your primary responsibility is the
that maximizes the amount of energy safe operation of your vehicle. We
returned through the regenerative braking recommend against the use of any
system. hand-held device while driving and
The percent displayed indicates the encourage the use of voice-operated
regenerative braking efficiency, with 100% systems when possible. Make sure you
representing the maximum amount of are aware of all applicable local laws
energy recovery. that may affect the use of electronic
Note: While regenerative braking works in
all drive modes, the brake coach display
may not be available in all drive modes. You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the information display
Brake coach can be turned on or off in the controls on the steering wheel.
settings menu. Corresponding information appears in the
instrument cluster display.
Trip Summary
Displays upon shutting off your vehicle.
The values are cumulative since you last
started your vehicle.
The information shown is the same as the
This Trip on demand screen. See
Personalized Settings (page 117).
112
Instrument Cluster Display OK Button

Controls
Use the OK button to make a selection.
You can also use it to scroll through a
menu.
Menu Button
Use the menu button on the main screen
to display the submenu.
12 Inch Display Menu

This icon indicates a feature's
status. A check in the box
E250032
unchecked indicates the feature is off.
A Return button. Note: Some options may appear slightly

B OK button. optional.
C Menu button. Note: Some MyKey menu options only
Return Button MyKey is programmed.
Select Screens
Select Screens
Menu options covered in Personalized Settings. See Personalized Settings (page

117).
Audio
Audio
Navigation
Navigation
113
Phone
Phone
Settings
Settings
Brake Coach
Oil Life Percent Oil Life Indication XXX%
Hold Ok to Reset
Tire Monitor Hold Ok to Reset
Neutral Tow Hold Ok to Initialize

Display Setup
Display Setup
Add Tachometer to View

Speedometer units
1 Hold Ok to Reset
Driving History
1 Hybrid only
Note: Additional display settings are Brake Coach

Settings (page 458). Appears after the vehicle has come to a
stop. It coaches you to brake in a manner
Hybrid Display Information (If that maximizes the amount of energy
Equipped) returned through the regenerative braking
system.
Unique hybrid vehicle information displays
on your instrument cluster display when The percent displayed indicates the
you shut off your vehicle or come to a stop. regenerative braking efficiency, with 100%
representing the maximum amount of
energy recovery.
114
Note: While regenerative braking works in Information Display Controls

all drive modes, the brake coach display
may not be available in all drive modes.
Brake coach can be turned on or off in the
settings menu.
Trip Summary
Displays upon shutting off your vehicle.
The values are cumulative since you last
started your vehicle.
The information shown is the same as the
This Trip on demand screen. See
Personalized Settings (page 117). E250032
A Return button.
GENERAL INFORMATION -
VEHICLES WITH: 4.2 INCH B OK button.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER C Menu button.
DISPLAY SCREEN
Return Button
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash OK Button
and injury. We strongly recommend that Use the OK button to make a selection.
you use extreme caution when using any You can also use it to scroll through a
device that may take your focus off the menu.
safe operation of your vehicle. We Menu Button
hand-held device while driving and Use the menu button on the main screen
encourage the use of voice-operated to display the submenu.
are aware of all applicable local laws 4 Inch Display Menu
that may affect the use of electronic This icon shows the features on
devices while driving. or off status. A check in the box
You can control various systems on your unchecked indicates the feature is off.
vehicle using the quick action menu (QAM)
buttons on the right-hand side of the Note: Some options may appear different
steering wheel. The information display or not at all if the items are optional.
provides the corresponding information. Note: Some MyKey menu options only
MyKey is programmed.
115
Trip Menu
Trip Menu
Trip 1
Trip 2
Reset Individual Values Select Your Setting
Configure View Select Your Setting
• Trip Odometer - Registers the distance traveled of individual journeys or the total
distance since the function was last reset.
• Trip Timer - Registers the elapsed time of individual journeys or the total time since
the function was last reset.
• Average Fuel - Indicates the average fuel consumption of individual journeys or the
average fuel consumption since the function was last reset.
• Average Speed - Indicates the average vehicle speed of individual journeys or the
average vehicle speed since the function was last reset.
• Distance to Empty - Indicates the approximate distance your vehicle can travel on
the fuel remaining in the tank. Changes in driving pattern can cause the value to not
only decrease but also increase or stay constant for periods of time.
Note: Hold OK to reset fuel history and average fuel economy.
MyView
MyView
Digital Speedometer
Fuel Economy
Trip/Audio
Calm Screen
Navigation
Navigation
116
Audio
Audio
Phone
Phone
Settings
Settings
Information Contains vehicle status information.
Select Your Setting.
Display Language Select Your Setting
Measure unit
Temperature unit
Tire Pressure
Driver Assistance Select Your Setting
Vehicle Maintenance Oil Level Select Your Setting
Oil Life
Brake Fluid Life
Tire Pressure
MyKey MyKey Info
Create MyKey

available through your touchscreen. See PERSONALIZED SETTINGS
Select one of these options to display on
your main screen.
117
Note: Some options may appear slightly

optional.
Select Screens
Calm Screen
Fuel Economy
Trip 1
Trip 2
1
This Trip
1
EV Coach
Tire Pressure
Intelligent AWD
Off Road
Trailer Light Check
Seatbelts
2
Auto StartStop
Now Playing
1 Hybrid only
2 Non-hybrid only
Hybrid features:
After making your selection:
• When the gasoline engine is off the
1. Select a setting and press the OK instant fuel economy gauge is replaced
button. This can offer more with an electric driving message.
information on some features.
Note: Hold OK to reset fuel history and
Note: Hold OK to reset fuel history and
average fuel economy.
average fuel economy.
Fuel Economy Trip 1 and 2

Provides trip timer, trip average fuel
An Instant Fuel Economy gauge is provided
economy and total trip distance traveled.
along with average fuel economy. Average
For hybrid vehicles, the trip also shows the
fuel economy is continuously averaged
distance traveled on electric power only.
since the last reset.
118
Hybrid Information (If Equipped) • When your power level is completely

within the box the color of the bar will
This Trip be all green. This means that the
regenerative braking system is being
Provides trip timer, trip average fuel used to efficiently slow the vehicle
economy, total trip distance traveled, and down and return the maximum
distance traveled on electric power only percentage of energy to the high
with the engine off. If the gasoline engine voltage battery.
has not turned on during the trip then trip
average fuel economy is not shown. This • When your power level is outside of the
Trip automatically resets each time you green box then the bar will be white.
start your vehicle. This means that both the regenerative
braking system and conventional
EV Coach braking system are being used.
EV Coach can help you to get the most out
of your vehicle’s electric driving and INFORMATION MESSAGES
regenerative braking capabilities.
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
When you are accelerating or maintaining and instrument cluster type, not all of the
speed you will see a blue or white solid bar messages display or are available. Certain
indicating vehicle power. You may also see messages may be abbreviated or shortened
a blue rectangular box which shows the depending upon which cluster type you
power level at which the engine will turn have.
on.
• When your power level is within the box
the color of the bar will be blue. This
means you are in Electric operation and
the engine is off.
• When your power level is outside of the
box the color of the bar will be white.
This means you are in Hybrid operation
with a combination of the electric E222314
motor and the engine providing vehicle
power. Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
When you are decelerating with either your
information display. Other message will
foot off the accelerator pedal or on the
be removed automatically after a short
brake pedal you will see a green or white
time.
solid bar indicating the power being used
to slow down the vehicle. You may also Certain messages need to be confirmed
see a green rectangular box which shows before you can access the menus.
the amount of power that can be
recaptured by the regenerative braking
system and returned to the high voltage
battery.
119
Active Park
Message Action
Active Park Fault The system requires service. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Adaptive Cruise Control
Message Action
Adaptive Cruise A radar concern is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging.
Malfunction See How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With Stop and Go Work
(page 241).
Front Sensor Not
Aligned
Adaptive Cruise Conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function
Not Available properly. See How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With Stop
and Go Work (page 241).
Adaptive Cruise The radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to inclement
Not Available weather, ice, mud or water in front of radar. You can typically clean
Sensor Blocked the sensor to resolve. See How Does Adaptive Cruise Control
See Manual With Stop and Go Work (page 241).
Normal Cruise Displays when the system disables automatic braking.
Active Adaptive
Braking Off
Adaptive Cruise - Displays when the system reinstates adaptive cruise control to you.
Driver Resume
Control
Adaptive Cruise Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive
Speed Too Low to cruise.
Activate
Adaptive Headlamps
Message Action
Check Headlamp Displays when the system detects a concern. Have the system
System See checked as soon as possible.
Manual
120
AdvanceTrac™ and Traction Control
Message Action
Service Advan- The system detects a condition that requires service. Have the
ceTrac system checked as soon as possible.
AdvanceTrac Off The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switch it off.
AdvanceTrac On The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switch it on.
AdvanceTrac OFF The system is off while the vehicle is in 4x4 low.
in 4x4 LOW
AdvanceTrac The status of the AdvanceTrac sport mode after you switch it on.
SPORT MODE
Traction Control The status of the traction control system after you switch it off.
Off
Traction Control The status of the traction control system after you switch it on.
On
Alarm
Message Action
Vehicle Alarm To Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm
Stop Alarm, Start (page 77).
Vehicle.
Battery and Charging System (12 volt)
Message Action
Check Charging The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or
System continues to come on, have the system checked as soon as possible.
Charging System The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or
Service Soon continues to come on have the system checked as soon as possible.
Charging System The charging system needs servicing. Have the system checked as
Service Now soon as possible.
121
Message Action
Battery State of The battery management system determines that the 12V battery
Charge Low is at a low state of charge. Start the engine to charge the battery
or charge the battery using an aftermarket battery charger. This
message clears once you restart your vehicle and the battery state
of charge has recovered.
Turn Power Off To The battery management system determines that the battery is at
Save Battery a low state of charge. Turn the ignition off as soon as possible to
protect the battery. This message will clear once the vehicle has
been started and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning
off unnecessary electrical loads will allow faster battery state-of-
charge recovery.
Low Battery Displays when the battery management system detects an
Features Tempor- extended low-voltage condition. Various vehicle features will be
arily Turned Off disabled to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the
electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If
the system voltage has recovered, the disabled features will operate
again as normal.
Battery and Charging System (High Voltage)
Message Action
Stop Safely Now Displays when the stop safety hazard warning lamp is illuminated.
This indicates an electrical component that requires service. This
causes the vehicle to shut down or enter into limited operating
mode.
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
Message Action
Blind Spot System A system error has occurred. Have the system checked as soon as
Fault possible.
Blind Spot Not The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
Available Sensor System (page 259).
Blocked See
Manual
Cross Traffic Alert The system detects a vehicle and automatically applied the brakes.
Applying Brakes
122
Message Action
Cross Traffic Not The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system
Available Sensor sensors are blocked. See Cross Traffic Alert (page 263).
Blocked See
Manual
Cross Traffic A system error has occurred. Have the system checked as soon as
System Fault possible.
Cross Traffic Alert The system automatically turns off and displays this message when
Deactivated Trailer you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have a trailer blind
Attached spot system or when you switch the trailer blind spot system off
through the information display. See Cross Traffic Alert (page
263).
Blind Spot Alert The system automatically turns off and displays this message when
Deactivated Trailer you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have a trailer blind
Attached spot system or when you switch the trailer blind spot system off
through the information display. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 259).
Doors and Locks
Message Action
Driver Door Ajar The driver door is not completely closed.

Passenger Door The passenger door is not completely closed.
Ajar
Rear Left Door Ajar The rear left door is not completely closed.
Rear Right Door The rear right door is not completely closed.
Ajar
Liftgate Ajar The liftgate is not completely closed.
Hood Ajar The hood is not completely closed.
Switches Inhibited The system has disabled the door switches.
Security Mode
Doors Locked Displays when the door lock is turned on and you attempt to open
Unlock Before the door.
Opening
123
Message Action
Driver Door Fault Indicates a driver door fault that requires manually opening the
Use Inside Over- door by the override lever. Have the system checked as soon as
ride Lever In Map possible.
Pocket
Door Fault Service Indicates a fault with the electronic door system. Have the system
Required checked as soon as possible.
Child Lock There is a system malfunction with the child locks. Have the system
Malfunction checked as soon as possible.
Service Required
Child Lock ON Indicates that the rear seat interior door release switches and power
windows are switched off, preventing rear seat occupants from
opening the doors or windows.
Child Lock OFF Indicates that the rear seat interior door release switches and power
windows are switched on, allowing the rear seat occupants to open
the doors and windows.
Factory Keypad The factory keypad code displays in the information display after
Code {X X X X X} the system resets the keypad. See Passive Anti-Theft System
(page 77).
Driver Alert
Message Action
Driver Alert Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.

Warning Rest Now
Driver Alert Take a rest soon.
Warning Rest
Suggested
Fuel
Message Action
Fuel Level Low An early reminder of a low fuel condition.

Check Fuel Fill The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.
Inlet
Fuel Door Opening Wait for up to 15 seconds while the fuel system depressurizes.
124
Message Action
Fuel Door Open The fuel system has finished depressurizing and you can begin to
refuel.
Close Fuel Door to A reminder to close the fuel door. Failure to follow this instruction
Avoid ""Check can cause the check engine light to illuminate.
Engine"" Light
Refuel Error See There is an error in attempting to refill your vehicle.
Manual
Message Action
Hill Descent Displays when you deactivate hill descent control mode.
Control OFF
For Hill Descent Displays when hill descent speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h).
Reduce Speed 20
MPH or Less
For Hill Descent Displays when hill descent speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h).
Reduce Speed 32
Km/h or Less
For Hill Descent Displays when hill descent control mode requires you to shift the
Select Gear transmission into gear.
Hill Descent Driver Displays when the hill control mode requires you to resume control.
Resume Control
Hill Descent Displays when a hill descent system fault is present.
Control Fault
Hill Descent Displays when you disable the hill descent control mode to cool
Control Off the brake system.
System Cooling
Hill Descent Displays when hill descent control mode is ready.
Control Ready
Hill Descent Displays when you activate the hill descent control mode.
Control Active
125
Hill Start Assist
Message Action
Hill Start Assist Hill start assist is not available. Have the system checked as soon
Not Available as possible. See Hill Start Assist (page 213).
Keys and Intelligent Access
Message Action
To START Press A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle.
Brake
No Key Detected The key is not detected by the system.
Restart Now or The Start Stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and an
Key is Needed Intelligent Access key is not detected inside your vehicle.
Full Accessory Your vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.
Power Active
Starting System There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. Have the
Fault system checked as soon as possible.
Key Program During spare key programming, an intelligent access key is
Successful programmed to the system.
Max Number of During spare key programming, the maximum number of keys have
Keys Learned been programmed.
Key Program Displays during spare key programming, when intelligent access
Failure key programming fails.
Not Enough Keys Displays during spare key programming when you have not
Learned programmed enough keys.
Key Battery Low Displays when the key battery is low. Change the battery as soon
Replace Soon as possible.
Vehicle Switched Displays when you switch the vehicle off.
Off
Vehicle is ON Informs you that upon exiting your vehicle that the vehicle is still
on.
126
Lane Keeping System
Message Action
Lane Keeping Sys. The system has malfunctioned. Have the system checked as soon
Malfunction as possible.
Service Required
Front Camera The system has detected a condition that has caused the system
Temporarily Not to be temporarily unavailable.
Available
Front Camera Low The system has detected a condition that requires the windshield
Visibility Clean to be cleaned to operate properly.
Screen
Front Camera The system has malfunctioned. Have the system checked as soon
Malfunction as possible.
Service Required
Keep Hands on The system requests the driver to keep their hands on the steering
Steering Wheel wheel.
Maintenance
Message Action
Low Engine Oil Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
Pressure Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues to come on
with your engine running, have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Change Engine Oil The engine oil life is low and needs to be changed soon.
Soon
Oil Change The engine oil life is low and needs to be changed immediately.
Required
Brake Fluid Level The brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be
Low inspected immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 328).
Check Brake The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
System Contact an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.
Over Temperature
Washer Fluid Level The washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.
Low
127
Message Action
Transport Mode Indicates that your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may not
Contact Dealer allow some features to operate properly. Have the system checked
as soon as possible.
Factory Mode Indicates that your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may not
Contact Dealer allow some features to operate properly. Have the system checked
See Manual Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due to a
powertrain malfunction.
Power Reduced to The engine has reduced power to help reduce high engine temper-
Lower Engine ature.
Temp
Brake Applied The brake system has reduced stopping power.
Power Reduced
MyKey
Message Action
MyKey not Created You cannot program a MyKey.

MyKey Active Drive MyKey is active.
Safely
Speed Limited to When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays that
{avg speed XXXX} the MyKey speed limit is on.
km/h
Near Vehicle Top MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle
Speed speed is approaching 81 mph (130 km/h).
Vehicle at Top You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.
Speed of MyKey
Setting
Check Speed Drive You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.
Safely
Buckle Up to Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.
Unmute Audio
AdvanceTrac On - With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.
MyKey Setting
128
Message Action
Traction Control With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.

On - MyKey
Setting
MyKey Park Aid With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.
Cannot be Deactiv-
ated
Lane Keeping Alert With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.
On MyKey Setting
Park Aid
Message Action
Check Front Park The system detects a fault that requires service. Have your vehicle
Aid checked as soon as possible.
Check Rear Park The system detects a fault that requires service. Have your vehicle
Aid checked as soon as possible.
Rear Park Aid Not The radar is blocked due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front
Available Sensor of radar. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Rear
Blocked See Parking Aid (page 225).
Manual
Front Park Aid Not The radar is blocked due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front
Available Sensor of radar. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Front
Blocked See Parking Aid (page 227).
Manual
Park Aid Not Avail- The radar is blocked due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front
able Sensor of radar. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Prin-
Blocked See ciple of Operation (page 225).
Manual
Front Park Aid On Displays the park aid status.
Off
Rear Park Aid On Displays the park aid status.
Off
129
Park Brake
Message Action
Park Brake The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you drive your
Engaged vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after the
parking brake is released, contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
To Release: Press The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is attempted
Brake and Switch without the brake pedal being pressed.
Park Brake Use The electric parking brake is set and an automatic release is
Switch to Release attempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual release.
Release Park The electric parking brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds
Brake 3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued driving.
Park Brake Not The electric parking brake is not fully applied.
Applied
Park Brake Not The electric parking brake is not fully released.
Released
Park Brake Main- The electric parking brake system has been put into a special mode
tenance Mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Park Brake Limited The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
Function Service requires service. Some functionality may still be available. Have the
Required system checked as soon as possible.
Park Brake The electric parking brake system has detected a condition that
Malfunction requires service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Service Now
Park Brake System Numerous park brake applies have overheated the system. Wait 2
Overheated minutes before attempting to apply again.
130
Power Steering
Message Action
Steering Fault The power steering system has detected a condition that requires
Service Now service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Steering Loss Stop The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle in a
Safely safe place. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Steering Assist The power steering system has detected a condition within the
Fault Service power steering system or passive entry or passive start system that
Required requires service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Steering Lock The steering lock system has detected a condition that requires
Malfunction service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Service Now
Pre-Collision Assist
Message Action
Pre-Collision You have a blocked sensor due to inclement weather, ice, mud or
Assist Not Avail- water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the sensor
able Sensor to resolve.
Blocked
Pre-Collision A fault with the system has occurred. Have the system checked as
Assist Not Avail- soon as possible.
able
Remote Start
Message Action
To Drive: Press Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and push the gear shift
Brake and Gear button to drive the vehicle after a remote start.
Shift Button
131
Seats
Message Action
Occupant Sensor Objects are by the passenger seat. After the objects are moved
BLOCKED Remove away from the seat, if the warning stays on or continues to come
Objects Near on have the system checked as soon as possible.
Passenger Seat
Memory Recall Not Displays as a reminder that memory seats are not available while
Permitted While driving.
Driving
Memory X Saved Displays to show where your memory setting has been saved.
Starting System
Message Action
To START Press Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the brake.
Brake
Cranking Time Displays when the starter has exceeded its cranking time in
Exceeded attempting to start the vehicle.
Engine Start Displays when the starter is attempting to start the vehicle.
Pending Please
Wait
Pending Start Displays when the pending start has been cancelled.
Cancelled
132
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message Action
Tire Pressure Low One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (page 364).
Tire Pressure The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning
Monitor Fault stays on or continues to come on, have the system checked as soon
as possible. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 364).
Tire Pressure A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use.
Sensor Fault For more information on how the system operates under these
conditions, See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 364). If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Trailer
Message Action
Trailer Connected A correct trailer connection is sensed during

a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Disconnected A trailer connection becomes disconnected,
either intentionally or unintentionally, and
has been sensed during a given ignition
cycle.
Trailer Sway Reduce Speed The trailer sway control has detected trailer
sway.
Trailer Wiring Fault There are certain faults in your vehicle
wiring and trailer wiring/brake system. See
Towing a Trailer (page 283).
Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault Check Lamps There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp.
Check your lamp.
Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault Check There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp.
Lamps Check your lamp.
Trailer Battery Not Charging See Manual There is a fault with your trailer battery.
See Towing a Trailer (page 283).
Trailer Lighting Module Fault See Manual There is a fault with your vehicle trailer
lighting module. See Towing a Trailer
(page 283).
133
Transmission
Message Action
Shift to Park You switched the engine off and shift select lever is in any position
other than park (P).
Transmission Transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you drive.
Warming Up
Please Wait
Press Brake Pedal Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed.
Transmission Over The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe
Temperature Stop place as soon as it’s possible.
Safely
Transmission Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Service Required
Transmission Too The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe
Hot Press Brake place as soon as it’s possible.
Transmission The transmission has limited functionality. Have the system
Limited Function checked as soon as possible.
See Manual
Transmission Not A reminder to shift into park. In addition, this message is typical
in Park after reconnecting or recharging the battery until you cycle the
ignition to the on mode. See Changing the 12V Battery (page
329).
SHIFT SYS FAULT Displays when there is a system fault and the park brake needs to
Confirm Park be depressed before exiting the vehicle. Have the system checked
Brake Apply Before as soon as possible.
Exiting the Vehicle
SHIFT SYS FAULT Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Service Required
SHIFT SYS FAULT Displays when there is a system fault while the vehicle is shifting
Vehicle is Shifting to park. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
to Park
SHIFT SYS FAULT Displays when there is a system fault while the vehicle is shifting
Reverse Unavail- to reverse. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
able Service
Required
134
Message Action

Drive Unavailable
Select S for Drive
Service Required
Neutral Unavail-
able Service
Required
Sport Unavailable
Service Required
Invalid Gear Selec- Displays when an invalid gear has been selected.
tion
Depress Brake to Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed to enable
Shift from Park the transmission to shift from park.
Neutral Tow Reminder to switch off the ignition while in neutral tow.
Engaged Turn Igni-
tion Off for Towing
Neutral Tow Displays when neutral hold is active and you want to exit neutral
Engaged Depress tow.
Brake and Select
Park to Exit
Neutral Tow
Neutral Tow Reminder to remove park brake while in neutral tow.
Remove Park
Brake for Towing
Neutral Tow Displays when the neutral tow is off.
Disengaged
Neutral Tow Displays when neutral tow is on.
Enabled Leave
Transmission in
Neutral
135
4WD
Message Action
4WD Temporarily The four wheel drive system has automatically disabled itself due
Disabled to the system overheating.
4WD Temporarily The four wheel drive system is locking up the torque transfer clutch
Locked to help reduce clutch temperature.
4WD Off Displays when the system automatically disables to protect itself.
This may be caused by operating the vehicle with a mini spare tire
installed, if the system detects dissimilar size tires, or if there is an
issue with another vehicle system preventing 4WD operation. The
system resumes normal operation and clears this message after
you cycle the ignition on and off and drive a short distance with the
road tire re-installed or after the other vehicle system issues are
resolved.
4WD Restored Displays after the system cools and the four wheel drive system
resumes normal function.
4WD Fault Service The four wheel drive system is not operating properly and the
Required powertrain fault indicator illuminates. If the warning stays illumin-
ated or continues to illuminate, contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Change 4WD Displayed when the transfer case fluid requires service.
Power Transfer
Unit Lube
4WD Power Displayed when the transfer case fluid has been changed and reset
Transfer Unit Lube to new.
Set to New
136
Climate Control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE Smart Zone - Hybrid Electric Vehicle

(HEV), Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle
CONTROL (PHEV)
If there is not an occupant in the front
passenger seat, the climate control system
may default to single zone to improve fuel
economy, if you were previously in dual
zone operation. When this occurs, dual
E286493
zone turns off and the passenger set point
changes to match the driver set point.
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different Press the dual zone button on the
from what you see here. touchscreen or adjust the passenger set
point to use dual zone operation without
Note: You can switch temperature units
a passenger present. The system remains
between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
in dual zone operation until you switch the
Note: You can control some of the climate vehicle off.
features through the touchscreen.
You can disable or re-enable the Smart
Note: For Hybrid Electric Vehicles and Zone feature by pressing and holding the
Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicles, the air dual zone button on the touchscreen. Both
conditioning compressor may run, and you set point displays begin flashing to signify
may feel airflow when the climate control when the feature disables. The system
is off to provide cooling to the battery. returns to previous state after you release
the dual zone button.
Accessing the Air Distribution
Controls Accessing Rear Climate Controls
Press and release the button to Press and release the button to
activate the selection screen. access additional controls for
E265283 E270447
the rear climate system.
From the screen, switch directed air from
the windshield, instrument panel or Setting the Blower Motor Speed
footwell vents on or off. You can direct air
through any combination of these vents. Press and release + or - to adjust
See Climate (page 445). the volume of air circulated in
the vehicle.
Accessing the Menu
Press and release the button to
access different climate
E265038
features.
137
Climate Control
Setting the Temperature Switching Auto Mode On and Off

switch on automatic operation.
E266187
Repeatedly press the button to
adjust auto mode.
E266186
The system adjusts the blower motor
Press the toggle button on the left-hand speed, air distribution, air conditioning
side of the climate control upward or operation, and outside or recirculated air
downward to set the left-hand to reach and maintain the temperature you
temperature. have set.
Note: This control also adjusts the Under high humidity conditions, the system
right-hand side temperature when you adjusts the blower motor speed, air
switch off dual zone mode. distribution and air conditioning operation
Press the toggle button on the right-hand to reduce window fogging.
side of the climate control upward or Note: The system starts at the previous
downward to set the right-hand setting when you switch on AUTO mode.
temperature.
Note: You can also switch off dual zone
mode by pressing and holding the button
for more than two seconds.
Auto Mode Indicator Status
Auto Mode Indicator Description

Status
One indicator illumin- • The blower motor speed is reduced.

ated. • Use this setting to minimize the amount of noise from
the blower motor.
• This setting increases the time taken to cool the
interior.
Two indicators illumin- • The blower motor speed is moderate.

ated.
Three indicators illumin- • The blower motor speed is increased.
ated. • Use this setting to reduce the time taken to cool the
interior.
• This setting increases the amount of noise from the
blower motor.
138
Climate Control
Switching the Air Conditioning On Note: Depending on your region, air

and Off conditioning turns on.
Press and release the button. You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
ice.
Use air conditioning with recirculated air Note: To prevent window fogging, you
to improve cooling performance and cannot select recirculated air when
efficiency. maximum defrost is on.
Note: In certain conditions, for example, Note: The heated rear window also turns
maximum defrost, the air conditioning on when you select maximum defrost.
compressor may continue to operate even
though you switch off the air conditioning. Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off
Note: The A/C LED light may turn on and
off based on the temperature setting or the Press and release the button to
current conditions. switch between outside air and
recirculated air.
Switching the Climate Control On
and Off The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. This may
Press and release the button. reduce the time needed to cool the interior,
when used with A/C, and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Switching Maximum Air Note: Recirculated air may turn off
Conditioning On and Off automatically, or prevent you from switching
on in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to
Press and release the button for reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may
maximum cooling. also turn on and off automatically in various
air distribution control combinations to
The driver and passenger temperatures improve heating or cooling efficiency.
are set to LO, recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel air vents, air
conditioning turns on and the blower motor HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
adjusts to the highest speed. INTERIOR CLIMATE
Switching Maximum Defrost On General Hints
and Off
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
Press and release the button for cause the windows to fog up.
maximum defrosting.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
The driver and passenger temperatures
air distribution setting.
are set to HI, air flows through the
windshield air vents, and the blower motor Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
adjusts to the highest speed. your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
139
Climate Control
Note: Do not place objects under the front 2. Adjust the temperature function to the
seats as this may interfere with the airflow setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
to the rear seats. a starting point, then adjust the setting
as necessary.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the Quickly Cooling the Interior
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a 1. Press and release MAX A/C.
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
Recommended Settings for
cold air through the air vents.
Cooling
1. Press and release AUTO.
Automatic Climate Control
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
Note: Adjusting the settings when your setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is a starting point, then adjust the setting
not necessary. Automatic mode is best as necessary.
recommended to maintain set temperature.
Note: The system adjusts to heat or cool Defogging the Side Windows in
the interior to the temperature you select Cold Weather
as quickly as possible. 1. Press and release defrost or maximum
Note: For the system to function efficiently, defrost.
the instrument panel and side air vents 2. Adjust the temperature control to the
should be fully open. setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
Note: If you select AUTO during cold a starting point, then adjust the setting
outside temperatures, the system directs as necessary.
air flow to the windshield and side window
air vents. In addition, the blower motor may REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE
run at a slower speed until the engine warms
up. CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: If you select AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
is hot, the system uses recirculated air to
maximize interior cooling. Blower motor
speed may also reduce until the air cools.
Quickly Heating the Interior

E289989
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
Recommended Settings for
from what you see here.
Heating
140
Climate Control
Directing Air to the Overhead Air Setting the Rear Temperature

Vents
E244097 direct airflow to the overhead air
vents.
Directing Air to the Rear Footwell

Air Vents
E244098 direct airflow to rear footwell air
vents.
Rear Climate Control Lock

Indicator
When illuminated, you can only E265862
operate the rear passenger
settings through the front Turn the control to set the temperature in
controls. the rear passenger compartment.
Switching the Rear Climate

Setting the Rear Blower Motor Control On and Off
Speed
Press and release the button.
Switching the Rear Heated Seats

On and Off (If Equipped)
See Heated Seats (page 156).
HEATED WINDSHIELD (IF

EQUIPPED)
Windshield Wiper De-Icer

E265389
When you switch the heated rear
Turn the control to adjust the volume of window on, the windshield wiper
E184884
air circulated in the rear passenger de-icer turns on.
compartment.
141
Climate Control
HEATED REAR WINDOW Based on your remote start settings, the

following vehicle-dependent features may
Press the button to clear the rear or may not remain on after remote starting
window of thin ice and fog. The your vehicle:
E184884
heated rear window turns off • Climate controlled seats.
after a short period of time. • Heated steering wheel.
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor • Heated mirrors.
blades or other sharp objects to clean or
remove decals from the inside of the heated • Heated rear window.
rear window. The vehicle warranty may not • Windshield wiper de-icer.
cover damage to the heated rear window Note: For dual zone climate controlled
grid lines. seats, the passenger seat setting defaults
to match the driver seat during remote start.
HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Automatic Settings
(IF EQUIPPED)
If Auto is on, the system sets the interior
When you switch the heated rear window temperature to 72°F (22°C) and heats or
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on. cools the vehicle interior as required to
achieve comfort.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass Note: In cold weather, the heated rear
when it is frozen in place. window and heated mirrors turn on.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or Last Settings

glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products. The If Last Settings is on, the system uses the
vehicle warranty may not cover damage settings last selected before you turned
caused to the mirror housing or glass. off the vehicle.
Heated and Cooled Features

REMOTE START (IF EQUIPPED)
In Auto mode, certain heated features may
switch on during cold weather, and cooled
The climate control system adjusts the
features during hot weather.
interior temperature during remote start.
You can switch this feature on or off and
adjust the settings using the touchscreen.
See Settings (page 458).
You cannot adjust the climate control
setting during remote start operation.
Switch the ignition on to make
adjustments.
142
Interior Air Quality
WHAT IS THE CABIN AIR

FILTER
The cabin air filter improves the quality of
air in your vehicle by trapping dust, pollen
and other particles.
REPLACING THE CABIN AIR

FILTER
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 476).
The cabin air filter is behind the glove
compartment.
To remove the lower glove compartment
and access the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment.
E311296
2. Press the tab on each side.

3. Fully lower the glove compartment.
4. Pull the glove compartment toward
you.
143
Seats
SITTING IN THE CORRECT We recommend that you follow these

guidelines:
POSITION
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out • Do not recline the seat backrest so that
of position or with the seatback reclined your torso is more than 30 degrees
too far can take weight off the seat from the upright position.
cushion and affect the decision of the • Adjust the head restraint so that the
passenger sensing system, resulting in top of it is level with the top of your
serious injury or death in the event of a head and as far forward as possible.
crash. Always sit upright against your Make sure that you remain
seat back, with your feet on the floor. comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
WARNING: Do not recline the seat yourself and the steering wheel. We
backrest too far as this can cause the recommend a minimum of 10 in
occupant to slide under the seatbelt, (25 cm) between your breastbone and
resulting in personal injury in the event the airbag cover.
of a crash.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
WARNING: Do not place objects slightly bent.
higher than the top of the seat backrest. • Bend your legs slightly so that you can
Failure to follow this instruction could press the pedals fully.
result in personal injury or death in the • Position the shoulder strap of the
event of a sudden stop or crash. seatbelt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: Fully adjust the head

restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do
E68595 not adjust the head restraint when your
vehicle is moving.
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
144
Seats
Lowering the Head Restraint

WARNING: The head restraint is a 1. Press and hold the C button.
safety device. Whenever possible it
2. Push the head restraint down.
should be installed and properly
adjusted when the seat is occupied. Second Row Center Seat Head
Failure to adjust the head restraint Restraint (If Equipped)
properly could reduce its effectiveness
during certain impacts.
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright

driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Adjusting the Head Restraints

E286400
Front Seat Head Restraints
The head restraints consist of:
A An energy absorbing head
restraint.
B Two steel stems.
C Guide sleeve adjust and release
buttons.
Removing the Head Restraint

1. Press and hold the C buttons.
E291139 2. Pull the head restraint up.
The head restraints consist of: Installing the Head Restraint
A An energy absorbing head Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
restraint. and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
B Two steel stems.
C Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
Raising the Head Restraint

Pull the head restraint up.
145
Seats
Second Row Outermost Seat Head Third Row Seat Head Restraints
Restraints
E286397
E333253
A An energy absorbing head
A An energy absorbing head restraint.
restraint. B Two steel stems.
B Two steel stems. C Fold strap.
C Guide sleeve unlock and remove
buttons. Folding the Head Restraint
Removing the Head Restraint Pull the fold strap (C). Pull the head
restraint back up to reset.
1. Press and hold the C buttons. Note: Press the stow or fold button on the
2. Pull the head restraint up. power folding seats to fold the head
restraint.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves MANUAL SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
and push the head restraint down until it
locks. Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver

seat or seat backrest when your vehicle
is moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle.
146
Seats
WARNING: Make sure the seat fully

locks into place by rocking it backward
and forward. Not securing the seat into
the locked position can be dangerous in
a crash and could cause serious personal
injury or death.
E291151
POWER SEATS
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver

seat or seat backrest when your vehicle
E190838
is moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control
Adjusting the Seat Backrest of your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or

WARNING: Always drive and ride any objects behind the seatback before
with your seatback upright and the lap returning it to the original position.
belt snug and low across the hips.

any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure
that it has fully latched after returning
the seat backrest to its original position.
An unlatched seat may become
dangerous if you stop suddenly or have
a crash.
147
Seats
10-Way Seat Controls
E176038
Adjusting the Lumbar Support (If

Equipped)
E176039
148
Seats
8-Way Seat Controls
E338902
Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front

Seats With Active Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The engine must be running or the
vehicle must be in accessory mode to
activate the seats.
Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. The seat backrest and cushion
massage cannot function at the same time.
E156301
149
Seats
Massage Mode Lumbar and Bolster Mode
A Back massage intensity Upper lumbar

adjustment
B Massage intensity decrease Lumbar decrease
*
and off
C Cushion massage intensity Lower lumbar
**
adjustment
D Massage intensity increase Lumbar increase
E On and off -
* • Driver seat.
The massage feature defaults to an
alternating massage mode with back • Power mirrors.
massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar • Optional power steering column.
and bolster feature defaults to the middle
The memory control is on the driver door.
lumbar mode.
**
Press C a second time to adjust the back
bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the
cushion bolster.
You can also adjust this feature through
the touchscreen. When switched on, the
system displays directions for you to adjust
the lumbar settings in your seat or to set
the massage function.
MEMORY FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED)

E142554
Saving a PreSet Position

WARNING: Before activating the
memory seat, make sure that the area 1. Switch the ignition on.
immediately surrounding the seat is clear 2. Adjust the memory features to your
of obstructions and that all occupants preferred position.
are clear of moving parts.
3. Press and hold the preferred preset
WARNING: Do not use the memory button until you hear a single tone.
function when your vehicle is moving. You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset
This feature recalls the position of the at any time.
following:
150
Seats
Recalling a PreSet Position Note: If more than one linked remote

control or intelligent access key is in range,
Press and release the preset button the memory function moves to the settings
associated with your preferred driving of the first key to recall a memory position.
position. The memory features move to
the position stored for that preset. Easy Entry and Exit Feature
Note: You can only recall a preset memory
If you enable the easy entry and exit
position when the ignition is off, or when the
feature, it moves the driver seat position
transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N)
rearward up to 2 in (5 cm) when you switch
and the vehicle is not moving if the ignition
the ignition off.
is on.
The driver seat returns to the previous
You can also recall a preset memory
position when you switch the ignition on.
position by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your You can enable or disable this feature
remote control if it is linked to a preset through the touchscreen. See Settings
position. (page 458).
• Unlocking the driver door handle if a
linked remote control is present. REAR SEATS
Note: Using a linked remote control to
recall your memory position when the
Adjusting the Second Row Rear
ignition is off moves the seat to the Easy
Seats
Entry position.
Note: Pressing any active memory feature WARNING: Always drive and ride
adjustment control, or any memory button with your seatback upright and the lap
during a memory recall, cancels the belt snug and low across the hips.
operation.
WARNING: Do not recline the seat
Linking a PreSet Position to your backrest too far as this can cause the
Remote Control occupant to slide under the seatbelt,
Your vehicle can save the preset memory resulting in personal injury in the event
positions for up to three remote controls. of a crash.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory

features to the preferred positions.
2. Press and hold the preferred preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
sounds after about two seconds.
Continue holding until you hear a
second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
151
Seats
Adjusting the Seat Backrest Moving the Seat Backward and

Forward (If Equipped)
E190838
Adjusting the Second Row Seats for

Easy Entry
E281809 WARNING: Do not drive your

Lift the handle and adjust the seat vehicle with a seat that is unlatched or
backrest rearward or forward. in the folded position. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
Folding the Seat Backrest Flat injury or death in the event of a sudden
stop or crash.

a crash.
E281813
WARNING: Do not adjust a seat or
release a seat floor latch when the
Lift the handle and fold the seat backrest vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this
forward until it is flat. instruction could result in personal injury
or death in a sudden stop or crash.
Note: For bench seats, make sure you
unbuckle the center seatbelt before folding
Note: You may have to move the front row
the seat backrest.
seat forward to allow the second row seat
to be fully folded.
152
Seats
Note: You can move the second row 3. To return the seat to the seating
outermost seats forward to allow access to position, push the seat backrest and
the third row seats. move the track rearward. Make sure
the seat backrest locks in the upright
This feature allows for easier entry and exit
position.
to and from the third row seat.
Adjusting the Second Row Seats with
Power Easy Entry (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not fold a seat if it

is occupied. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
The easy entry seat allows for easier entry

and exit to and from the third row seat.
E281814
1. Lift the handle on top of the seat

backrest. The seat backrest folds
forward and engages the seat track.
E281819
Press the button on top of the second row

seat backrest to move the seat forward.
This provides access to the third row.
Folding the Second Row Center Seat
E281818
2. Push the seat forward.
E281821
153
Seats
Pull the strap to fold the seat backrest flat.

To return the seat to the upright position, WARNING: Do not drive your
rotate the seat backrest until it locks. vehicle with a seat that is unlatched or
in the folded position. Failure to follow
Adjusting the Second Row Outermost this instruction could result in personal
Seats injury or death in the event of a sudden
stop or crash.
E286395
Lift the handle to move the seat forward

or rearward.
Exiting the Third Row Seats

any objects behind the seatback before E291067
returning it to the original position.
1. Pull the strap on the back of the
second row seat. This moves the seat
WARNING: Check under the seat
forward.
cushion to make sure no cargo or objects
are under the seat cushion before 2. To return the seat to the seating
returning the seat cushion to its original position, push the seat backrest and
position, and that the seat cushion locks move the track rearward. Make sure
into place. Failure to do so may prevent the seat backrest locks in the upright
the seat from operating properly in the position.
event of a crash, which could increase
the risk of serious injury. Folding the Third Row Manual Seat
1. Remove all objects from the seat.
WARNING: Do not adjust a seat or
release a seat floor latch when the
vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this
or death in a sudden stop or crash.
154
Seats
Note: Make sure the area under the load

floor is free of objects before unstowing it.
E286398
2. Fold the head restraints by pulling the

head restraint release strap. E286399
3. From the rear of the vehicle, fold the 1. To return the seat backrest to the
seat backrest by pulling and holding upright position, pull the long strap
the strap while pushing the seat until the seat backrest locks.
backrest forward. Release the strap 2. Pull the head restraints up to their
once the seat backrest starts rotating normal positions.
forward.
Note: Do not use the seat anchors as cargo Adjusting the Third Row Power
tie downs. Seats
Note: Make sure that the area under the Note: The power rear seat functions disable
seat is free of objects before stowing it. 10 minutes after you switch the ignition off.
The transmission must be in park (P) and
Unfolding the Third Row Manual Seat the liftgate must be open to operate the
seats.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or The buttons are inside the liftgate area.
a crash.
Note: Make sure that there are no objects

such as books, purses or briefcases on the
load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure
to remove all objects from the top of the
load floor prior to unstowing it may cause
damage to the seat.
155
Seats
HEATED SEATS
WARNING: Use caution when using

the heated seat if you are unable to feel
pain to your skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use,
E291063
exhaustion or other physical conditions.
The heated seat could cause burns even
A Press to fold the left-hand third at low temperatures, especially if used
row seat. for long periods of time. Failure to follow
B Press to fold and unfold both this instruction could result in personal
third row seats. injury.
C Press to fold the right-hand third WARNING: Do not poke sharp
row seat. objects into the seat cushion or seat
backrest. This could damage the heated
To return the third-row seat backrest to
seat element and cause it to overheat.
the original position, press the
corresponding control again.
result in personal injury.
If the seats are inoperable, do the
following: WARNING: Do not place anything
1. Make sure that the engine is running on the seat that blocks the heat, for
and the tailgate is open. example a seat cover or a cushion. This
could cause the seat to overheat. Failure
2. Make sure that there are no objects on to follow this instruction could result in
the seats that would prevent them personal injury.
from folding completely.
3. Press and hold button B for one minute Front Seats
until both seats completely fold and
unfold. Do not do the following:
4. Press button A and button C to confirm • Place heavy objects on the seat.
each seat is operational. • Operate the heated seat if water or any
Note: During this procedure, the seat may other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
appear to be fully unfolded. Continue seat to dry thoroughly.
holding the switch for a few seconds. Note: The engine must be running to use
If the power rear seat disables after 10 this feature.
minutes, you can enable the seat by:
• Opening any door.
• Pressing the unlock button on the key
fob.
• Pressing any keyless entry keypad
button.
• Switching the ignition on.
156
Seats
E224689
Press this symbol to cycle through the

various ventilation settings and off. More
E146322 indicator lights indicate higher fan speeds.
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle Note: The ventilated seats switch on during
through the various heat settings and off. a remote start if they are enabled.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings. Note: The ventilated seats may switch on
when you start your vehicle if they were on
Note: The heated seats switch on during a when you previously switched your vehicle
remote start if they are enabled. off.
Note: The heated seats may switch on If the engine falls below 350 RPM when
when you start your vehicle if they were on the ventilated seats are on, the system
when you previously switched your vehicle turns off. You need to switch it back on.
off.
Note: To improve comfort, use the
Automatic Climate Controlled ventilated seats along with the vehicle’s air
Seats (If Equipped) conditioning system.
When you switch on the auto setting, the Automatic Climate Controlled
seats switch between the heated seats Seats (If Equipped)
and ventilated seats to match your climate
control setting. When you switch on the auto setting, the
seats switch between the heated seats
Second Row Heated Seats and ventilated seats to match your climate
control setting.
The heated seat controls are on the rear
of the center console.
VENTILATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

Do not do the following:
• Spill liquid on the front seats. This may
cause the air vent holes to become
blocked and not work properly.
• Place cargo or objects under the seats.
They may block the air intake causing
the air vents to not work properly.
The engine must be running to use this
feature.
157
Rear Occupant Alert System
WHAT IS THE REAR

OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM WARNING: Do not leave children
or pets unattended in your vehicle.
The rear occupant alert system monitors Failure to follow this instruction could
vehicle conditions and notifies you to check result in personal injury or death.
for rear seat occupants when you switch
the ignition off.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
HOW DOES THE REAR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM The system does not detect the presence
WORK of objects or passengers in the rear seat.
It monitors when rear doors are opened
The system monitors when rear doors have and closed.
been opened and closed to indicate the Note: It is possible to receive an alert when
potential presence of an occupant in the there is no rear seat occupant, but alert
rear seat. conditions are met.
A message displays in the information and Note: It is possible to receive no alert when
entertainment display screen and an there is an occupant in the rear seat, if alert
audible warning sounds when you switch conditions are not met. For example, if a rear
the ignition off after any of the following seat occupant does not enter the vehicle
conditions have been met: through a rear door.
• A rear door is opened or closed while Note: The audible warning does not sound
the ignition is on. when the front door is opened before you
• You switch the ignition on within 15 switch the ignition off.
minutes of a rear door opening and
closing.
SWITCHING REAR OCCUPANT
• You switch the ignition on within 15
minutes of the alert having displayed ALERT SYSTEM ON AND OFF
or sounded.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT 2. Press Vehicle.
SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS 3. Switch Rear Occupant Alert on or off.
Note: The default setting is on.
Note: Performing a master reset causes the
WARNING: On hot days, the system to switch on again.
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
very quickly. Exposure of people or Semiannual Reminder (If Equipped)
animals to these high temperatures for
even a short time can cause death or When you switch the system off, a
serious heat related injuries, including message appears every six months as a
brain damage. Small children are reminder that the system is off. You can
particularly at risk. switch the system back on or leave it off.
158
Rear Occupant Alert System
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT

SYSTEM INDICATORS
E350472
Message
Check rear seats for occupants.
Displays when you switch your vehicle off

after the alert conditions are met.
The message displays for a short period of
time. Press Close to acknowledge and
remove the message.
Note: Depending on your SYNC version, the
graphic may look different from what you
see here.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT

SYSTEM AUDIBLE WARNINGS
Sounds when you switch your vehicle off
after the alert conditions are met.
The warning sounds for a short period of
time.
159
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE GARAGE DOOR GARAGE DOOR OPENER

OPENER PRECAUTIONS
HomeLink Wireless Control
System WARNING: Do not use the system
with any garage door opener that does
not have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal
Safety Standards (this includes any
garage door opener manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door
opener which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse,
does not meet current federal safety
standards. Using a garage door opener
without these features increases the risk
of serious injury or death.
E188211
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
The universal garage door opener replaces security device are free from obstruction
the common hand-held garage door when you are programming. Do not program
opener with a three-button transmitter the system with your vehicle in the garage.
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
HOW DOES THE GARAGE vehicles as well as for future system
DOOR OPENER WORK programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
The system includes two primary features, or lease termination of your vehicle, you
a garage door opener and a platform for erase the programmed function buttons for
remote activation of devices within the security reasons. See Clearing the Garage
home. You can program garage doors as Door Opener (page 162).
well as entry gate operators, security
systems, entry door locks and home or
office lighting. GARAGE DOOR OPENER
Additional system information can be LIMITATIONS
found online at www.homelink.com or by
calling the toll-free help line at Canadian radio-frequency laws require
1-800-355-3515. transmitter signals to time-out (or quit)
after several seconds – which may not be
Note: You can program a maximum of long enough for HomeLink to pick up the
three devices. To change or replace any of signal.
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the U.S. gate operators time-out in the same
current settings. See Clearing the Garage manner.
Door Opener (page 162).
160
Note: If programming a garage door opener 4. Press and hold the hand-held
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the transmitter button you want to
device during the “cycling” process to program while watching the indicator
prevent possible overheating. light on HomeLink. Continue to hold
the hand-held button until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly
PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE or is continuously on.
DOOR OPENER TO YOUR Note: You may need to use a different
HAND-HELD TRANSMITTER method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
This process is to program your in-vehicle or garage door opener. See Programming
HomeLink function button with your the Garage Door Opener to Your Gate
hand-held transmitter. Opener Motor (page 162).
Note: The programming steps below 5. Press and hold the HomeLink button
assume you will be programming HomeLink you programmed for two seconds, then
that was not previously programmed. If your release. You may need to do this twice
HomeLink was previously programmed, you to activate the door.
may need to erase your HomeLink buttons. Note: If the indicator light stays on, the
See Clearing the Garage Door Opener programming is complete.
(page 162).
Note: If the HomeLink indicator flashes
rapidly, repeat step 5.
Note: If your device still does not operate,
you must program your garage door. See
Programming the Garage Door Opener to
Your Garage Door Opener Motor (page
161).
6. To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE

E188212
DOOR OPENER TO YOUR
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the GARAGE DOOR OPENER
garage, switch your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle. MOTOR
2. Press and release one of the three
HomeLink function buttons that you
would like to program.
3. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
E142659
161
1. Press the learn button on the garage 1. Press and release, every two seconds,
door opener motor, you have 30 your hand-held transmitter until the
seconds to complete the next two HomeLink indicator light changes to a
steps. rapidly blinking or continuously on light.
2. Return to your vehicle. 2. Release the hand-held transmitter
button.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink function
button you want to program for two
seconds, then release. You may need
to do this twice to activate the door.
Note: If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete.
Note: If the HomeLink indicator flashes
rapidly, repeat Step 3.
Note: If your device still does not operate,
E188212
you must program your garage door. See
Programming the Garage Door Opener to
3. Press and hold one of the three Your Garage Door Opener Motor (page
HomeLink function buttons you want 161).
to program for two seconds, then 4. To program additional buttons, repeat
release. Repeat this step. Depending Steps 1 – 4.
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time. CLEARING THE GARAGE DOOR
OPENER
PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE
DOOR OPENER TO YOUR GATE
OPENER MOTOR
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, E188213
some U.S. gate operators “time-out” in the
same manner. 1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
Note: If programming a garage door opener approximately 10 seconds until the
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the indicator light above the buttons
device during the “cycling” process to flashes rapidly.
prevent possible overheating.
162
2. When the indicator light flashes, This equipment complies with FCC
release the buttons. radiation exposure limits set forth for an
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons. uncontrolled environment. End Users must
follow the specific operating instructions
for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This
REPROGRAMMING THE transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm)
GARAGE DOOR OPENER from the user and must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any other
To program a device to a previously trained antenna or transmitter.
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow programming steps.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER

RADIO FREQUENCIES
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that could cause undesired
operation.
163
Auxiliary Power Points
12 Volt DC Power Point USB Port and Power Point

Locations
WARNING: Do not plug optional USB Ports and Power Points may be in the
electrical accessories into the cigar following locations:
lighter socket. Incorrect use of the cigar • On the lower instrument panel.
lighter can cause damage not covered • Inside the center console.
by the vehicle warranty, and can result
in fire or serious injury. • On the front of the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you • In the cargo area.
can use the socket to power 12 volt • On the passenger side floor panel.
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps. • 3rd row on the quarter trim panels.
Note: If the power supply does not work Note: Some of the USB ports may not have
after you switch the ignition off, switch the data transfer capabilities.
ignition on. Note: Incorrect use of the USB ports can
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the cause damage not covered by the vehicle
accessory plug. warranty.
Note: Do not use the power point over the 110 Volt AC Power Point
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps WARNING: Do not keep electrical
closed when not in use. devices plugged into the power outlet
whenever the device is not in use. The
Do not insert objects other than an outlet provides power when the vehicle
accessory plug into the power point. This is on. Failure to follow this instruction
damages the power point and may blow could result in personal injury.
the fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the WARNING: Do not use an
power point. extension cord or connect multiple
devices to the power outlet. Doing so
To prevent the battery from running out of
could result in overloading the power
charge:
outlet. Failure to follow this instruction
• Do not use the power point longer than could result in fire, personal injury or
necessary when the vehicle is not property damage.
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in Note: The power point turns off when you
overnight or when you park your vehicle switch off the ignition, when the vehicle is
for extended periods. not in accessory mode or when the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.
You can use the power point for electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is
on the rear of the center console.
164
Auxiliary Power Points
• Measuring devices, which process

precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
E247586
When the indicator light on the power point

is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is ON or the vehicle is in
accessory mode.
• Off: The power point is OFF, the ignition
is OFF or the vehicle is not in accessory
mode.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
Due to the different technologies used on
its construction, some devices may exceed
the capacity shown on its label when they
are initially plugged-in.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
165
Wireless Accessory Charger (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE WIRELESS • The vehicle ambient temperature is too

high.
ACCESSORY CHARGER
• You attempt to charge a non-Qi
The wireless accessory charger allows you compatible device on the wireless
to charge one compatible Qi wireless charger.
charging device on the charging area. Note: During charging, the device and the
charger could heat up, this is normal. If the
battery gets hotter than usual, the device
WIRELESS ACCESSORY may stop charging.
CHARGER PRECAUTIONS
LOCATING THE WIRELESS
WARNING: Wireless charging ACCESSORY CHARGER
devices can affect the operation of
implanted medical devices, including The charging area is on the
cardiac pacemakers. If you have any center console or in the media
implanted medical devices, we
E297549
bin below the instrument panel.
recommend that you consult with your
physician.
CHARGING A WIRELESS
Keep the charging area clean and remove DEVICE
foreign objects prior to charging a device.
Do not place items with a magnetic strip Place the device on the center of the
or radio-frequency identification chip, for charging surface with the charging side
example passports, parking tickets, down. The charging stops after your device
transportation passes or credit cards, near reaches a full charge.
the charging area when charging a device. You can use the charger when the vehicle
Damage could occur to the magnetic strip is in accessory mode, when the vehicle is
or radio-frequency identification chip. running, or when SYNC is on.
Do not place metal objects, for example Displays on the status bar when
remote controls, coins and candy E263583 wireless charging is in progress.
wrappers, on or near the charging area
when charging a device. Metal objects may Note: The charging performance may be
heat up and degrade the charging affected if your device is in a case. It may be
performance, in addition to causing necessary to remove the case to wirelessly
interruptions in charging. charge your device.
Charging could be interrupted, degraded, Note: Software and firmware updates may
or could stop if any of the following occur: affect device compatibility, including the
use of unofficial software or firmware. You
• The system detects a foreign object. should verify charging functionality with your
• The device is misaligned on the specific devices in-vehicle.
charging area.
• The device moves on the active
charging area when the vehicle is in
motion.
166
Storage Compartments
CUP HOLDERS
Note: Stow items in the cupholders
carefully as items may become loose during
hard braking, acceleration or crashes,
including hot drinks which may spill.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E307323
Press the rear edge of the overhead

console door to open the glasses holder.
167
Starting and Stopping the Engine
GENERAL INFORMATION If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle

may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 6 mi
(10 km) after you reconnect it. This is
WARNING: Extended idling at high because the engine management system
engine speeds can produce very high must realign itself with the engine. You can
temperatures in the engine and exhaust disregard any unusual driving
system, creating the risk of fire or other characteristics during this period.
damage.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
WARNING: Do not park, idle or the accelerator pedal before and during
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
dry ground cover. The emission system when you have difficulty starting the
heats up the engine compartment and engine.
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
IGNITION SWITCH
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start
the engine. Failure to follow this
or death.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may

result in entry of harmful and potentially
E304650
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust 0 (off) - The ignition is off.
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not Note: When you switch the ignition off and
drive if you smell exhaust fumes. leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
The powertrain control system meets all battery to lose charge.
Canadian interference-causing equipment I (accessory) - Allows the electrical
standard requirements regulating the accessories, such as the radio, to operate
impulse electrical field or radio noise. while the engine is not running.
Note: If you use your vehicle regularly above Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
the altitude of 7,500 ft (2,286 m) and under position for too long.This could cause your
the temperature of -4.0°F (-20°C), it is vehicle battery to lose charge.
recommended to use the alternative engine
oil. See Capacities and Specifications II (on) - All electrical circuits are
(page 378). operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
III (start) - Cranks the engine.
168
KEYLESS STARTING (IF EQUIPPED) STARTING A GASOLINE

ENGINE
Note: The system may not function if the
remote control is close to metal objects or When you start the engine, the idle speed
electronic devices, for example keys or a cell increases. This helps to warm up the
phone. engine. If the engine idle speed does not
Note: A valid remote control must be slow down, have your vehicle checked as
located inside your vehicle to switch the soon as possible.
ignition on and start your vehicle. Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
Ignition Modes before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each
time, without the engine starting, you
reached the 60-second time limit. A
message appears in the information display
alerting you that you exceeded the cranking
time. You cannot attempt to start the
engine for at least 15 minutes. After 15
minutes, you are limited to a 15-second
engine cranking time. You need to wait 60
minutes before you can crank the engine for
E357532 60 seconds again.
The keyless starting system has three Before starting your vehicle, check the
modes: following:
Off: Turns the ignition off. • Make sure all occupants fasten their
seatbelt.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once • Make sure the headlamps and
when the ignition is in the on mode, or electrical accessories are off.
when your vehicle is running but is not • Make sure the parking brake is on.
moving. • Make sure the transmission is in park
On: All electrical circuits are operational (P).
and the warning lamps and indicators • Switch the ignition on. For vehicles with
illuminate. a keyless ignition, see the following
• Without applying the brake pedal, instructions.
press and release the button once.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Start: Starts your vehicle. The engine may
not start when your vehicle starts. Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
• Press the brake pedal, and then press 1. Fully press the brake pedal.
the button for any length of time. 2. Turn the key to the start position to
start your vehicle.
169
Note: The engine may continue cranking 3. With the key in this position, press the
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts. brake pedal then press the push button
ignition switch to switch the ignition on
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
and start your vehicle.
first try, wait for a short period and try again.
Fast Restart
Vehicles with Keyless Start
The fast restart feature allows you to
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of
Note: You must have your intelligent access switching it off, even if it does not detect
key in your vehicle in order to shift the a valid passive key.
transmission out of park (P). After 20 seconds, you can no longer start
1. Fully press the brake pedal. your vehicle if it does not detect a valid
2. Press the push button ignition switch. passive key. Within 20 seconds of
switching the engine off, press the brake
The system does not function if: pedal and press the push button ignition
• The passive key frequencies are switch.
jammed. Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
• The key battery has no charge. until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do
a valid passive key. If you open and close
the following:
a door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key.
You cannot start your vehicle if the system
does not detect a valid passive key within
20 seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Attempt to start your vehicle and wait
until the engine stops cranking.
5. Release the accelerator pedal.
E297184
6. Start the engine.
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
2. Insert the passive key into the backup
slot.
170
Automatic Engine Shutdown 2. Switch the ignition off.

For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this 3. Apply the parking brake.
feature shuts down the engine if it has Vehicles with Keyless Start
been idling for an extended period. The
ignition also turns off in order to save 1. Shift into park (P).
battery power. Before your vehicle shuts 2. Press the push button ignition switch.
down, a message appears in the
information display showing a timer 3. Apply the parking brake.
counting down from 30 seconds. If you do Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
not intervene within 30 seconds, your all warning lamps and indicators will be
vehicle shuts down. Another message turned off.
appears in the information display to
inform you that your vehicle has shut down Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you the ignition and engine automatically shut
normally do. down.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override Stopping the Engine When Your

Vehicle is Moving
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the WARNING: Switching off the
following: engine when your vehicle is still moving
• You can reset the timer by interacting results in a significant decrease in
with your vehicle, for example pressing braking assistance. Higher effort is
the brake or accelerator pedal. required to apply the brakes and to stop
your vehicle. A significant decrease in
• You can temporarily switch off the
steering assistance could also occur. The
shutdown feature any time the ignition
steering does not lock, but higher effort
is on. Use the vehicle settings on your
could be required to steer your vehicle.
touchscreen to switch the 30min Max
When you switch the ignition off, some
Idle on or off. The feature only remains
electrical circuits, for example airbags,
off for the current ignition cycle.
also turn off. If you unintentionally switch
• During the 30-second countdown, the the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and
system prompts you to press OK or restart the engine.
RESET to temporarily switch the
feature off for the current ignition cycle
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
only.
Note: You cannot permanently switch off 1. Switch the ignition off.
the automatic shutdown feature. When you 2. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
temporarily switch it off, it turns on at the bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
next ignition cycle. 3. Apply the parking brake.
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicles with Keyless Start
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Press and hold the push button ignition
Vehicles with an Ignition Key switch, or press it three times within
two seconds.
1. Shift into park (P).
171
2. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to Note: The green ready indicator illuminates
bring your vehicle to a safe stop. letting you know that your vehicle is ready
3. Shift into park (P). for driving. Since your vehicle comes with a
silent key start, the engine may not start
4. Apply the parking brake. when your vehicle starts. See Hybrid
Vehicle Operation (page 178).
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
When the engine starts for the first time
on your drive, the idle speed increases, this
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may helps to warm up the engine. If the engine
result in entry of harmful and potentially idle speed does not slow down, have your
lethal fumes into the passenger vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
compartment. If you smell exhaust The system does not function if:
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
• The passive key frequencies are
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
jammed.
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
• The key battery has no charge.
Important Ventilating Information If you are unable to start your vehicle, do
the following:
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
STARTING A HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE SYSTEM
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants fasten their
seatbelt.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on. E297184
• Make sure the transmission is in park
(P). 1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
2. Insert the passive key into the backup
1. Fully press the brake pedal. slot.
2. Press the push button ignition switch. 3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal then press the push button
ignition switch to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
172
Fast Restart You can stop the shutdown, or reset the

timer, at any point before the 30-second
The fast restart feature allows you to countdown expires by doing any of the
restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of following:
switching it off, even if it does not detect
a valid passive key. • You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle, for example pressing
Within 20 seconds of switching your the brake or accelerator pedal.
vehicle off, press the brake pedal and press • You can temporarily switch off the
the push button ignition switch. After 20 shutdown feature any time the ignition
seconds, you can no longer start your is on using the information display. See
vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive Information Displays (page 110). The
key. feature only remains off for the current
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running ignition cycle.
until you press the push button ignition • During the 30-second countdown, the
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect system prompts you to press OK or
a valid passive key. You cannot start your RESET to temporarily switch the
vehicle if the system does not detect a feature off for the current ignition cycle
valid passive key within 20 seconds. only.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Switching Off Your Vehicle When
For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this It Is Stationary
feature shuts down the engine if it has 1. Put the transmission in park (P).
been idling for an extended period. The
ignition also turns off in order to save 2. Press the push button ignition switch
battery power. Before your vehicle shuts once.
down, a message appears in the 3. Apply the parking brake.
information display showing a timer Note: This switches off the ignition, warning
counting down from 30 seconds. If you do lamps and indicators.
not intervene within 30 seconds, your
vehicle shuts down. Another message Switching Off Your Vehicle When
appears in the information display to It Is Moving
inform you that your vehicle has shut down
to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you
normally do. WARNING: Switching off the
Note: Automatic Engine Shutdown may be engine when your vehicle is still moving
more frequent for hybrid vehicles. results in a significant decrease in
braking assistance. Higher effort is
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override required to apply the brakes and to stop
your vehicle. A significant decrease in
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
steering assistance could also occur. The
the automatic shutdown feature. When you
steering does not lock, but higher effort
switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.
173
could be required to steer your vehicle. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF

When you switch the ignition off, some EQUIPPED)
electrical circuits, for example airbags,
also turn off. If you unintentionally switch
the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and
restart the engine. WARNING: Failure to follow engine
block heater instructions could result in
1. Put the transmission into neutral (N) property damage or serious personal
and use the brakes to bring your vehicle injury.
to a safe stop.
WARNING: Do not use your heater
2. When your vehicle has stopped, put with ungrounded electrical systems or
the transmission in park (P). two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
3. Press and hold the push button ignition electrical shock.
switch for one second, or press it three
times within two seconds. WARNING: Do not fully close the
4. Apply the parking brake. hood, or allow it to drop under its own
weight when using the engine block
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes heater. This could damage the power
cable and may cause an electrical short
resulting in fire, injury and property
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may damage.
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger Note: The heater is most effective when
compartment. If you smell exhaust outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
fumes inside your vehicle, have your (-18°C).
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not The heater acts as a starting aid by
drive if you smell exhaust fumes. warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
Important Ventilating Information quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element, installed in the engine block and
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the a wire harness. You can connect the
engine idling for long periods of time, we system to a grounded 120-volt AC
recommend that you do one of the electrical source.
following:
We recommend that you do the following
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm). for a safe and correct operation:
• Set your climate control to outside air. • Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
174
temperatures, and be clearly marked The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
Suitable for Use with Outdoor of energy per hour of use. The system does
Appliances. Do not use an indoor not have a thermostat. It achieves
extension cord outdoors. This could maximum temperature after
result in an electric shock or become a approximately three hours of operation.
fire hazard. Using the heater longer than three hours
• Use as short an extension cord as does not improve system performance and
possible. unnecessarily uses electricity.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
• If the block heater cord is under the
hood, Do Not remove the wiring from
its original location. Do Not close the
hood on the extension wiring.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater

Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
175
Unique Driving Characteristics
AUTO-START-STOP (IF EQUIPPED) The Auto-Start-Stop system status is

available at a glance within the information
The system helps reduce fuel consumption display. See Information Displays (page
by automatically stopping and restarting 110).
the engine when your vehicle has stopped. Enabling Auto-Start-Stop
The engine restarts automatically when
you release the brake pedal. The system automatically enables every
In some situations, your vehicle may restart time you start your vehicle if:
automatically, for example: • You do not press the Auto-Start-Stop
• To maintain interior comfort. button (not illuminated).
• To recharge the battery. • Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed
of 3 mph (5 km/h) after you have
Note: Power assist steering turns off when initially started your vehicle.
the engine is off.
• You have stopped your vehicle.
Note: If your vehicle is flex fuel capable,
Auto-Start-Stop will be inhibited for a short • Your foot is on the brake pedal.
time after a refuel event while the system • The driver door is closed.
is verifying the fuel type being used. • The interior compartment has cooled
or warmed to an acceptable level.
WARNING: Apply the parking • The front windshield defroster is off.
brake, shift into park (P), switch the • You have not turned the steering wheel
ignition off and remove the key before rapidly or you do not have it at a sharp
you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow angle.
this instruction could result in personal • The vehicle is not on a steep road
injury or death. grade.
WARNING: Apply the parking • The battery is within optimal operating
brake, shift into park (P), switch the conditions (battery state of charge and
ignition off and remove the key before temperature in range).
you open the hood or have any service • The engine coolant is near operating
or repair work completed. If you do not temperature.
switch the ignition off, the engine could • Elevation is below about 12,000 ft
restart at any time. Failure to follow this (3,650 m).
or death. • Ambient temperature is moderate.
• The trailer is not connected.
WARNING: The system may • If you select Normal, Eco, Snow/Wet
require the engine to automatically or Grass/Gravel/Snow modes.
restart when the auto-start-stop
indicator illuminates green or flashes • You are not in 4H or 4L.
amber. Failure to follow this instruction • You have not selected Manual shift
could result in personal injury. mode.
• Hill descent control is not active.
• You have not selected Tow haul, Sport,
Sand or Mud/Rut modes.
176
Note: Note when in Sport mode it can be Any of the following conditions may result
enabled by pressing the Auto-Start-Stop in an automatic restart of the engine:
button. • You have increased the blower fan
The green Auto-Start-Stop speed or changed the climate control
indicator light on the instrument temperature.
E121377
cluster will illuminate to indicate • You have an electrical accessory
when the automatic engine stop occurs. turned on or plugged in.
If the instrument cluster is Note: You may notice that the climate seat
equipped with a grey fan fluctuates during an automatic restart.
E146361
Auto-Start-Stop indicator light,
it illuminates when automatic engine stop Disabling Auto-Start-Stop
is not available due to one of the above
noted conditions not being met.
Automatic Engine Restart

Any of the following conditions will result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
• You have removed your foot from the
brake pedal.
• You press the accelerator pedal.
• You press the accelerator and the
brake pedal at the same time. E255783
• The driver safety belt becomes
unfastened or the driver door is ajar. Press the Auto-Start-Stop button on the
center console to switch the system off.
• Your vehicle is moving. The button will illuminate. Deactivating
• The interior compartment does not using the button lasts only 1 key cycle.
meet customer comfort when air Press the button again to restore
conditioning or heat is on. Auto-Start-Stop function.
• Fogging of the windows could occur Note: If the Shift to park (P), Restart Engine
and the air conditioning is on. message appears and the amber
• The battery is not within optimal Auto-Start-Stop indicator light flashes, this
operating conditions. indicates automatic restart is unavailable.
You must restart the vehicle manually. See
• You have exceeded the maximum Information Displays (page 110).
engine off time.
• When you press the Auto-Start-Stop If your vehicle is in engine off
button with the engine automatically Auto-Start-Stop, shifting from drive (D) to
stopped. reverse (R) will not cause a restart if you
do not press the brake pedal. The message
• The front defroster is turned to the Max Auto-Start-Stop Press Brake to Start
setting. Engine appears. You must press the brake
• When you shift into park (P), the engine pedal within 60 seconds or the system
will restart. requires you to shift into park (P) and
manually restart your vehicle.
177
HYBRID VEHICLE OPERATION • Charge level of high voltage battery is

low.
- HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
• High or low outside temperatures in
(HEV) order to provide system heating or
cooling.
This hybrid vehicle combines electric and
gasoline propulsion to provide • Engine not warm enough to provide
breakthrough performance and improved passenger requested cabin
efficiency. Familiarizing yourself with these temperature.
unique characteristics provides an optimal • Towing a trailer.
driving experience from your vehicle. • Selectable drive modes: Certain
selectable drive modes may cause the
Starting engine to run. See What Is Drive Mode
When you start your vehicle, a Control (page 273).
green READY indicator light • Live in Drive: Use of the paddle shifters
E293827
appears in the instrument cluster while in drive (D) may cause the engine
letting you know that your vehicle is ready to run. See Automatic Transmission
for driving. (page 197).
The engine may not start because your
Stopping
vehicle has a silent key start feature. This
fuel saving feature allows your vehicle to The gas engine may shut off to conserve
be ready to drive without requiring the gas fuel as you come to a stop. Restarting your
engine to be running. The indicator remains vehicle is not required. Simply step on the
on when your vehicle is on, whether the accelerator when you are ready to drive.
engine is running or not, to indicate your
vehicle is capable of movement using the Transmission Operation
electric motor, gas engine or both.
Typically, the engine does not start unless The engine and electric motor together
the vehicle is cold, a climate control propel the vehicle through the automatic
change is requested or you press the transmission. This is normal hybrid
accelerator pedal. operating and helps deliver fuel efficiency
and performance.
Driving Battery
The gas engine automatically starts and Your hybrid is equipped with a high voltage
stops to provide power when needed and battery. A cool battery maintains battery
to save fuel when not needed. When life and provides the best possible
coasting at low speeds, coming to a stop, performance. The high voltage battery is
or standing, the gas engine normally shuts cooled by the vehicle's air conditioning
down and your vehicle operates in system. When the air conditioning system
electric-only mode. is on, you may notice a slight increase in
Conditions that may cause the engine to air temperature coming from the climate
start up or remain running include: control vents while the battery is cooling.
You may also notice cool air flowing from
• Considerable vehicle acceleration.
the vents when the air conditioning or
• Climbing a hill. blower is off.
178
Braking • Keep the tires properly inflated and

only use the recommended size.
Your hybrid is equipped with standard
hydraulic braking and regenerative braking. • Aggressive driving increases the
Regenerative braking is performed by your amount of energy required to move
transmission and it captures brake energy your vehicle. In general, you can
and stores it in the high voltage battery. achieve better fuel economy with mild
to moderate acceleration and
You may also notice during extending deceleration. Moderate braking is
downhill driving that your engine continues particularly important since it allows
to run instead of shutting off. During this you to maximize the energy captured
engine braking, the engine stays on, but it by the regenerative braking system.
is not using any fuel. You may also hear a
slight whine or whistle when operating your Additional Tips:
vehicle. This is the normal operation of the • Do not carry extra loads.
electric motor in the hybrid system. • Be mindful of adding external
accessories that may increase
Driving to Optimize Fuel Economy aerodynamic drag.
Note: Having your engine running is not • Observe posted speed limits.
always an indication of inefficiency. In some • Perform all scheduled maintenance.
cases, it is actually more efficient than
driving in electric mode. • There is no need to wait for your engine
to warm up. The vehicle is ready to
Your fuel economy should improve drive immediately after starting.
throughout your hybrid's break-in period.
As with any vehicle, your driving habits and
accessory usage can significantly impact
your fuel economy. For best results, keep
these tips in mind:
179
HYBRID VEHICLE FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS - HYBRID

ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)
Question Answer
What are the series of clicks from the cargo The high voltage battery is electrically isol-
area when I switch the ignition on? ated from the rest of the vehicle when the
ignition is off. When you switch the ignition
on, the high voltage contacts inside the
battery are closed. This makes the electri-
city available to the motor and generator
and allows your vehicle to proceed. The
clicks are the sound of these contacts as
they close and open during start up and
shut down.
Why does the engine sometimes start at The vehicle's computer determines if an
key-on? engine start is required at key-on. Silent key
starts the engine if it is necessary for cabin
heating, windshield defrost, or if the outside
temperature is low.
Why does it take a long time before the There are several reasons the engine stays
engine shuts down? on for an extended amount of time when
you first start it. One common reason is to
make sure that the emission's components
are warm enough to minimize tailpipe
emissions. As the climate gets cooler, this
engine-on time is extended.
Why does my engine stay on when it is In order to make sure that the climate
extremely cold outside? control system can begin heating the cabin
or defrosting the windshield as soon as you
request it, the engine coolant temperature
has to be kept sufficiently hot. Keeping the
engine on is required to maintain the correct
coolant temperature.
Can I put E15 or E85 in my vehicle, and how Your hybrid vehicle can use E15 fuel (15%
will it affect my fuel economy? ethanol, 85% gasoline), but you could
notice slightly reduced fuel economy
because ethanol contains less energy per
gallon than gasoline. Your hybrid vehicle is
not designed to use E85 (85% ethanol).
How long will my high voltage battery last? The high voltage battery system is designed
Does it need maintenance? to last the life of the vehicle and requires
no maintenance.
180
Fuel and Refueling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS • Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel

vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel fuel vapor can cause serious illness and
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank permanent injury.
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire. • Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
WARNING: The fuel system may remove contact lenses (if worn), flush
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing with water for 15 minutes and seek
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not medical attention. Failure to seek
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, proper medical attention could lead to
fuel may spray out, which could cause permanent injury.
serious personal injury. • Fuels can be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If you splash fuel on
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious your skin, clothing or both, promptly
injury or death if misused or mishandled. remove contaminated clothing and
thoroughly wash your skin with soap
WARNING: Fuel may contain and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
benzene, which is a cancer-causing contact causes skin irritation.
agent. • Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
WARNING: When refueling always for the treatment of alcoholism.
shut the engine off and never allow Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank adverse reaction, serious personal
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell injury or sickness. Immediately call a
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is physician if you experience any adverse
extremely hazardous under certain reactions.
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Follow these guidelines when refueling: FUEL QUALITY - E85

• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel
vehicle. Vehicles
• Always switch the engine off before Flex fuel vehicles have one of the following
refueling. identifiers:
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or • Yellow fuel filler cap.
fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic • Yellow bezel around the fuel filler inlet.
and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed • Yellow fuel filler housing.
immediately call a physician, even if no • Yellow E85 label on the fuel tank filler
symptoms are immediately apparent. door.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
apparent for hours.
181
Fuel and Refueling
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuels containing more than 85%
ethanol or E100 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
E161513
additives, including manganese-based
Your vehicle is designed to operate on compounds.
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum • Fuels containing the octane booster
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 or additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
regular unleaded gasoline blended with a manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
maximum of 85% ethanol (E85). • Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
Some fuel stations, particularly those in prohibited by law.
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as The use of fuels with metallic compounds
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane such as methylcyclopentadienyl
rating below 87. The use of these fuels manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
could result in engine damage that will not as MMT), which is a manganese-based
be covered by the vehicle warranty. fuel additive, will impair engine
For best overall vehicle and engine performance and affect the emission
performance, premium fuel with an octane control system.
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel Switching Between E85 and
is most noticeable in hot weather as well Gasoline
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 283). We do not recommend repeatedly
alternating between E85 and gasoline. If
Do not be concerned if the engine you switch from using E85 to gasoline, or
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the from gasoline to E85, add as much fuel as
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with possible, at least half a tank. Drive your
the recommended octane rating, contact vehicle immediately for a minimum of 5 mi
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine (8 km) to allow it to adapt to the change
damage. in ethanol concentration. If you use E85
We recommend Top Tier detergent exclusively, we recommend that you fill
gasolines, where available to help minimize the fuel tank with regular unleaded
engine deposits and maintain optimal gasoline at each scheduled oil change.
vehicle and engine performance. For
additional information, refer to
www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
182
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
Choosing the Right Fuel control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
E161513
• Fuels containing methanol.
Your vehicle is designed to operate on • Fuels containing metallic-based
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum additives, including manganese-based
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. compounds.
Some fuel stations, particularly those in • Fuels containing the octane booster
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
rating below 87. The use of these fuels • Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
could result in engine damage that will not prohibited by law.
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
For best overall vehicle and engine such as methylcyclopentadienyl
performance, premium fuel with an octane manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The as MMT), which is a manganese-based
performance gained by using premium fuel fuel additive, will impair engine
is most noticeable in hot weather as well performance and affect the emission
as other conditions, for example when control system.
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 283).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with LOCATION
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine The fuel filler funnel is in the spare wheel
damage. storage tray.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance. For Running out of fuel can cause damage not
additional information, refer to covered by the vehicle Warranty.
www.toptiergas.com.
183
Fuel and Refueling
If your vehicle runs out of fuel: Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel Container
to restart the engine.
• You may need to switch the ignition
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle
from off to on several times after
of a fuel container or an aftermarket
refueling to allow the fuel system to
funnel into the fuel filler neck. This may
pump the fuel from the tank to the
damage the fuel system filler neck or its
engine. When restarting, cranking time
seal and cause fuel to run onto the
takes a few seconds longer than
ground.
normal.
Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope, WARNING: Do not try to pry open
more fuel may be required. or push open the capless fuel system
with foreign objects. This could damage
Filling a Portable Fuel Container the fuel system and its seal and cause
injury to you or others.
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel

fuel pump nozzle can produce static in the household refuse or the public
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are sewage system. Use an authorized waste
filling an ungrounded fuel container. disposal facility.
Use the following guidelines to avoid When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
electrostatic charge build-up, which can a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
produce a spark, when filling an included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
ungrounded fuel container: Funnel Location (page 183).
• Only use an approved fuel container to Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the they may not work with the capless fuel
container on the ground when filling it. system and can damage it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
inside your vehicle (including the cargo a fuel container, do the following:
area).
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it. 2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
fuel filler inlet.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
184
Fuel and Refueling
REFUELING - EXCLUDING:
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)
Refueling System Overview
A B
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel C

container.
E267248
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
5. Fully close the fuel filler door. A Fuel filler door.
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it B Fuel tank filler valve.
back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
of it. C Fuel tank filler pipe.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler
an authorized dealer if you choose to cap.
dispose of the funnel.
185
Fuel and Refueling
WARNING: The fuel system may

be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not pry open the

fuel tank filler valve. This could damage
the fuel system. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in fire, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel

E206911 pump nozzle from its fully inserted
position when refueling.
A Left-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear WARNING: Stop refueling when
edge of the fuel filler door and the fuel pump nozzle automatically
then release. shuts off for the first time. Failure to
B Right-hand side. To open the follow this will fill the expansion space
fuel filler door, press the center in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel
rear edge of the fuel filler door overflowing.
and then release.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
C Left-hand side. Pull the rear of tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
the fuel filler door to open it. may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
D Right-hand side. Pull the rear of and fire.
the fuel filler door to open it.
WARNING: Wait at least five
seconds before removing the fuel pump
Refueling Your Vehicle
nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
into the fuel tank.
WARNING: When refueling always WARNING: Read and follow all the
shut the engine off and never allow instructions on the pump island.
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain 2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. your vehicle.
186
Fuel and Refueling
E337395
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within

the area shown.
E139202
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the E119081

first notch on the nozzle A. Keep the
fuel pump nozzle resting on the fuel 6. When the nozzle shuts off, wait at least
tank filler pipe. 5 seconds, then slightly raise the fuel
pump nozzle and slowly remove it.
A 7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Do not attempt to start the engine if you
have filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel.
Incorrect fuel use could cause damage that
the vehicle Warranty may not cover. See
your authorized dealer immediately.
Refueling System Warning (If Equipped)

If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully
B close, a message could appear in the
E139203
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
B when refueling. Holding the fuel Message
pump nozzle in position A can affect
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel Check Fuel Fill Inlet
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
If the message appears, do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
187
Fuel and Refueling
3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Fully open the fuel filler door. WARNING: Do not pry open the
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any fuel tank filler valve. This could damage
debris that may be restricting its the fuel system. Failure to follow this
movement. instruction could result in fire, personal
injury or death.
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank
filler valve. WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the pump nozzle from its fully inserted
fuel filler funnel provided with your position when refueling.
vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. See
Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page WARNING: Stop refueling when
183). This action should dislodge any the fuel pump nozzle automatically
debris that may be preventing the fuel shuts off for the first time. Failure to
tank filler valve from fully closing. follow this will fill the expansion space
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel
filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe. overflowing.
9. Fully close the fuel filler door. WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
Note: The message may not immediately tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
reset. If the message continues to appear may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and a warning lamp illuminates, see your and fire.
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Wait at least five
seconds before removing the fuel pump
REFUELING - HYBRID nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV) into the fuel tank.
WARNING: Read and follow all the

instructions on the pump island.
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow
1. When you stop your vehicle, shift into
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
park (P) and switch the ignition off.
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.

E293006
188
Fuel and Refueling
2. Press the button on the left side of the 4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
instrument panel next to the headlamp B when refueling. Holding the fuel
switch to open the fuel filler door. The pump nozzle in position A can affect
fuel filler door can take up to 15 the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel
seconds to open before you can insert pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
a fuel filler nozzle.
E206912
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within

the area shown.
E139202
E119081
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it 6. When the pump shuts off, wait 5
resting on the cover of the fuel tank seconds, then slowly lift and remove
filler pipe opening. the nozzle.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
A
Note: To close the fuel filler door, press the
center rear edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
Complete the refueling process within 20
minutes. If 20 minutes elapses, press the
button on the left side of the instrument
panel again. Fuel pump nozzle automatic
shut off could occur if you do not press the
button on the left side instrument panel.
B
E139203 System Warnings
If the fuel filler door fails to open, an
information message appears in the
189
Fuel and Refueling
Message Action
Message Action
If you see this message and
Please Your vehicle has a sealed a "Check Engine" lamp illu-
wait for fuel system that may be minates, please fully close
fuel door under pressure. This inform- the fuel filler door. The
to open ation message appears "Check Engine" Light should
while the fuel system is clear within five seconds. If
depressurizing with the fuel the "Check Engine" light
filler door closed. Wait for persists, please see your
the fuel system to depres- dealer.
surize and for the fuel filler
door to unlatch. Refuel A warning message appears
Error See in the information display
Fuel Door This information message Manual when the fuel system fails
Open appears when the fuel to depressurize or the fuel
system depressurizes and filler door fails to open. You
the fuel filler door opens. may have to use the fuel
Fully open the fuel filler door filler door manual override
to refuel and fully close the lever.
fuel filler door when
refueling is complete. If the Refuel Error information message
Fuel door Your vehicle has a sealed appears, do the following:
ajar Close fuel system that requires the 1. Check the fuel filler door for anything
fully to fuel filler door to be fully that may be obstructing its movement,
avoid closed after refueling. This for example ice or snow.
""Check warning message appears
2. Remove any obstruction from the fuel
Engine"" when the fuel filler door is
filler door.
light ajar. Please fully close the
fuel filler door to avoid a 3. Press the button on the left side of the
"Check Engine" Light. instrument panel to open the fuel filler
door.
4. If the fuel filler door fails to open and
the Refuel Error message remains in
the information display, use the fuel
filler door manual override lever.
Fuel Filler Door Manual Override

Lever

190
Fuel and Refueling
Note: The transmission must be in park (P) FUEL CONSUMPTION

or neutral (N).
When using the manual override lever do Advertised Capacity
the following:
The advertised capacity is the maximum
1. Switch the ignition on. amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
See Capacities and Specifications
(page 384).
In addition, the fuel tank contains an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.
Calculating Fuel Economy

Your vehicle calculates fuel economy
figures through the trip computer average
fuel function. See Information Displays
(page 110).
The first 1,000 mi (1,600 km) of driving is
the break-in period of the vehicle.
Resetting average fuel in your trip
computer after 2,000–3,000 mi
(3,200–4,800 km) provides a more
accurate measurement.
E297793 Conditions Influencing Fuel Efficiency
Note: The manual override lever is in the See Driving Economically (page 288).
driver side rear wheel well area.
2. Pull the manual override lever.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Complete the refueling process within
20 minutes.
191
EMISSION LAW Tampering With a Noise Control

System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
WARNING: Do not remove or alter • Removal or rendering inoperative by
the original equipment floor covering or any person other than for purposes of
insulation between it and the metal floor maintenance.
of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the • Repair or replacement of any device or
vehicle from the engine and exhaust element of the design incorporated into
system heat and noise. On vehicles with a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
no original equipment floor covering control prior to its sale or delivery to
insulation, do not carry passengers in a the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
manner that permits prolonged skin use.
contact with the metal floor. Failure to • The use of the vehicle after any person
follow these instructions may result in removes or renders inoperative any
fire or personal injury. device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws may presume to constitute tampering as
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative follows:
emission control system components.
Similar federal or provincial laws may • Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any absorbers, fender apron barriers,
vehicle modification without first underbody noise shields or acoustically
determining applicable laws. absorptive material.
Tampering with emissions • Tampering or rendering inoperative the
E67028
control systems including engine speed governor, to allow engine
related sensors or the Diesel speed to exceed manufacturer
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced specifications.
engine power and the illumination of the If the engine does not start, runs rough,
service engine soon light. experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.
192
• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.

• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
climactic conditions. result in entry of harmful and potentially
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel lethal fumes into the passenger
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank. compartment. If you smell exhaust
Regular maintenance or replacement is not fumes inside your vehicle, have your
needed. vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Note: If these checks do not help you
correct the concern, have your vehicle Your vehicle has various emission control
checked as soon as possible. components and a catalytic converter that
enables it to comply with applicable
Noise Emissions Warranty, exhaust emission standards.
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation continue to work properly:
became effective governing the noise • Do not crank the engine for more than
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb 10 seconds at a time.
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The preceding statements • Do not run the engine with a spark plug
concerning prohibited tampering acts and lead disconnected.
maintenance, and the noise warranty • Do not push-start or tow-start your
found in the Warranty Guide, are vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
applicable to complete chassis cabs over Starting the Vehicle (page 293).
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR. • Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
CATALYTIC CONVERTER vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
WARNING: Do not park, idle or maintenance information performed
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other according to the specified schedule.
dry ground cover. The emission system
heats up the engine compartment and Note: Resulting component damage may
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire. not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
WARNING: The normal operating in scheduled maintenance information are
temperature of the exhaust system is essential to the life and performance of
very high. Never work around or attempt your vehicle and to its emissions system.
to repair any part of the exhaust system
until it has cooled. Use special care when If you use anything other than Ford,
working around the catalytic converter. Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
The catalytic converter heats up to a very maintenance replacements or for service
high temperature after only a short of components affecting emission control,
period of engine operation and stays hot such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
after the engine is switched off. to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
193
Illumination of the service engine soon 1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
indicator, charging system warning light or engine may misfire or run poorly.
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, 2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine fuel—the engine may misfire or run
power could indicate that the emission poorly.
control system is not working properly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
An improperly operating or damaged properly. See Refueling (page 185).
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
4. Driving through deep water—the
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
electrical system may be wet.
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately. You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
owners and anyone who manufactures,
out. After three driving cycles without these
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
or any other temporary malfunctions
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
present, the service engine soon indicator
are not permitted to intentionally remove
should stay off the next time you start the
an emission control device or prevent it
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
from working. Information about your
engine startup followed by mixed city and
vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
highway driving. No additional vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
service is required.
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement. If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
Please consult your warranty information
available opportunity. Although some
for complete details.
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II) not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
Your vehicle has a computer known as the soon indicator on can result in increased
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
monitors the engine’s emission control engine and transmission smoothness and
system. The system protects the lead to more costly repairs.
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government Readiness for Inspection and
emission standards. The OBD-II system Maintenance (I/M) Testing
also assists a service technician in properly
Some state and provincial and local
servicing your vehicle.
governments may have
When the service engine soon Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
E67028
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II to inspect the emission control equipment
system has detected a on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may inspection could prevent you from getting
cause the service engine soon indicator to a vehicle registration.
illuminate. Examples are:
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
E67028
not work, your vehicle may need

service. See On-Board Diagnostics.
194
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if

the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
start the vehicle and complete the
above driving cycle. The vehicle must
warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
off the vehicle until the above driving
cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.
195
High Voltage Battery (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION - The high-voltage battery system is a

high-voltage, lithium-ion battery system.
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE The pack is located underneath the vehicle.
(HEV) The high voltage battery system uses an
advanced active liquid heating and cooling
system to regulate high voltage battery
WARNING: This battery pack temperature and help maximize the life of
should only be serviced by an authorized the high voltage battery.
electric vehicle technician. Improper Note: The high-voltage battery does not
handling can result in personal injury or require regular service maintenance.
death.
WARNING: Apply the parking

brake, shift into park (P), switch the
ignition off and remove the key before
you open the hood or have any service
or repair work completed. If you do not
switch the ignition off, the engine could
restart at any time. Failure to follow this
or death.
WARNING: Do not touch the

electronic ignition system parts after you
have switched the ignition on or when
the engine is running. The system
operates at high voltage. Failure to
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Keep your hands and

clothing clear of the engine cooling fan.
Your vehicle consists of various

high-voltage components and wiring. All
of the high-voltage power flows through
specific wiring assemblies labeled as such
or covered with a solid orange convolute,
or orange striped tape, or both. Do not
come in contact with these components.
196
Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Apply the parking brake

and make sure your vehicle is in park (P).
Power the vehicle off and remove the
keys or remote control whenever you
leave your vehicle. Failure to follow this
or death.
WARNING: Do not apply the brake

pedal and accelerator pedal
simultaneously. Applying both pedals
simultaneously for more than a few E227917
seconds limits vehicle performance,
which may result in difficulty maintaining
P Park.
speed in traffic and could lead to serious
injury. R Reverse.
N Neutral.
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is D Drive.
inside your vehicle. M Manual.
Automatic Transmission Position L Low.
Indicators
The instrument cluster displays the current
The instrument cluster displays the current gear.
position. Note: Your vehicle may come with low (L)
or manual (M) in the center of the selector
depending on trim level.
E317778
Park (P)
With the transmission in park (P), your
vehicle locks the transmission and
Note:
E317777 The position may illuminate on the prevents the wheels from turning. Always
transmission selector. come to a complete stop before putting
your vehicle into and out of park (P).
Understanding Your Transmission
Selector Positions When you switch the ignition off, your
vehicle shifts into park (P). If you switch
Your vehicle has an electronic transmission the ignition off while your vehicle is moving,
shifter. The transmission selector is on the the transmission first shifts into neutral (N)
center console. until it reaches a speed less than 3 mph
(5 km/h) and then shifts into park (P).
197
Transmission
The electric parking brake could apply • Door ajar indicator does not illuminate
when you shift to park (P) without the with the driver door open.
brake pedal fully pressed. The electric • Door ajar indicator illuminates with the
parking brake applies when you shift to driver door closed.
park (P) on large slopes. The electric
parking brake releases with the drive away • Transmission not in park message
release function or manually. See Electric appears with the driver door closed,
Parking Brake (page 211). after you shift out of park (P).
Note: A warning tone sounds if you open Reverse (R)
the driver door and you have not shifted the
transmission selector to park (P). With the transmission selector in reverse
(R), your vehicle moves backward. Always
Automatic Return to Park come to a complete stop before shifting
into and out of reverse (R).
What is Automatic Return to Park (P)
Neutral (N)
Your vehicle shifts in park (P) if you
attempt to exit your vehicle without the With the transmission selector in neutral
transmission in park (P). (N), you can start your vehicle and it is free
to roll. Hold the brake pedal down when in
How Does Automatic Return to Park (P) this position.
Work
Temporary Neutral Mode
Your vehicle shifts into park (P) when your
vehicle is stationary and any of the What is Temporary Neutral Mode
following occur:
This mode keeps your vehicle in neutral
• You switch the vehicle off. (N) when you switch your vehicle off. Use
• You open the driver door with your this mode at an automatic car wash if you
seatbelt unlatched. exit your vehicle or switch your vehicle off.
• You unlatch the driver seatbelt when Note: Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.
the driver door is open.
Note: Automatic return to park (P) delays
Note: Do not use automatic return to park when your vehicle is in this mode.
(P) when your vehicle is moving, except in
an emergency. See Starting and Stopping Temporary Neutral Mode Limitations
the Engine (page 168).
Your vehicle may shift to park (P) after 30
Automatic Return to Park (P) Limitations minutes, or when the vehicle battery
charge level is low. Prolonged use of this
Automatic return to park (P) may not work mode can cause the vehicle battery to run
if the door ajar switch is malfunctioning. out of charge.
Have the system checked immediately if Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.
any of the following occur: Failure to follow these instructions could
result in vehicle damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Entering Temporary Neutral Mode
1. Switch your vehicle on.
198
Transmission
2. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop. Manual Mode (M) - Vehicles with
3. Press and hold the brake pedal. Paddle Shifters
4. Shift into neutral (N). With the transmission selector in manual
(M), the driver can change gears up or
Note: A instructional message appears.
down. After selecting the Manual (M)
5. Press the manual (M), or low (L) button while the transmission range
button. selector is in the Drive (D) position, you
Note: A confirmation message appears now have control of selecting the gear you
when your vehicle enters the mode. desire using shift buttons on the steering
wheel.
6. Release the brake pedal.
To exit manual mode, push the manual
Note: Your vehicle is free to roll. (M) button on your transmission selector.
7. Switch your vehicle off.
Low (L) - Vehicles without Paddle
Note: Do not tow your vehicle in this mode. Shifters
Note: The neutral (N) indicator on the
With the transmission selector in low (L),
transmission selector may flash in this
your vehicle provides maximum engine
mode.
braking. You can shift the transmission into
Exiting Temporary Neutral Mode low (L) at any vehicle speed. Do not use
under extended or normal driving
1. Press the brake pedal. conditions as it results in lower fuel
2. Shift into park (P), or switch your economy.
vehicle on and shift into drive (D), or
reverse (R). Manually Shifting Gears
Drive (D) Shifting Using Paddle Shifters

The instrument cluster displays the current
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
gear. The current gear flashes when your
the best fuel economy and smoothness.
vehicle cannot shift into the requested
Shift the transmission selector to drive (D)
gear. Your vehicle will not shift if the
to allow your vehicle to move forward and
requested gear raises or lowers the engine
shift automatically through the forward
speed beyond the limit.
gears.
Your vehicle may shift when you fully press
The transmission shifts to the appropriate
the accelerator or brake pedal.
gear for optimum performance based on
ambient temperature, road slope, vehicle Note: Prolonged driving with high engine
load and your input. speed could cause vehicle damage not
covered by vehicle warranty.
Note: When the vehicle shifts into the
requested gear, it could affect drive modes.
199
Transmission
The indicator light illuminates and a

message displays in the instrument cluster
when the system becomes active. Select
a different mode to switch the system off.
The Tow Mode Feature:

• Moves upshifts to higher engine speeds
to reduce the frequency of
E144821 transmission shifting.
• Provides engine braking in all forward
Manually Shifting Gears in Drive (D) gears, which slows your vehicle and
Use this feature when overtaking another assists you in controlling your vehicle
vehicle, or to temporarily change gear. when descending a slope.
• Pull any paddle to switch the feature • Depending on driving conditions and
on. load conditions, it may downshift the
transmission, slow your vehicle and
• Pull the right (+) paddle to upshift. control your vehicle speed when
• Pull the left (-) paddle to downshift. descending a hill, without pressing the
• Hold the (+) paddle for a few seconds accelerator pedal. The amount of
to switch the feature off. downshift braking provided varies
based upon the amount you press the
Note: If you do not pull either paddle, the brake pedal.
feature switches off after a short period of
time. The tow mode feature improves
transmission operation when towing a
Manually Shifting Gears in Manual (M) trailer or a heavy load. All transmission
gear ranges are available when using tow
Use this feature for engine braking on hilly mode.
or mountainous roads, or to select a
specific gear. Transmission Not in Park (P)
• Shift to manual (M) to switch the Audible Warning
feature on.
Sounds if you open the driver door before
• Pull the right (+) paddle to upshift. shifting into park (P).
• Pull the left (-) paddle to downshift.
Manual Park Release (MPR)
• Shift to drive (D) to switch the feature
off.
Tow Mode (If Equipped)

WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take the
To activate tow mode, use the transmission out of park (P) which
drive mode switch on the center means your vehicle can roll freely. To
E161509 console. See Selecting a Drive avoid unwanted vehicle movement,
Mode (page 273). apply the parking brake prior to doing
this procedure. Use wheel chocks if
appropriate.
200
Transmission
3. Switch the vehicle ignition on without

WARNING: If the parking brake is starting the vehicle by pressing the
fully released, but the brake warning ignition push to start without pressing
lamp remains illuminated, the brakes the brake.
may not be working properly. Have your 4. Once in the driver seat, fully apply the
vehicle checked as soon as possible. brake pedal and hold. Do not release.
WARNING: Do not drive your

vehicle until you verify that the
stoplamps are working.
Use the manual park release to move your

transmission from the park (P) position in
the event of an electrical malfunction or
emergency.
E317360
Activating the Manual Park Release Note: A: 2.0 in (50 mm) B: 0.1 in (3.3 mm)
Cable
5. Insert a screwdriver type tool into the
Manual Park Release (MPR) lever slot.
Pull the manual park release lever
toward the rear until the detent in the
slot pops up, against the tool. Allow
full upward travel of detent,
approximately 0.28 in (7 mm) in the
park override mode (Click). You can
remove the tool. If done correctly, a
message on the instrument cluster
displays Park Not Available,
Transmission Not in Park, or Shift
E292050
System Fault.
6. With your foot still fully applied on the
1. Apply the parking brake. See Electric brake pedal, disengage the parking
Parking Brake (page 211). brake. See Electric Parking Brake
(page 211).
Note: If the vehicle battery is dead, for
example, no electrical power is available, 7. Your vehicle remains in neutral (N) for
you require an external power to apply the emergency towing purposes.
parking brake. 8. Switch off the ignition.
2. Using a flat head screwdriver, 9. Once safe, and there is no risk of your
maximum length 5 in (120 mm), as vehicle rolling, disconnect the negative
shown in the picture, carefully open the (black) battery cable from the battery.
access cover under the arm rest
console.
201
Transmission
7. If the instrument cluster does not

display the park (P) position or there
is a message stating park (P) is not
available, transmission not in park (P)
or a shift system fault, apply the
parking brake before exiting your
vehicle and have your vehicle checked
immediately.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud

or Snow
E297270 If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
rock it out by shifting between forward and
Returning Your Vehicle to Normal reverse gears, stopping between shifts in
Mode a steady pattern. Press lightly on the
accelerator in each gear.
1. Reconnect the negative (black) battery
cable to the battery. Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
2. Apply the parking brake. See Electric damage to the transmission could occur.
Parking Brake (page 211).
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
Note: If the vehicle battery is dead, for
a minute or damage to the transmission and
example, no electrical power is available,
tires may occur, or the engine could
you require an external power to apply the
overheat.
parking brake.
3. Fully apply the brake pedal and hold,
do not release.
4. Insert the screwdriver tool fully into the
manual park release lever slot. Push
the tool downwards. The system
detent releases and the manual park
release lever moves forward, allowing
the vehicle to go back into park (P).
Remove the tool.
5. Install the access cover.
6. With your foot fully applied on the
brake pedal, start your vehicle. Confirm
that your vehicle is in the park (P)
position and that the instrument
cluster indicates park (P).
202
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: A warning message displays in the

information display when a 4WD system
This system is a proactive system. It has fault is present. See Information
the ability to anticipate wheel slip and Messages (page 119). A 4WD system fault
transfer torque to the front wheels before causes the 4WD system to default to
slip occurs. Even when wheel slip is not rear-wheel drive only mode. When this
present, the system is continuously warning message is displayed, have your
adjusting to the torque distribution, in an vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
attempt to improve straight line and Note: A warning message displays in the
cornering behavior, both on and off road. information display if the 4WD system
The system automatically turns on every overheats. See Information Messages
time you switch the ignition on. (page 119). This condition could occur if the
vehicle is operated in extreme conditions
If any component requires maintenance, with excessive wheel slip, such as deep
a message appears in the information sand. To resume normal 4WD function as
display. soon as possible, stop the vehicle in a safe
location and stop the engine for at least 10
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE minutes. After the engine is restarted and
the 4WD system is adequately cooled, the
warning message turns off and normal 4WD
function returns.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel Operating Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
drive vehicles) handle differently than Vehicles With Spare Tires
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns, Do not use a different size spare tire other
excessive speed and abrupt steering in than the tire provided. If the mini-spare tire
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously is installed, the 4WD system will disable
increases the risk of losing control of your and enter rear-wheel drive only mode to
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury protect driveline components. Some
and death. limited 4WD traction could be provided if
the mini-spare is installed on one of the
The intelligent 4WD system continuously front wheels. If you are in driving conditions
monitors vehicle conditions and adjusts where limited 4WD traction is needed
the power distribution between the front while the mini-spare is installed, it is
and rear wheels. It combines transparent recommended the mini-spare be installed
all-surface operation with highly capable on the front axle. See Information
four-wheel drive. Messages (page 119).
The 4WD system is always active and If the mini-spare is installed, this condition
requires no driver input. It is capable of is indicated by a warning in the information
handling all road conditions including display. If there is a warning message in
street and highway driving as well as the information display from using the
off-road and winter driving. You can spare tire, this indicator should turn off
optimize more 4WD control by selecting after reinstalling or replacing the normal
different drive modes. See Selecting a road tire and cycling the ignition off and
Drive Mode (page 273). on. We recommended reinstalling or
203
replacing the normal road tire as soon as Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front
possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes and rear axles (for example, 17 inch low
between the front and rear axles could profile tires on the front axle and 22 inch
cause the 4WD system to stop functioning high profile tires on the rear axle) could
and default to rear-wheel drive or damage cause the 4WD system to stop functioning
the 4WD system. and default to rear-wheel drive or damage
the 4WD system.
The slip response system could activate if
the mini spare is installed on the front For optimum 4WD Performance, it is
wheels. If the mini spare was installed on recommended to follow the tire rotation
the rear wheels the slip response system maintenance schedule. To avoid potential
will fully disable. In situations where there 4WD malfunction or 4WD system damage,
is a wintery mix or an off road situation, it is recommended to replace all four tires
and you need to use a mini spare, you must rather than mixing significantly worn tires
install the mini spare in the front tire with new tires. For example, using 3 worn
position and move a full size tire to the rear tread tires and 1 new tread tire all of the
tire position for the slip response system same original tire size/brand, can be
to function. tolerated by the 4WD system as long as
the worn tires still have usable tread depth.
Operating Four-Wheel drive (4WD)
Vehicles with Mismatched Tires How Your Vehicle Differs from
Other Vehicles
WARNING: Only use replacement Truck and utility vehicles can differ from
tires and wheels that are the same size, some other vehicles. Your vehicle could be
load index, speed rating and type (such higher to allow it to travel over rough
as P-metric versus LT-metric or terrain without getting hung up or
all-season versus all-terrain) as those damaging underbody components.
originally provided by Ford. The The differences that make your vehicle so
recommended tire and wheel size may versatile also make it handle differently
be found on either the Safety than an ordinary passenger car.
Compliance Certification Label (affixed
Maintain steering wheel control at all
to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
times, especially in rough terrain. Since
post, or the door edge that meets the
sudden changes in terrain can result in
door-latch post, next to the driver's
abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure
seating position), or the Tire Label which
you grip the steering wheel from the
is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the
outside. Do not grip the spokes.
driver's door. If this information is not
found on these labels, then you should Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage
contact your authorized dealer as soon from concealed objects such as rocks and
as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not stumps.
recommended by Ford can affect the You should either know the terrain or
safety and performance of your vehicle, examine maps of the area before driving.
which could result in an increased risk of Map out your route before driving in the
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, area. To maintain steering and braking
personal injury and death. control of your vehicle, you must have all
four wheels on the ground and they must
be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
204
Driving in Special Conditions With If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the
Four-Wheel drive (4WD) Pavement
Note: Use of the 4WD system in slippery, • If your vehicle goes off the edge of the
deep snow, and sand drive modes on dry pavement, slow down, but avoid severe
surfaces could produce some vibration, brake application, ease the vehicle
driveline bind up, or excessive tire wear as back onto the pavement only after
these drive modes are intended for slippery reducing your speed. Do not turn the
and loose surfaces. steering wheel too sharply while
returning to the road surface.
Note: The design of 4WD vehicles are for
driving on sand, snow, mud and rough roads • It could be safer to stay on the apron
and have operating characteristics that are or shoulder of the road and slow down
somewhat different from conventional gradually before returning to the
vehicles, both on and off the highway. pavement. You could lose control if you
do not slow down or if you turn the
Basic Operating Principles in Special steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
Conditions • It often could be less risky to strike
small objects, such as highway
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which reflectors, with minor damage to your
can affect the normal steering vehicle rather than attempt a sudden
characteristics of your vehicle. return to the pavement which could
• Be extremely careful when driving on cause the vehicle to slide sideways out
pavement made slippery by loose sand, of control or rollover. Remember, your
water, gravel, snow or ice. safety and the safety of others should
be your primary concern.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNING: Apply the parking

brake, shift into park (P), switch the
ignition off and remove the key before
you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow
injury or death.
WARNING: If the parking brake is

fully released, but the brake warning
lamp remains illuminated, the brakes
may not be working properly. Have your
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels

at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
205
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration
you can rock it out by shifting between or braking which could result in an
forward and reverse gears, stopping increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press vehicle rollover and/or personal injury.
lightly on the accelerator in each gear. Use all available road surface to return
the vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
If your vehicle comes with AdvanceTrac®
with Roll Stability Control™, it could be • In the event of an emergency stop,
beneficial to disengage the AdvanceTrac® avoid skidding the tires and do not
with Roll Stability Control™ system while attempt any sharp steering wheel
attempting to rock the vehicle. movements.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine • If the vehicle goes from one type of
is not at normal operating temperature or surface to another (i.e., from concrete
damage to the transmission could occur. to gravel) there is a change in the way
the vehicle responds to a maneuver
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than (steering, acceleration or braking).
a few minutes or damage to the Again, avoid these abrupt inputs.
transmission and tires could occur or the
engine could overheat. Sand
Emergency Maneuvers When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
• In an unavoidable emergency situation Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
where a sudden sharp turn must be to a lower gear and drive steadily through
made, remember to avoid the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
"over-driving" your vehicle (for and avoid spinning the wheels.
example, turn the steering wheel only
as rapidly and as far as required to Avoid excessive speed because vehicle
avoid the emergency). Excessive momentum can work against you and
steering can result in less vehicle cause the vehicle to become stuck to the
control, not more. Additionally, smooth point that assistance could be required
variations of the accelerator and/or from another vehicle. Remember, you
brake pedal pressure should be utilized could be able to back out the way you
if changes in vehicle speed are called came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability could
be limited.
Note: Driving through deep water could
damage your vehicle.
When driving through water, determine the
depth; avoid water higher than the bottom
of the hubs (if possible) and proceed
slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle could stall.
206
Once through water, always try the brakes. Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be traction, slipping sideways and possibly
improved by moving your vehicle slowly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill,
while applying light pressure on the brake determine beforehand the route you will
pedal. use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill
without seeing what conditions are on the
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill
speed or direction when you are driving in
without the aid of an observer.
mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction
in slick mud. As when you are driving over When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle a lower gear from a higher gear once the
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide ascent has started. This reduces strain on
until you regain control of the vehicle. the engine and the possibility of stalling.
After driving through mud, clean off residue If you do stall out, do not try to turn around
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. because you might roll over. It is better to
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating back down to a safe location.
driveshafts causes an imbalance that Apply just enough power to the wheels to
could damage drive components. climb the hill. Too much power can cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
E143950
“Tread Lightly” is an educational program

designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities
in our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our
national forest and other public and private
lands by “treading lightly.” E143949
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
Although natural obstacles could make it brake application and brake overheating.
necessary to travel diagonally up or down Do not descend in neutral; instead,
a hill or steep incline, you should always disengage overdrive or manually shift to a
try to drive straight up or straight down. lower gear. When descending a steep hill,
avoid sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have to be
turning in order to steer the vehicle.
207
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore Make sure you allow sufficient distance
apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” between you and other vehicles for
the brakes. stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
Driving on Snow and Ice emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Since your vehicle comes
with a four wheel (ABS), do not “pump”
WARNING: If you are driving in the brakes. See Hints on Driving With
slippery conditions that require tire Anti-Lock Brakes (page 211).
chains or cables, then it is critical that
you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down, Maintenance and Modifications
allow for longer stopping distances and
avoid aggressive steering to reduce the The suspension and steering systems on
chances of a loss of vehicle control your vehicle have been designed and
which can lead to serious injury or death. tested to provide predictable performance
If the rear end of your vehicle slides while whether loaded or empty and durable load
cornering, steer in the direction of the carrying capability. For this reason, we
slide until you regain control of your strongly recommend that you do not make
vehicle. modifications such as adding or removing
parts (such as lowering kits or stabilizer
bars) or by using replacement parts not
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
equivalent to the original factory
driveline damage.
equipment.
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like
the center of gravity can make it more likely
any other vehicle.
the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss
Should you start to slide while driving on of control. We strongly recommend that
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel caution be used with any vehicle equipped
in the direction of the slide until you regain with a high load or device (such as ladder
control. or luggage racks).
Avoid sudden applications of power and Failure to maintain your vehicle properly
quick changes of direction on snow and could void the warranty, increase your
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and repair cost, reduce vehicle performance
steadily when starting from a full stop. and operational capabilities and adversely
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a affect driver and passenger safety.
4WD vehicle could accelerate better than Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis
a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, components is recommended if the vehicle
it will not stop any faster, because as in is subjected to off-highway usage.
other vehicles, braking occurs at all four
wheels. Do not become overconfident as
to road conditions.
208
Rear Axle
LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL

(IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on

slippery surfaces, particularly when one
wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under
normal conditions, the limited-slip axle
functions like a standard rear axle. The axle
may exhibit a slight noise or vibration
during tight turns with low vehicle speed.
This is normal behavior and indicates the
axle is working.
209
Brakes
GENERAL INFORMATION Anti-lock Brake System

This system helps you maintain steering
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
control during emergency stops by keeping
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
the brakes from locking.
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn. Have your vehicle This lamp illuminates
checked. If the vehicle has continuous E67020
momentarily when you switch
vibration or shudder in the steering wheel the ignition on to confirm the
while braking, have your vehicle checked. lamp is functional.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the If the warning lamp does not illuminate
wheels, even under normal driving during start up, remains on or flashes, the
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the system may be disabled. Have the system
brakes wear and does not contribute to checked. If the anti-lock brake system is
brake noise. Wet brakes result in reduced disabled, normal braking is still operational.
braking efficiency. Gently press the brake
pedal a few times when driving from a car See Warning Lamps and Indicators
wash or standing water to dry the brakes. (page 105).
See Cleaning the Wheels (page 344). Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
This lamp illuminates
Brake Over Accelerator momentarily when you switch
In the event the accelerator pedal
E270480
the ignition on to confirm the
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady lamp is functional. If it does not
E67024
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to illuminate when you switch the
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power. ignition on, or if it begins to flash
If you experience this condition, apply the at any time except the time during applying
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe or releasing the parking brake, have the
stop. Switch the engine off, move the system checked.
transmission to park (P) and apply the
parking brake. Inspect the accelerator Regenerative Braking System
pedal and the area around it for any items
or debris that may be obstructing its This feature simulates the engine braking
movement. If none are found and the of an internal combustion engine and
condition persists, have your vehicle assist the standard brake system while
checked. If your vehicle has to be towed, recovering some of the energy of motion
we recommend that you contact a and storing it in the battery to improve fuel
professional towing service. economy. The standard brake system is
designed to fully stop the car if
Emergency Brake Assist regenerative braking is not available.
During regenerative braking, the motor is
Emergency brake assist detects when you spun as a generator to create electrical
brake heavily by measuring the rate at current. This recharges the battery and
which you press the brake pedal. It slows the vehicle. Once the accelerator
provides maximum braking efficiency as pedal is released, the motor changes from
long as you press the pedal. Emergency an energy user to an energy producer.
brake assist can reduce stopping distances
in critical situations.
210
Brakes
When you release the accelerator pedal or

press the brake pedal, the brake controller WARNING: If you drive extended
automatically detects the amount of distances with the parking brake applied,
deceleration requested and optimizes how you could cause damage to the brake
much of the deceleration will be produced system.
by regenerative braking. The remaining
portion is generated by standard friction WARNING: The electric parking
braking. When the battery is almost fully brake does not operate if the vehicle
charged, the amount of regenerative battery has run out of charge.
braking is limited to avoid overcharging,
and the requested deceleration is
Your vehicle has an electric parking brake.
produced by standard friction braking
You operate it with a switch instead of a
alone.
lever. The switch is on the center console
Regenerative braking does not take the or to the left-hand side of the steering
place of the standard friction brakes; it only wheel, on the lower part of the instrument
assists them. Regenerative braking is panel.
designed to interact with the anti-lock
Note: The electric parking brake makes
brake system. Regenerative braking
noises during operation. This is normal.
disables when the anti-lock brake system
is activated or the battery is fully charged. Applying the Electric Parking
Brake
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH Pull the switch up.
E267156
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
The anti-lock brake system does not The red warning lamp flashes
eliminate the risks when: during operation and illuminates
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
E270480
when the parking brake is
front of you. applied.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
E67024
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor. Note: It remains illuminated for a short
Note: If the system activates, the brake period of time after you switch the ignition
pedal could pulse and may travel further. off.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You If it continues to flash or does not
may also hear a noise from the system. This illuminate, the system has malfunctioned.
is normal. Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE Note: You can apply the electric parking
brake when the ignition is off.
WARNING: Apply the parking brake

and shift into park (P) before leaving
your vehicle.
211
Brakes
Note: If you shift your vehicle into park (P) Pulling Away on a Hill When Towing a
on a slope and the transmission cannot Trailer
securely hold the vehicle, the electric parking
brake automatically applies. See Press and hold the brake pedal.
Transmission (page 197). E267156
Pull the switch up and hold it.
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in
an Emergency
Shift into gear.
Note: Do not apply the electric parking Press the accelerator pedal until the engine
brake when your vehicle is moving, except has developed sufficient torque to prevent
in an emergency. If you repeatedly use the your vehicle from rolling down the hill.
electric parking brake to slow or stop your
vehicle, you could cause damage to the E267156
Release the switch and pull
brake system. away in a normal manner.
You can use the electric parking brake to
slow or stop your vehicle in an emergency. Automatically Releasing the
Pull the switch up and hold it. Electric Parking Brake
E267156
Close the driver door.
The red warning lamp Shift into gear.
illuminates, a tone sounds and Press the accelerator pedal and pull away
E270480
the stoplamps turn on. in a normal manner.
The red warning lamp turns off.
E67024
E270480
The electric parking brake continues to

slow your vehicle down unless you release E67024
the switch.
If it remains illuminated or flashes, the
Manually Releasing the Electric electric parking brake has not released.
Parking Brake Manually release the parking brake.
Switch the ignition on. Releasing the Electric Parking
Press and hold the brake pedal. Brake if the Vehicle Battery is
Running Out of Charge
E267156
Push the switch down.
Connect a booster battery to the vehicle
battery to release the electric parking brake
The red warning lamp turns off. if the vehicle battery is running out of
charge. See Jump Starting the Vehicle
E270480 (page 293).
E67024
If it remains illuminated or flashes, the

system has malfunctioned. Have your
212
Brakes
HILL START ASSIST Using Hill Start Assist

1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
WARNING: The system does not the brake pedal pressed and shift into
replace the parking brake. When you first gear when facing uphill or reverse
leave your vehicle, always apply the (R) when facing downhill.
parking brake. 2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system activates
WARNING: You must remain in automatically.
your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times, you are responsible for 3. When you remove your foot from the
controlling your vehicle, supervising the brake pedal, your vehicle remains on
system and intervening, if required. the slope without rolling away for
Failure to take care may result in the loss about two to three seconds. This hold
of control of your vehicle, serious time automatically extends if you are
personal injury or death. in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
WARNING: The system will turn system releases the brakes
off if a malfunction is apparent or if you automatically.
rev the engine excessively. Failure to take
Note: When you remove your foot from the
care may result in the loss of control of
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
your vehicle, serious personal injury or
the system is active, you will experience
death.
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the Switching the System On and Off
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle Vehicles with Manual Transmission
remains stationary on the slope for two to You can switch this feature on or off in the
three seconds after you release the brake information display. The system
pedal. This allows time to move your foot remembers the last setting when you start
from the brake to the accelerator pedal. your vehicle.
The system releases the brakes
automatically once the engine has Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
developed sufficient torque to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This You cannot turn the system on or off.
is an advantage when pulling away on a When you switch the ignition on, the
slope, for example from a car park ramp, system automatically turns on.
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
a parking space.
The system activates on any slope that
causes your vehicle to roll.
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.
213
Brakes
AUTO HOLD 2. Release the brake pedal. The system

holds your vehicle at a standstill. The
auto hold active indicator remains
illuminated in the information display.
replace the parking brake. When you Note: The system only activates if you
leave your vehicle, always apply the apply enough brake pressure. If your vehicle
parking brake. is on a steep slope, you might need to press
the brake pedal harder before the system
WARNING: You must remain in activates.
your vehicle when the system turns on. Note: Under certain conditions, the system
At all times, you are responsible for could apply the electric parking brake. The
controlling your vehicle, supervising the brake system warning lamp illuminates. The
system and intervening, if required. electric parking brake releases when you
Failure to take care may result in the loss press the accelerator pedal. See Electric
of control of your vehicle, serious Parking Brake (page 211).
Note: If auto-start-stop turns off the
WARNING: The system turns off if engine, auto hold remains active.
there is a malfunction. Note: The system deactivates if you shift
into reverse (R) and press the brake pedal.
The system is designed to apply the brakes 3. Pull away in the normal manner. The
to hold your vehicle at a standstill after you system releases the brakes and the
stop your vehicle and release the brake auto hold active indicator turns off.
pedal. This could be beneficial in certain
situations, for example when waiting on a Auto Hold Indicator
hill or in traffic.
The auto hold indicator illuminates in the
Switching Auto Hold On and Off information display when the system is on
and is either active or unavailable.
Press the button on the center
console. The button illuminates Illuminates when the system is
E297843
when you switch the system on. active. Your vehicle remains
E197933 stationary after you release the
Note: You can only switch the system on brake pedal.
after you close the driver door, and start the
engine.
Note: The system remembers the last Illuminates when the system is
setting when you start your vehicle. E197934
on but unavailable to hold your
vehicle at a standstill.
Make sure you switch the system off before
towing with your vehicle or before using an
automatic car wash.
Using Auto Hold The system could be unavailable when any

of the following occur:
1. Use the brakes to bring your vehicle to • During an active park assist maneuver.
a complete stop. The auto hold active
indicator illuminates in the information • Your vehicle is in stay in neutral mode.
display.
214
Brakes
• The driver door is open.

• You shift into reverse (R) before the
system is active.
215
Reverse Braking Assist (If Equipped)
WHAT IS REVERSE BRAKING

ASSIST WARNING: Traffic control systems,
fluorescent lamps, inclement weather,
air brakes, external motors and fans may
affect the correct operation of the
sensing system. This may cause reduced
performance or false alerts.
WARNING: Some situations and

objects prevent hazard detection. For
example low or direct sunlight, inclement
E205199
weather, unconventional vehicle types,
and pedestrians. Apply the brakes when
Reverse braking assist is designed to necessary. Failure to follow this
reduce impact damage or assist in avoiding instruction could result in the loss of
a collision while in reverse (R). Using control of your vehicle, personal injury or
sensors on the rear of the vehicle, it can death.
detect a possible collision and apply the
brakes. If full braking occurs, the system WARNING: Do not use the system
attempts to stop the vehicle a safe with accessories that extend beyond the
distance from the obstacle. front or rear of your vehicle, for example
a trailer hitch or bike rack. The system is
not able to make corrections for the
REVERSE BRAKING ASSIST additional length of the accessories.
PRECAUTIONS
The system only applies the brakes for a
short period of time when an event occurs.
Act as soon as you notice the brakes apply
WARNING: You are responsible for
to remain in control of the vehicle. If you
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
do not intervene the vehicle may start to
system is designed to be an aid and does
move again.
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure Note: Certain add-on devices around the
to follow this instruction could result in bumper or fascia may create false alerts.
the loss of control of your vehicle, For example, large trailer hitches, bicycle or
personal injury or death. surfboard racks, license plate brackets,
bumper covers or any other device that may
WARNING: To help avoid personal block the normal detection zone of the
injury, always use caution when in system. Remove the add-on device to
reverse (R) and when using the sensing prevent false alerts.
system. Note: The system does not react to small
or moving objects, particularly those close
WARNING: The system may not
to the ground.
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy Note: The system does not operate during
rain and spray. Always drive with due hard acceleration or steering.
care and attention. Failure to take care
216
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to Note: The system is unavailable when rear
the bumper or fascia leaving it misaligned parking aid or cross traffic alert is off.
or bent, it could alter the sensing zone
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alerts. OVERRIDING REVERSE
Note: Vehicle loading and suspension
BRAKING ASSIST
changes can impact the angle of the sensors
There could be instances when
and may change the normal detection zone
unexpected or unwanted braking occurs.
of the system resulting in inaccurate
Firmly pressing the accelerator pedal or
measurement of obstacles or false alerts.
switching the feature off overrides the
Note: When you connect a trailer, the system.
system may detect the trailer and provide
an alert, or the system turns off. If the
system does not turn off, manually switch REVERSE BRAKING ASSIST
the system off after you connect the trailer. INDICATORS
Note: You may experience reduced system
performance on road surfaces that limit If the system determines that a collision
deceleration. For example, roads with ice, with an obstacle may occur, full braking
loose gravel, mud or sand. may apply.
A message and warning
indicator appear when the
SWITCHING REVERSE E293490
system applies the brakes.
BRAKING ASSIST ON AND OFF
You can switch the system on or off
through the touchscreen. See Settings
(page 458).
217
REVERSE BRAKING ASSIST – TROUBLESHOOTING
REVERSE BRAKING ASSIST – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Description
Reverse Brake Assist Displays when the system applies the

brakes and remains on for a few seconds.
Reverse Brake Assist Not Available See Make sure that all doors, liftgate or tailgate
Manual and hood are closed. Drive the vehicle on a
straight road for a short period. Make sure
the parking aids and cross traffic alert
systems are on. If the message remains on,
have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Reverse Brake Assist Fault Displays when a system error has occurred.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Reverse Brake Assist Off Displays when reverse brake assist is off.
218
REVERSE BRAKING ASSIST – • You recently had your vehicle serviced,

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS or the battery disconnected. Drive your
vehicle a short distance to resume
Why is reverse braking assist unavailable? system operation.
• Make sure you switch the system on. • The system does not function when
See Switching Reverse Braking you connect a trailer. Operation
Assist On and Off (page 217). resumes when you disconnect the
• Make sure that the liftgate, hood and trailer.
all doors are closed. Note: If the answers to why the system is
• Make sure the cross traffic alert system unavailable do not assist in returning reverse
is on. See Cross Traffic Alert (page braking assist to available, have the system
263). checked as soon as possible.
• Make sure the rear parking aid system
is on. See Rear Parking Aid (page 225).
• Make sure traction control is on. See
Using Traction Control (page 220).
• The vehicle has sustained a rear end
impact. Have the sensors checked for
proper coverage and operation.
• An ABS, traction control or stability
control event may have occurred. The
system resumes operation when the
event is complete.
• Make sure the rear view camera and
360 degree camera are not dirty or
obstructed. If it is dirty, clean the
camera. See Rear View Camera
(page 234). See 360 Degree Camera
(page 237). If the message still appears
after cleaning the camera, wait a short
time and the message should clear. If
the message does not clear, have the
system checked.
• Make sure the sensors are not blocked
or faulted. See Cross Traffic Alert
(page 263). See Rear Parking Aid
(page 225).
219
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION System Indicator Lights and

Messages
The traction control system helps avoid
The stability and traction control
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
light:
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system E138639
applies the brakes to individual wheels • Temporarily illuminates on engine

and, when needed, reduces engine power start-up.
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
• Flashes when a driving condition
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
activates either of the systems.
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction. • Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.
USING TRACTION CONTROL The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
E130458 on engine start-up and stays on
when you switch the traction control
WARNING: Operating your vehicle system off.
with the traction control disabled could
lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
The system automatically turns on each

time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off

When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information
display showing system status.
You can switch the system off by using the
switch.
Using a Switch (If Equipped)

Use the traction control switch on the
center console near the shifter to switch
the system off or on.
The traction control switch.
E297971
220
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION If a driving condition activates either the

stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
conditions:
WARNING: Vehicle modifications
involving braking system, aftermarket • The stability and traction control light
roof racks, suspension, steering system, flashes.
tire construction and wheel and tire size • Your vehicle slows down.
may change the handling characteristics • Reduced engine power.
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic • A vibration in the brake pedal.
stability control system. In addition, • The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
installing any stereo loudspeakers may • If the driving condition is severe and
interfere with and adversely affect the your foot is not on the brake, the brake
electronic stability control system. Install pedal may move as the systems
any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as applies higher brake forces.
far as possible from the front center
console, the tunnel, and the front seats The stability control system has several
in order to minimize the risk of interfering features built into it to help you maintain
with the electronic stability control control of your vehicle:
sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of
the electronic stability control system Electronic Stability Control
could lead to an increased risk of loss of The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal to prevent skids or lateral slides by
injury and death. applying brakes to one or more of the
wheels individually and, if necessary,
WARNING: Remember that even reducing engine power.
advanced technology cannot defy the
laws of physics. It’s always possible to Roll Stability Control
lose control of a vehicle due to
inappropriate driver input for the The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
conditions. Aggressive driving on any to prevent rollovers by detecting your
road condition can cause you to lose vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
control of your vehicle increasing the risk it changes by applying the brakes to one
of personal injury or property damage. or more wheels individually.
Activation of the electronic stability
control system is an indication that at Curve Control
least some of the tires have exceeded The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
their ability to grip the road; this could to follow the road when cornering severely
reduce the operator’s ability to control or avoiding objects in the roadway. Curve
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss Control operates by reducing engine power
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, and, if necessary, applying brakes to one
personal injury and death. If your or more of the wheels individually.
electronic stability control system
activates, SLOW DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each

221
Stability Control
Traction Control USING STABILITY CONTROL

The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by Electronic Stability Control - Base
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See Model
Using Traction Control (page 220). The system automatically turns on each
You cannot switch the stability control and
roll stability control systems off, but when
you shift into reverse (R), the systems
deactivate.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on. See Using Traction Control
(page 220).
Electronic Stability Control - ST

Model
The system turns on each time
you switch the ignition on. You
E138639 can switch off the traction
control portion of the system
independently. See Using Traction
Control (page 220).
E72903
A Vehicle without stability control

skidding off its intended route.
B Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
222
Stability Control
ESC Features for ST model
Button Func- Mode Stability Control Electronic Traction Control

tions Off Light Stability Control System
Default at start- Default - Trac- On during bulb Enabled Enabled

up tion Control On check
and Normal
AdvanceTrac
Button Traction Control On Enabled Disabled
momentarily Off
pressed - single
press
Button pressed AdvanceTrac On Disabled Disabled
and held for five Off
seconds
Button pressed Return to Off Enabled Enabled
when in Trac- Default
tion Control Off
or AdvanceTrac
Off
Note: Do not use the AdvanceTrac Off

setting on public roadways.
223
WHAT IS HILL DESCENT SWITCHING HILL DESCENT

CONTROL CONTROL ON AND OFF
Press the button on the center
WARNING: Hill descent control console. A light illuminates in the
cannot control descent in all surface control and a tone sounds when
conditions and circumstances, such as the system is active.
ice or extremely steep grades. Hill
descent control is a driver assist system
and cannot substitute for good judgment SETTING THE HILL DESCENT
by the driver. Failure to do so may result SPEED
in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious
injury.
replace the parking brake. When you
replace the parking brake. When you
leave your vehicle, always apply the
leave your vehicle, always apply the
parking brake.
parking brake.
Note: The system does not function below control speed in low traction conditions
3 mph (5 km/h). or extremely steep slopes. The system
Hill descent control allows the driver to set is designed to be an aid and does not
and maintain vehicle speed while relieve you of your responsibility to drive
descending steep slopes in various surface with due care and attention. Failure to
conditions. follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
The system can maintain vehicle speeds
on downhill slopes between 3–20 mph
To increase the descent speed, press the
(5–32 km/h). Above 20 mph (32 km/h),
accelerator pedal until you reach the speed
the system remains on but the descent
you prefer.
speed cannot be set or maintained.
To decrease the descent speed, press the
The system requires a cool down interval
brake pedal until you reach the speed you
after a period of sustained use. The
prefer.
amount of time that the system can
remain active before cooling varies with When you reach the speed you prefer,
conditions. The system provides a warning either by accelerating or decelerating,
in the message center and a tone sounds remove your feet from the pedals. The
when the system is about to disengage for system maintains the chosen vehicle
cooling. At this time, manually apply the speed.
brakes as needed to maintain descent
speed.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL
INDICATOR
Illuminates when you switch hill
descent control on.
224
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: Certain add-on devices installed

around the bumper or fascia may create
false alerts. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
WARNING: To help avoid personal brackets, bumper covers or any other device
injury, always use caution when in that may block the normal detection zone
reverse (R) and when using the sensing of the system. Remove the add-on device
system. to prevent false alerts.
WARNING: The system may not Note: When you connect a trailer to your
detect objects with surfaces that absorb vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
reflection. Always drive with due care trailer and therefore provide an alert. Disable
and attention. Failure to take care may the rear parking aid when you connect a
result in a crash. trailer to prevent the alert.
The sensing system warns the driver of
WARNING: Traffic control systems, obstacles within a certain range of your
inclement weather, air brakes, external vehicle. The system turns on automatically
motors and fans may affect the correct whenever you switch the ignition on.
operation of the sensing system. This
may cause reduced performance or false You can switch the system off through the
alerts. touchscreen, information display or from
the pop-up message that appears once
WARNING: The system may not you shift the transmission into reverse (R).
detect small or moving objects, If your vehicle has a parking aid button, you
particularly those close to the ground. can switch the system off by pressing the
button.
Note: If your vehicle has MyKey™, the If a fault is present in the system, a warning
sensing system cannot be switched off message appears in the information
when a MyKey™ is present. See Principle display. See Information Messages
of Operation (page 64). (page 119).
Note: Keep the sensors on the bumper or
fascia free from snow, ice and large REAR PARKING AID
accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are
covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects. WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to reflection. Always drive with due care
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned and attention. Failure to take care may
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered result in a crash.
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alerts. WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
225
Parking Aids
WARNING: To help avoid personal

injury, always use caution when in
reverse (R) and when using the sensing
system.
WARNING: The parking aid system

can only assist you to detect objects
when your vehicle is moving at parking
speeds. To help avoid personal injury you
must take care when using the parking
aid system.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice

and large accumulations of dirt. E130178
Note: Do not cover up the sensors. The sensor coverage area is up to 70 in

Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp (180 cm) from the rear bumper.
objects. If the system detects a fault, a warning
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage message appears in the information
leaving the sensors misaligned, this may display.
cause inaccurate measurements or false The system detects large objects when
alerts. you shift into reverse (R) and any of the
Note: Some accessories, for example large following occur:
trailer hitches or bike or surfboard racks, can • Your vehicle is moving backward at low
cause reduced performance or false alerts. speed.
The sensors are on the rear bumper. • Your vehicle is stationary, but an object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
The sensors are active when the
at low speed.
transmission is in reverse (R) and the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). • Your vehicle is moving backward at low
When the parking aid system sounds a speed and an object is moving toward
tone, the audio system may reduce the set your vehicle, for example another
volume. vehicle, at low speed.
A warning tone sounds when your vehicle If your vehicle remains stationary for two
approaches an object. As your vehicle seconds, the audible warning turns off. If
moves closer to an object, the rate of the your vehicle moves backward, the tone
tone increases. The warning tone sounds again.
continuously sounds when an object is 12 in Note: If the detected object is 12 in (30 cm)
(30 cm) or less from the center of the rear or less from the rear bumper, the audible
bumper. warning does not turn off.
Note: There is a decreased coverage area
at the outer corners.
226
Parking Aids
Object Distance Indicator (If Equipped) FRONT PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED)

detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.

detect small or moving objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: To help avoid personal

injury, always use caution when in
reverse (R) and when using the sensing
system.

E190459 can only assist you to detect objects
The system provides object distance speeds. To help avoid personal injury you
indication through the information display. must take care when using the parking
aid system.
• As the distance to the object
decreases, the indicator blocks
illuminate and move toward the vehicle Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
icon. and large accumulations of dirt.
• If the system does not detect an object, Note: Do not cover up the sensors.
the distance indicator blocks are gray. Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
When you shift into reverse (R), the system objects.
provides audible warnings and visual Note: If your vehicle sustains damage
indication when your vehicle is moving, and leaving the sensors misaligned, this may
the detected object is moving toward your cause inaccurate measurements or false
vehicle. When you stop your vehicle, the alerts.
audible warnings stop after two seconds.
Visual indication remains on when the Note: Some accessories, for example large
transmission is in reverse (R). trailer hitches or bike or surfboard racks can
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
The sensors are on the front bumper.
The sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P). When the parking aid system
sounds a tone, the audio system may
reduce the set volume.
227
Parking Aids
A warning tone sounds when your vehicle Object Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
approaches an object. As your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the rate of the
tone increases. The warning tone
continuously sounds when an object is 12 in
(30 cm) or less from the front bumper.
Note: There is a decreased coverage area
at the outer corners.
The system turns off when the vehicle
speed reaches 5 mph (8 km/h).
E190459
The system provides object distance

E187330 indication through the information display.
The sensor coverage area is up to 28 in • As the distance to the object

(70 cm) from the center of the bumper. decreases, the indicator blocks
illuminate and move toward the vehicle
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the icon.
system detects objects when your vehicle
• If there is no object detected, the
is moving at low speed or an object is
distance indicator blocks are gray.
moving toward your vehicle, for example
another vehicle at low speed. When you When you shift into any forward gear, the
stop your vehicle, the audible warning turns system provides audible warnings and
off after two seconds. visual indication when your vehicle is
moving at a speed of approximately 5 mph
If the transmission is in any forward gear,
(8 km/h) or below and the system detects
the system provides audible warnings
an object within the detection zone. When
when your vehicle is moving and an object
you stop your vehicle, the audible warnings
is within the detection area. When you stop
stop after two seconds and visual
your vehicle, the audible warning turns off
indication stops after four seconds.
after two seconds and the visual warning
turns off after four seconds. Note: If the detected object is 12 in (30 cm)
or less from your vehicle, visual indication
If the system detects a fault, a warning
remains on.
message appears in the information
display.
228
Parking Aids
When you shift into neutral (N), the system Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
only provides visual indication if your and large accumulations of dirt.
vehicle is moving at a speed of Note: Do not cover up the sensors.
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or below,
for example, your vehicle is moving on a Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
slope, and the system detects an object objects.
moving toward your vehicle. When you Note: If your vehicle sustains damage
stop your vehicle, visual indication stops leaving the sensors misaligned, this may
after four seconds. cause inaccurate measurements or false
alerts.
SIDE SENSING SYSTEM (IF The system may not function if:
EQUIPPED) • You switch the ignition on, off and back
on within a few seconds.
• Your vehicle remains stationary for over
WARNING: The system may not two minutes.
detect objects with surfaces that absorb • The anti-lock brake system activates.
reflection. Always drive with due care • The traction control system activates.
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash. Note: If you switch traction control off, the
side sensing system also turns off.
WARNING: The system may not Note: Some accessories, for example large
detect small or moving objects, trailer hitches or bike or surfboard racks can
particularly those close to the ground. cause reduced performance or false alerts.
WARNING: To help avoid personal To reinitialize the system, you may have to
injury, always use caution when in drive your vehicle approximately 10 ft
reverse (R) and when using the sensing (3 m).
system.

can only assist you to detect objects
speeds. To help avoid personal injury you
must take care when using the parking
aid system.
The system uses the front and rear

outermost parking aid sensors to detect
objects that are near to the sides of your
vehicle. The system displays them on a
virtual map in the information display as
your vehicle moves past them.
E190458
The sensors are on the front and rear
bumpers. The sensor coverage area is up to 24 in
(60 cm) from the side of your vehicle.
229
Parking Aids
When the system detects an object within When you shift into reverse (R), the system
the coverage area and the driving path of provides audible warnings and a visual
your vehicle, an audible warning sounds. indication when detected objects are
As your vehicle moves closer to the object, within 24 in (60 cm) and are inside the
the rate of the tone increases. driving path of your vehicle. When you stop
your vehicle, the audible warnings turn off
Note: The system does not detect an object
after two seconds.
that is moving toward the side of your
vehicle, for example another vehicle moving When you shift into any forward gear, the
at low speed, if it does not pass a front or system provides audible warnings and a
rear sensor. visual indication when your vehicle is
moving at a speed of approximately 5 mph
Object Distance Indicator (If Equipped) (8 km/h) or below and the system detects
an object within the detection zone. When
you stop your vehicle, the audible warnings
turn off after two seconds and the visual
indication turns off after four seconds.
When you shift into neutral (N), the system
only provides a visual indication if your
vehicle is moving at a speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or below.
For example, your vehicle is moving on a
slope, and the system detects an object
moving toward your vehicle. When you
stop your vehicle, the visual indication
turns off after four seconds.
If the system is not available, the side
distance indicator blocks do not display.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (IF

E190459 EQUIPPED)
The system provides object distance

indication through the information display.
WARNING: You must remain in
• As the distance to the object
your vehicle when the system turns on.
decreases, the indicator blocks
At all times, you are responsible for
illuminate and move toward the vehicle
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
icon.
system and intervening, if required.
• If there is no object detected, the Failure to take care may result in the loss
distance indicator blocks are gray. of control of your vehicle, serious
WARNING: The sensors may not

detect objects in heavy rain or other
conditions that cause interference.
230
Parking Aids
Note: The system detects other vehicles

WARNING: You are responsible for and curbs to find a parking space.
controlling your vehicle at all times. The Note: The system searches for parallel
system is designed to be an aid and does parking spaces on the passenger side. Press
not relieve you of your responsibility to the active park assist button again to make
drive with due care and attention. Failure the system search for perpendicular spaces.
2. Use the direction indicator lever to
the loss of control of your vehicle,
search for a parking space on the driver
or passenger side of your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not use the system 3. Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft
with accessories that extend beyond the (1 m) away from and parallel to the
front or rear of your vehicle, for example other parked vehicles when searching
a trailer hitch, bike rack or side mirror for a parking space.
extensions such as telescoping mirrors Note: A tone sounds and a message
or towing mirrors. The system is not able appears in the information display when
to make corrections for the additional active park assist finds a suitable parking
length of the accessories. space.
The system assists parking into and out of 4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
parking spaces. It uses sensors to detect 5. Release the steering wheel and shift
parking spaces. The system then steers, into neutral (N).
accelerates, brakes and shifts gear as 6. Press and hold the active park assist
required to maneuver into or out of a button.
parking space.
7. Release the brake pedal to allow the
Using Active Park Assist vehicle to park.
Note: When parallel parking between
The active park assist button is
objects, the system parks closer to the
near the transmission selector
E146186 object in front of your vehicle to allow easier
on the center console.
access to your luggage compartment.
Press the active park assist button to bring Note: When perpendicular parking, the
up full screen notifications. Press either the system aligns the front end of your vehicle
active park assist button or the soft keys with the object next to it.
on the display screen to switch between
Note: When perpendicular parking, if the
Parallel Park In, Perpendicular Park In or
system detects only one object, it allows
Parallel Park Out parking modes.
enough distance to open the door on either
Driving into a Parking Space side.
Note: You can slow down your vehicle at
Note: When parking perpendicularly, the
any time by pressing the brake pedal.
system backs your vehicle into parking
spaces. Note: When parking is complete the vehicle
shifts into park (P).
1. Press the active park assist button.
Note: The system does not recognize
parking space lines and centers your vehicle
between objects.
231
Parking Aids
Leaving a Parking Space Note: After the system drives your vehicle
to a position where you can exit the parking
The system assists leaving only parallel space in a forward movement, a message
parking spaces. appears instructing you to take full control
1. Press the active park assist button. of your vehicle.
2. Use the direction indicator lever to Canceling Active Park Assist
choose the direction to leave.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal. To cancel parking assistance at any time,
shift out of neutral (N).
4. Release the steering wheel and shift
into neutral (N). Note: If you turn the steering wheel or open
the driver door the parking assistance also
5. Release the parking brake. cancels.
6. Press and hold the active park assist
button. Pausing Active Park Assist
7. Release the brake pedal to allow the To pause parking assistance at any time,
vehicle to move. release the active park assist button.
Note: You can slow down your vehicle at The vehicle stops moving until you press
any time by pressing the brake pedal. and hold the active park assist button
again.
Note: If you open the passenger or rear
doors the parking assistance also pauses.
Active Park Assist Troubleshooting
Symptom Possible Cause
The system does not correctly The system is unable to detect a vehicle, curb or object
operate. to park next to, or in-between. This could occur because
of sensors not operating correctly, not enough room
for your vehicle, or the traction control is off.
The system does not search for You may have switched traction control off.
a parking space.
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must
be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space.
The system does not offer a There could be blockage on the sensors. For example,
parking space. snow, ice or large accumulations of dirt. Blocked
sensors can affect how the system functions.
The sensors in the front or rear bumper could be
damaged.
There is not enough room in the parking space for your
vehicle to safely park.
232
Parking Aids
Symptom Possible Cause
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on

the opposite side of the parking space.
The parking space is more than 5 ft (1.5 m) or less than
2 ft (0.5 m) away.
The vehicle speed is greater than 22 mph (35 km/h)
for parallel parking or greater than 19 mph (30 km/h)
for perpendicular parking.
You recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After
you reconnect the battery you must drive your vehicle
on a straight road for a short period of time.
The system does not correctly An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the
position your vehicle in a system from correctly aligning your vehicle.
parking space.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be
correctly parked.
Your vehicle stopped too far past the parking space.
The tires may not be correctly installed or maintained.
For example, not inflated correctly, improper size, or of
different sizes.
A repair or alteration changes the detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example,
a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed.
The parking space length or position of parked objects
changes after your vehicle passes the space.
You are using a spare tire or a tire more significantly
worn than the other tires.
The temperature around your vehicle quickly changes.
For example, driving from a heated garage into cold
outside temperature, or after leaving a car wash.
233
Parking Aids
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNING: The rear view camera

system is a reverse aid supplement
device that still requires the driver to use
it in conjunction with the interior and
exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close

to either corner of the bumper or under
the bumper, might not be seen on the E253742
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system. The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.
WARNING: Reverse your vehicle
slowly. Failure to follow this instruction
Using the Rear View Camera
could result in the loss of control of your
System
vehicle, personal injury or death. The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
WARNING: Use caution when the the transmission in reverse (R).
rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo
door is ajar, the camera will be out of Note: The reverse sensing system is not
position and the video image may be effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
incorrect. All guidelines disappear when and may not detect certain angular or
the rear cargo door is ajar. Failure to moving objects.
follow this instruction could result in The system uses three types of guides to
personal injury. help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines (if equipped): Show
WARNING: Use caution when
the intended path of your vehicle when
turning camera features on or off when
reversing.
the transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving. • Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
Note: Some vehicles may not come in a straight line. This can be helpful
equipped with guidelines. when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
The rear view camera system provides a object behind you.
video image of the area behind your
vehicle. • Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
During operation, lines appear in the example, a trailer).
display which represent your vehicle’s path
and proximity to objects behind your Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
vehicle. and the luggage compartment door or
liftgate is open, no rear view camera
features will display.
234
Parking Aids
Note: When towing, the camera only sees

what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in A B C D E
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines
may disappear when you connect the trailer
tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner. You can also use the rear
washer to clean the camera. See Rear
Window Wiper and Washers (page
85).
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
Camera System Settings F

The rear view camera system settings can E142436
be accessed through the touchscreen. See
Settings (page 458). A Active guidelines (If equipped)
Camera Guidelines B Centerline
C Fixed guideline: Green zone
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R). D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone
E Fixed guideline: Red zone
F Rear bumper
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed

guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines
toward an intended path. If you change
the steering wheel position while reversing,
your vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
235
Parking Aids
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and Manual Zoom

out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not
display when the steering wheel position WARNING: When manual zoom is
is straight. on, the full area behind your vehicle may
Always use caution while reversing. not show. Be aware of your surroundings
Objects in the red zone are closest to your when using the manual zoom feature.
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to Note: Manual zoom is only available when
your vehicle as they move from the green the transmission is in reverse (R).
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to the centerline is shown.
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of the vehicle. Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If symbol in the camera screen to change the
Equipped)
view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Rear Camera Delay

Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The default setting for the rear camera
delay is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until:
• Your vehicle speed reaches
E190459 approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
The system will provide an image of your
vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones
will highlight green, yellow and red when
the parking aid sensors detect an object in
the coverage area.
236
Parking Aids
360 DEGREE CAMERA (IF • Allows you to see a top-down view of

the area outside your vehicle, including
EQUIPPED) the blind spots.
• Provides you with visibility around your
vehicle in parking maneuvers such as:
WARNING: The 360 degree • Centering in a parking space.
camera system still requires the driver
to use it in conjunction with looking out • Obstacles near the vehicle.
of the windows, and checking the interior • Parallel parking.
and exterior mirrors for maximum The front camera enable button
coverage. is near the display screen and
E205884 turns on the front camera when
WARNING: Objects that are close your vehicle is not in reverse (R).
to either corner of the bumper or under
the bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the Using the System
camera system. Note: The 360 degree camera system turns
off when your vehicle is in motion at low
WARNING: Use caution when speed, except when in reverse (R).
turning camera features on or off when
the transmission is not in park (P). Make The front and rear cameras have multiple
sure your vehicle is not moving. screens which consist of normal view with
360, normal view, and split view. When in
WARNING: You are responsible for park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D), only the
controlling your vehicle at all times. The front images display when you press the
system is designed to be an aid and does button. When in reverse (R), only the rear
not relieve you of your responsibility to images display.
drive with due care and attention. Failure Press to access the different
to follow this instruction could result in camera views.
the loss of control of your vehicle, E224483
personal injury or death. Normal + 360 view: Contains
the normal camera view next to
Note: Use caution using the 360 view when E224783
a 360 degree camera view.
any of the doors are ajar. If a door is ajar, the
camera becomes out of position and the Normal view: Provides an
video image could be incorrect. image of what is directly in front
E224784
The 360 degree camera system consists or behind your vehicle.
of front, side and rear cameras. The Split view: Provides an
system: extended view of what is in front
E224785
• Allows you to see what is directly in or behind your vehicle.
front or behind your vehicle.
Zooms in on the image.
• Provides cross traffic view in front and
behind your vehicle. E224485
237
Parking Aids
Keep Out Zone The front video camera is on the grille and
provides a video image of the area in front
of your vehicle. To use the front video
camera system, place the transmission in
any gear except reverse (R). An image
displays once you press the front camera
enable button. The image on the screen
may vary according to your vehicle's
orientation or road condition.
Side Camera
E225016
The yellow dotted lines running parallel to

your vehicle represent the keep out zone.
Front Camera
WARNING: The front camera

system still requires the driver to use it
in conjunction with looking out of your E231401
vehicle.
The side view camera, in the outside mirror,
Note: The system turns off the front video provides a video image of the area on the
image when your vehicle is in motion at low sides of your vehicle as part of the front
speeds, except when in reverse (R). 360 + normal view and rear 360 + normal
view. It aids you while parking your vehicle
either forward or backward.
E188845
238
Cruise Control
WHAT IS CRUISE CONTROL SETTING THE CRUISE

CONTROL SPEED
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING: When you are going
Requirements downhill, your vehicle speed could
increase above the set speed. The
Use cruise control when the vehicle speed system does not apply the brakes.
is greater than 20 mph (30 km/h).
Drive to the speed you prefer.
SWITCHING CRUISE CONTROL Press the toggle button upward
ON AND OFF E246884 or downward to set the current
speed.
E246885
WARNING: Do not use cruise
control on winding roads, in heavy traffic Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
or when the road surface is slippery. This
could result in loss of vehicle control, Note: The indicator changes color in the
serious injury or death. information display.
The cruise controls are on the steering Changing the Set Speed
wheel. Press and release the toggle
E246884 button upward to increase the
Switching Cruise Control On set speed in small increments.
Press the button to put the
system in standby mode. Press and hold the toggle button upward
E71340 to accelerate. Release the button when
you have reached your preferred speed.
Switching Cruise Control Off Press and release the toggle
Press the button when in button downward to decrease
E246885
standby mode or switch the the set speed in small

E71340 ignition off. increments.
Note: When you switch cruise control off Press and hold the toggle button
the set speed clears. downward to decelerate. Release the
button when you have reached your
preferred speed.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed does not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
239
Cruise Control
CANCELING THE SET SPEED

Press the button, or tap the
brake pedal to cancel the set
E280804
speed.
Note: The system remembers the set
speed.
Note: The system cancels if the vehicle
speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under
the set speed when driving uphill.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED

Press the button.
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS
system on.
E71340
240
HOW DOES ADAPTIVE CRUISE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL

CONTROL WITH STOP AND GO PRECAUTIONS - VEHICLES
WORK WITH: LANE CENTERING
Adaptive cruise control with stop and go Adaptive cruise control precautions apply
uses radar and camera sensors to adjust to lane centering unless stated otherwise
the speed of your vehicle to maintain a set or contradicted by a lane centering
gap from the vehicle in front of you in the precaution. See Adaptive Cruise Control
same lane while following it to a complete Precautions (page 241).
stop. You can also engage the system to
follow a vehicle in front of you and adjust
set speed while stopped. WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
WHAT IS ADAPTIVE CRUISE control of your vehicle, personal injury or
CONTROL WITH LANE death.
CENTERING WARNING: Do not use the system
if any changes or modifications to the
Adaptive cruise control with lane centering
steering wheel have been made. Any
uses radar and camera sensors to help
changes or modifications to the steering
keep your vehicle in the lane by applying
wheel could affect the functionality or
continuous assistance steering torque
performance of the system. Failure to
input toward the lane center on highways.
follow this instruction could result in the
Note: The adaptive cruise control gap loss of control of your vehicle, personal
setting operates normally. injury or death.
WHAT IS INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL PRECAUTIONS - VEHICLES
Intelligent adaptive cruise control WITH: STOP AND GO
combines speed sign recognition with
adaptive cruise control to adjust the cruise
set speed to the speed limit detected by WARNING: You are responsible for
the speed sign recognition system. For controlling your vehicle at all times. The
example, if the speed sign recognition system is designed to be an aid and does
system detects a 50 mph (80 km/h) not relieve you of your responsibility to
speed limit, the cruise set speed is updated drive with due care and attention. Failure
to 50 mph (80 km/h) +/- the driver's to follow this instruction could result in
selected speed offset. the loss of control of your vehicle,
Note: The adaptive cruise control gap personal injury or death.
setting operates normally.
241
When Following a Vehicle

WARNING: Pay close attention to
changing road conditions such as
entering or leaving a highway, on roads WARNING: When following a
with intersections or roundabouts, roads vehicle that is braking, your vehicle does
without visible lanes of travel, roads that not always decelerate quickly enough to
are winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep avoid a crash without driver intervention.
slopes. Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
WARNING: The system does not personal injury or death.
control speed in low traction conditions
or extremely steep slopes. The system Hilly Condition Usage
is designed to be an aid and does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive You should select a lower gear when the
with due care and attention. Failure to system is active in situations such as
follow this instruction could result in prolonged downhill driving on steep
personal injury. grades, for example in mountainous areas.
The system needs additional engine
WARNING: The system is not a braking in these situations to reduce the
crash warning or avoidance system. load on the vehicle’s regular brake system
to prevent it from overheating.
WARNING: Do not use the system Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
when towing a trailer that has system shuts down if it applies brakes for
aftermarket electronic trailer brake an extended period of time. This allows the
controls. Failure to follow this instruction brakes to cool. The system functions
could result in the loss of control of your normally again after the brakes cool.
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use tire sizes ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL

other than those recommended because LIMITATIONS - VEHICLES
this can affect the normal operation of
the system. Failure to do so may result WITH: LANE CENTERING
in a loss of vehicle control, which could
result in serious injury. Adaptive cruise control limitations apply
to lane centering unless stated otherwise
WARNING: Do not use the system or contradicted by a lane centering
with a snow plow blade installed. limitation. See Adaptive Cruise Control
Limitations (page 243).
WARNING: Do not use the system The system may not correctly operate in
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy any of the following conditions:
rain, spray or snow. • The lane is too narrow or wide.
• The system does not detect at least
one lane marking or when lanes merge
or split.
• Limited steering torque input is applied.
242
• Areas under construction or new

infrastructure. WARNING: The system only warns
• When modifications to the steering of vehicles detected by the radar sensor.
system have been made. In some cases there may be no warning
• When using a spare tire. or a delayed warning. Apply the brakes
when necessary. Failure to follow this
Note: The driving assistance torque is instruction could result in personal injury
limited and may not be sufficient for all or death.
driving situations such as driving through
tight curves or driving through curves at high WARNING: The system may not
speeds. detect stationary or slow moving
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
may deviate from the center line.
detect pedestrians or objects in the road.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
LIMITATIONS - VEHICLES WARNING: The system does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the same
WITH: STOP AND GO lane.
Sensor Limitations WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
WARNING: On rare occasions, obstruction.
detection issues can occur due to the
road infrastructures, for example bridges, WARNING: The sensor may
tunnels and safety barriers. In these incorrectly track lane markings as other
cases, the system may brake late or structures or objects. This can result in
unexpectedly. At all times, you are a false or missed warning.
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening,
if required.
WARNING: If the system

malfunctions, have your vehicle checked
WARNING: Large contrasts in

outside lighting can limit sensor
performance.
E307893
The camera is mounted on the windshield

behind the interior mirror.
243
Detection issues can occur:
E307892
The radar sensor is in the lower grille.

Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
behind a fascia panel.
Note: Keep the front of your vehicle free of
dirt, metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
protectors, aftermarket lights, additional
paint or plastic coatings could also degrade
sensor performance.
A message displays if something obstructs
the camera or the sensor. When something
blocks the sensor, the system cannot
detect a vehicle ahead and does not
function. See Adaptive Cruise Control E71621
– Information Messages (page 250). A When driving on a different line

The radar sensor has a limited field of view. than the vehicle in front.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect B With vehicles that edge into your
a vehicle later than expected in some lane. The system can only detect
situations. The lead vehicle image does these vehicles once they move
not illuminate if the system does not fully into your lane.
detect a vehicle in front of you.
C There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
In these cases, the system may brake late

or unexpectedly.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone may change. This could
cause missed or false vehicle detection.
244
Optimal system performance requires a The system may cancel and set the parking
clear view of the road by the brake if:
windshield-mounted camera. • You unbuckle the seatbelt and open
Optimal performance may not occur if: the driver door after you stop your
vehicle.
• The camera is blocked.
• Your vehicle is at a stop continuously
• There is poor visibility or lighting for more than three minutes.
conditions.
The system may turn off or prevent
• There are bad weather conditions.
activating when requested if:
• The vehicle has a blocked sensor.
SWITCHING ADAPTIVE
• The brake temperature is too high.
CRUISE CONTROL ON AND OFF • There is a failure in the system or a
related system.
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 82).
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On CRUISE CONTROL SPEED
Press the button to set the Drive to the speed you prefer.
system in standby mode. Press the toggle button upward
E144529
E246884 or downward to set the current
The indicator, current gap setting and set speed.
speed appear in the information display.
E246885
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control

Off Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Press the button when the The indicator, current gap setting and set
system is in standby mode, or speed appear in the information display.
E144529
switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
Automatic Cancellation or
Deactivation
The system may cancel if:
• The tires lose traction.
E255686
• You apply the parking brake.
A vehicle image illuminates if there is a
vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
245
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed The system may apply the brakes to slow
from a Complete Stop the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed continuously displays in the
Press the toggle button upward information display when the system is
E246884 or downward while keeping the active.
brake pedal fully pressed.
E246885
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL GAP
The set speed adjusts to 20 mph
(30 km/h). Press the button to cycle
The indicator, current gap setting and set through the four gap settings.
speed appear in the information display.
Note: The system activates from a
complete stop only when it detects a lead
vehicle in close proximity.
Manually Changing the Set Speed

Press and release the toggle
E246884 button upward to increase the
set speed in small increments. E255686
Press and hold the toggle button upward The selected gap appears in the
to increase the set speed in large instrument cluster display as shown by the
increments. Release the button when the bars in the image.
set speed is equal to your desired speed. Note: The gap setting is time dependent
Press and release the toggle and therefore, the distance adjusts with your
E246885 button downward to decrease vehicle speed.
the set speed in small Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
increments. appropriate to the driving conditions.
Press and hold the toggle button Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
downward to decrease the set speed in
large increments. Release the button when Graphic Gap Distance Dynamic
the set speed is equal to your desired Display, Behavior
speed. Bars Indic-
ated
You can also press the accelerator or brake
Between
pedal until you reach the speed you prefer.
Vehicles
Press the toggle button upward or
downward to select the current speed as 1 Closest. Sport.
the set speed.
2 Close. Normal.
3 Medium. Normal.
4 Far. Comfort.
246
Each time you switch the system on, it RESUMING THE SET SPEED
selects the last chosen gap setting.
Press the button.
Following a Vehicle
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in Your vehicle speed returns to the
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts previously set speed and gap setting. The
to maintain the gap setting. set speed displays continuously in the
Note: When you are following a vehicle and information display when the system is
you switch on a turn signal lamp, adaptive active.
cruise control may provide a small, Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
temporary acceleration to help you pass. the set speed and intend to return to it.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
Resuming the Set Speed from a
Complete Stop
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed. If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a
• The vehicle in front of you moves out complete stop and remains stationary for
of the lane you are in. less than three seconds, your vehicle
accelerates from a stationary position to
• You set a new gap distance. follow the vehicle ahead.
The system applies the brakes to slow If your vehicle follows a vehicle
down your vehicle to maintain a safe gap to a complete stop and remains
distance from the vehicle in front of you. stationary for more than three
The system only applies limited braking. seconds, press and release the button or
You can override the system by applying press the accelerator pedal to follow the
the brakes. vehicle ahead.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
OVERRIDING THE SET SPEED
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds, a message appears in the
instrument cluster display and an indicator WARNING: If you override the
flashes when the system continues to system by pressing the accelerator
brake. Take immediate action. pedal, it does not automatically apply
the brakes to maintain a gap from any
vehicle ahead.
CANCELING THE SET SPEED
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
Press the button or tap the brake override the set speed and gap distance.
pedal.
E280804 Use the accelerator pedal to intentionally
exceed the set speed limit.
The set speed does not erase.
247
When you override the system, the green ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
indicator illuminates and the vehicle icon
does not appear in the instrument cluster INDICATORS - VEHICLES
display. WITH: LANE CENTERING
The system resumes operation when you
Illuminates when you switch
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
lane centering on. The color of
speed decreases to the set speed, or a E262175 the indicator changes to indicate
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
the system status.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL Gray indicates the system is on but

inactive.
INDICATORS - VEHICLES
WITH: INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE Green indicates the system is active and
applying assistance steering torque input
CRUISE CONTROL to keep your vehicle in the center of the
lane.
Amber with an audible tone and then gray
indicates a system auto-cancellation.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL

INDICATORS - VEHICLES
WITH: STOP AND GO
E292490
Illuminates when you switch
A bracket appears around the set speed adaptive cruise control on. The
E144529
and the detected speed limit sign in the color of the indicator changes to
information display. indicate the system status.
System Warnings White indicates the system is on but
inactive.
If the set speed is increased beyond the
speed limit or speed limit plus a positive Green indicates that you set the speed and
tolerance value, the set speed indicator the system is active.
flashes.
The warning does not occur if: SWITCHING FROM ADAPTIVE
• You override the set speed using the CRUISE CONTROL TO CRUISE
accelerator pedal.
CONTROL
• The vehicle speed exceeds the set
speed due to being on a downhill slope.
WARNING: Normal cruise control
will not brake when your vehicle is
approaching slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have selected
and apply the brakes when necessary.
248
Use the touchscreen to select the Note: If it does not detect valid lane
following: markings, the system stays inactive until
valid markings are available.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Driver Assist. You can override the system at any time
by steering your vehicle.
3. Select Cruise Control.
4. Select Normal. System Alerts and Automatic
Cancellation
The cruise control indicator
replaces the adaptive cruise You must keep your hands on the steering
E71340 control indicator if you select wheel at all times.
normal cruise control. The gap setting
does not display, and the system does not When the system is active and detects no
respond to lead vehicles. Automatic steering activity for a certain period of time,
braking remains active to maintain set the system alerts you to put your hands on
speed. The system remembers the last the steering wheel. If you do not react to
setting when you start your vehicle. the warnings the system cancels and slows
your vehicle down to idle speeds while
maintaining steering control.
SWITCHING LANE CENTERING The system also alerts you if your vehicle
ON AND OFF crosses lane markings without detected
steering activity.
The cruise controls are on the steering Note: The system may detect a light grip
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 81). or touch on the steering wheel as hands-off
Press the button. driving.
When an external condition cancels the
E262175 system, for example, no lane markings
The indicator appears in the information available, a tone sounds and a message
display. When the system is on, the color appears in the information display.
of the indicator changes to indicate the If your vehicle starts to slow
system status. See Adaptive Cruise down, you must provide steering
Control Indicators (page 248). input to the wheel and press and
Note: Adaptive cruise control must be on release the button to regain full system
before you can switch lane centering on. performance.
Activating Lane Centering Automatic cancellation can also occur if:

• The lane becomes too wide or too
The system only activates when all of the narrow.
following occur:
• The system cannot detect valid lane
• You have adaptive cruise control with markings.
stop-and-go on.
• Lane markings are crossed.
• Your hands are on the steering wheel.
Note: The system disables until the next
• The system detects both lane key cycle if your vehicle slows down due to
markings. driver inactivity twice within a key cycle.
249
SWITCHING INTELLIGENT You can override the set speed at any time.
You may need to override or cancel the
MODE ON AND OFF system in certain situations such as
inclement weather or if an incorrect speed
is set.
WARNING: You are responsible for Note: The system may not detect and read
controlling your vehicle at all times. The speed limit signs with conditional
system is designed to be an aid and does information, for example, when a sign is
not relieve you of your responsibility to flashing, during specific time ranges, or
drive with due care and attention. Failure when children are present.
the loss of control of your vehicle, Note: Under certain conditions, the system
personal injury or death. may not adjust the vehicle speed until after
your vehicle passes the speed limit sign.
2. Press Driver Assistance. ADJUSTING THE SET SPEED
3. Press Cruise Control. TOLERANCE
4. Press Intelligent.
You can set a permanent speed tolerance
Changing the Set Speed with that is above or below the detected speed
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control limit.
When intelligent mode is on, the system 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
adjusts the set speed to the speed limit 2. Press Driver Assistance.
detected by the camera and the speed 3. Press Cruise Control.
limit information provided by the
navigation system. 4. Press Intelligent.
Note: The set speed adjusts when the 5. Press Tolerance.
system detects a different maximum speed 6. Use + and - to set the tolerance.
limit. Note: You cannot set the tolerance more
Note: The speed limit information provided than 20 mph (30 km/h) above or below the
by the navigation map data may be recognized speed.
inaccurate or out of date. See Navigation
(page 449). ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
Note: The system alerts you if the set speed – TROUBLESHOOTING
increases beyond the speed limit. See
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators (page
248). ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL –
INFORMATION MESSAGES -
If the system does not detect a speed limit,
VEHICLES WITH: LANE
the vehicle speed remains at the current
CENTERING
set speed.
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all
messages display or are available.
250
Note: The system could abbreviate or

shorten certain messages depending upon
which cluster type you have.
Message Action
Keep Hands on Steering Return your hands to the steering wheel and provide steering
Wheel input to cancel the message.
Lane Centering Assist To reset the feature when the vehicle is stationary, return the
Not Available gear selector to park and turn the vehicle off. Restart the
vehicle with your foot on the brake pedal.
Resume Control You must immediately take full control of the vehicle.
Press Accelerator Pedal Resume adaptive cruise control with lane centering by
to Resume applying foot pressure on the accelerator pedal. You can also
resume the feature by pressing the resume button on the
steering wheel.
251
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL – Note: Depending on your vehicle options

INFORMATION MESSAGES - and instrument cluster type, not all
VEHICLES WITH: INTELLIGENT messages display or are available.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL Note: Certain messages may be
abbreviated or shortened depending upon
Message Action
Intelligent Cruise Control Conditions exist preventing the system from being available.
Speed Sign Recognition
Not Available
252
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL – Note: Depending on your vehicle options

INFORMATION MESSAGES - and instrument cluster type, not all
VEHICLES WITH: STOP AND GO messages display or are available.
Note: The system could abbreviate or
shorten certain messages depending upon
Message Action
Adaptive Cruise A malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging.

Malfunction
Front Sensor Not Aligned Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for
proper coverage and operation.
Adaptive Cruise Not Conditions exist preventing the system from being available.
Available
Adaptive Cruise Not You have a blocked radar because of poor radar visibility due
Available Sensor to inclement weather or ice, mud, or water in front of the radar.
Blocked See Manual You can typically clean the sensor to resolve this.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a
blockage warning with no actual block. This happens, for
example, when driving in sparse rural or desert environments.
A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you
restart your vehicle.
Normal Cruise Active You have selected normal cruise control. The system does
Adaptive Braking Off not brake or react to traffic.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver Displays when the adaptive cruise control is going to cancel
Resume Control and you must take control.
Adaptive Cruise Speed Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the
Too Low to Activate adaptive cruise control and there is no lead vehicle in range.
253
Driving Aids
DRIVER ALERT Note: If the camera is blocked or if the

windshield is damaged, the system may not
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION function.
Note: The system remembers the on or off
setting in the information display menu
WARNING: You are responsible for through ignition cycles.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
activates at speeds above 40 mph
not relieve you of your responsibility to
(64 km/h). When below the activation
drive with due care and attention. Failure
speed, the information display informs the
driver that the system is unavailable.
the loss of control of your vehicle,

function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: Take regular rest

breaks if you feel tired. Do not wait for
the system to warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles

may result in the system warning you
even if you are not feeling tired.
E249505
WARNING: In cold and severe The system automatically monitors your

weather conditions the system may not driving behavior using various inputs
function. Rain, snow and spray can all including the front camera sensor.
limit sensor performance.
If the system detects that your driving
WARNING: The system will not alertness is reduced below a certain
operate if the sensor cannot track the threshold, the system alerts you using a
road lane markings. chime and a message in the cluster display.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the USING DRIVER ALERT

immediate area surrounding the sensor, Switching the System On and Off
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible. Switch the system on or off using the
touchscreen. See Settings (page 458).
When active, the system monitors your
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
alertness level based upon your driving
with a suspension kit not approved by
behavior in relation to the lane markings,
us.
and other factors.
Note: Keep the windshield free from System Warnings
obstructions. For example, bird droppings,
insects and snow or ice. Note: The system does not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
254
Driving Aids
Note: If you receive a warning you should

consider resting, even if the current WARNING: The system will not
assessment is within the typical range. operate if the sensor cannot track the
The warning system has two stages. At road lane markings.
first, the system issues a temporary
warning that you need to take a rest. This WARNING: The sensor may
message only appears for a short time. If incorrectly track lane markings as other
the system detects further reduction in structures or objects. This can result in
driving alertness, it may issue another a false or missed warning.
warning that remains in the information
display for a longer time. You can press OK WARNING: The system may not
on the steering wheel control to clear the operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
warning. Keep the windshield free from
obstruction.
Resetting the System
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
You can reset the system by either:
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
• Switching the ignition off and on. have your vehicle checked as soon as
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening possible.
and closing the driver’s door.
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM with a suspension kit not approved by
us.
WARNING: You are responsible for Note: The system works above 40 mph
controlling your vehicle at all times. The (64 km/h).
system is designed to be an aid and does Note: The system works as long as the
not relieve you of your responsibility to camera can detect one lane marking.
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in Note: When you select aid or alert and aid
the loss of control of your vehicle, mode and the system detects no steering
personal injury or death. activity for a short period, the system alerts
you to put your hands on the steering wheel.
WARNING: Always drive with due The system may detect a light grip or
care and attention when using and touch on the steering wheel as hands off
operating the controls and features on driving.
your vehicle. Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked, or if the windshield is
WARNING: In cold and severe damaged or dirty.
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
WARNING: Large contrasts in

outside lighting can limit sensor
performance.
255
Driving Aids
E249505 E288067
When you switch the system on and it Press the button on the direction indicator
detects an unintentional drift out of your stalk to switch the system on or off.
lane is likely to occur, the system notifies
or assists you to stay in your lane through System Settings
the steering system and information
The system has optional setting menus
display. In Alert mode (if equipped), the
available. The system stores the last
system provides a warning by vibrating the
known selection for each of these settings.
steering wheel. In Aid mode, the system
You do not need to readjust your settings
provides steering assistance by gently
each time you switch the system on.
counter steering your vehicle back into the
lane. Mode: This setting allows you to select
which of the system features you can
When the system is functioning in the
enable.
combined Alert and Aid mode, the system
first provides steering assistance by gently
counter steering your vehicle back into the
lane, followed by a warning that vibrates
the steering wheel if the vehicle is still out
of the lane markings.
Switching the System On and Off

Note: The system is turned on
automatically at each ignition cycle.
E165515
Alert only (if equipped) – Provides a

steering wheel vibration when the system
detects an unintended lane departure.
256
Driving Aids
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate

general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration used for the
alert (if equipped) and alert + aid modes.
This setting does not affect the aid
mode.
• Low.
• Normal.
E165516 • High.
Aid only – Provides steering assistance System Display
toward the lane center when the system
detects an unintended lane departure.
E294544
E165517
A Alert
B Aid When you switch the system on, a graphic
of lane markings appears in the
Alert + Aid – Provides steering assistance information display.
toward the lane center. When you switch the system off, the lane
If your vehicle continues drifting out of the marking graphics do not display.
lane after the lane keeping aid corrects the While the system is on, the color of the
vehicle, the system provides a steering lane markings change to indicate the
wheel vibration. system status. These colors represent the
If your vehicle stays to one side of the lane following:
after the lane keeping aid corrects your Gray: Indicates that the system is
vehicle and then subsequently drifts out temporarily unable to provide a warning
of the lane again, the system only provides or intervention on the indicated side. This
an alert at the steering wheel. may be because:
257
Driving Aids
• Your vehicle is under the activation Note: If your vehicle has lane centering
speed. assist and the system is active, the walls
• The direction indicator is active. appear green instead of white.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver. Yellow: Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a lane
• The road has no or poor lane markings
keeping aid intervention.
in the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to Red: Indicates that the system is providing
detect the lane markings due to or has just provided a lane keeping alert
environmental, traffic or vehicle warning.
conditions. For example, significant sun The system can be temporarily suppressed
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or at any time by the following:
fog, following a large vehicle that is
• Quick braking.
blocking or shadowing the lane or poor
headlamp illumination. • Fast acceleration.
See Troubleshooting for additional • Using the direction indicator.
information. • Evasive steering maneuver.
White: Indicates that the system is • Driving too close to the lane markings.
available or ready to provide a warning or
intervention on the indicated side.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.

The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
258
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.

There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the
Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds are present.

There is a large road crown.
Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.
The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION

SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not use the blind

spot information system as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The
blind spot information system is not a E255695
replacement for careful driving.

conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due
259
Driving Aids
The design of the system is to detect When the system detects a vehicle, an
vehicles that enter the blind spot zone. The alert indicator illuminates in the exterior
detection area is on both sides of your mirror on the side the approaching vehicle
vehicle, extending rearward from the is coming from. If you switch the direction
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft indicator on for that side of your vehicle,
(4 m) beyond the rear bumper. The the alert indicator flashes.
detection area extends to approximately Note: The system may not alert you if a
59 ft (18 m) beyond the rear bumper when vehicle quickly passes through the detection
the vehicle speed is greater than 30 mph zone.
(48 km/h) to alert you of faster
approaching vehicles. Blocked Sensors
Note: The system does not prevent contact
with other vehicles. It does not detect
parked vehicles, pedestrians, animals or
other infrastructures.
Using the Blind Spot Information

System
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
E205199
The system turns on when all of the
following occur: The sensors are behind the rear bumper
• You start your vehicle. on both sides of your vehicle.
• You shift into drive (D). Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h). Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: The system does not operate in park
(P) or reverse (R). Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.
System Lights and Messages
Note: Bike and cargo racks could cause
false alerts due to obstruction of the sensor.
We recommend switching the feature off
when using a bike or cargo rack.
If the sensors become blocked, a message
could appear in the information display.
See Information Messages (page 119).
The alert indicators remain illuminated,
but the system does not alert you.
System Errors
E142442 lamp illuminates and a message displays.
See Information Messages (page 119).
260
Driving Aids
Switching the System On and Off You can switch the system off in the
information display. See General
To switch the system on or off, adjust the Information (page 115). If you switch the
setting. Depending on your vehicle options, blind spot information system off, blind
the setting could be in the following: spot information system with trailer tow
• Information display. See General turns off.
Setting up a Trailer
• Touchscreen. See Settings (page 458).
When you switch the system off, a warning You can setup a trailer through the
lamp illuminates and the alert indicators information display. See General
flash twice. Information (page 115).
Note: The system remembers the last

setting when you start your vehicle.
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.
Blind Spot Information System

with Trailer Tow (If Equipped)
E293526
A Trailer length.
B Trailer width.
C Trailer hitch ball.
Note: Measure the width of the trailer at
the front of the trailer, not the widest point.
The maximum width that the system can
support is 8.2 ft (2.5 m)(B).
Note: The trailer length is the distance
E293525 between the trailer hitch ball and the rear
of the trailer. The maximum length that the
The design of the system is to aid you in system can support is 33 ft (10 m)(A).
detecting vehicles that could enter the
detection area zone (A). The detection When setting up a trailer, a sequence of
area is on both sides of your vehicle and screens appear asking for trailer
trailer, extending rearward from the information:
exterior mirrors to the end of your trailer. • Select trailer screen: None, Trailer A,
When you attach and have setup a trailer, Trailer B or Trailer C.
the blind spot information system with
trailer tow becomes active when driving Note: You can select only one trailer on
forward above 6 mph (10 km/h). small information displays.
Select one of the trailers and press OK. The
menu goes to the next screen.
• Width less than 8.2 ft (2.5 m) and
length less than 33 ft (10 m)?
261
Driving Aids
Note: You do not need to enter an exact If you connect a trailer, a message appears
trailer width measurement. You only need indicating that you attached a trailer. If you
to confirm that the width of the trailer is have not selected a trailer previously,
8.2 ft (2.5 m) or less. another message appears requesting you
to select one of the trailers in the list or add
If no, the system turns off.
a new trailer. The blind spot information
If yes, the menu goes to the next screen. system with trailer tow does not function
• Enter length of trailer: without a trailer selected. If you do not
select a trailer, a message appears in the
Toggling up or down using the menu information display stating the system has
buttons increases or decreases the turned this feature off.This message might
measurement by 1 ft (0.3 m). Select a not appear until your vehicle speed reaches
length that is equal to or within 1 ft (0.3 m) 22 mph (35 km/h).
of the actual measured length. For
example, if the actual measured length is The blind spot information system with
25 ft (7.6 m), toggle the length in the menu trailer tow activates when driving forward
to 25 ft (8 m). When you enter the length for that particular trailer set up. If you cycle
of the trailer, this saves the system setup. the ignition, the blind spot information
system with trailer tow continues to
Note: When you connect a trailer, but do function using the last trailer you selected.
not setup a trailer in the blind spot
information system, the system turns off Trailer Considerations
and a warning appears in the information
display. The system works with a trailer with a front
width of 8.2 ft (2.5 m) or less, and a total
Note: If the trailer is a bike rack or cargo length from the trailer hitch ball to the rear
rack with electrical lighting, enter a length of the trailer of 33 ft (10 m) or less.
of 3 ft (1 m). Cross Traffic Alert remains on
for trailers with a length of 3 ft (1 m) or less. Some trailers could cause a slight change
in system performance:
Note: The system requires proper
• Wide box trailers, especially those
measurement and measurement entry to
wider than the towing vehicle, could
function as designed.
cause false alerts to occur when driving
System Operation next to infrastructure or near parked
cars. A false alert could also occur
If you select a trailer in the information while making a 90-degree turn or
display prior to connecting a trailer, the driving through a roundabout.
system loads that configuration and the • Wide trailers that have a total length
information display shows a message greater than 20 ft (6 m) could cause
when you connect the trailer. A second delayed alerts when a vehicle is
message appears stating cross traffic alert passing at high speeds.
is off, unless a trailer is set up with a length
of 3 ft (1 m). The blind spot information
system with trailer tow still functions
normally when driving forward.
262
Driving Aids
• Box trailers that have a width greater CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT

than 8.2 ft (2.5 m) could cause early
alerts when you pass a vehicle.
• Clam shell or V-Nose box trailers with WARNING: Do not use the cross
a width greater than 8.2 ft (2.5 m) traffic alert system as a replacement for
could cause delayed alerts when a using the interior and exterior mirrors or
vehicle traveling the same speed as looking over your shoulder before
your vehicle merges lanes. reversing out of a parking space. The
cross traffic alert system is not a
System Errors replacement for careful driving.
lamp illuminates and a message displays. WARNING: The system may not
See Information Messages (page 119). operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
Switching the System On and Off rain and spray. Always drive with due
You can switch the blind spot information may result in a crash.
system with trailer tow off by not selecting
a trailer in the information display. See The system alerts you of vehicles
General Information (page 115). In this approaching from the sides behind your
case, the system turns off as long as a vehicle when you shift into reverse (R).
trailer is attached to your vehicle. As soon
as you disconnect the trailer, the blind spot Using Cross Traffic Alert
information system becomes active.
The system detects vehicles that approach
When you switch the system off, a warning at a speed between 4 mph (6 km/h) and
lamp illuminates and the alert indicators 37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases
flash twice. when the sensors are partially, mostly or
Note: The system remembers the last fully obstructed. Slowly reversing helps
trailer setting when you start your vehicle. increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
You cannot switch off the blind spot
information system with trailer tow when The system turns on when you start the
using MyKey, but you can still change the engine and you shift into reverse (R). The
trailer settings. See MyKey™ (page 64). system turns off when you shift out of
reverse (R).
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.
263
Driving Aids
E142440
The sensor on the left-hand side is only

partially obstructed and zone coverage on
the right-hand side is maximized.
E142441
264
Driving Aids
Zone coverage also decreases when • The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph
parking at narrow angles. The sensor on (12 km/h).
the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and • You reverse out of an angled parking
zone coverage on that side is severely space.
reduced.
Cross Traffic Alert Behavior When
Cross Traffic Alert System Sensors Trailer is Attached
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with an
approved trailer tow module and tow bar,
the system turns off when you attach a
trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
E205199
Cross traffic alert remains on when you
The sensors are behind the rear bumper attach a trailer in vehicles that come with
on both sides of your vehicle. blind spot information system with trailer
tow under the following conditions:
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt. • You connect a trailer.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper • The trailer is a bike rack or cargo rack
stickers, repair compound or other objects. with a maximum length of 3 ft (1 m).
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system • You set the trailer length to 3 ft (1 m)
performance. in the information display.
Note: Bike and cargo racks could cause See Blind Spot Information System
false alerts due to obstruction of the sensor. (page 259).
We recommend switching the feature off
when using a bike or cargo rack.
Switching the System On and Off
If the sensors are blocked, a message may To switch the system on or off, adjust the
appear in the information display when setting. Depending on your vehicle options,
you shift into reverse (R). the setting could be in the following:
• Information display. See General
Cross Traffic Alert System Information (page 110).
Limitations
• Touchscreen. See Settings (page 458).
The system may not correctly operate Note: The system turns on every time you
when any of the following occur: switch the ignition on. To permanently
• The sensors are blocked. switch the system off, contact an authorized
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects dealer.
are obstructing the sensors.
• Vehicles approach at speeds less than
4 mph (6 km/h) or greater than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
265
Driving Aids
Cross Traffic Alert Indicator If the system malfunctions, a warning lamp

illuminates in the instrument cluster and
When the system detects an a message appears in the information
E268294 approaching vehicle, a tone display. Have your vehicle checked as soon
sounds, a warning lamp as possible.
illuminates in the relevant exterior mirror
and arrows appear in the information Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
display to show which side the could alert you, even when there is nothing
approaching vehicle is coming from. in the detection zone, for example a vehicle
passing further away from your vehicle.
Note: If arrows do not display, a message
appears in the information display.
Cross Traffic Alert Information Messages
Message Action
Cross Traffic Alert Displays instead of indication arrows when the system
detects a vehicle. Check for approaching traffic.
Cross Traffic Not Avail- Indicates blocked cross traffic alert system sensors. Clean
able Sensor Blocked See the sensors. If the message continues to appear, have your
Manual vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked
Fault as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic Alert Deac- Displays if you attach a trailer to your vehicle.
tivated Trailer Attached
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION (IF WARNING: In cold and severe

weather conditions the system may not
EQUIPPED) function. Rain, snow and spray can all
Principle of Operation
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: You are responsible for Keep the windshield free from
controlling your vehicle at all times. The obstruction.
not relieve you of your responsibility to The system is designed to detect speed
drive with due care and attention. Failure limit signs to inform you of the current
to follow this instruction could result in speed limit. Detected speed signs appear
the loss of control of your vehicle, in the information display. The sensor is
personal injury or death. behind the interior mirror.
Note: Do not carry out windshield repairs
in the immediate area surrounding the
sensor.
266
Driving Aids
Note: Speed sign data provided by the System Display

navigation system contains information
integrated to the data carrier release.
Note: The system may not detect or
correctly read all speed signs.
Note: If your vehicle has a suspension kit
not approved by us, the system may not
correctly function.
Note: Always replace headlamp bulbs with
those specifically designed for your vehicle.
Other bulbs could reduce system
performance.
E317824
The system turns on when you switch the
ignition on, and you cannot switch the When the system detects a speed limit
system off. sign, the speed limit appears in the
Using Speed Sign Recognition
Note: If your vehicle has a navigation
Setting the System Speed Warning system, stored speed sign data could
influence the indicated speed limit value.
You can set the system speed warning to
alert you when the vehicle speed exceeds To switch the system off or to adjust the
the speed limit recognized by the system settings, use the touchscreen:
by a certain speed tolerance. 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
Note: The system remembers the last 2. Press Driver Assistance.
setting when you start your vehicle.
3. Press Speed Sign Recognition.
4. Press Speed Warning.
5. Press Tolerance.
6. Use + and - to set the tolerance.
Information Messages
Message Action
Traffic Sign Reduced Performance See The traffic sign data provided by the navig-
Manual ation system is unavailable due to a weak
signal, or no signal. Wait for a short period
of time for the signal to improve. If the
message continues to appear, have your
267
Driving Aids
STEERING Steering Tips

If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
Electric Power Steering
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
WARNING: The electric power • Loose or worn suspension
steering system has diagnostic checks components.
that continuously monitor the system. If
• Loose or worn steering components.
a fault is detected, a message displays
in the information display. Stop your • Improper vehicle alignment.
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Note: A high crown in the road or high
Switch the ignition off. After at least 10 crosswinds may also make the steering
seconds, switch the ignition on and seem to wander or pull.
watch the information display for a
steering system warning message. If a Adaptive Learning (If Equipped)
steering system warning message
returns, have the system checked as The electronic power steering system
soon as possible. adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
WARNING: If the system detects and steering feel. It communicates with
an error, you may not feel a difference in the brake system to help operate
the steering, however a serious condition advanced stability control and accident
may exist. Have your vehicle checked as avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever
soon as possible. Failure to do so may the battery is disconnected or a new
result in loss of steering control. battery installed, you must drive your
vehicle a short distance before the system
Your vehicle has an electric power steering relearns the strategy and reactivates all
system, there is no fluid reservoir, no systems.
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while PRE-COLLISION ASSIST
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
WARNING: You are responsible for
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase not relieve you of your responsibility to
the effort required for you to steer your drive with due care and attention. Failure
vehicle, this increased effort prevents to follow this instruction could result in
overheating and permanent damage to the loss of control of your vehicle,
the steering system. You do not lose the personal injury or death.
ability to steer your vehicle manually.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool and return to
normal operation.
268
Driving Aids

detect vehicles that are driving in a E156130
different direction, cyclists or animals.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure If your vehicle is rapidly approaching
to follow this instruction could result in another stationary vehicle, a vehicle
the loss of control of your vehicle, traveling in the same direction as yours, or
personal injury or death. a pedestrian within your driving path, the
system design provides three levels of
WARNING: The system does not functionality:
operate during hard acceleration or 1. Alert.
steering. Failure to take care may lead
2. Brake Support.
to a crash or personal injury.
3. Active Braking.
WARNING: Some situations and
objects prevent hazard detection. For
example low or direct sunlight, inclement
weather, unconventional vehicle types,
and pedestrians. Apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.

conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy E255268
rain and spray. Always drive with due

Alert: When active, a flashing visual
warning appears and an audible warning
tone sounds.
WARNING: The system cannot Brake Support: The system design helps
help prevent all crashes. Do not rely on reduce the impact speed by preparing the
this system to replace driver judgment brakes for rapid braking. Brake support
and the need to maintain a safe distance does not automatically apply the brakes.
and speed. If you press the brake pedal, the system
could apply additional braking up to
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice maximum braking force, even if you lightly
and large accumulations of dirt. press the brake pedal.
Active Braking: Active braking may
Using the Pre-Collision Assist activate if the system determines that a
System collision is imminent. The system may help
The system is active at speeds above the driver reduce impact damage or avoid
approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) and the crash completely.
pedestrian detection is active at speeds
up to 50 mph (80 km/h).
269
Driving Aids
Note: Brake support and active braking are

active at speeds up to 75 mph (120 km/h).
If your vehicle has a radar sensor included
with adaptive cruise control, then brake
support and active braking are active up to
the maximum speed of the vehicle.
Note: If you perceive pre-collision assist
alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,
though we recommend using the highest
sensitivity setting where possible. Setting
lower sensitivity would lead to fewer and
later system warnings.
Distance Indication and Alert (If

Equipped)
Distance indication and alert is a function

that provides the driver with a graphical E358669
indication of the time gap to other
preceding vehicles traveling in the same If the time gap to a preceding vehicle is
direction. Distance indication and alert small, a red visual indication displays to
shows one of the graphics that follow in the driver.
the information display. Note: Distance indication and alert
deactivates and the graphics do not display
when adaptive cruise control is active.
Speed Sensitivity Graphics Distance Gap Time Gap

62 mph
Normal Grey >82 ft (25 m) >0.9sec
(100 km/h)
62 mph 56–82 ft 0.6sec —
Normal Yellow
(100 km/h) (17–25 m) 0.9sec
62 mph
Normal Red <56 ft (17 m) <0.6sec
(100 km/h)
The system only activates when all of the

Evasive Steering Assist (If Equipped) following occur:
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching a • The system detects a vehicle ahead
stationary vehicle or a vehicle traveling in and starts to apply active braking.
the same direction as your vehicle, the • You turn the steering wheel in an
system design helps you steer around the attempt to steer around the vehicle.
vehicle.
270
Driving Aids
After you turn the steering wheel, the Note: If you switch active braking off,
system applies additional steering torque evasive steering assist turns off.
to help you steer around the vehicle. After
you pass the vehicle, the system applies Blocked Sensors
steering torque in the opposite direction to
encourage you to steer back into the lane.
The system deactivates after you fully pass
the vehicle.
Note: The system does not automatically
steer around a vehicle. If you do not turn the
steering wheel, the system does not
activate.
Note: The system does not activate if the
distance to the vehicle ahead is too small
and the system cannot avoid a crash.
E273245
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings
1. Camera.
You can adjust the following settings by 2. Radar sensor (if equipped).
using the touchscreen.
• You can change Alert and Distance If a message regarding a blocked sensor
Alert sensitivity to one of three possible or camera appears in the information
settings. display, you have obstructed radar signals
or camera images. If your vehicle has a
• You can switch distance indication and
radar sensor, it is behind the fascia cover
alert on or off.
in the center of the lower grille. With a
• If required, you can switch active blocked sensor or camera, the system may
braking on or off. not function, or performance may reduce.
• If required, you can switch evasive The following table lists possible causes
steering assist on or off. and actions for when this message
displays.
Note: Active braking and evasive steering
assist automatically turn on every time you
switch the ignition on.
Camera Troubleshooting
Cause Action
The windshield in front of the camera is Clean the outside of the windshield in front
dirty or obstructed in some way. of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is Wait a short time. It may take several
clean but the message remains in the minutes for the camera to detect that there
display screen. is no obstruction.
271
Driving Aids
Radar Troubleshooting (If Equipped)

Cause Action
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
or obstructed in some way.
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean Wait a short time. It may take several
but the message remains in the display minutes for the radar to detect that there
screen. is no obstruction.
The system is temporarily disabled. The
Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog is interfering
system automatically reactivates a short
with the radar signals.
time after the weather conditions improve.
The pre-collision assist system is tempor-
Swirling water or snow or ice on the surface
arily disabled. The system automatically
of the road may interfere with the radar
reactivates a short time after the weather
signals.
conditions improve.
Radar is out of alignment due to a front- Have the radar checked for proper coverage
end impact. and operation.
Note: Proper system operation requires a

clear view of the road by the camera. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera's field of view repaired.
Note: If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs and your vehicle
has a radar sensor, the radar sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or
false detections. Contact an authorized
dealer to have the radar checked for proper
coverage and operation.
272
Drive Mode Control
WHAT IS DRIVE MODE

CONTROL
Your vehicle has various drive modes that
you can select for different driving
conditions. Depending on the drive mode
that you select, the system adjusts various
vehicle settings.
HOW DOES DRIVE MODE

CONTROL WORK E298238
Selectable drive modes change various Rotate the drive mode dial on the center
electronic and mechanical settings within console to select or change a drive mode.
your vehicle to tailor its performance and
driving characteristics to on-road or
off-road driving conditions. Steering feel
and effort, traction control, stability
control, chassis control, powertrain
response, transmission shift points and
four-wheel driveline settings alter to a
pre-determined setting depending upon
the drive mode that you select.
Note: Your vehicle has diagnostic checks
that continuously monitor all systems for
proper operation. If a drive mode is E297643
unavailable due to a system fault, your
vehicle defaults to normal mode. To select drive modes for RWD vehicles
use the console mounted control.
SELECTING A DRIVE MODE
DRIVE MODES
Note: Drive mode changes may not be
available when the ignition is off or when
DEEP SNOW/SAND
the engine is not running.
Note: Button icons shown may vary from For off-road driving on soft dry
your vehicle. sand or deep snow. This mode
E295420
optimizes accelerator pedal
response, traction settings, and stability
controls to help maintain forward
momentum when driving through deep
sand or snow. If your vehicle becomes
stuck in deep conditions, using this mode
may help it become unstuck.
273
Drive Mode Control
Note: Using deep snow/sand mode on dry, TOW/HAUL

hard surfaces could produce some vibration,
driveline bind up, and potential excessive For improved transmission
tire wear. operation when towing a trailer
E246592 or a heavy load. This mode
moves upshifts to higher engine speeds to
ECO
reduce the frequency of transmission
For efficient driving. This mode shifting. This mode also provides engine
helps deliver maximum fuel braking in all forward gears, which slows
E295413
efficiency and helps to increase your vehicle and assists you in controlling
driving range. your vehicle when descending a slope. The
amount of downshift braking provided
varies based on the amount you press the
NORMAL brake pedal.
For everyday driving. This mode

is a perfect balance of TRAIL
E225310
excitement, comfort and
convenience. This is the default mode after For off-road driving on muddy,
each ignition cycle. rutted, soft, or uneven terrain.
E295419
This mode lowers throttle
response to enhance low speed vehicle
SLIPPERY control when driving off road. Additionally,
the mode optimizes traction and stability
For less than ideal road control settings, helping the vehicle to
E295414
conditions such as snow or ice maintain forward momentum through
covered roads. This mode lowers loose deformable surfaces.
throttle response, adjusts transmission
shift points, and optimizes vehicle stability
controls to help mitigate wheel spin and
maintain vehicle control when driving in
winter conditions.
Note: Using slippery mode on dry, hard
surfaces could produce some vibration,
driveline bind up, and potential excessive
tire wear.
SPORT
For sporty driving with improved
performance handling and
E246593 response. This mode increases
accelerator pedal response, enhances
steering to provide a sportier feel, and
adjusts transmission shift points for quicker
vehicle acceleration.
274
Load Carrying
GENERAL INFORMATION REAR UNDER FLOOR

STORAGE
WARNING: Make sure that you Spare Tire Cover (If Equipped)
properly secure objects in the luggage
compartment. Failure to follow this
in the event of a sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects

on the luggage cover. Failure to follow
injury or death in the event of a sudden
stop or crash.
WARNING: The appropriate

loading capacity of your vehicle can be E326709
limited either by volume capacity (how
much space is available) or by payload The system is in the floor of the cargo area.
capacity (how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have reached
the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can
contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
WARNING: Make sure that you fully

close the liftgate to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. If you
are unable to fully close the liftgate, E298021
open the air vents or the windows to
allow fresh air to enter your vehicle. Remove the additional cover to access the
Failure to follow this instruction could spare tire and fuel filler.
WARNING: Do not exceed the

maximum front and rear axle loads for
your vehicle.
Note: When loading long objects into your

vehicle, for example pipes, timber or
furniture be careful not to damage the
interior trim.
275
Load Carrying
Adjustable Load Floor (If Equipped)
E297641
Vehicles with the standard size spare tire

can adjust the load floor to two positions.
At the high position, you can place the front
of the load floor on the ledge behind the
rear seat and on the ledge of the liftgate
scuff trim. At the low position, you can tuck
the front of the load floor into the lower
forward area of the spare tire cover and
rest the load floor on top of the spare tire
cover, or spare tire cover weather mat.
E204323
CARGO NETS
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS
WARNING: This net is not designed
to restrain objects during a collision or
heavy braking. WARNING: When loading the roof
racks, we recommend you evenly
The cargo net secures lightweight objects distribute the load, as well as maintain
in the cargo area. Attach the net to the a low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles,
anchors provided. Repeat the attachment with higher centers of gravity, may
on both sides of the vehicle. handle differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased stopping
distance, when driving a heavily loaded
vehicle.
276
Load Carrying
For correct roof rack system function, you Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
must place loads directly on crossbars panel. The roof panel is not designed to
affixed to the roof rack side rails. When directly carry a load.
using the roof rack system, we recommend
you use Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars Maximum Recommended Load
designed specifically for your vehicle. Amounts
Make sure that you securely fasten the Note: The maximum recommended load
load. Check the tightness of the load is based on the load being evenly distributed
before driving and at each fuel stop. on the crossbars.
Description Maximum Recommended Load
Vehicles with Moonroof 75 lb (35 kg)

Vehicles without Moonroof 165 lb (75 kg)
Adjusting the Crossbar (If Equipped) LOAD LIMIT

Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section guides you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer, or both. Keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return
E291741 of vehicle design performance.
1. Loosen the crossbar bolt by using the
Before you load your vehicle,
supplied tool or similar tool. become familiar with the
following terms for determining
2. Move the crossbar to the new position.
your vehicle’s weight rating, with
3. Tighten the bolt by using the supplied or without a trailer, from the
tool or similar tool.
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Note: For less wind noise and better Information label or Safety
aerodynamics, only install the crossbars Compliance Certification label.
when you need them for carrying cargo.
277
Load Carrying
Tire and Loading Label Information is the maximum payload for your
Example: vehicle as built by the assembly
plant. If you install any additional
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.
WARNING: The
appropriate loading capacity of
your vehicle can be limited either
by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the
vehicle should carry). Once you
have reached the maximum
payload of your vehicle, do not
add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
E198719 improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
Payload control and vehicle rollover.
Payload is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
vehicle is carrying. The maximum Rating)
payload for your vehicle appears GAWR is the maximum allowable
on the Tire and Loading label. The weight that a single axle (front or
label is either on the B-pillar or the rear) can carry. These numbers
edge of the driver door. Vehicles are on the Safety Compliance
exported outside the US and Certification label. The label is
Canada may not have a tire and located on the door hinge pillar,
loading label. Look for “The door-latch post, or the door edge
combined weight of occupants that meets the door-latch post,
and cargo should never exceed next to the driver seating position.
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label
278
Load Carrying
The total load on each axle must

never exceed its Gross Axle WARNING: Exceeding the
Weight Rating. Safety Compliance Certification
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight label vehicle weight limits can
Rating) adversely affect the
performance and handling of
GVWR is the maximum allowable your vehicle, cause vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle. damage and can result in the
This includes all options, loss of control of your vehicle,
equipment, passengers and cargo. serious personal injury or death.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label. Maximum Loaded Trailer
The label is located on the door Weight
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the Maximum loaded trailer weight is
door-latch post, next to the driver the highest possible weight of a
seating position. fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. Consult an authorized dealer
The gross vehicle weight must (or the RV and Trailer Towing
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Guide available at an authorized
Weight Rating. dealer) for more detailed
Safety Compliance Certification Label information.
Example:
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the
loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle
can handle without risking
E198828
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
279
Load Carrying
be used for safe control of towed Steps for determining the

vehicles and for trailers where the correct load limit:
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer 1. Locate the statement "The
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight combined weight of occupants
Rating of the towing vehicle. and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
The gross combined weight must vehicle’s placard.
never exceed the Gross Combined
Weight Rating. 2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
Note: For trailer towing passengers that will be riding
information refer to the RV and in your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Guide available at 3. Subtract the combined weight
an authorized dealer. of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
WARNING: Do not exceed 4. The resulting figure equals the
the GVWR or the GAWR available amount of cargo and
specified on the certification luggage load capacity. For
label. example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
WARNING: Do not use be five 150 lb. passengers in
replacement tires with lower your vehicle, the amount of
load carrying capacities than the available cargo and luggage
original tires because they may load capacity is 650 lb.
lower your vehicle's GVWR and (1400-(5 x 150) = 1400-750 =
GAWR limitations. Replacement 650 lb.)
tires with a higher limit than the 5. Determine the combined
original tires do not increase the weight of luggage and cargo
GVWR and GAWR limitations. being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
WARNING: Exceeding any exceed the available cargo and
vehicle weight rating can luggage load capacity
adversely affect the calculated in Step 4.
performance and handling of
your vehicle, cause vehicle 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
damage and can result in the trailer, load from your trailer
loss of control of your vehicle, will be transferred to your
serious personal injury or death. vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
280
Load Carrying
Helpful examples for calculating - 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do

the available amount of cargo not have enough cargo capacity
and luggage load capacity to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
Suppose your vehicle has a be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
and luggage capacity. You decide 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
to go golfing. Is there enough load You will need to reduce the load
capacity to carry you, four of your weight by at least 240 pounds
friends and all the golf bags? You (104 kilograms). If you remove
and four friends average 220 three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
pounds (99 kilograms) each and cement bags, then the load
the golf bags weigh approximately calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each. 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
The calculation would be: 1400 - 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 the load capacity to transport the
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have cement and your friend home. In
enough load capacity in your metric units, the calculation would
vehicle to transport four friends be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
and your golf bags. In metric units, kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
the calculation would be: 635 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 - The above calculations also
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms. assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
Suppose your vehicle has a manner that does not overload
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo the front or the rear gross axle
and luggage capacity. You and weight rating specified for your
one of your friends decide to pick vehicle on the Safety Compliance
up cement from the local home Certification label.
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for Special Loading Instructions
the past two years. Measuring the for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
inside of the vehicle with the rear and Utility-type Vehicles
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do WARNING: When loading
you have enough load capacity to the roof racks, we recommend
transport the cement to your you evenly distribute the load,
home? If you and your friend each as well as maintain a low center
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms), of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
the calculation would be: 1400 - higher centers of gravity, may
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
281
Load Carrying
handle differently than unloaded

vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance,
when driving a heavily loaded
vehicle.
282
Towing
TOWING A TRAILER Load Placement

To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
WARNING: Towing trailers when driving:
beyond the maximum
recommended gross trailer • Load the heaviest items closest
weight exceeds the limit of your to the trailer floor.
vehicle and could result in engine • Load the heaviest items
damage, transmission damage, centered between the left and
structural damage, loss of right side trailer tires.
vehicle control, vehicle rollover • Load the heaviest items above
and personal injury. the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
WARNING: Do not exceed tongue. Do not allow the final
the GVWR or the GAWR trailer tongue weight to go
specified on the certification above or below 10-15% of the
label. loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the
Note: See Recommended correct rise or drop and load
Towing Weights (page 284). capacity. When both the
Your vehicle may have electrical loaded vehicle and trailer are
items, such as fuses or relays, connected, the trailer frame
related to towing. See Fuses should be level, or slightly
(page 305). angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
Your vehicle's load capacity side.
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily When driving with a trailer or
use all available space when payload, a slight takeoff vibration
loading a vehicle or trailer. or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Towing a trailer places an extra Additional information regarding
load on your vehicle's engine, proper trailer loading and setting
transmission, axle, brakes, tires your vehicle up for towing is
and suspension. Inspect these located in another chapter of this
components periodically during, manual. See Load Limit (page
and after, any towing operation. 277).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
283
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online

Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/
Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed

is too high, the system may turn on multiple
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed.
The system applies the brakes to the
individual wheels and reduces engine
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway torque to aid vehicle stability. If the trailer
control increases the risk of loss of begins to sway, the stability control
vehicle control, serious injury or death. warning lamp flashes and a message
Ford does not recommend disabling this appears in the information display. See
feature except in situations where speed Information Messages (page 119). Slow
reduction may be detrimental (such as your vehicle down, pull safely to the side
hill climbing), the driver has significant of the road and check for correct load
trailer towing experience, and can control distribution. See Load Carrying (page
trailer sway and maintain safe operation. 275).
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer You can switch this feature off in the
sway, but reduces it when it begins. information display. When you switch the
ignition on, the system automatically turns
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers on.
from swaying.
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
Market Website
United States of America https://www.fleet.ford.com/
towing-guides/
Canada https://www.fleet.ford.ca/towing-
guides/
284
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross

them under the trailer tongue and allow
Follow these guidelines for safe towing: enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km). Trailer Brakes
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with WARNING: Do not connect a
towing accessories for the proper trailer's hydraulic brake system directly
installation and adjustment to your vehicle's brake system. Your
specifications. vehicle may not have enough braking
power and your chances of having a
• Service your vehicle more frequently if collision greatly increase.
you tow a trailer. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 476).
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
instructions the rental agency gives install them properly and adjust them to
you. the manufacturer's specifications. The
You can find information on load trailer brakes must meet local and federal
specification terms found on the tire label regulations.
and Safety Compliance label as well as The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
instructions on calculating your vehicle's system operation is at the gross vehicle
load in the Load Carrying chapter. See weight rating, not the gross combined
Load Limit (page 277). weight rating.
Remember to account for the trailer Safe control of towed vehicles requires
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load separate functioning brake systems for
when calculating the total vehicle weight. vehicles and trailers weighing more than
1,500 lb (680 kg) when loaded.
Hitches
Trailer Lamps
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the WARNING: Never connect any
total trailer weight is on the tongue. trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail
A weight distributing hitch is not required lamp wiring; this may damage the
for your vehicle. electrical system resulting in fire. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
Safety Chains possible for assistance in proper trailer
tow wiring installation. Additional
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the electrical equipment may be required.
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the Most towed vehicles require trailer lamps.
hook retainers of your vehicle hitch. Make sure all running lights, brake lights,
direction indicators and hazard flashers
are working.
285
Towing
Before Towing a Trailer 2. Set your vehicle parking brake.

Practice turning, stopping and backing up 3. Place the automatic transmission in
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer park (P).
combination before starting on a trip. 4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
When turning, make wider turns so the of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not
trailer wheels clear curbs and other included with vehicle.)
obstacles.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
When Towing a Trailer Personal Watercraft (PWC)
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi before backing the trailer into the water.
(800 km).
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
• Do not make full-throttle starts. after removing the trailer from the water.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections When backing down a ramp during boat
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly launching or retrieval:
after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
• Do not allow the static water level to
• When stopped in congested or heavy rise above the bottom edge of the rear
traffic during hot weather, place the bumper.
gearshift in park (P) to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C • Do not allow waves to break higher
performance. than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
edge of the rear bumper.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed Exceeding these limits may allow water to
control may turn off automatically enter vehicle components:
when you are towing on long, steep • Causing internal damage to the
grades. components.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down • Affecting driveability, emissions, and
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the reliability.
brakes continuously, as they may
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
overheat and become less effective.
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
• If your transmission is equipped with a Water may have contaminated the rear
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use axle lubricant, which is not normally
this feature when towing. This provides checked or changed unless a leak is
engine braking and helps eliminate suspected or other axle repair is required.
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
• Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
286
Towing
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON Recreational Towing - Rear-Wheel

Drive Vehicles (If Equipped)
FOUR WHEELS
You cannot recreational tow your vehicle
Emergency Towing with all wheels on the ground because
vehicle or transmission damage could
occur. We recommend towing your vehicle
WARNING: If your vehicle has a with all four wheels off the ground, such
steering wheel lock make sure the as when using a car-hauling trailer.
ignition is in the accessory or on position Otherwise, you cannot recreational tow
when being towed. your vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes inoperable without Recreational Towing - All-Wheel

access to wheel dollies or a vehicle and Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles (If
transport trailer, it can be flat-towed with Equipped)
all wheels on the ground, regardless of the
powertrain and transmission configuration, You cannot recreational tow your vehicle
under the following conditions: with all wheels on the ground because
• Your vehicle is facing forward for
occur. We recommend towing your vehicle
towing in a forward direction.
with all four wheels off the ground, such
• Refer to the Manual Park Release as when using a car-hauling trailer.
procedure. See Automatic Otherwise, you cannot recreational tow
Transmission (page 197). Failing to your vehicle.
do so could result in damage to the
transmission.
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
Note: If you are unsure of the vehicle’s
configuration, contact an authorized dealer.
Recreational Towing - Front-Wheel

Drive Vehicles (If Equipped)
You cannot recreational tow your vehicle
with all wheels on the ground because
occur. Place the front wheels on a
two-wheel tow dolly. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by
the equipment provider.
287
Driving Hints
REDUCED ENGINE COLD WEATHER

PERFORMANCE PRECAUTIONS
The functional operation of some
WARNING: If you continue to drive components and systems can be affected
your vehicle when the engine is at temperatures below approximately
overheating, the engine could stop -13°F (-25°C).
without warning. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of BREAKING-IN
control of your vehicle.
Your vehicle requires a break-in period. For
If the engine coolant temperature gauge the first 1,000 mi (1,600 km), avoid driving
needle moves to the upper limit position, at high speeds, heavy braking, aggressive
the engine is overheating. See Gauges shifting or using your vehicle to tow. During
(page 104). this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
You must only drive your vehicle for a short unusual driving characteristics.
distance if the engine overheats. The
distance you can travel depends on DRIVING ECONOMICALLY
ambient temperature, vehicle load and
terrain. The engine continues to operate The following helps to improve fuel
with limited power for a short period of consumption:
time.
• Drive smoothly, accelerate gently and
If the engine temperature continues to rise, anticipate the road ahead to avoid
the fuel supply to the engine reduces. The heavy braking.
air conditioning switches off and the engine
• Regularly check your tire pressures and
cooling fan operates continually.
make sure that they are inflated to the
1. Gradually reduce your speed and stop correct pressure.
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do • Follow the recommended maintenance
so. schedule and carry out the
2. Immediately switch the engine off to recommended checks.
prevent severe engine damage. • Plan your journey and check the traffic
3. Wait for the engine to cool down. before you set off. It is more efficient
4. Check the coolant level. See Engine to combine errands into a single trip
Coolant Check (page 324). whenever possible.
5. Have your vehicle checked as soon as • Avoid idling the engine in cold weather
possible. or for extended periods. Start the
engine only when you are ready to set
off.
• Do not carry unnecessary weight in your
vehicle as extra weight wastes fuel.
288
Driving Hints
• Do not add unnecessary accessories

to the exterior of your vehicle, for
example running boards. If you use a
roof rack, remember to fold it down or
remove it when not in use.
• Do not shift into neutral when you are
braking or when your vehicle is slowing
down.
• Shut all windows when driving at high
speeds.
• Switch off all electric systems when
E266447
not in use, for example air conditioning.
Make sure that you unplug any When driving through standing water, drive
accessories from the auxiliary power very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
points when not in use. Your brake performance and traction could
be limited. After driving through water and
DRIVING THROUGH SHALLOW as soon as it is safe to do so:
WATER • Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that
WARNING: Do not attempt to the steering power assist works.
cross a deep or flowing body of water. Check the function of the following:
result in the loss of control of your • Horn
vehicle, personal injury or death. • Exterior lights
Note: Driving through standing water can FLOOR MATS

cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter. WARNING: Use a floor mat
Before driving through standing water, designed to fit the footwell of your
check the depth. Never drive through water vehicle that does not obstruct the pedal
that is higher than the bottom of the front area. Failure to follow this instruction
rocker area of your vehicle. could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Pedals that cannot

move freely can cause loss of vehicle
control and increase the risk of serious
personal injury.
289
Driving Hints
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to

WARNING: Secure the floor mat make sure they are secure.
to both retention devices so that it
cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
death.
WARNING: Do not place additional

floor mats or any other covering on top
of the original floor mats. This could
result in the floor mat interfering with the
operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
death.
WARNING: Always make sure that

objects cannot fall into the driver foot
well while your vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped
under the pedals causing a loss of
vehicle control.
E142666
To install floor mats that have eyelets,

position the floor mat eyelet over the
retention post and press down to lock in
position. Repeat for all eyelets on the floor
mat.
To remove the floor mats, reverse the
installation procedure.
290
Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE • Towing — independent service

contractors, if not prohibited by state,
Vehicles Sold in the United States: local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
Getting Roadside Assistance eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
To fully assist you should you have a disablement location or to the nearest
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company authorized dealer. If a member
offers a complimentary roadside requests a tow to an authorized dealer
assistance program. This program is that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
separate from the New Vehicle Limited the disablement location, the member
Warranty. shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
The service is available:
• Roadside Assistance includes up to
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
• For the coverage period supplied with eligible vehicle requires service at the
your vehicle. nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
Roadside Assistance covers: vehicle is operational but the trailer is
not, then the trailer does not qualify for
• A flat tire change with a good spare any roadside services.
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit). Vehicles Sold in the United States:
• Battery jump start. Using Roadside Assistance
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement Complete the roadside assistance
cost is the customer's responsibility). identification card and place it in your
• Fuel delivery — independent service wallet for quick reference. This card is in
contractors, if not prohibited by state, the Owner's Manual kit.
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
United States vehicle customers who
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)
require Roadside Assistance, call
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
1-800-241-3673.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences If you need to arrange roadside assistance
within a 12-month period. for yourself, Ford Motor Company
• Winch out — available within 100 ft reimburses a reasonable amount for
(30 m) of a paved or county towing to the nearest dealership within
maintained road, no recoveries. 35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
291
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting FUEL SHUTOFF

Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of WARNING: If your vehicle has been
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary involved in a crash, have the fuel system
roadside assistance program. This program checked. Failure to follow this instruction
is eligible within Canada or the continental could result in fire, personal injury or
United States. death.
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week. Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
This program is separate from the New that various systems are safe to restart.
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage Once the vehicle determines the systems
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
period of your vehicle. Canadian roadside restart.
coverage and benefits may differ from the
U.S. coverage. Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
If you require more information, please call a qualified technician.
us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit
our website at www.ford.ca. The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of
fuel to the engine in the event of a
moderate to severe crash. Not every
HAZARD FLASHERS impact causes a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
Note: The hazard flashers operate when you may restart your vehicle.
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is
not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle If your vehicle has a key system:
is not running, the battery loses charge. As 1. Switch off the ignition.
a result, there may be insufficient power to
2. Switch to start position.
restart your vehicle.
3. Switch off the ignition.
The flasher control is on the
E75790 instrument panel. Use your 4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the
hazard flashers when your fuel pump.
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other 5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
motorists. steps 1 through 4.
• Press the flasher control and all front If your vehicle has a push button start
and rear direction indicators flash. system:
• Press the button again to switch them 1. Press START/STOP to switch off your
off. vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and
START/STOP to switch on your
vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
292
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
by pressing the brake pedal and disabled vehicle as this could damage the
START/STOP, or press START/STOP vehicle electrical system.
without pressing the brake pedal. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
steps 1 through 4. two vehicles do not touch.
Locating the Jump Starting

JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE Connection Points
WARNING: Batteries normally

produce explosive gases which can
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of

reach of children. Batteries contain E288229
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when 1. Open the hood. See Opening and
working near the battery to protect Closing the Hood (page 315).
against possible splashing of acid 2. Remove the access cover.
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for 3. Remove the red protective cover from
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt the positive lead jump connection
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, point.
call a physician immediately. 4. Locate the negative jump connection
point on the rear mounting bolt for the
WARNING: Use only adequately cross brace, as shown.
sized cables with insulated clamps.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your WARNING: If the engine is running
automatic transmission vehicle. while the hood is open, stay clear of
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle moving engine components. Failure to
with an automatic transmission may cause follow this warning could result in serious
transmission damage. personal injury or death.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your WARNING: Do not connect the
vehicle. negative jumper cable to any other part
of your vehicle. Use the ground point.
293
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle Jump Starting

represents the booster vehicle.
Note: If you are using a hybrid vehicle as
the booster vehicle, you do not need to rev
the engine.
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables

Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
E281345 positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the 4. Remove the jumper cable from the
discharged battery. positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal 5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
of the booster vehicle battery. minute.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
294
COLLISION, DAMAGE OR FIRE Crashes

EVENT A crash or impact significant enough to
require an emergency response for
Guidance for Ford Motor Company conventional vehicles would also require
Electric and Hybrid-Electric the same response for an electric or
Vehicles Equipped With High hybrid-electric vehicle.
Voltage Batteries
If possible:
(Vehicle Owner/Operator/General • Move your vehicle to a safe, nearby
Public) location and remain on the scene.
Electric and Hybrid-Electric Vehicle
Considerations • Roll down the windows before
switching your vehicle off.
In the event of damage or fire involving an • Place your vehicle in park (P), set the
electric vehicle or hybrid-electric vehicle: parking brake, switch off the vehicle,
• Always assume the high-voltage activate the hazard warning flashers
battery and associated components and move your key(s) at least 15 ft
are energized and fully charged. (5 m) away from the vehicle.
• Exposed electrical components, wires, Always:
and high-voltage batteries present • Call emergency assistance if needed
potential high-voltage shock hazards. and advise that an electric or
• Venting high-voltage battery vapors hybrid-electric vehicle is involved.
are potentially toxic and flammable. • Exposed electrical components, wires,
• Physical damage to the vehicle or and high-voltage batteries present
high-voltage battery may result in potential high-voltage shock hazards.
immediate or delayed release of toxic, • Avoid contact with leaking fluids and
flammable gases and fire. gases, and remain out of the way of
Vehicle information and general safety oncoming traffic until emergency
practices: responders arrive.
• Know the make and model of your • When emergency responders arrive,
vehicle. tell them that the vehicle involved is an
electric vehicle or hybrid-electric
• Review the owner’s manual and
vehicle.
become familiar with your vehicle’s
safety information and recommended Fires
safety practices.
• Do not attempt to repair damaged As with any vehicle, call emergency
electric and hybrid-electric vehicles assistance immediately if you see sparks,
yourself. smoke or flames coming from the vehicle.
Remain a safe distance from the vehicle
Contact an authorized dealer. and try to stay clear of the smoke.
• Exit the vehicle immediately.
• Advise emergency assistance that an
electric or hybrid-electric vehicle is
involved.
295
• As with any vehicle fire, do not inhale TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

smoke, vapors or gas from the vehicle,
as they may be hazardous.
• Stay out of the roadway and stay out
of the way of any oncoming traffic
while awaiting the arrival of emergency
responders.
Post-Incident
• Do not store a severely damaged
vehicle with a lithium-ion battery inside
a structure or within 49 ft (15 m) of any
structure or vehicle.
• Make sure that passenger and luggage
compartments remain ventilated.
• Call emergency assistance if you
observe leaking fluids, sparks, smoke
or flames, or hear gurgling or bubbling
from the high-voltage battery.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM

The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety E143886
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a
The horn and indicators turn off when: professional towing service or, if you are a
• You press the hazard control button. member of a roadside assistance program,
• You press the panic button on the your roadside assistance service provider.
remote entry transmitter (if equipped). We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
• Your vehicle runs out of power. dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. We do
• Sounding of the horn is only enabled
not approve a slingbelt towing procedure.
in specific markets.
If you tow your vehicle incorrectly, or by
any other means, vehicle damage may
occur.
We produce a towing manual for all
authorized tow truck operators. Have your
tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for
your vehicle.
296
Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drive

vehicle requires that all wheels be off the
ground, such as using a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. Wheel lift
may only be done by lifting the rear wheels
and putting the front wheels on dollies.
This prevents damage to the transmission,
all-wheel or four-wheel drive system and
vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes inoperable without
access to wheel dollies, a car-hauling
trailer or a flatbed transport vehicle, you
can flat-tow with all wheels on the ground
under limited conditions. See Towing the
Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 287).
297
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU Additional information and resources are

available online:
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be Website
performed by an authorized dealer. While www.owner.ford.com
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling These are some of the items that can be
authorized dealer who wants to ensure found online:
your continued satisfaction. • U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so • Owner Manuals.
not all authorized dealers are authorized • Maintenance Schedules.
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
• Recalls.
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle • Ford Extended Service Plans.
to another authorized dealer. • Ford Genuine Accessories.
A reasonable time must be allowed to • Service specials and promotions.
perform a repair after taking your vehicle In Canada:
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or Mailing address
remanufactured or other parts that are Customer Relationship Centre
authorized by Ford. Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Away From Home Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
If you are away from home when your Telephone
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the 1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
online resources listed below to find the TDD for the hearing impaired:
nearest authorized dealer. 7-1-1 (where offered by your telephone
service provider)
In the United States:
Mailing address Website
Ford Motor Company www.ford.ca
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126 Facebook
Telephone FordServiceCA (English)

FordServiceQC (Français)
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
TDD for the hearing impaired: Twitter
7-1-1 (where offered by your telephone @FordServiceCA
service provider)
If your vehicle is configured as a
motorhome please call 1-800-444-3311
for support.
298
Customer Assistance
Additional Assistance IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)

If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
receiving, follow these steps: requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
1. Contact your Sales Representative or vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
Service Advisor at your selling or applicable express warranty after a
servicing authorized dealer. reasonable number of attempts, the
2. If your inquiry or concern remains manufacturer shall be required to either
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager, replace the vehicle with one substantially
Service Manager or Customer Relations identical or repurchase the vehicle and
Manager. reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
3. If you require assistance or clarification consumer (less a reasonable allowance
on Ford Motor Company policies, for consumer use). The consumer has the
please contact the Ford Customer right to choose whether to receive a refund
Relationship Center. or replacement vehicle.
In order to help us serve you better, please California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
have the following information available presumes that the manufacturer has had
when contacting a Customer Relationship a reasonable number of attempts to
Center: conform the vehicle to its applicable
• Vehicle Identification Number. express warranties if, within the first 18
• Your telephone number (home and months of ownership of a new vehicle or
business). the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever
occurs first:
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located. 1. Two or more repair attempts are made
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading. on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
In some states within the United States,
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
you must directly notify Ford in writing
on the same nonconformity (a defect
before pursuing remedies under your
or condition that substantially impairs
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
allowed a final repair attempt.
OR
Additionally, in some states within the 3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
United States, a consumer has the option of nonconformities for a total of more
of submitting a warranty dispute to the than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
BBB Auto Line before taking action under all at one time).
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
pursuing replacement or repurchase must also notify the manufacturer of the
remedies provided by certain state laws. need for the repair of the nonconformity
This dispute handling procedure is not at the following address:
required prior to enforcing state created Ford Motor Company
rights or other rights which are independent 16800 Executive Plaza Drive
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or Mail Drop 3NE-B
state replacement or repurchase laws. Dearborn, MI 48126
299
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting program are usually decided within 40
in court any rights or remedies conferred days after you file your claim with the BBB.
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are not bound by the decision, and
You are also required to use BBB AUTO may reject the decision and proceed to
LINE before exercising rights or seeking court where all findings of the BBB Auto
remedies created by the Federal Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. in the court action. Should you choose to
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
redress by pursuing rights and remedies is then bound by the decision, and must
not created by California Civil Code Section comply with the decision within 30 days
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss of receipt of your acceptance letter.
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
not required by those statutes. information that follows, please call or
write to request a program application.
THE BETTER BUSINESS You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE new vehicle, information about your
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY) warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a needs to be completed, signed and
warranty concern has not been resolved returned to the BBB along with proof of
using the three-step procedure outlined ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB reviews
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the the claim for eligibility under the Program
Services you need section, you may be Summary Guidelines.
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
You can get more information by
LINE program.
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of 1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
BBB AUTO LINE a Division of BBB
During mediation, a representative of the
National Programs, Inc.
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
1676 International Drive, Suite 550
Company to explore options for settlement
McLean, VA 22102
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
participate in mediation, and if your claim requested by calling the Ford Motor
is eligible, you may participate in the Company Customer Relationship Center
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing at 1-800-392-3673.
will be scheduled so that you can present For additional information, refer to the
your case in an informal setting before an Better Business Bureau website.
impartial person. The arbitrator considers
the testimony provided and makes a Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
decision after the hearing. right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
300
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE GETTING ASSISTANCE

MEDIATION/ARBITRATION OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) CANADA
For vehicles delivered to authorized Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
Canadian dealers. In those cases where country, contact the appropriate foreign
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford embassy or consulate. These officials can
of Canada and the authorized dealer to inform you of local vehicle registration
resolve a factory-related vehicle service regulations and where to find unleaded
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper
Canada participates in an impartial third sulfur fuel for diesel engines.
party mediation/arbitration program If you cannot find the proper fuel
administered by the Canadian Motor recommended for your vehicle, contact
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). our Customer Relationship Center.
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve without proper conversion may damage
a disagreement when all other efforts to the effectiveness of your emission control
produce a settlement have failed. This system and may cause engine knocking or
procedure is without cost to you and is serious engine damage. Ford Motor
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy Company or Ford of Canada is not
and expensive legal proceedings. responsible for any damage caused by use
In the CAMVAP program, impartial of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at also result in difficulty importing your
mutually convenient times and places in vehicle back into the United States.
an informal environment. These impartial If your vehicle must be serviced while you
arbitrators review the positions of the are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
parties, make decisions and, when Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands
appropriate, render awards to resolve and/or Puerto Rico, Central America, the
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
binding on both you and Ford of Canada. the authorized dealer cannot help you,
CAMVAP services are available in all contact the corresponding Ford Customer
Canadian territories and provinces. For Assistance Center:
more information, without charge or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 Customer Relationship Centers in:
or visit www.camvap.ca.
301
Customer Assistance
Customer Relation-
Phone Fax E-mail
ship Center
Asia Pacific N/A N/A [email protected]

Caribbean and
+1-800-841-3673 N/A [email protected]
Central America
Ford
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441067
UAE
80004441066
Middle East Saudi Arabia 971 4 3327 266 [email protected]
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell
phone users in Saudi
800850078
Kuwait
22280384
North Africa N/A N/A [email protected]
Puerto Rico and U.S.
+1-800-841-3673 N/A [email protected]
Virgin Islands
Sub-Saharan Africa N/A N/A [email protected]
[email protected] or
South Korea +82-02-1600-6003 N/A
[email protected]
If you are in another foreign country,

If you buy your vehicle in North America
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
and then relocate to any of the above
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
locations, register your vehicle
communicate your concern with the
identification number (VIN) and new
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
address with Ford Global Trade Services
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
by emailing, [email protected].
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
302
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL If NHTSA receives similar

OWNER'S LITERATURE complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
To order the publications in this portfolio, safety defect exists in a group of
contact Helm, LLC at: vehicles, it may order a recall and
HELM, LLC remedy campaign. However,
47911 Halyard Drive, Suite 200 NHTSA cannot become involved
Plymouth, Michigan 48170 in individual problems between
Attention: Customer Service you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Or to order a free publication catalog, call Company.
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
To contact NHTSA, you may call
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST the Vehicle Safety Hotline
Helm, LLC can also be reached by their toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
website: 1-800-424-9153); go to
www.helminc.com www.safercar.gov; or write to:
(Items in this catalog may be purchased Administrator
by credit card, check or money order.)
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Obtaining a French Owner’s Southeast
Manual
Washington, D.C. 20590
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by You can also obtain other
contacting Helm, LLC using the contact information about motor vehicle
information listed previously in this section. safety from www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

(U.S. ONLY) (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
a defect which could cause a which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
crash or could cause injury or inform Transport Canada and Ford of
death, you should immediately Canada.
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
303
Customer Assistance
Transport Canada Contact Information
Website http://tc.canada.ca/recalls
(English)
Website http://tc.canada.ca/rappels
(French)
Phone 1-800-333-0510
Ford of Canada Contact Information
Website www.ford.ca
Phone 1-800-565-3673
304
Fuses
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART The engine compartment fuse box is under

the driver side leaf screen in the engine
Engine Compartment Fuse Box compartment. It has high-current fuses
that protect your vehicle's main electrical
systems from overloads.
WARNING: Always disconnect the If you disconnect and reconnect the
battery before servicing high current battery, you need to reset some features.
fuses. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 329).
Note: Replace fuses with the same type
WARNING: To reduce risk of
and rating. See Changing a Fuse (page
electrical shock, always replace the
313).
cover to the power distribution box
before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
E288347
305
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Fuse Rating Protected Component

Number
1 40A Body control module - battery power in

feed 1.
2 20A Power outlet main console bin.
3 40A Body control module - battery power in
feed 2.
4 30A Fuel pump.
5 5A Powertrain control module keep alive
power.
6 20A Powertrain control module power.
7 20A Canister vent solenoid.
Evaporative leak control module.
Exhaust gas heat recovery (hybrid electric
vehicle).
Tank pressure control valve (hybrid electric
vehicle).
Refueling valve (plug-in hybrid electric
vehicle).
Vapor blocking valve.
Universal exhaust gas oxygen 11.
Universal exhaust gas oxygen 21.
Catalyst monitor sensor 12.
Catalyst monitor sensor 22.
Canister purge valve.
8 20A Cooling fan relay coil.
Battery interrupt box.
Transmission oil pump.
Auxiliary coolant pump.
Fuel flap door (hybrid electric vehicle).
Engine coolant bypass valve.
Active grille shutters.
9 20A Ignition coils.
13 40A Front blower motor relay.
14 15A Transmission oil pump.
A/C compressor variable clutch.
Auxiliary pumps (hybrid electric vehicle).
306
Fuses

Number
16 15A Windshield and rear window washer pump

relay power.
17 5A Charge status indicator (hybrid electric
vehicle).
18 30A Starter motor.
21 10A Headlamp leveling motors.
Adaptive headlamps.
22 10A Electric power assisted steering module.
23 10A Anti-lock brake system module with
integrated park brake.
24 10A Powertrain control module.
Hybrid powertrain control module.
25 10A Air quality sensor.
360 camera with park aid.
Rear view camera.
Blind spot information system.
Adaptive cruise control module.
26 15A Transmission control module.
28 40A Anti-lock brake system valves with integ-
rated park brake.
29 60A Anti-lock brake system pump with integ-
rated park brake.
30 30A Driver seat module.
31 30A Passenger seat motor.
32 20A Front media bin power point.
33 20A Rear cargo area power point.
34 20A Console end cap power point.
35 20A Power point 4.
36 40A Power inverter.
38 30A Climate controlled seat module.
41 30A Power liftgate module.
307
Fuses

Number
42 30A Trailer brake control module.

43 60A Body control module.
44 10A Brake on and off switch.
46 15A Battery charger control module (hybrid
electric vehicle).
50 40A Heated backlite.
54 20A Heated steering wheel.
55 20A Trailer tow park lamps.
57 30A Trailer tow battery charge.
58 10A Trailer tow backup lamps.
61 15A Multi-contour seat module.
62 15A Headlamp washer pump.
64 40A Four-wheel drive module.
69 30A Front window wiper motor.
71 15A Rear window wiper motor.
72 20A Not used (spare).
73 30A Driver door module.
78 50A Left-hand heated windshield.
79 50A Right-hand heated windshield.
80 20A Trailer tow.
88 20A Rear blower motor.
91 20A Trailer tow lighting module.
95 15A Integrated spark control (hybrid electric
vehicle).
97 10A Electric AC (hybrid electric vehicle).
308
Fuses

Number
High voltage positive temperature coeffi-

cient heater (hybrid electric vehicle).
98 10A Traction battery coolant proportional valve
(hybrid electric vehicle).
109 30A Passenger door module.
111 30A Body control module voltage quality
monitor feed.
115 20A Amplifier.
118 30A Second row heated seats.
120 15A Port fuel injectors.
124 5A Rain sensor.
125 5A USB smart charger 1.
127 20A Amplifier.
131 40A Power folding seat module.
133 15A Heated wiper park.
134 10A Family entertainment system.
309
Fuses

Number
139 5A USB smart charger 2.

142 5A Traffic cam.
146 15A Battery electronic control module.
148 30A Left-hand headlamp module.
149 30A Right-hand headlamp module.
155 25A Transmission control module (hybrid
electric vehicle).
159 15A DC/DC converter (hybrid electric vehicle).
168 20A Low voltage service disconnect.
169 10A Coolant pump (hybrid electric vehicle).
170 10A Traction battery coolant pump (hybrid
electric vehicle).
Pedestrian sounder (hybrid electric
vehicle).
Note: Spare fuse amperage may vary.
Note: It may be easier to access the fuse

Passenger Compartment Fuse panel if you remove the finish trim piece.
Panel
The fuse panel is under the instrument
panel to the left of the steering column.
310
Fuses
E145984

Number
1 — Not used.
2 10A Moonroof.
ERA-GLONAS.
eCall.
Telematics control unit module.
Inverter.
Driver door switch pack.
3 7.5A Memory seat switch.
Wireless accessory charger module.
Seat switches.
5 — Not used.
6 10A Not used.
7 10A Smart data link connector power.
8 5A Telematics control unit modem.
Hands-free liftgate actuation module.
Power liftgate module.
9 5A Keypad switch.
311
Fuses

Number
Rear climate control.

10 — Not used.
11 — Not used.
12 7.5A Climate control head.
Gear shift module.
13 7.5A Steering column control module.
Smart datalink connector.
Instrument cluster.
15 15A SYNC.
Integrated control panel.
16 — Not used.
17 7.5A Headlamp control module.
18 7.5A Not used (spare).
19 5A Headlamp switch.
Push button ignition switch.
20 5A Ignition switch.
Telematics control unit module.
Key inhibit solenoid lock.
21 5A Not used.
24 30A Moonroof.
30 5A Trailer brake connector.
312
Fuses

Number
31 10A Terrain management switch.

Selectable drive mode switch.
Transceiver module.
32 20A Audio control module.
33 — Not used.
34 30A Run/start relay.
36 15A Park assist module.
Image processing module A.
38 30A Left-hand rear power window.
Right-hand rear power window.
Note: Spare fuse amperage may vary.
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse

with one that has the specified
E217331
amperage rating. Using a fuse with a
higher amperage rating can cause severe If electrical components in the vehicle are
wire damage and could start a fire. not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
313
Fuses
Fuse Types
E207206
Callout Fuse Type
A Micro 2
B Micro 3
C Maxi
D Mini
E M Case
F J Case
G J Case Low Profile
314
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION Working with the Engine On
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help

maintain its roadworthiness and resale WARNING: To reduce the risk of
value. There is a large network of vehicle damage and personal burn
authorized dealers that are there to help injuries, do not start your engine with the
you with their professional servicing air cleaner removed and do not remove
expertise. We believe that their specially it while the engine is running.
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly. 1. Set the parking brake and shift the
They are supported by a wide range of transmission to park (P).
highly specialized tools developed 2. Block the wheels.
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
necessary parts and service. Check your HOOD
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered. Opening the Hood
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
E263274
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away 1. Open the left-hand front door.
from the battery and all fuel related
parts. 2. Fully pull the hood release lever and
let it completely retract.
Working with the Engine Off Note: This action releases the hood latch.
1. Set the parking brake and shift the 3. Fully pull the hood release lever for a
transmission to park (P). second time.
2. Switch off the engine. Note: This action fully releases the hood.
3. Block the wheels. 4. Open the hood.
Note: There is no secondary latch under the
hood.
315
Maintenance
Closing the Hood
WARNING: Make sure that you fully

latch the hood before driving. Failure to
1. Remove the prop rod from the catch

and secure it correctly in the clip.
2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last
10–14 in (25–35 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
E318379 closed.
5. Support the hood with the prop rod.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
E357684
A Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 329).

B Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 319).
316
Maintenance
C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 319).

D Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 328).
E Engine compartment fuse box. See Changing a Fuse (page 313).
F Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 324).
G Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 321).
H Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 336).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.0L
E288092
A Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 329).

B Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 319).
C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 319).
D Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 328).
E Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 305).
F Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 324).
317
Maintenance
G Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 322).
H Washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 336).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.3L
E288595
A. Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 329).

B. Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 319).
C. Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 319).
D. Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 328).
E. Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 305).
F. Engine coolant reservoir cap. See Engine Coolant Check (page 324).
G. Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 321).
H. Inverter system controller coolant reservoir cap- HEV only.
I. Washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 336).
318
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.3L ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.3L

ECOBOOST™
E354437
E270482
A Minimum.
A Minimum. B Nominal.
B Nominal. C Maximum.
C Maximum.
ENGINE OIL CHECK
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.0L
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Check the oil level before starting the
engine, or switch the engine off after
warm up and wait 15 minutes for the
oil to drain into the oil pan.
Note: Checking the oil level too soon could
result in an inaccurate reading.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth.
4. Reinstall the dipstick and make sure it
is fully seated.
E250320
5. Remove the dipstick again to check the
A Minimum. oil level.
B Nominal. Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
C Maximum. is acceptable. Do not add oil.
6. If the oil level is at the minimum mark,
immediately add oil.
7. Reinstall the dipstick. Make sure it is
fully seated.
319
Maintenance
Note: The oil consumption of new engines OIL CHANGE INDICATOR

reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km). RESET
Note: Increases in oil level can occur from Use the information display controls on
frequent short trips that do not allow the the steering wheel to reset the oil change
engine to get to operating temperature, as indicator.
well as frequent idling or low speed driving
for long periods of time. From the main menu scroll to:
Note: If oil levels are continuously noted Message Action and description
above the maximum mark, schedule a visit
to your authorized dealer. Settings Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
Adding Engine Oil to the following message.
Vehicle Press the right arrow button,
WARNING: Do not add engine oil then from this menu scroll
when the engine is hot. Failure to follow to the following message.
Hold OK to Press and hold the OK
injury.
Reset button until the instrument
cluster displays the
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
following message.
cap when the engine is running.
Reset Successful
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary When the oil change indic-
and could lead to engine damage that the ator resets the instrument
vehicle warranty may not cover. cluster displays 100%.
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine Remaining Life
oil filler cap before you remove it.
{00}%
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap.
3. Add engine oil that meets our If the instrument cluster
specifications. See Capacities and displays one of the following
Specifications (page 384). messages, repeat the
process.
4. Reinstall the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong Not Reset
resistance.
Reset Cancelled
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Immediately soak up any oil spillage
with an absorbent cloth.
320
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR

FILTER - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
WARNING: To reduce the risk of

vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
When changing the engine air filter, do not

allow debris or foreign material to enter
the air induction system. Engine
components are susceptible to damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 476).
Incorrect component use can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty. See Motorcraft Parts (page
382).
E294782
To replace the air filter element do the
following: 1. Remove the clips that secure the air
filter housing cover.
2. Using a screwdriver, loosen the clamp
on air filter housing cover.
3. Gently pull the boot back away from
the air filter housing cover.
4. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover
from the air filter housing assembly.
5. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
6. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and that you have a
good seal.
321
Maintenance
7. Install a new air filter element. Be

careful not to crimp the filter element
edges between the air filter housing
and cover. This could cause filter
damage and allow unfiltered air to
enter the engine if it is not properly
seated.
8. Install the air filter housing cover.
9. Engage the clips to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
10. Reconnect the boot to the air filter
housing cover and torque to 3.69 lb.ft
(5 Nm).

FILTER - 3.0L

injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove E294778
1. Remove the clips that secure the air
When changing the engine air filter, do not filter housing cover.
allow debris or foreign material to enter 2. Using a screwdriver, loosen two clamps
the air induction system. Engine on either side of the air filter housing
components are susceptible to damage cover.
not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
3. Gently pull the two boots back away
Change the air filter element at the correct from the air filter housing cover.
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
4. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
(page 476).
5. Remove the air filter element from the
Incorrect component use can cause air filter housing.
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty. See Motorcraft Parts (page 6. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
382). housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and that you have a
To replace the air filter element do the good seal.
following:
322
Maintenance

seated.
8. Install the air filter housing cover.
9. Engage the clips to secure the air filter E295061
housing cover to the air filter housing.
10. Reconnect the two boots on the air
filter housing cover and torque to
3.69 lb.ft (5 Nm).

FILTER - 3.3L

injuries, do not start your engine with the x2
air cleaner removed and do not remove
1. Release the clamps that secure the air
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter filter cover to the housing.
element may result in severe engine 2. Using a screwdriver, loosen the clamp
damage. Resulting component damage on the air filter housing cover.
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
3. Gently pull the boot back away from
Note: When servicing the air cleaner, do the air filter housing cover.
not allow foreign material to enter the air
4. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
induction system. The engine is susceptible
to damage from even small particles. 5. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. 6. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
Change the air filter element at the proper gets in the engine and that you have a
intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance good seal.
(page 476).
seated.
323
Maintenance
8. Install the air filter housing cover. Maintain coolant concentration within
9. Engage the clips to secure the air filter 48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
housing cover to the air filter housing. point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
10. Reconnect the boot to the air filter checked using a refractometer. We do not
housing cover and torque to 3.69 lb.ft recommend the use of hydrometers or
(5 Nm). coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK Adding Coolant
WARNING: Do not remove the WARNING: Do not add coolant

coolant reservoir cap when the engine is further than the MAX mark.
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool WARNING: Do not add coolant
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap when the vehicle is on or the cooling
with a thick cloth to prevent the system is hot. Failure to follow this
possibility of scalding and slowly remove instruction could result in personal injury.
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury. WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
WARNING: Do not put coolant in on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
the windshield washer reservoir. If minutes for the cooling system to cool
sprayed on the windshield, coolant could down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
make it difficult to see through the with a thick cloth to prevent the
windshield. possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
WARNING: To reduce the risk of could result in personal injury.
personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant WARNING: Do not put coolant in
pressure relief cap. The cooling system the windshield washer reservoir. If
is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid sprayed on the windshield, coolant could
can come out forcefully when you loosen make it difficult to see through the
the cap slightly. windshield.
When the engine is cold, check the Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
concentration and level of the coolant at system sealants, or non-specified additives
the intervals listed in the scheduled as they can cause damage to the engine
maintenance information. See Scheduled cooling or heating systems. Resulting
Maintenance (page 476). component damage may not be covered by
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is the vehicle Warranty.
between the MIN and the MAX marks on Note: Automotive fluids are not
the coolant reservoir. interchangeable.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
324
Maintenance
It is very important to use prediluted 5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
coolant approved to the correct reservoir the next few times you drive
specification in order to avoid plugging the your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
small passageways in the engine cooling prediluted engine coolant to bring the
system. See Capacities and coolant level to the correct level.
Specifications (page 378). Do not mix If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
different colors or types of coolant in your engine coolant per month, have your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using vehicle checked as soon as possible.
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine Operating an engine with a low level of
or cooling system components and may coolant can result in engine overheating
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. and possible engine damage.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available, In case of emergency, you can add a large
use the approved concentrated coolant amount of water without engine coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See in order to reach a vehicle service location.
Capacities and Specifications (page 378). In this instance, qualified personnel:
Using water that has not been deionised
may contribute to deposit formation, 1. Must drain the cooling system.
corrosion and plugging of the small cooling 2. Chemically clean the coolant system.
system passageways.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and possible.
models may not be approved to our
specifications and may cause damage to Water alone, without engine coolant, can
the cooling system. Resulting component cause engine damage from corrosion,
damage may not be covered by the vehicle overheating or freezing.
Warranty. Do not use the following as a coolant
If the coolant level is at or below the substitute:
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant • Alcohol.
immediately. • Methanol.
To top up the coolant level do the • Brine.
following:
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure methanol antifreeze.
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
2. Add prediluted coolant approved to damage from overheating or freezing.
the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
378). the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to the coolant.
reach the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn Recycled Coolant
the cap clockwise until it contacts the We do not recommend the use of recycled
hard stop. coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.
Note: Dispose of used coolant in the
appropriate manner.
325
Maintenance
Follow your community's regulations and Fail-Safe Cooling

standards for recycling and disposing of
automotive fluids. Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
Severe Climates component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient
If you drive in extremely cold climates: temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%. How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
• A coolant concentration of 60% If the engine begins to overheat,
provides improved freeze point E103308 the coolant temperature gauge
protection. moves toward the red zone:
• Coolant concentrations above 60% A warning lamp illuminates and
decrease the overheat protection E67028
a message may appear in the
characteristics of the coolant and may information display.
cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates: If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
• You can decrease the coolant
automatically switches to alternating
concentration to 40%.
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
• A coolant concentration of 40% acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
provides improved overheat protection.
When this occurs, your vehicle still
• Coolant concentrations below 40% operates, however:
decrease the overheat and corrosion
protection characteristics of the • Engine power is limited.
coolant and may cause engine • The air conditioning system turns off.
damage. Continued operation increases the engine
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme temperature, causing the engine to
climates should use prediluted coolant for completely shut down. Your steering and
optimum cooling system and engine braking effort increases in this situation.
protection. When the engine temperature cools, you
Coolant Change can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
At specific mileage intervals, as listed in engine damage.
the scheduled maintenance information,
the coolant should be changed. Add When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
prediluted coolant approved to the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 378). WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for
use during emergencies only. Operate
your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as
long as necessary to bring your vehicle
to rest in a safe location and seek
immediate repairs. When in fail-safe
mode, your vehicle will have limited
power, will not be able to maintain
326
Maintenance
high-speed operation, and may Engine Coolant Temperature

completely shut down without warning, Management (If Equipped)
potentially losing engine power, power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a WARNING: To reduce the risk of
crash resulting in serious injury. crash and injury, be prepared that the
vehicle speed may reduce and the
WARNING: Do not remove the vehicle may not be able to accelerate
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is with full power until the coolant
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 temperature reduces.
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
with a thick cloth to prevent the engine may temporarily reach a higher
possibility of scalding and slowly remove temperature during severe operating
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction conditions, for example ascending a long
could result in personal injury. or steep grade in high ambient
temperatures.
Your vehicle has limited engine power At this time, you may notice the coolant
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your temperature gauge moves toward the red
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not zone and a message may appear in the
maintain high-speed operation and the information display.
engine may operate poorly.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
Remember that the engine is capable of speed caused by reduced engine power in
automatically shutting down to prevent order to manage the engine coolant
engine damage. In this situation: temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely mode if certain high-temperature and
possible and switch the engine off. high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
2. If you are a member of a roadside
vehicle loading, grade and ambient
assistance program, we recommend
temperature. If this occurs, there is no
that you contact your roadside
need to stop your vehicle. You can
assistance service provider.
continue to drive.
3. If this is not possible, wait for a short
period of time for the engine to cool. The air conditioning may automatically
turn on and off during severe operating
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant conditions to protect the engine from
level is at or below the minimum mark, overheating. When the coolant
add prediluted coolant immediately. temperature decreases to the normal
5. When the engine temperature cools, operating temperature, the air conditioning
you can re-start the engine. Have your turns on.
vehicle checked as soon as possible to If the coolant temperature gauge moves
minimize engine damage. fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair temperature warning or service engine
increases the chance of engine damage. soon messages appear in your information
display, do the following:
327
Maintenance
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe BRAKE FLUID CHECK

to do so. Fully apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Leave the engine running until the WARNING: Do not use any fluid
coolant temperature gauge needle other than the recommended brake fluid
returns to the normal position. If the as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use
temperature does not drop after of incorrect fluid could result in the loss
several minutes, follow the remaining of vehicle control, serious personal injury
steps. or death.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level. WARNING: Only use brake fluid
4. If the coolant level is at or below the from a sealed container. Contamination
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant with dirt, water, petroleum products or
immediately. other materials may result in brake
system damage or failure. Failure to
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart adhere to this warning could result in the
the engine and continue. loss of vehicle control, serious personal
injury or death.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid
FLUID CHECK to touch your skin or eyes. If this
happens, rinse the affected areas
If required, have an authorized dealer check immediately with plenty of water and
and change the transmission fluid at the contact your physician.
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 476). WARNING: The brake system
The automatic transmission does not have could be affected if the brake fluid level
a transmission fluid dipstick. is below the MIN mark or above the MAX
mark on the brake fluid reservoir.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals for fluid
checks and changes. Your transmission
does not consume fluid. However, if the
transmission slips, shifts slowly or if you
notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an
authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
328
Maintenance
For detailed interval information, see

Scheduled Maintenance in your Owner's
Manual or your local maintenance guide.
POWER STEERING FLUID

CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY

- EXCLUDING: HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)
E170684
WARNING: Batteries normally
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface. produce explosive gases which can
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
2. Look at the brake fluid reservoir to see allow flames, sparks or lighted
where the brake fluid level is relative substances to come near the battery.
to the MIN and the MAX marks on the When working near the battery, always
reservoir. shield your face and protect your eyes.
Note: If the brake fluid level is between the Always provide correct ventilation.
MIN and the MAX marks on the reservoir, it
is acceptable. WARNING: When lifting a
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
Note: If the brake fluid level is below the
on the end walls could cause acid to flow
MIN mark or above the MAX mark, have
through the vent caps, resulting in
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
personal injury and damage to the
Note: To avoid fluid contamination, the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a
reservoir cap must remain in place and fully battery carrier or with your hands on
tight, unless you are adding fluid. opposite corners.
Only use fluid that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and WARNING: Keep batteries out of
Specifications (page 378). reach of children. Batteries contain
Brake Fluid Service Interval eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect
Brake fluid absorbs water over time which against possible splashing of acid
degrades the effectiveness of the brake solution. In case of acid contact with skin
fluid. Change the brake fluid at the or eyes, flush immediately with water for
specified intervals to prevent degraded a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
braking performance. medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately.
329
Maintenance
Note: If you only disconnect the negative

WARNING: Battery posts, battery cable terminal, make sure it is
terminals and related accessories isolated or placed away from the battery
contain lead and lead compounds, terminal to avoid unintended connection or
chemicals known to the State of arcing.
California to cause cancer and If you replace the battery make sure it
reproductive harm. Wash your hands matches the electrical requirements of
after handling. your vehicle.
If you disconnect or replace the battery
WARNING: This vehicle may have
and your vehicle has an automatic
more than one battery. Removing the
transmission, it must relearn its adaptive
battery cables from only one battery
strategy. Because of this, the transmission
does not disconnect your vehicle
may shift firmly when first driven. This is
electrical system. Make sure you
normal operation while the transmission
disconnect the battery cables from all
fully updates its operation to optimum
batteries when disconnecting power.
shift feel.
Failure to do so may cause serious
personal injury or property damage. Battery Sensor Reset
WARNING: For vehicles with When you install a new battery, reset the
Auto-Start-Stop the battery requirement battery sensor by doing the following:
is different. You must replace the battery
1. Switch the ignition on, and leave the
with one of exactly the same
engine off.
specification.
Note: Complete Steps 2 and 3 within 10
The battery is in the engine compartment. seconds.
See Under Hood Overview (page 317). 2. Flash the high beam headlamps five
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free times, ending with the high beams off.
battery. It does not require additional 3. Press and release the brake pedal three
water during service. times.
If the vehicle battery has a cover and vent The battery warning lamp flashes three
hose, make sure you correctly install it after times to confirm that the reset is
cleaning or replacing the battery. successful.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry and the Battery Management System (If
battery cables tightly fastened to the Equipped)
battery terminals. If any corrosion is

The system monitors battery conditions
present on the battery or terminals, remove
and takes actions to extend battery life. If
the cables from the terminals and clean
excessive battery drain is detected, the
with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
system temporarily disables some
acid with a solution of baking soda and
electrical systems to protect the battery.
water.
Systems included are:
We recommend that you disconnect the
negative battery cable terminal from the • Heated rear window.
battery if you plan to store your vehicle for • Heated seats.
an extended period.
330
Maintenance
• Climate control. 1. Apply the parking brake and switch the

• Heated steering wheel. ignition off.
• Audio unit. 2. Switch all electrical equipment off, for
example lights and radio.
• Navigation system.
3. Wait a minimum of two minutes before
A message may appear in the information disconnecting the battery.
display to alert you that battery protection
actions are active. This message is only for Note: The engine management system has
notification that an action is taking place, a power hold function and remains powered
and not intended to indicate an electrical for a period of time after you switch the
problem or that the battery requires ignition off. This is to allow the system to
replacement. store diagnostic and adaptive tables.
Disconnecting the battery without waiting
After battery replacement, or in some can cause damage not covered by the
cases after charging the battery with an vehicle warranty.
external charger, the battery management
system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep 4. Disconnect the negative battery cable
time to relearn the battery state of charge. terminal.
During this time, your vehicle must remain 5. Disconnect the positive battery cable
fully locked with the ignition switched off. terminal.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state 6. Remove the battery securing clamp.
of charge, the battery management system 7. Remove the battery.
may temporarily disable some electrical
systems. 8. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Electrical Accessory Installation Note: Before reconnecting the battery,
To make sure the battery management make sure the ignition remains switched off.
system works correctly, do not connect an Note: Make sure to fully tighten the battery
electrical device ground connection cables.
directly to the battery negative post. This
If you disconnect or replace the vehicle
can cause inaccurate measurements of
battery, you must reset the following
the battery condition and potential
features:
incorrect system operation.
• Window bounce-back. See Power
Note: If you add electrical accessories or Windows (page 94).
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability. • Clock Settings.
This may also affect the performance of • Pre-set radio stations.
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
Battery Disposal
Remove and Reinstall the Battery
Make sure that you dispose of
Install a battery approved for use by our old batteries in an
E107998
specifications. See Capacities and environmentally friendly way.

Specifications (page 378). Seek advice from your local authority
about recycling old batteries.
To disconnect or remove the battery, do
the following:
331
Maintenance
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY

- HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE WARNING: This vehicle may have
more than one battery. Removing the
(HEV) battery cables from only one battery
does not disconnect your vehicle
electrical system. Make sure you
WARNING: Batteries normally disconnect the battery cables from all
produce explosive gases which can batteries when disconnecting power.
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not Failure to do so may cause serious
allow flames, sparks or lighted personal injury or property damage.
substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always WARNING: For vehicles with
shield your face and protect your eyes. Auto-Start-Stop the battery requirement
Always provide correct ventilation. is different. You must replace the battery
with one of exactly the same
WARNING: When lifting a specification.
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
on the end walls could cause acid to flow The primary battery is in the engine
through the vent caps, resulting in compartment. See Under Hood
personal injury and damage to the Overview (page 317).
vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a
The secondary battery is located behind
battery carrier or with your hands on
the trim panel in the luggage
opposite corners.
compartment.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts,

terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash your hands
after handling.
332
Maintenance
Note: If you only disconnect the negative

battery cable terminal, make sure it is
isolated or placed away from the battery
terminal to avoid unintended connection or
arcing.
If you replace the battery make sure it
matches the electrical requirements of
your vehicle.
If you disconnect or replace the battery
and your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, it must relearn its adaptive
strategy. Because of this, the transmission
may shift firmly when first driven. This is
normal operation while the transmission
fully updates its operation to optimum
shift feel.
Battery Sensor Reset

When you install a new battery, reset the
battery sensor by doing the following:
1. Switch the ignition on, and leave the
engine off.
Note: Complete Steps 2 and 3 within 10
E371794
seconds.
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free 2. Flash the high beam headlamps five
battery. It does not require additional times, ending with the high beams off.
water during service.
3. Press and release the brake pedal three
If the vehicle battery has a cover and vent times.
hose, make sure you correctly install it after
cleaning or replacing the battery. The battery warning lamp flashes three
times to confirm that the reset is
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the successful.
top of the battery clean and dry and the
battery cables tightly fastened to the Battery Management System (If
battery terminals. If any corrosion is Equipped)
present on the battery or terminals, remove
the cables from the terminals and clean The system monitors battery conditions
with a wire brush. You can neutralize the and takes actions to extend battery life. If
acid with a solution of baking soda and excessive battery drain is detected, the
water. system temporarily disables some
electrical systems to protect the battery.
We recommend that you disconnect the
negative battery cable terminal from the Systems included are:
battery if you plan to store your vehicle for • Heated rear window.
an extended period.
• Heated seats.
333
Maintenance
• Climate control. 1. Apply the parking brake and switch the

• Heated steering wheel. ignition off.
• Audio unit. 2. Switch all electrical equipment off, for
example lights and radio.
• Navigation system.
3. Wait a minimum of two minutes before
A message may appear in the information disconnecting the battery.
display to alert you that battery protection
actions are active. This message is only for Note: The engine management system has
notification that an action is taking place, a power hold function and remains powered
and not intended to indicate an electrical for a period of time after you switch the
problem or that the battery requires ignition off. This is to allow the system to
replacement. store diagnostic and adaptive tables.
Disconnecting the battery without waiting
After battery replacement, or in some can cause damage not covered by the
cases after charging the battery with an vehicle warranty.
external charger, the battery management
system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep 4. Disconnect the negative battery cable
time to relearn the battery state of charge. terminal.
During this time, your vehicle must remain 5. Disconnect the positive battery cable
fully locked with the ignition switched off. terminal.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state 6. Remove the battery securing clamp.
of charge, the battery management system 7. Remove the battery.
may temporarily disable some electrical
systems. 8. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Electrical Accessory Installation Note: Before reconnecting the battery,
To make sure the battery management make sure the ignition remains switched off.
system works correctly, do not connect an Note: Make sure to fully tighten the battery
electrical device ground connection cables.
directly to the battery negative post. This
If you disconnect or replace the vehicle
can cause inaccurate measurements of
battery, you must reset the following
the battery condition and potential
features:
incorrect system operation.
• Window bounce-back. See Power
Note: If you add electrical accessories or Windows (page 94).
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability. • Clock Settings.
This may also affect the performance of • Pre-set radio stations.
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
Battery Disposal
Remove and Reinstall the Battery
Make sure that you dispose of
Install a battery approved for use by our old batteries in an
E107998
specifications. See Capacities and environmentally friendly way.

Specifications (page 378). Seek advice from your local authority
about recycling old batteries.
To disconnect or remove the battery, do
the following:
334
Maintenance
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS 3. Switch on the low beam headlamps

and open the hood.
Vertical Aim Adjustment
If your vehicle has been involved in a crash,
have the aim of the headlamp beam
checked by an authorized dealer.
E142465
4. On the wall or screen you will observe

a flat zone of high intensity light
located at the top of the beam pattern.
If the top edge of the flat zone of high
E142592
intensity light is not on the horizontal
reference line, adjust the aim of the
A 8 ft (2.4 m) headlamp beam.
B Ground to the center of the
headlamp high beam bulb
C 25 ft (7.6 m)
D Horizontal reference line
Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure

1. Park your vehicle on level ground
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) from a wall
or screen.
2. Measure the distance from the ground
to the center of the headlamp beam
bulb and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m) long
horizontal reference line on the wall or
screen at this height.
Note: There may be an identifying mark on
the lens to help you locate the center line
of the headlamp beam bulb.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the E292172
other.
335
Maintenance
5. Use a suitable tool, for example a CHECKING THE WIPER

screwdriver or socket wrench, to turn
the adjuster clockwise or BLADES
counterclockwise to adjust the vertical
aim of the headlamp. The horizontal
edge of the brighter light should touch
the horizontal reference line.
6. Close the hood and switch off the
lamps.
WASHER FLUID CHECK

E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of

WARNING: If you operate your the blade to check for roughness.
vehicle in temperatures below 41.0°F
(5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
protection. Failure to use washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or
with antifreeze protection in cold cloth.
weather could result in impaired
windshield vision and increase the risk CHANGING THE FRONT WIPER
of injury or accident.
BLADES
Note: The front and rear washer systems
You can improve poor wiper quality by
are supplied from the same reservoir.
cleaning the wiper blades and the
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is windshield.
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Replace the wiper blades at least annually
our specifications. See Capacities and
for optimum performance.
Specifications (page 378).
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
FUEL FILTER E129990
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime 1. Lift the wiper arm and then press the
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel wiper blade locking buttons together.
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade to lift the
is not needed.
wiper arm.
336
Maintenance
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached. wiper blade is not attached.
2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade. 3. To install, reverse the removal
3. Remove the wiper blade. procedure.
4. To install, reverse the removal Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
procedure. into place.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. CHANGING A BULB
CHANGING THE REAR WIPER

WARNING: Switch the lamps and
BLADES the ignition off. Failure to do so could
result in serious personal injury.
You can improve poor wiper quality by
cleaning the wiper blades and the WARNING: Bulbs can become hot.
windshield. Let the bulb cool down before removing
Replace the wiper blades at least annually it. Failure to do so could result in
for optimum performance. personal injury.
Use the correct specification bulb. See

Bulb Specification Chart (page 412).
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
Rear Direction Indicator and

Reversing Lamp
E292168
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition

off.
E183236
2. Use a suitable tool, for example a
1. Lift the wiper arm. screwdriver, to carefully remove the
access cover.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade to lift the
wiper arm. 3. Remove the side cover.
2. Remove the wiper blade. 4. Remove the screw that secures the
lamp assembly.
337
1 2
Maintenance
5. Gently pull the lamp assembly away • Rear fog lamps (if equipped).
from the vehicle. • Front side marker lamps.
6. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise • Front signature lamps.
and remove it.
• Central high mounted brake lamp.
7. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out. License Plate Lamp
E292171
A Rear direction indicator.

B Reverse lamp. E292276
LED Lamps 1. Use a suitable tool, for example a

screwdriver, to carefully remove the
LED lamps are not serviceable items. See lamp.
an authorized dealer if they fail. 2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
The following lamps are LED: and remove it.
• Headlamp low beam. 3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
• Headlamp high beam.
• Front direction indicator.
• Side direction indicator.
• Daytime running lamps.
• Front fog lamps (if equipped).
• Brake and rear lamp.
• Rear side marker lamp.
338
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION CLEANING PRODUCTS

Your dealer has many quality products Materials
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes. For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)

Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M5B194-B
Motorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M14P4-A
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.) ESR-M14P3-A
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &
Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with WSS-M14P19-A
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37- WSS-M14P19-A
F/M (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada) ESR-M14P5-A
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.) ESR-M14P5-A
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
339
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Cleaning the Exterior Lamps

Note: Do not scrape the exterior lamps
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lenses or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
or chemical solvents to clean them.
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash. Note: Do not wipe the exterior lamps when
they are dry.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or Exterior Chrome Parts
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces. • Apply a high quality-cleaning product
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot to bumpers and other chrome parts.
to the touch, or during strong or direct Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
sunlight. We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water • Do not apply the cleaning product to
spotting. hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird than the time recommended.
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your • Using non-recommended cleaners can
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. result in severe and permanent
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and cosmetic damage.
Tar Remover. Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
• Remove any exterior accessories, for example steel wool or plastic pads as they
example antennas, before entering a can scratch the chrome surface.
car wash. Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
• When filling with AdBlue®, remove any cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
residue on painted surfaces
immediately. Exterior Plastic Parts
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents For routine cleaning we recommend
can damage painted surfaces. If these Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
substances come in contact with your spots are present, we recommend
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
possible.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Cleaning the Exterior Precautions
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
Immediately remove fuel spillages, AdBlue however, pressure washing may be used
residuals, bird droppings, insect deposits under the following conditions:
and road tar. These may cause damage to
your vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. • Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
Remove any exterior accessories, for
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F
example antennas, before entering a car
(82°C).
wash.
340
Vehicle Care
• Use a spray with a 40 degree wide • Do not allow wax to come in contact
spray angle pattern. with any non-body (low-gloss black)
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm) colored trim. The wax will discolor or
distance and 90 degree angle to your stain the parts over time.
vehicle's surface. • Roof racks.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle • Bumpers.
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may • Grained door handles.
damage graphics and cause the edges to
• Side moldings.
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
• Mirror housings.
Underbody • Windshield cowl area.
Regularly clean the entire underside of your • Do not apply wax to glass areas.
vehicle. This includes the chassis, body • After waxing, your car's paint should
floor sheet metal and wheel wells using feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
fresh water. Keep body and door drain smudges.
holes free of debris or foreign material.
Under Hood CLEANING THE ENGINE

For removing black rubber marks from Engines are more efficient when they are
under the hood we recommend Motorcraft clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug the engine warmer than normal.
and Tar Remover.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
WAXING to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
and cause damage.
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the • Do not spray a hot engine with cold
painted surface once or twice a year. water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct • Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before Degreaser on all parts that require
applying wax. cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
• Use a quality wax that does not contain Shampoo.
abrasives.
Note: If your vehicle has an engine cover
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions remove the cover before application of
to apply and remove the wax. Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a Immediately rinse away any over spray.
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
341
Vehicle Care
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it CLEANING THE INTERIOR

is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, WARNING: Do not use cleaning
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
the area in and around these locations. seatbelts, as these actions may weaken
• Cover the battery, power distribution the belt webbing.
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the WARNING: On vehicles equipped
engine. with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND side airbag system and affect
WIPER BLADES performance of the side airbag in a crash.
Car wash chemicals and environmental For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats
fallout can result in windshield and wiper equipped with side airbags:
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and • Remove dust and loose dirt with a
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper vacuum cleaner.
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper • Remove light stains and soil with
performance. Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• If grease or tar is present on the
• Clean the windshield with a material, spot-clean the area first with
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
cleaning the interior of the windshield, Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the Cleaner.
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces • If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
immediately. cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
• For windshields contaminated with or the ring will set.
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool • Do not use household cleaning
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a products or glass cleaners, which can
circular motion and rinse with water. stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl materials.
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate. Mirrors
Note: Do not use razor blades or other Do not clean the housing or glass of any
sharp objects to clean or remove decals mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
from the inside of the heated rear window. petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
The vehicle warranty does not cover products.
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
342
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT 1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,

soft cloth as quickly as possible.
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
CLUSTER LENS Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
WARNING: Do not use chemical or stain remover on an inconspicuous
solvents or strong detergents when area.
cleaning the steering wheel or 3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
instrument panel to avoid contamination clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
of the airbag system. water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather 4. If necessary, apply more soap and
instrument panels and leather interior trim water solution or cleaning product to
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
(page 343). soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
these areas.
area.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase 6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
undesirable windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning Note: Follow the same procedure as
products or glass cleaners as these cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
may damage the finish of the instrument panels and leather interior trim
instrument panel, interior trim and surfaces.
cluster lens. For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
have been in contact with certain water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
products such as insect repellent and soft cloth.
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage For cleaning and removing stains such as
to the interior painted surfaces. dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces. commercially available leather cleaning
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. product for automotive interiors.
Your warranty may not cover these Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
damages. an inconspicuous area.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
343
Vehicle Care
You should: 4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water

• Remove dust and loose dirt with a after cleaning.
vacuum cleaner. If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
• Clean and treat spills and stains as extended period after cleaning the wheels
soon as possible. with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
a few minutes before doing so. This
Do not use the following products as these reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake
may damage the leather: discs, brake pads and linings.
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners. Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.
• Alcohol solutions.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
• Solvents or cleaners intended harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
specifically for rubber, vinyl and cleaners or abrasive materials could
plastics. damage wheel rims, covers and bolts.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT VEHICLE STORAGE

DAMAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
We recommend that you contact an days or more, read the following
authorized dealer to identify your vehicle maintenance recommendations to make
color code. Authorized dealers have sure your vehicle stays in good operating
touch-up paint to match your vehicle's condition.
color.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
Before repairing minor paint damage, use and their components for reliable, regular
a cleaner to remove particles such as bird driving. Under various conditions,
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar long-term storage may lead to degraded
spots, road salt and industrial fallout. engine performance or failure unless you
Read the instructions before using cleaning use specific precautions to preserve engine
products. components.
General
CLEANING THE WHEELS • Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
1. Regularly clean them with a wheel
cleaner. We recommend that you use • Protect from sunlight, if possible.
Ford approved wheel cleaner if • If vehicles are stored outside, they
available. require regular maintenance to protect
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a against rust and damage.
sponge.
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and
tar remover. We recommend that you
use Ford approved bug and tar remover
if available.
344
Vehicle Care
Body Cooling system

• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to • Protect against freezing temperatures.
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from • When removing your vehicle from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing storage, check coolant fluid level.
and the underside of front fenders. Confirm that there are no cooling
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is system leaks and that fluid is at the
stored in exposed locations. recommended level.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
Disconnecting Your 12 Volt Battery
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts • Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent connections clean.
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary • If storing your vehicle for more than 30
when you wash your vehicle. days without recharging the battery,
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage we recommend that you disconnect
compartment hinges and latches with the battery cables to maintain battery
a light grade oil. charge for quick starting.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading. Note: It is necessary to reset memory
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and features if you disconnect the battery
solvents. cables.
Engine Brakes
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to • Make sure the brakes and parking brake
storage because used engine oil release fully.
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage. Tires
• Start the engine every 15 days for a • Maintain recommended air pressure.
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast
idle with the climate controls set to Miscellaneous
defrost until the engine reaches normal
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
operating temperature.
and pins under your vehicle are covered
• With your foot on the brake, shift with grease to prevent rust.
through all the gears while the engine
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
is running.
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
• We recommend that you change the and prevent corrosion.
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
345
Vehicle Care
Removing Vehicle From Storage

When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
BODY STYLING KITS

The distance between the underside of
your vehicle and the ground is less than
that of other models. Drive with extreme
care to avoid damage to your vehicle.
346
Wheels and Tires
GENERAL INFORMATION Self-Sealing Tires (If Equipped)
The recommended tire inflation pressures Self-Sealing tires are a special type of tire
are found on the Tire Label which is that have a material on the inside of the
located on the B-pillar or the edge of the tire that can seal punctures up to 0.2 in
driver door. This information can also be (6 mm) in diameter in the tread area. This
found on the Safety Compliance material does not protect from damage or
Certification Label, affixed to either the punctures in the sidewall of the tire.
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the Self-sealing tires can be identified by the
door edge that meets the door-latch post, tire manufacturer with a special mark.
next to the driver’s seating position. If your TPMS warning light comes on,
We strongly recommend maintaining these inspect your tires for damage and re-inflate
tire pressures at all times. Failure to follow your tires to the pressure indicated on the
the tire pressure recommendations can tire placard. See Tire Pressure
cause uneven treadwear patterns, reduced Monitoring System (page 364). If your
fuel economy, and adversely affect the tires are damaged or continue to lose air,
way your vehicle handles. take your vehicle to the nearest authorized
dealer to have your tires inspected and
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the repaired/replaced as necessary.
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the Note: Replace self-sealing tires with
tires are cold. self-sealing tires to maintain the
functionality provided.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least
once per month. Note: Do not drive on a deflated
self-sealing tire. This damages the tire
If your vehicle has a spare tire, set the beyond repair.
pressure to the highest value given for your
vehicle and tire size combination. Notice to utility vehicle and truck
Use only approved wheels and tire sizes; owners
using other sizes could damage your
vehicle.
If you change the diameter of the factory center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
installed tires, the speedometer could drive vehicles) handle differently than
display the incorrect speed. This could vehicles with a lower center of gravity
effect the functionality of the 4WD system (passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
(if equipped). Take your vehicle to an excessive speed and abrupt steering in
authorized dealer and have the engine these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
management system reprogrammed. increases the risk of losing control of your
If you intend to change the size of the vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
factory installed tires, check the suitability and death.
with an authorized dealer.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
Additional information related to the unbelted person is significantly more
functionality and maintenance of your tires likely to die than a person wearing a
can be found in the Wheels and Tire seatbelt.
section. See Tire Care (page 349).
347
Wheels and Tires
Utility vehicles and trucks handle We recommend installing the temporary

differently than passenger cars in the spare wheel and tire on the front axle when
various driving conditions that are possible. This could provide limited 4WD
encountered on streets, highways and traction.
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not Four-wheel drive: Never use a spare tire of
designed for cornering at speeds as high a different size than the one provided with
as passenger cars any more than low-slung your vehicle. This could cause the
sports cars are designed to perform four-wheel drive system to default to
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. rear-wheel drive.
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about How your vehicle differs from
equipment features, instructions for safe other vehicles
driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
injury. from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
Four-Wheel Drive system (if • Higher - to allow higher load carrying
equipped) capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
WARNING: Do not become • Shorter - to give it the capability to
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel approach inclines and drive over the
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel crest of a hill without getting hung up
drive vehicle may accelerate better than or damaging underbody components.
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction All other things held equal, a shorter
situations, it won't stop any faster than wheelbase may make your vehicle
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive quicker to respond to steering inputs
at a safe speed. than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
A vehicle equipped with Four-Wheel Drive • Narrower - to provide greater
has the ability to use all four wheels to maneuverability in tight spaces,
power itself. This increases traction which particularly in off-road use.
may enable you to safely drive over terrain As a result of the above dimensional
and road conditions that a conventional differences, sport utility vehicles and trucks
two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. Power is often have a higher center of gravity and a
supplied to all four wheels through a greater difference in center of gravity
transfer case. Four-wheel drive vehicles between the loaded and unloaded
allow you to select different modes as condition. These differences that make
necessary. You can find more information your vehicle so versatile also make it
on transfer case operation, drive mode handle differently than an ordinary
selection, and transfer case maintenance passenger car.
in this manual. See Four-Wheel Drive
(page 203). You should become thoroughly
familiar with this information before you
operate your vehicle.
348
Wheels and Tires
TIRE CARE U.S. Department of

Transportation Tire quality
Information About Uniform grades: The U.S. Department of
Tire Quality Grading Transportation requires us to give
you the following information
about tire grades exactly as the
government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
E142542
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear 1½ times as well on
Tire Quality Grades apply to new the government course as a tire
pneumatic passenger car tires. graded 100. The relative
The Quality grades can be found performance of tires depends
where applicable on the tire upon the actual conditions of their
sidewall between tread shoulder use, however, and may depart
and maximum section width. For significantly from the norm due to
example: Treadwear 200 variations in driving habits, service
Traction AA Temperature A. practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the Traction AA A B C
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new WARNING: The traction
pneumatic passenger car tires. grade assigned to this tire is
They do not apply to deep tread, based on straight-ahead braking
winter-type snow tires, traction tests, and does not
space-saver or temporary use include acceleration, cornering,
spare tires, light truck or LT type hydroplaning or peak traction
tires, tires with nominal rim characteristics.
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
349
Wheels and Tires
The traction grades, from highest Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
grades represent the tire’s ability represent higher levels of
to stop on wet pavement as performance on the laboratory
measured under controlled test wheel than the minimum
conditions on specified required by law.
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire Glossary of Tire Terminology
marked C may have poor traction *Tire label: A label showing the
performance. original equipment tire sizes,
Temperature A B C recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
WARNING: The *Tire Identification Number
temperature grade for this tire is (TIN): A number on the sidewall
established for a tire that is of each tire providing information
properly inflated and not about the tire brand and
overloaded. Excessive speed, manufacturing plant, tire size and
underinflation, or excessive date of manufacture. Also referred
loading, either separately or in to as DOT code.
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure. *Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
The temperature grades are A *Standard load: A class of
(the highest), B and C, P-metric or Metric tires designed
representing the tire’s resistance to carry a maximum load at set
to the generation of heat and its pressure. For example: For
ability to dissipate heat when P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
tested under controlled conditions for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar).
on a specified indoor laboratory Increasing the inflation pressure
test wheel. Sustained high beyond this pressure will not
temperature can cause the increase the tire’s load carrying
material of the tire to degenerate capability.
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden *Extra load: A class of P-metric
tire failure. The grade C or Metric tires designed to carry a
corresponds to a level of heavier maximum load at 42 psi
performance which all passenger (2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
car tires must meet under the pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
350
Wheels and Tires
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of Information Contained on the

air pressure. Tire Sidewall
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a Both United States and Canada
standard unit of air pressure. Federal regulations require tire
*Cold tire pressure: The tire manufacturers to place
pressure when the vehicle has standardized information on the
been stationary and out of direct sidewall of all tires. This
sunlight for an hour or more and information identifies and
prior to the vehicle being driven for describes the fundamental
1 mi (1.6 km). characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
*Recommended inflation Identification Number for safety
pressure: The cold inflation standard certification and in case
pressure found on the Safety of a recall.
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge Information on P Type Tires
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch E
post, next to the driver's seating C D F
position), or Tire Label located on G
the B-Pillar or the edge of the
B
H
driver door.
A
* B-pillar: The structural member I
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim. J
M
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
L
K
the perimeter of the tire that E142543
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle. P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
*Rim: The metal support (wheel) rating. The definitions of these
for a tire or a tire and tube items are listed below. (Note that
assembly upon which the tire the tire size, load index and speed
beads are seated. rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
351
Wheels and Tires
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated G. H: Indicates the tire's speed

by the Tire and Rim Association, rating. The speed rating denotes
that may be used for service on the speed at which a tire is
cars, sport utility vehicles, designed to be driven for extended
minivans and light trucks. Note: If periods of time under a standard
your tire size does not begin with condition of load and inflation
a letter this may mean it is pressure. The tires on your vehicle
designated by either the European may operate at different
Tire and Rim Technical conditions for load and inflation
Organization or the Japan Tire pressure. These speed ratings may
Manufacturing Association. need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
B. 215: Indicates the nominal ratings range from 81 mph
width of the tire in millimeters (130 km/h) to 186 mph
from sidewall edge to sidewall (299 km/h). These ratings are
edge. In general, the larger the listed in the following chart.
number, the wider the tire.
Note: You may not find this
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio information on all tires because it
which gives the tire's ratio of is not required by federal law.
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire. Letter Speed rating
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim rating
diameter in inches. If you change M 81 mph (130 km/h)
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the N 87 mph (140 km/h)
new wheel diameter.
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to R 106 mph (171 km/h)
how much weight a tire can carry. S 112 mph (180 km/h)
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not, T 118 mph (190 km/h)
contact a local tire dealer.
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it H 130 mph (210 km/h)
is not required by federal law. V 149 mph (240 km/h)
352
Wheels and Tires
Letter Speed rating J. Tire Ply Composition and

rating Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
W 168 mph (270 km/h) layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
Y 186 mph (299 km/h) manufacturers also must indicate
Note: For tires with a maximum the ply materials in the tire and the
speed capability over 149 mph sidewall, which include steel,
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers nylon, polyester, and others.
sometimes use the letters ZR. For K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
those with a maximum speed maximum load in kilograms and
capability over 186 mph (299 pounds that can be carried by the
km/h), tire manufacturers always tire. See the Safety Compliance
use the letters ZR. Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification door-latch post, or the door edge
Number (TIN): This begins with that meets the door-latch post,
the letters DOT and indicates that next to the driver's seating
the tire meets all federal position), for the correct tire
standards. The next two numbers pressure for your vehicle.
or letters are the plant code L. Treadwear, Traction and
designating where it was Temperature Grades:
manufactured, the next two are
the tire size code and the last four *Treadwear The treadwear grade
numbers represent the week and is a comparative rating based on
year the tire was built. For the wear rate of the tire when
example, the numbers 317 mean tested under controlled conditions
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000, on a specified government test
the numbers go to four digits. For course. For example, a tire graded
example, 2501 means the 25th 150 would wear one and one-half
week of 2001. The numbers in times as well on the government
between are identification codes course as a tire graded 100.
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
353
Wheels and Tires
*Traction: The traction grades, The tire suppliers may have

from highest to lowest are AA, A, additional markings, notes or
B, and C. The grades represent the warnings such as standard load
tire's ability to stop on wet or radial tubeless.
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified Additional Information
government test surfaces of Contained on the Tire Sidewall
asphalt and concrete. A tire for LT Type Tires
marked C may have poor traction Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
performance. apply to this type of tire.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and B
C, representing the tire's C
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate A
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation D
B
pressure which can be found on E142544
the Safety Compliance LT type tires have some additional

Certification Label (affixed to information beyond those of P
either the door hinge pillar, type tires; these differences are
door-latch post, or the door edge described below.
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
position), or Tire Label which is by the Tire and Rim Association,
located on the B-Pillar or the edge that is intended for service on light
of the driver’s door. The cold trucks.
inflation pressure should never be B. Load Range and Load
set lower than the recommended Inflation Limits: Indicates the
pressure on the vehicle label. tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
354
Wheels and Tires
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)

at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual, B C D
defined as four tires on the rear E
axle (a total of six or more tires on A
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single, defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
E142545
T type tires have some additional

information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
355
Wheels and Tires
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio control and increased risk of

which gives the tire's ratio of injury. Under-inflation increases
height to width. Numbers of 70 or sidewall flexing and rolling
lower indicate a short sidewall. resistance, resulting in heat
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
R: Indicates a radial type tire. unnecessary tire stress, irregular
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim wear, loss of vehicle control and
diameter in inches. If you change accidents. A tire can lose up to
your wheel size, you will have to half of its air pressure and not
purchase new tires to match the appear to be flat!
new wheel diameter.
You are strongly urged to buy a
Recommended Tire Pressures reliable tire pressure gauge, as
and Inflating Your Tires automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. We
Safe operation of your vehicle recommend the use of a digital or
requires that your tires are dial-type tire pressure gauge
properly inflated. Remember that rather than a stick-type tire
a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure gauge. Use the
pressure without appearing flat. recommended cold inflation
Every day before you drive, check pressure for optimum tire
your tires. If one looks lower than performance and wear.
the others, use a tire gauge to Under-inflation or over-inflation
check the pressure of all tires and may cause uneven treadwear
adjust if required. patterns.
At least once a month and before Always inflate your tires to the
long trips, inspect each tire and recommended inflation pressure
check the tire pressure with a tire even if it is less than the maximum
gauge (including spare, if inflation pressure information
equipped). Inflate all tires to the found on the tire. You will find a
inflation pressure recommended Tire Label containing the
by the manufacturer. manufactures recommended tire
inflation pressure by the tire size
and other important information
WARNING: Under-inflation located on the B-Pillar or the edge
is the most common cause of of the driver’s door).
tire failures and may result in
severe tire cracking, tread
separation or blowout, with
unexpected loss of vehicle
356
Wheels and Tires
The recommended tire inflation Improper or inadequate vehicle

pressure is also found on the maintenance can cause tires to
Safety Compliance Certification wear abnormally. Inspect all your
Label (affixed to either the door tires, including the spare,
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the frequently, and replace them if
door edge that meets the one or more of the following
door-latch on the B-pillar, or on conditions exist:
the edge of the driver’s door.
Tire Wear
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged E142546
in the tread grooves. Check the tire When the tread is worn down to
and valve stems for holes, cracks, one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm),
or cuts that may permit air tires must be replaced to help
leakage and repair or replace the prevent your vehicle from skidding
tire and replace the valve stem. and hydroplaning. Built-in
Inspect the tire sidewalls for treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
cracking, cuts, bruises and other which look like narrow strips of
signs of damage or excessive smooth rubber across the tread
wear. If internal damage to the tire will appear on the tire when the
is suspected, have the tire tread is worn down to one
dismounted and inspected in case sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are When the tire tread wears down
damaged or show signs of to the same height as these wear
excessive wear should not be used bars, the tire is worn out and must
because they are more likely to be replaced.
blow out or fail.
357
Wheels and Tires
Damage U.S. DOT Tire Identification

Number
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such Both United States and Canada
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls, Federal regulations require tire
cracks in the tread groove and manufacturers to place
separation in the tread or standardized information on the
sidewall). If damage is observed sidewall of all tires. This
or suspected, have the tire information identifies and
inspected by a tire professional. describes the fundamental
Tires can be damaged during characteristics of the tire and also
off-road use, so inspection after provides a U.S. DOT Tire
off-road use is also Identification Number for safety
recommended. standard certification and in case
of a recall.
Age
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
WARNING: Tires degrade all federal standards. The next
over time depending on many two numbers or letters are the
factors such as weather, storage plant code designating where it
conditions, and conditions of use was manufactured, the next two
(load, speed, inflation pressure) are the tire size code and the last
the tires experience throughout four numbers represent the week
their lives. and year the tire was built. For
In general, tires should be example, the numbers 317 mean
replaced after six years the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
regardless of tread wear. the numbers go to four digits. For
However, heat caused by hot example, 2501 means the 25th
climates or frequent high loading week of 2001. The numbers in
conditions can accelerate the between are identification codes
aging process and may require used for traceability. This
tires to be replaced more information is used to contact
frequently. customers if a tire defect requires
You should replace your spare a recall.
tire when you replace the road Tire Replacement
tires or after six years due to Requirements
aging even if it has not been
used. Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
358
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: Only use WARNING: To reduce the

replacement tires and wheels risk of serious injury, when
that are the same size, load mounting replacement tires and
index, speed rating and type wheels, you should not exceed
(such as P-metric versus the maximum pressure indicated
LT-metric or all-season versus on the sidewall of the tire to set
all-terrain) as those originally the beads without additional
provided by Ford. The precautions listed below. If the
recommended tire and wheel beads do not seat at the
size may be found on either the maximum pressure indicated,
Safety Compliance Certification re-lubricate and try again.
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or WARNING: For a mounting
the door edge that meets the pressure more than 20 psi
door-latch post, next to the (1.38 bar) greater than the
driver's seating position), or the maximum pressure, a Ford
Tire Label which is located on dealer or other tire service
the B-Pillar or edge of the professional should do the
driver's door. If this information mounting.
is not found on these labels, then
you should contact your WARNING: Always inflate
authorized dealer as soon as steel carcass tires with a remote
possible. Use of any tire or wheel air fill with the person inflating
not recommended by Ford can standing at a minimum of 12 ft
affect the safety and (3.66 m) away from the wheel
performance of your vehicle, and tire assembly.
which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle WARNING: When inflating
control, vehicle rollover, personal the tire for mounting pressures
injury and death. up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater
than the maximum pressure on
the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
• Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
• Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
359
Wheels and Tires
• Stand at a minimum of 12 ft Safety Practices

(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
• Use both eye and ear WARNING: If your vehicle
protection. is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do
not rapidly spin the tires;
Important: Remember to replace spinning the tires can tear the
the wheel valve stems when the tire and cause an explosion. A
road tires are replaced on your tire can explode in as little as
vehicle. three to five seconds.
It is recommended that the two
front tires or two rear tires WARNING: Do not spin the
generally be replaced as a pair if wheels at over 34 mph
the worn tires still have usable (55 km/h). The tires may fail and
depth. injure a passenger or bystander.
To avoid potential Four-Wheel
Drive (4WD) malfunction or Driving habits have a great deal
(4WD) system damage, it is to do with your tire mileage and
recommended to replace all four safety.
tires rather than mixing *Observe posted speed limits
significantly worn tires with new
tires. *Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
The tire pressure sensors mounted *Avoid potholes and objects on
in the wheels (originally installed the road
on your vehicle) are not designed *Do not run over curbs or hit the
to be used in aftermarket wheels. tire against a curb when parking
The use of wheels or tires not Highway Hazards
recommended may affect the
operation of your tire pressure No matter how carefully you drive,
monitoring system. there is always the possibility that
If the tire pressure monitoring you may eventually have a flat tire
system indicator is flashing, your on the highway. Drive slowly to the
system is malfunctioning. Your closest safe area out of traffic.
replacement tire might be This may further damage the flat
incompatible with your tire tire, but your safety is more
pressure monitoring system, or important.
some component of the system
may be damaged.
360
Wheels and Tires
If you feel a sudden vibration or Tire Rotation

ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately WARNING: If the tire label
reduce your speed. Drive with shows different tire pressures for
caution until you can safely pull the front and rear tires and the
off the road. Stop and inspect the vehicle has a tire pressure
tires for damage. If a tire is monitoring system, then you
under-inflated or damaged, need to update the settings for
deflate it, remove wheel and the system sensors. Always
replace it with your spare tire and perform the system reset
wheel. If you cannot detect a procedure after tire rotation. If
cause, have the vehicle towed to you do not reset the system, it
the nearest repair facility or tire may not provide a low tire
dealer to have the vehicle pressure warning when
inspected. necessary.
Tire and Wheel Alignment Note: If your tires show uneven
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or wear, ask an authorized dealer to
pothole can cause the front end check for and correct any wheel
of your vehicle to become misalignment, tire imbalance or
misaligned or cause damage to mechanical problem involved
your tires. If your vehicle seems to before tire rotation.
pull to one side when you are Note: Your vehicle may be
driving, the wheels may be out of equipped with a dissimilar spare
alignment. Have an authorized wheel and tire assembly. A
dealer check the wheel alignment dissimilar spare wheel and tire
periodically. assembly is defined as a spare
Wheel misalignment in the front wheel and tire assembly that is
or the rear can cause uneven and different in brand, size or
rapid treadwear of your tires and appearance from the road tires and
should be corrected by an wheels. If you have a dissimilar
authorized dealer. Front-wheel spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
drive vehicles and those with an intended for temporary use only
independent rear suspension (if and should not be used in a tire
equipped) may require alignment rotation.
of all four wheels. Note: After having your tires
The tires should also be balanced rotated, inflation pressure must be
periodically. An unbalanced tire checked and adjusted to the
and wheel assembly may result in vehicle requirements.
irregular tire wear.
361
Wheels and Tires
Rotating your tires at the ice conditions. Like any tire, summer tire
recommended interval will help performance is affected by tire wear and
your tires wear more evenly, environmental conditions. If you must drive
in those conditions, we recommend using
providing better tire performance Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season or
and longer tire life. Sometimes Snow tires.
irregular tire wear can be
Always store your summer tires indoors at
corrected by rotating the tires. See temperatures above 19°F (-7°C). The
Scheduled Maintenance (page rubber compounds used in these tires lose
476). flexibility and may develop surface cracks
in the tread area at temperatures below
Tire Rotation Diagram 19°F (-7°C). If the tires have been
subjected to 19°F (-7°C) or less, warm
Rear-wheel drive and Four-wheel them in a heated space to at least 41°F
drive vehicles, front tires at left of (5°C) for at least 24 hours before installing
diagram. them on a vehicle, or moving the vehicle
with the tires installed, or checking tire
inflation. Do not place tires near heaters
or heating devices used to warm the room
where the tires are stored. Do not apply
heat or blow heated air directly on the tires.
Always inspect the tires after storage
periods and before use.
USING WINTER TIRES
E142548
USING SUMMER TIRES

Summer tires provide superior
performance on wet and dry roads.
Summer tires do not have the Mud and
Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating on
the tire side wall. Since summer tires do
not have the same traction performance E278852
as All-season or Snow tires, we do not
recommend using summer tires when Inflate the winter tires to the same tire
temperatures drop to about 45°F (7°C) or pressures as those listed in the tire
below (depending on tire wear and pressures table.
environmental conditions) or in snow and
362
Wheels and Tires
Only use snow chains on rear wheels.

WARNING: Snow tires must be the Install snow chains in pairs. Do not use
same size, load index and speed rating self-tensioning snow chains.
as those originally provided by Ford. Use Only use snow chains on the following
of any tire or wheel not recommended specified tire sizes:
by Ford can affect the safety and
• 255/60R18
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of • Only install chains that are 10 mm
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or less.
and death. Additionally, the use of • 255/65R18
non-recommended tires and wheels can • Only install chains that are 10 mm
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer or less.
case or power transfer unit failure.
Follow the Ford recommended tire • 265/60R18
inflation pressure found on the Safety • Only install chains that are 10 mm
Compliance Certification Label (on the or less.
door hinge pillar, door latch post or the • 255/55R20
door edge that meets the door latch
post, next to the driver seat), or Tire • Only install chains that are 10 mm
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the or less.
driver door. Failure to follow the tire We recommend you use steel wheels of
pressure recommendations can cause the same size and specification if snow
uneven treadwear patterns and chains are required because chains may
adversely affect the way your vehicle chip aluminum wheels.
handles.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and traction devices:
USING SNOW CHAINS • If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Purchase snow chains from a
WARNING: Do not exceed 30 mph manufacturer that clearly labels body
(50 km/h). Failure to follow this to tire dimension restrictions.
instruction could result in the loss of • When driving with snow chains do not
control of your vehicle, personal injury or exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) or the
death. maximum speed recommended by the
chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
WARNING: Do not use snow chains
on snow-free roads. • Drive cautiously. If you hear the snow
chains rub or bang against the vehicle,
WARNING: Only fit snow chains to stop and tighten them. If this does not
specified tires. work, remove the snow chains to
prevent vehicle damage.
WARNING: If your vehicle is fitted • Remove the snow chains when they
with wheel trims, remove them before are no longer needed. Do not use snow
fitting snow chains. chains on dry roads.
363
Wheels and Tires
• If a temporary spare wheel is mounted • Use snow chains that fit against the
on your vehicle, do not use snow chains sidewall of the tire to prevent the
on the axle with the temporary spare chains from touching the wheel rims
wheel. or suspension, see following
illustration.
E292547
Note: You should only use tire sealants in

If you have any questions regarding snow
roadside emergencies as they may cause
chains, please contact your authorized
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
dealer.
system sensor.
Note: If the tire pressure monitoring system
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING sensor becomes damaged, it may not
SYSTEM function.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
E139232
WARNING: The tire pressure monthly when cold and inflated

monitoring system is not a substitute for to the inflation pressure recommended by
manually checking tire pressures. You the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
should periodically check tire pressures placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
using a pressure gauge. Failure to your vehicle has tires of a different size
correctly maintain tire pressures could than the size indicated on the vehicle
increase the risk of tire failure, loss of placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
control, vehicle rollover and personal should determine the proper tire inflation
injury. pressure for those tires).
364
Wheels and Tires
As an added safety feature, your vehicle This device complies with Part 15 of the
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure FCC Rules and with License exempt RSS
Monitoring System (TPMS) that Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale is subject to the following two conditions:
when one or more of your tires is 1. This device may not cause harmful
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, interference, and
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check 2. This device must accept any
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate interference received, including
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a interference that may cause undesired
significantly under-inflated tire causes the operation.
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the WARNING: Changes or
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. modifications not expressively approved
Please note that the TPMS is not a could void the user's authority to operate
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain radio certification number only signifies
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation that Industry Canada technical
has not reached the level to trigger specifications were met.
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale. Changing Tires With a Tire
Your vehicle has also been equipped with Pressure Monitoring System
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
E142549
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
for a variety of reasons, including the
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
installation of replacement or alternate
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
the TPMS from functioning properly.
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
Always check the TPMS malfunction
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
care when changing the tire to avoid
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
damaging the sensor.
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function You should always have your tires serviced
properly. by an authorized dealer.
365
Wheels and Tires
Check the tire pressure periodically (at the light is illuminated, your tires are
least monthly) using an accurate tire under-inflated and need to be inflated to
gauge. See When Inflating Your Tires in the manufacturer’s recommended tire
this chapter. pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
Understanding Your Tire Pressure still needs to be checked.
Monitoring System
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
E250820
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
The tire pressure monitoring system When You Believe Your System is Not
measures pressure in your road tires and Operating Properly
sends the tire pressure readings to your
The main function of the tire pressure
vehicle. You can view the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
readings through the information display.
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
See General Information (page 115). The
the event the system is no longer capable
low tire pressure warning light will turn on
of functioning as intended. See the
if the tire pressure is significantly low. Once
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
366
Wheels and Tires
Low tire pressure

Possible cause Customer action required
warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pres-

sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
Tire(s) under-inflated as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
Solid warning light Spare tire in use
description on how the system functions,
see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
is Installed in this section.
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
TPMS malfunction
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
On vehicles with different front and rear
tire pressures, the system must be
Tire rotation without
retrained following every tire rotation.
sensor training
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Reset procedure later in this section.
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
Spare tire in use
description on how the system functions,
Flashing warning see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
light is Installed in this section.
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
TPMS malfunction
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
367
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset

Procedure
WARNING: Do not use the tire

pressure displayed in the information WARNING: To determine the
display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure required pressure(s) for your vehicle, see
to follow this instruction could result in the Safety Compliance Certification
personal injury or death. Label (on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post or the door edge that
When putting air into your tires (such as at meets the door-latch post, next to the
a gas station or in your garage), the tire driver seat) or the Tire Label on the
pressure monitoring system may not B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door.
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires. Note: You need to perform the tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure after
It may take up to two minutes of driving
each tire rotation.
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the To provide the vehicle's load carrying
recommended inflation pressure. capability, some vehicles require different
recommended tire pressures in the front
How Temperature Affects Your Tire tires as compared to the rear tires. The tire
Pressure pressure monitoring system equipped on
these vehicles is designed to illuminate the
The tire pressure monitoring system
low tire pressure warning light at two
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
different pressures; one for the front tires
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
and one for the rear tires.
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa) Since tires need to be rotated to provide
from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is consistent performance and maximum tire
stationary overnight with the outside life, the tire pressure monitoring system
temperature significantly lower than the needs to know when the tires are rotated
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may to determine which set of tires are on the
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of front and which are on the rear. With this
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This information, the system can detect and
lower pressure value may be detected by properly warn of low tire pressures.
the tire pressure monitoring system as System reset tips:
being significantly lower than the
recommended inflation pressure and
activate the system warning light for low
tire pressure. If the low tire pressure
warning light is on, visually check each tire
to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check
the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire
is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle
to the nearest location where air can be
added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to
the recommended inflation pressure.
368
Wheels and Tires
• To reduce the chances of interference 5. Train the tire pressure monitoring

from another vehicle, perform the system sensors in the tires using the
system reset procedure at least 3 ft following system reset sequence
(1 m) away from another Ford Motor starting with the left front tire in the
Company vehicle undergoing the following clockwise order: Left front -
system reset procedure at the same driver side front tire, Right front -
time. passenger side front tire, Right rear -
• Do not wait more than two minutes passenger side rear tire, Left rear -
between resetting each tire sensor or driver side rear tire.
the system can time-out and you have 6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
to repeat the entire procedure on all stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
four wheels. air pressure until the horn sounds.
• A double horn sounds indicating the Note: The single horn tone confirms that
need to repeat the procedure. the sensor identification code has been
learned by the module for this position. If a
Performing the System Reset Procedure double horn is heard, the reset procedure
Read the entire procedure before was unsuccessful, and you must repeat it.
attempting. 7. Remove the valve cap from the valve
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph stem on the right front tire. Decrease
(32 km/h) for at least two minutes, the air pressure until the horn sounds.
then park in a safe location where you 8. Remove the valve cap from the valve
can easily get to all four tires and have stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the
access to an air pump. air pressure until the horn sounds.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and 9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
keep the key in the ignition. stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position air pressure until the horn sounds.
with the engine off. Training is complete after the horn
sounds for the last tire trained, driver
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off side rear tire, the system indicator
three times. You must accomplish this stops flashing, and a message shows
within 10 seconds. If you successfully in the information display.
enter the reset mode, the horn sounds
once, the system indicator flashes and 10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn
a message shows in the information beeps are heard, the reset procedure
display. If this does not occur, please was unsuccessful and you must
try again starting at step 2. If after repeat it. If after repeating the
repeated attempts to enter the reset procedure and two short beeps are
mode, the horn does not sound, the heard when the ignition is turned to
system indicator does not flash and no off, seek assistance from your
message shows in the information authorized dealer.
display, seek service from your
authorized dealer.
369
Wheels and Tires
11. Set all four tires to the recommended Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
air pressure as indicated on the Assembly Information
Safety Compliance Certification
Label, affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door WARNING: Failure to follow these
edge that meets the door-latch post, guidelines could result in an increased
next to the driver seating position or risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or
Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or death.
the edge of the driver door.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
WARNING: If the tire pressure is the same size and type as the road tires
monitor sensor becomes damaged it and wheels that were originally provided
may not function. by us. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, you should replace it rather
Note: You should only use tire sealants in than repair it.
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
system sensor. is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system appearance from the road tires and wheels
indicator light illuminates when the spare and can be one of three types:
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels 1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
equipped with tire pressure monitoring begins with the letter T for tire size and
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle. may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall.
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually 2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
decrease your speed. Hold the steering on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
place on the side of the road. TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the When driving with one of the dissimilar
tire pressure monitoring system sensors. spare tires listed above, do not:
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System • Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
(page 364). Replace the spare tire with a • Load the vehicle beyond maximum
road tire as soon as possible. During vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have Compliance Label.
the authorized dealer inspect the tire
pressure monitoring system sensor for • Tow a trailer.
damage. • Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
370
Wheels and Tires
• Use commercial car washing When driving with the full-size dissimilar
equipment. spare wheel and tire assembly additional
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire. caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can • Driving vehicles equipped with a
lead to impairment of the following: camper body.
• Handling, stability and braking • Driving vehicles with a load on the
performance. cargo rack.
• Comfort and noise. Drive cautiously when using a full-size
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs. dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability. Tire Change Procedure
• Four-wheel driving capability.
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without WARNING: The jack supplied with
label on wheel. this vehicle is only intended for changing
When driving with the full-size dissimilar wheels. Do not use the vehicle jack other
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not: than when you are changing a wheel in
an emergency.
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare WARNING: Check that the vehicle
wheel and tire assembly at a time. jack is not damaged or deformed and
• Use commercial car washing the thread is lubricated and clean.
equipment.
WARNING: To help prevent your
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle from moving when changing a
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
wheel, shift the transmission into park
and tire assembly.
(P), set the parking brake and use an
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare appropriate block or wheel chock to
wheel and tire assembly can lead to secure the wheel diagonally opposite to
impairment of the following: the wheel being changed. For example,
• Handling, stability and braking when changing the front left wheel,
performance. place an appropriate block or wheel
chock on the right rear wheel.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs. WARNING: Always use the jack
• Winter weather driving capability. provided as original equipment with your
vehicle. If using a jack other than the one
• Wet weather driving capability. provided, make sure the jack capacity is
• Four-wheel driving capability. adequate for the vehicle weight,
including any vehicle cargo or
modifications. If you are unsure if the jack
capacity is adequate, contact the
authorized dealer.
371
Wheels and Tires
Note: No maintenance or additional

WARNING: Do not work on your lubrication of your jack is required over the
vehicle when the jack is the only support service life of your vehicle.
as your vehicle could slip off the jack. 1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
Failure to follow this instruction could brake and switch on the hazard
result in personal injury or death. flashers.
2. Apply the parking brake, place the
WARNING: Use only the specified transmission in park (P) or reverse (R)
jacking points. If you use other positions, for manual transmission. Turn the
you may damage the body, steering, engine off.
suspension, engine, braking system or
the fuel lines. 3. If your vehicle has air suspension, use
the touch screen to switch on the Air
WARNING: Never place anything Suspension Service Mode prior to
between the vehicle jack and your jacking.
vehicle.
WARNING: Never place anything

between the vehicle jack and the ground.
WARNING: Park your vehicle so

that you do not obstruct the flow of
traffic or place yourself in any danger and
set up a warning triangle.
WARNING: Do not attempt to

change a tire on the side of the vehicle
close to moving traffic. Pull far enough E142551
off the road to avoid the danger of being
4. Block the wheel diagonally opposite
hit when operating the jack or changing
the flat tire. For example, if the left
the wheel.
front tire is flat, block the right rear
wheel.
Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
E166722
372
Wheels and Tires
8. Turn the hex nut on the jack

counterclockwise to remove the lug
wrench from jack. This lowers the jack
and loosens the mechanical lock.
E181744
9. Unfold the wrench for use.
E288598
5. Unfold the third row seat if it is in the

stowed position, then remove the
carpeted cargo area to access the
spare tire and jack storage
compartment.
6. Turn the wing nut securing the spare
tire counterclockwise, remove the wing E288597
nut.
7. Remove the spare tire, jack and wrench 10. Remove the strap from the jack.
from the spare tire storage
compartment.
E175694
373
Wheels and Tires
2
E307859
13. Place the jack at the jacking point

next to the tire which you are
changing. Turn the lug wrench handle
clockwise until the flat tire is
completely off the ground.
E181745
11. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half

turn counterclockwise, but do not
remove them until the flat tire is
raised off the ground.
E201156
14. Remove the lug nuts with the lug

E145908
wrench.
12. Find the jacking points shown here, 15. Replace the flat tire with the spare
small arrow-shaped marks on the tire, making sure the valve stem is
sills show the location of the jacking facing outward.
points. 16. Install the lug nuts snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts
until the vehicle is lowered.
17. Turn the wrench handle
counterclockwise to lower the vehicle
completely.
374
Wheels and Tires
Stowing the flat tire

You cannot store the full-sized road wheel
1 in the temporary spare tire well.
1. Find the flat tire retainer strap tucked
inside the jack channel. Lower the
3 4 carpeted load floor.
2. Stow the flat tire in the cargo area on
the load floor with the wheel facing up.
Secure the flat tire with the retainer
strap by following the next steps.
5 2
E306781
18. Remove the jack and fully tighten the

lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page
376).
19. If you enabled the Air Suspension
Service Mode, switch the mode off
prior to driving. E142906
20. Remove the wheel blocks. 3. Locate the rear left side and right side
Stowing the jack cargo tie-down rings. Push the loop end
of the retainer strap through one cargo
tie-down ring. Thread the non-loop end
through the loop.
4. Weave the retainer strap through the
wheel openings.
E176165
1. To store the folded wrench on the jack, E294325

engage the bracket of the jack base
and the lug wrench pin, swing the
wrench upwards, adjust jack height
until the wrench hook engages the hole
on jack. Tighten the hex nut clockwise
by hand until secure.
2. Place the jack in the spare tire
compartment, install the wing nut and
tighten clockwise by hand until secure.
375
Wheels and Tires
5. Locate the front cargo tie-down in the

opposite rear corner of the cargo area.
Thread the retainer strap through the
tie-down and pull tight.
E143746
6. Secure by tying a 2-half hitch knot.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign
materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel
hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of
the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel
mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while
your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
Bolt size lb.ft (Nm)

*
M14 x 1.5 150 lb.ft (204 Nm)

*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only our
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
376
Wheels and Tires
E145950
A Wheel pilot bore

Inspect the wheel pilot bore and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
377
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
Engine 2.3L EcoBoost
Compression ratio. 10:1

Displacement. 138 in³ (2,261 cm³)
Firing order. 1-3-4-2
Ignition system. Coil on plug
Spark plug gap. 0.028–0.031 in (0.7–0.8 mm)
Drivebelt Routing
2.3L EcoBoost Engine
E293908
A. Long drivebelt is on first pulley

groove closest to engine.
B. Short drivebelt is on second
pulley groove farthest from
engine.
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.0L, ST
Item Description
Configuration. 60 degree V6
3.36 in (85.4 mm) bore x 3.39 in (86 mm)
Bore x stroke.
stroke
378
Item Description
Compression ratio. 9.5:1

Firing order. 1-4-2-5-3-6
Horsepower. 1
400 hp
Torque. 1
415 lb.ft
Redline. 6500 RPM
Valvetrain. Overhead cam - roller finger followers
Ignition. Coil on plug
Throttle body. 2.4 in (60 mm)
Pistons. Cast aluminum
Crankshaft. Forged steel
Connecting rods. Forged steel
Induction. Twin turbocharged
Maximum Boost. 18.0 psi (124 kPa)
Dual 2.16 in (55 mm) exhaust with quad
Exhaust system.
3 in (76 mm) chrome tips
1 When using premium fuel.
Drivebelt Routing
E297178
379
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.0L
Engine 3.0L

Drivebelt Routing
E297178
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.3L, GASOLINE
Engine 3.3L

380
Drivebelt Routing A. Long drivebelt is on second

pulley groove farthest from
engine.
B. Short drivebelt is on first pulley
groove closest to engine.
E288323
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.3L, HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE

(HEV)
Engine 3.3L HEV

Drivebelt Routing
E291364
381
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
Component Motorcraft Part Number
Air filter element. FA-1884

Battery. BAGM-48H6-760
Cabin air filter. FP-100
1 FL-910-S
Engine oil filter.
Spark plug. SP-594
Rear window wiper blade. WW-1110
Windshield wiper blade. WW-2616 (driver side)
WW-2113 (passenger side)
1 If
a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are

available at your authorized dealer or at
www.fordparts.com. We engineer these
parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed
our specifications. Use of other parts could
impact vehicle performance, emissions
and durability. Your warranty could be void
for any damage related to use of other
parts.
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.0L

1 FL-2062-A
Engine oil filter.
Spark plug. SP-594
382

1 If

available at your authorized dealer or at
www.fordparts.com. We engineer these
our specifications. Use of other parts could
impact vehicle performance, emissions
parts.
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.3L

1 FL-500-S
Engine oil filter.
Spark plug. SP-520
1 If

available at your authorized dealer or at VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
www.fordparts.com. We engineer these NUMBER
our specifications. Use of other parts could The vehicle identification number is on the
impact vehicle performance, emissions left-hand side of the instrument panel.
parts.
383
C Make, vehicle line, series, body

type.
D Engine type.
E Check digit.
F Model year.
G Assembly plant.
H Production sequence number.
CAPACITIES AND
SPECIFICATIONS - 2.3L
ECOBOOST™
E142476
Use oil and fluid that meets the defined
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is specification and viscosity grade.
representative of your vehicle identification
If you do not use oil and fluid that meets
number.
the defined specification and viscosity
The Vehicle Identification Number contains grade, it could result in:
the following information: • Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Reduced brake performance.
Air Conditioning System
E142477 WARNING: The air conditioning

refrigerant system contains refrigerant
A World manufacturer identifier. under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
B Brake system, Gross Vehicle conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices the air conditioning refrigerant system
and their locations. can cause personal injury.
Capacities
Variant Refrigerant Refrigerant Oil
All. 35 oz (0.99 kg) 5.41 fl oz (160 ml)
384
Materials
Name Specification
R-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.) WSS-M17B21-A

R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.) WSS-M2C300-A2
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
Automatic Transmission
Note: Only use MERCON® ULV
transmission fluid for automatic
transmissions that require MERCON® ULV
transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid
could cause transmission damage.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 1
12.6 qt (11.9 L)
1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis- WSS-M2C949-A, MERCON® ULV

sion Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid / MERCON® ULV huile pour boîtes auto-
matique Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-12-QULV(U.S. & Canada)
385
Engine Coolant
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Without trailer towing. 14.1 qt (13.3 L)

With trailer towing. 15.2 qt (14.4 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/ WSS-M97B57-A2

Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
An oil that displays this symbol conforms

Engine Oil to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that display
the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines.
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that your
E142732
vehicle warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Variant Including the Oil Filter
All. 5.2 qt (4.9 L)
386
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor WSS-M2C961-A1

Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for

Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
Name Specification
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend WSS-M2C963-A1
E240523
387
Note: If you use your vehicle regularly above

the altitude of 7,500 ft (2,286 m) and under
the temperature of -4.0°F (-20°C), it is
oil.
Fuel Tank
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 17.9 gal (67.8 L)
Grease
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease(U.S.) ESA-M1C75-B

Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease / Graisse
longue durée de qualité première Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XG-1-E1(U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray(U.S.) ESB-M1C93-B
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray / Graisse
tout usage en aérosol Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-5-A(U.S. & Canada)
Hydraulic Brake System

Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor WSS-M6C65-A2

Vehicle Brake Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile
haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-20(U.S. & Canada)
388
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low Locks

Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid could cause reduced brake
performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials could result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant(U.S.) -

Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid / Liquide dégrippant
XL-1(U.S.)
CXC-51-A(Canada)
Transfer Case
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Four-wheel drive. 1.1 qt (1 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission WSS-M2C938-AMERCON® LV,

Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid / Huile pour boîte automatique MERCON® LV
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
389
Front Axle
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Four-wheel drive. 0.6 qt (0.6 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle WSL-M2C192-A

Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant / Lubrifiant synthétique pour pont arrière
SAE 75W-140 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W140-QL(U.S.)
CXY-75W140-1L(Canada)
Rear Axle
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Two-wheel drive. 1.9 qt (1.8 L)

Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic WSS-M2C942-A

Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute
qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
390
Washer Reservoir
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. Fill as required.
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concen- WSS-M14P19-A

trate with Bitterant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motor-
craft®(Canada)
ZC-32-B2(U.S.)
CXC-37-F/M(Canada)
• Reduced engine performance.

CAPACITIES AND • Reduced fuel economy.
SPECIFICATIONS - 3.0L • Reduced brake performance.
Use oil and fluid that meets the defined Air Conditioning System
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil and fluid that meets
WARNING: The air conditioning
the defined specification and viscosity
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
grade, it could result in:
under high pressure. Only qualified
• Component damage that your vehicle personnel should service the air
warranty does not cover. conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
• Longer engine cranking periods. the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury.
Capacities
With rear air conditioning. 35 oz (0.99 kg) 5.41 fl oz (160 ml)

Without rear air condi- 24 oz (0.68 kg) 3.04 fl oz (90 ml)
tioning.
391
Materials
Name Specification

YN-33-A(U.S.)
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 1
12.6 qt (11.9 L)
Materials
Name Specification

sion Fluid(U.S.)
392
Engine Coolant
Capacities
Variant Quantity
With rear heat. 18.0 qt (17 L)

Without rear heat. 15.5 qt (14.7 L)
Materials
Name Specification

Coolant(U.S.)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)

ILSAC.
engines.
E142732
Capacities
All. 6.0 qt (5.7 L)
393
Materials
Name Specification

Oil(U.S.)
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)

Materials
Name Specification
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend WSS-M2C963-A1
E240523
394

oil.
Fuel Tank
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 20.2 gal (76.5 L)
Grease
Materials
Name Specification

craft®(Canada)

Materials
Name Specification

395

Materials
Name Specification

XL-1(U.S.)
CXC-51-A(Canada)
Transfer Case
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Materials
Name Specification

Fluid(U.S.)
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
396
Front Axle
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Materials
Name Specification

Lubricant(U.S.)
XY-75W140-QL(U.S.)
Rear Axle
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 1.9 qt (1.8 L)
Materials
Name Specification

397
Washer Reservoir
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Materials
Name Specification

craft®(Canada)
ZC-32-B2(U.S.)
CXC-37-F/M(Canada)

CAPACITIES AND • Reduced engine performance.
SPECIFICATIONS - 3.3L, • Reduced fuel economy.
GASOLINE • Reduced brake performance.
Use oil and fluid that meets the defined Air Conditioning System
If you do not use oil and fluid that meets WARNING: The air conditioning
the defined specification and viscosity refrigerant system contains refrigerant
grade, it could result in: under high pressure. Only qualified
• Component damage that your vehicle personnel should service the air
warranty does not cover. conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
• Longer engine cranking periods. the air conditioning refrigerant system
Capacities

tioning.
398
Materials
Name Specification

YN-33-A(U.S.)
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 1
12.6 qt (11.9 L)
Materials
Name Specification

sion Fluid(U.S.)
399
Engine Coolant
Capacities
Variant Quantity
With rear heat. 15.2 qt (14.4 L)

Materials
Name Specification

Coolant(U.S.)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)

ILSAC.
engines.
E142732
Capacities
All. 6.0 qt (5.7 L)
400
Materials
Name Specification

Oil(U.S.)
XO-5W20-Q1SP(U.S.)

Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Motor WSS-M2C962-A1

Oil(U.S.)
(Canada)
XO-0W20-QFS(U.S.)
E240522
401

oil.
Fuel Tank
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 20.2 gal (76.5 L)
Grease
Materials
Name Specification

craft®(Canada)

Materials
Name Specification

402

Materials
Name Specification

XL-1(U.S.)
CXC-51-A(Canada)
Transfer Case
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Materials
Name Specification

Fluid(U.S.)
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
403
Front Axle
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Materials
Name Specification

Lubricant(U.S.)
XY-75W140-QL(U.S.)
Rear Axle
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 1.7 qt (1.6 L)
Materials
Name Specification

404
Washer Reservoir
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Materials
Name Specification

craft®(Canada)
ZC-32-B2(U.S.)
CXC-37-F/M(Canada)

CAPACITIES AND • Reduced engine performance.
SPECIFICATIONS - 3.3L, • Reduced fuel economy.
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE • Reduced brake performance.
(HEV) Air Conditioning System
Use oil and fluid that meets the defined
WARNING: The air conditioning
If you do not use oil and fluid that meets refrigerant system contains refrigerant
the defined specification and viscosity under high pressure. Only qualified
grade, it could result in: personnel should service the air
• Component damage that your vehicle conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
warranty does not cover. the air conditioning refrigerant system
• Longer engine cranking periods.
Capacities

tioning.
405
Materials
Name Specification

YN-33-A(U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant POE Oil(U.S.) WSS-M2C31-B2
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant POE Oil / Huile
POE pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 1
13.7 qt (13 L)
Materials
Name Specification

sion Fluid(U.S.)
406
Engine Coolant
Capacities
Variant Quantity
With rear heat. 16.4 qt (15.5 L)

HEV low temperature cooling loop (battery 4.6 qt (4.4 L)
and electric motor electronics).
Materials
Name Specification

Coolant(U.S.)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)

ILSAC.
engines.
E142732
Capacities
All. 6.0 qt (5.7 L)
407
Materials
Name Specification

Oil(U.S.)
XO-5W20-Q1SP(U.S.)

Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Motor WSS-M2C962-A1

Oil(U.S.)
(Canada)
XO-0W20-QFS(U.S.)
E240522
408

oil.
Fuel Tank
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 18.0 gal (68.1 L)
Grease
Materials
Name Specification

craft®(Canada)

Materials
Name Specification

409

Materials
Name Specification

XL-1(U.S.)
CXC-51-A(Canada)
Transfer Case
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Materials
Name Specification

Fluid(U.S.)
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
410
Front Axle
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Materials
Name Specification

Lubricant(U.S.)
XY-75W140-QL(U.S.)
Rear Axle
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 1.9 qt (1.8 L)
Materials
Name Specification

411
Washer Reservoir
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Materials
Name Specification

craft®(Canada)
ZC-32-B2(U.S.)
CXC-37-F/M(Canada)
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART

Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
the proper lamp performance, light
brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the
lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.
Exterior Lamps
Lamp Specification Power (Watt)
Front side marker lamps. LED. LED.

Front signature lamps. LED. LED.
Front direction indicator. LED. LED.
Daytime running lamps. LED. LED.
Headlamp low beam. LED. LED.
412
Headlamp high beam. LED. LED.

Front fog lamps. LED. LED.
Side direction indicator. LED. LED.
Rear side marker lamp. LED. LED.
Brake and rear lamp. LED. LED.
Central high mounted brake lamp. LED. LED.
Rear direction indicator. 3757NAK, PY27/7W 27
Reversing lamps. W21W 21
License plate lamp. W5W 5
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
All interior lamps. LED. LED.

Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
413
Connected Vehicle
WHAT IS A CONNECTED ENABLING AND DISABLING THE

MODEM
VEHICLE
1. Press Settings.
A connected vehicle has technology that
allows your vehicle to connect to a mobile 2. Press FordPass Connect.
network and for you to access a range of 3. Press Connectivity Settings.
features. When used in conjunction with 4. Switch connectivity features on or off.
the FordPass app, it could allow you to
monitor and control your vehicle further,
for example checking the tire pressures, CONNECTING FORDPASS TO THE
the fuel level and the vehicle location. For MODEM
additional information, refer to the local
Ford website. 1. Make sure that the modem is enabled
using the vehicle settings menu.
2. Open the FordPass app on your device
CONNECTED VEHICLE and log in.
REQUIREMENTS 3. Add your vehicle or select your vehicle
if already added.
Connected service and related feature
functionality requires a compatible vehicle 4. Select the option to activate your
network. vehicle.
Some remote features require additional 5. Make sure that the name on the screen
service activation. Log in to your Ford matches the name shown in your
account for details. Some restrictions, third FordPass account.
party terms and message or data rates 6. Confirm that FordPass account is
may apply. connected to the modem.
CONNECTED VEHICLE CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO

LIMITATIONS A WI-FI NETWORK - VEHICLES
WITH: SYNC 3
Evolving technology, cellular networks, or
regulations could affect functionality and 1. Press Settings.
availability, or continued provision of some
features. These changes could even stop 2. Press Wi-Fi.
some features from functioning. 3. Switch Wi-Fi on.
4. Press View Available Networks.
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO 5. Select an available Wi-Fi network.
A MOBILE NETWORK Note: Enter the network password to
connect to a secure network.
WHAT IS THE MODEM
The modem allows access to a
range of features built into your
vehicle.
414
Connected Vehicle
CONNECTED VEHICLE – TROUBLESHOOTING - VEHICLES WITH:

MODEM
Symptom Possible Cause and Resolution
I cannot confirm the – Modem is not enabled.

connection of my FordPass • Switch connectivity features on.
account to the modem.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to a place where the
network signal is not obstructed.
415
Connected Vehicle
CONNECTED VEHICLE – TROUBLESHOOTING - VEHICLES WITH:

SYNC 3
I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi – Password error.

network. • Enter the correct network password.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Multiple access points in range with the same SSID.
• Use a unique name for your SSID. Do not use the
default name unless it contains a unique identifier,
for example as part of the MAC address.
The Wi-Fi connection – Weak network signal.

disconnects after successful • Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
connection. a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot – Obstructed network signal.

but the network signal • If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position
strength is weak. your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the
Wi-Fi hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
but not on the windshield, position your vehicle so
that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or
open the windows that are facing the hotspot.
and the windshield, open the windows that are
facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the
garage door closed, open the garage door.
I cannot see a network in the – Hidden network.

list of available networks • Make the network visible and try again.
that I expect to see.
416
Connected Vehicle
I cannot see the Wi-Fi – System limitation.

hotspot name when I search • Make sure Wi-Fi hotspot visibility is on.
for Wi-Fi networks on my
cell phone or other device. • The system does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at
this time.
Software downloads take – Weak network signal.

too long. • Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet
connection.
• Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.
The system seems to – No software update available.

connect to a Wi-Fi network – Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance
and the signal strength is of terms and conditions.
excellent but the software
does not update. • Test the connection using another device. If the
network requires a subscription or acceptance of
terms and conditions, contact the network service
provider.
417
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)
CREATING A VEHICLE WI-FI 2. If the portal does not open on your

device, open a website and it redirects
HOTSPOT to the vehicle network carrier’s portal.
You can create a Wi-Fi hotspot in your Note: Secure websites do not redirect.
vehicle and allow devices to connect to it 3. Follow the instructions on the carrier
for access to the Internet. portal to purchase a plan.
Select the settings option on the Note: If you have an active plan, the system
feature bar. does not redirect to the vehicle network
E280315
carrier’s portal when you connect a device.
1. Press FordPass Connect. Visit the vehicle network carrier’s website
2. Press Vehicle Hotspot. to purchase more data.
Note: The vehicle hotspot default setting Note: If data usage information is available
is on. in the vehicle hotspot menu, it is
approximate.
3. Press Settings.
Note: If you carry out a master reset, the
4. Press Wi-Fi visibility. system does not remove your vehicle from
Note: The Wi-Fi Visibility default setting is your vehicle network carrier’s account. To
on. remove your vehicle from the account,
contact your vehicle network carrier.
Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name
Note: The vehicle network carrier provides
and Password Vehicle Hotspot services, subject to your
Select the settings option on the vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage
feature bar. and availability.
E280315
1. Press FordPass Connect. CHANGING THE VEHICLE WI-

2. Press Vehicle Hotspot. FI HOTSPOT NAME OR
3. Press Settings. PASSWORD
Note: The SSID is the hotspot name.
4. Press View Password. feature bar.
E280315
Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi
Hotspot 1. Press FordPass Connect.
2. Press Vehicle Hotspot.
1. On your device, switch Wi-Fi on and
select the hotspot from the list of 3. Press Settings.
available Wi-Fi networks. 4. Press Edit.
2. When prompted, enter the password. 5. Press Change SSID Name.
Purchasing a Data Plan 6. Enter your required SSID.
7. Press Done.
1. Connect a device to the hotspot.
8. Press Change Password.
Note: The vehicle network carrier’s portal
opens on your device. 9. Enter your required password.
10. Press Done.
418
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION hand-held device while driving and

encourage the use of voice-operated
WARNING: Driving while distracted are aware of all applicable local laws
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash that may affect the use of electronic
and injury. We strongly recommend that devices while driving.
device that may take your focus off the Radio Frequencies and Reception
road. Your primary responsibility is the Factors
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Reception Factors
Distance and strength The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Adjusting the Volume

AUDIO UNIT
E286496
Note: Depending on your vehicle option

package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Note: Some features, such as satellite
radio, may not be available in your location.
Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: The touchscreen system controls E265373
most of the audio features.
Turn to adjust the volume.
419
Audio System
Changing Radio Stations In satellite radio mode, press and release

to select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If you select a specific category,
such as jazz, rock or news, press to find the
next or previous station in that category.
DIGITAL RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts, where
available, in addition to the analog
E265696
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
In radio mode, turn to search through the than analog broadcasts with free,
radio frequency band. crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
In satellite radio mode, turn to find the guide to available stations and
previous or next available satellite radio programming, please visit
station. www.hdradio.com.
Switching the Audio Unit On and When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
Off station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
Press and release the button. screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
Using Seek, Fast Forward and The multicast indicator appears in FM
Reverse mode, only, if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
In radio mode, select a frequency band and multicast stations, HD2 through HD7, are
press and release either button. The only available digitally.
system stops at the first station it finds in
that direction.
420
Audio System
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
can access the following functions: preset, the sound mutes before the
• Memory presets allow you to save an digital audio plays, because the system
active channel as a memory preset. has to reacquire the digital signal.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot Note: As with any saved radio station, you
until the sound returns. There is a brief cannot access the saved station if your
mute while the radio saves the station. vehicle is outside the station’s reception
Sound returns when finished. When area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
Station blending When the system first receives a station, aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations, it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible

experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for the accuracy of all audio
streams and data fields.
421
Audio System
Potential Station Issues
Issues Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a
in audio. by the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The
and out. analog and digital audio. reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
There is an audio mute The digital multicast is not No action required. This is
delay when selecting HD2 or available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until
HD3, multicast preset or broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available.
direct tune. decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
Cannot access the HD2 or The previously stored No action required. The
HD3 multicast channels multicast preset or direct station is not available in
when recalling a preset or tune is not available in your your current location.
from a direct tune. current reception area.
Text information does not Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue
match currently playing radio broadcaster. form at website listed
audio. 1
below.
There is no text information Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue
shown for currently selected radio broadcaster. form at website listed
frequency. 1
below.
1 http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under

license from iBiquity Digital Corporation SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts a
trademarks of DTS. Ford and DTS are not variety of music, news, sports, weather,
responsible for the content sent using HD traffic and entertainment satellite radio
Radio technology. Content may be channels. For more information and a
changed, added or deleted at any time at complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
the station owner's discretion. channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada,
or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
422
Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos

real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential Satellite Radio Reception Issues
Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna

clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Factory-installed and aftermarket vehicle structures
including, but not limited to, roof racks and soft top roofs
in a partially open position could reduce reception
performance.
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system could mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
ence interference and the audio system could mute.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service

Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Neither SiriusXM and its affiliates nor Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates will be
liable to you or any third party for any such
modification, suspension or termination.
E208625
423
Audio System
SiriusXM satellite radio is a Satellite Radio Electronic Serial

subscription-based satellite radio service Number (ESN)
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment You need your ESN to activate, modify or
programming. Your factory-installed track your satellite radio account.
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term, Locating Your ESN
which begins on the date of sale or lease 1. Select SiriusXM as the audio source.
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability. 2. Tune to channel 0.
For more information on extended

subscription terms, a service fee is required,
the online media player and a complete
list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,
and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Troubleshooting
Message Condition Action
Acquiring… Radio requires more than No action required. This

two seconds to produce message should disappear
audio for the selected shortly.
channel.
Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module If this message does not
or system failure present. clear shortly, or with an igni-
SIRIUS system failure tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
Invalid Channel The channel is no longer Tune to another channel or
available. choose another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
include this channel. 539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal The signal is lost from the The signal is blocked. When
SiriusXM satellite or Siri- you move into an open area,
usXM tower to your vehicle the signal should return.
antenna.
424
Audio System
Message Condition Action
Updating… Update of channel No action required. The

programming in progress. process may take up to
three minutes.
Questions? Call Your satellite service is no Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
longer available. 539-7474 to resolve
1-888-539-7474 subscription issues.
None found All the channels in the Use the channel guide to
selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip
Check Channel Guide skipped or locked. function on that station.
Subscription Updated SiriusXM has updated the No action required.
channels available for your
vehicle.
USB A
USB PORT

E201595
encourage the use of voice-operated USB C
E301114
425
Audio System
The USB port allows you to plug in media

playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices.
Note: We recommend using only USB-IF
certified cables and adapters. Non-certified
cables and adapters may not work.
Locating the USB Ports

The USB ports may be in the following
locations:
• Inside the media bin.
• Inside the center console.
• On the lower instrument panel.
Note: The number and type of USB ports
may vary depending on your vehicle.
Note: Not all USB ports in your vehicle have
data transfer capabilities. See Auxiliary
Power Points (page 164).
426
SYNC™ 3
GENERAL INFORMATION Using the Touchscreen

encourage the use of voice-operated
devices while driving. E293823
About SYNC A Status bar.

The system allows you to interact with the B Home screen.
entertainment, information and C Clock. See Settings (page 458).
communication systems on your vehicle
using voice commands and a touchscreen. D Outside air temperature.
The system provides easy interaction with E Feature bar.
audio, phone, navigation, mobile apps and
settings. Status Bar
Note: You can switch the system on and
Cell phone microphone muted.
use it for up to an hour without switching
the ignition on.
Note: You can use the system after you Audio system muted.
switch the ignition off for up to 10 minutes
or until you open a door.
Note: For your safety, some features are Software update installed.
speed-dependent. Their use is limited to
when your vehicle speed is less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). Wi-Fi connected.
Cell phone roaming.
Text message received.
427
SYNC™ 3
Automatic crash notification Updating the System

system off.
Updating the System Using a USB Drive
Cell phone network signal
Downloading an Update
strength.
1. Go to the SYNC update page on the
Vehicle data sharing on. local Ford website.
2. Download the update.
Vehicle location sharing on. Note: The website notifies you if an update
is available.
3. Insert a USB drive into your computer.
Vehicle data and vehicle location Note: The USB drive needs to be empty and
sharing on. meet the minimum requirements detailed
on the website.
Wireless charger active.
E263583 4. Follow the instructions provided to
download the update to the USB drive.
Feature Bar Installing an Update

Select to use the radio, a USB, a Note: You can use the system when an
media player or a Bluetooth® installation is in progress.
E100027
device. See Entertainment 1. Disconnect all other USB devices from
(page 435). the USB ports.
Select to adjust climate settings 2. Connect the USB drive with the update
See Climate (page 445). to a USB port.
E283811
Note: Installation starts automatically
Select to make calls and access within 10 minutes.
the phonebook on your cell
phone. See Phone (page 447). Updating the System Using a Wi-Fi
Network Connection
Select to use the navigation
system. See Navigation (page Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network
449).
Select to search for and use feature bar.
E280315
compatible apps on your iOS or
Android device. See Apps (page 1. Select Automatic Updates.
455).
2. Select System Wi-Fi.
Select to adjust system settings. 3. Switch System Wi-Fi on.
See Settings (page 458).
E280315 4. Select Available Wi-Fi Networks.
5. Select an available Wi-Fi network.
Cleaning the Touchscreen
Note: Enter the network password to
See Cleaning the Interior (page 342). connect to a secure network.
428
SYNC™ 3
Switching Automatic System Updates USING VOICE RECOGNITION

On
Select the settings option on the The system allows you to interact with the
feature bar. entertainment, information and
E280315 communication systems on your vehicle
1. Select Automatic Updates. using voice commands. This allows you
to keep your hands on the steering wheel
2. Switch Automatic System Updates and focus on what is in front of you.
on.
Press the voice control button
The system is now set to check for and on the steering wheel and wait
receive system updates when it is E142599 for the voice prompt.
connected to a Wi-Fi network.
Note: Press the voice control button again
Note: You can use the system when a to interrupt a voice prompt and begin
download is in progress. speaking.
Note: If the system is disconnected from Note: Turn the volume control when a voice
the Wi-Fi network when a download is in prompt plays to adjust the volume.
progress, the download continues the next
time the system is connected to a Wi-Fi Note: Press and hold the voice control
network. button on the steering wheel to use Siri on
your iOS device.
Additional Information and The following voice commands are
Assistance designed to help you from any screen:
For additional information and assistance, • List of Commands
we recommend that you contact an • Help
authorized dealer or refer to the local Ford
website. The following tables list some of the more
frequently used voice commands. For a
complete list of voice commands, refer to
our website.
General
Voice Command Description
___ List of Commands 1

Get a list of voice commands for a specific feature.
Cancel Cancel an active voice session.
___ Help 1
Get a list of voice commands for a specific feature.
Go back Return to the previous screen.
Main Menu Go to the main menu.
429
SYNC™ 3
Next Page Go to the next page.

Previous Page Go to the previous page.
1 Add the name of the feature to the command.
Entertainment
Audio Source
Radio Use the radio.

CD Player Use the CD player.
Bluetooth Stereo Use a Bluetooth® device.
USB Use a USB or media player.
Radio
AM Listen to AM radio.
AM ___ 1
Tune to a specific AM frequency.
Sirius Channel ___ 2
Listen to SiriusXM radio.
FM Listen to FM radio.
FM ___ 1
Tune to a specific FM frequency.
1 Addthe radio frequency to two decimal places to the command.
2 Youcan say the Sirius channel name or number such as "Sirius Channel 16" or "Sirius
The Pulse".
430
SYNC™ 3
USB and Media Player
Play Album ___

Play Artist ___
Play Genre ___
Play Playlist ___ Play your music by category.
1
Play Song ___

Play Audiobook ___
Play Podcast ___
Browse All Albums
Browse All Artists
Browse All Audiobooks
Browse All Genres Browse music on a USB device.
Browse All Playlists
Browse All Podcasts
Browse All Songs
Browse Album ___
Browse Artist ___
Browse Audiobook ___
1
Browse your music by category on a USB device.
Browse Genre ___
Browse Playlist ___
Browse Podcast ___
1 Add
an album name, artist name, audiobook name, genre name, playlist name, podcast
name or track name to the command. Say the name exactly as it appears on your device.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for

Climate (If Equipped) climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
You can control the temperature of the setting.
vehicle using voice commands.
431
SYNC™ 3
To adjust the temperature, say:

Voice command Description
Set Temperature ___ Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F

(15.5–29.5°C).
Phone
Pair Phone Pair a cell phone or Bluetooth®-enabled device.

Redial Redial the last number that you dialed.
Dial ___ 1
Dial a number.
Call ___ 2
Call a specific contact from your phonebook.
Call ___ ___ Call a specific contact from your phonebook at a
3
specific location.
Listen to Message Listen to a text message.
Listen to Message ___ Listen to a specific text message from a list of text
messages.
Reply to Message Reply to the last text message.
1 Add the number you want to dial to the command.
2 Add a contact name from your phonebook to the command. Say the first and last name
of your contact exactly as it appears on your device.

3 Add a contact name and location from your phonebook to the command. Say the first
and last name of your contact exactly as it appears on your device.
432
SYNC™ 3
Navigation (If Equipped)

Setting a Destination
Find an Address Enter a destination address. When prompted,

provide the house number, the street and city.
Find a Place Search for a point of interest by name or by category.
Find the Next ___ 1
Search for a nearby point of interest by category.
Find a POI Category 1
Search for a point of interest category.
Drive Home Set your saved home address as your destination.
Drive to Work Set your saved place of work as your destination.
Show Previous Destinations Display and select from a list of previous destina-
tions.
Show Favorites Display and select from a list of favorite destinations.
1 Add a point of interest category or the name of a major brand or chain to the command.
Route Guidance
Cancel Route Cancel the current route.

Detour Select an alternate route.
Repeat Instruction Repeat the last guidance prompt.
Show Route Display an overview of the route.
Show Traffic Display a list of traffic events on your route.
Show Map Display the map on the touchscreen.
North Up Display a two-dimensional map with north toward
the top of the touchscreen.
Heading Up Display a two-dimensional map with the direction
you are traveling toward the top of the touchscreen.
Show 3D Display a three-dimensional map with the direction
you are traveling toward the front.
433
SYNC™ 3
Apps
General
Mobile Applications Start an app. The system prompts you for the app
name.
List Applications Get a list of apps running on your device.
Find Applications Search and connect to apps running on your device.
Active App
___ Help 1
Get a list of voice commands for a specific app.
Exit ___ 1
Close an app.
1 Add an app name to the command.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If Equipped)
Voice Description
command
Show Displays a list of traffic incidents.

Traffic
Show Displays the current weather map.
Weather
Map
Show Fuel Displays a list of fuel prices.
Prices
Show 5 Displays the 5 day weather forecast.
Day Fore-
cast
434
SYNC™ 3
Voice Settings
Voice Settings Go to the voice settings menu.

Interaction Mode Novice Switch long voice prompts on.
Interaction Mode Advanced Switch short voice prompts on.
Phone Confirmation On Switch call confirmation on. The system prompts
you to confirm before making a call.
Phone Confirmation Off Switch call confirmation off. The system does not
prompt you to confirm before making a call.
Voice Command Lists On Switch the display of voice commands on.
Voice Command Lists Off Switch the display of voice commands off.
Automatic Blower Motor Speed ENTERTAINMENT

Reduction
If necessary, the system decreases the A
blower motor speed when you are using
voice commands to reduce the amount of
background noise in your vehicle. It returns
to normal when you are done.
Switching Automatic Blower Motor

Speed Reduction Off
Simultaneously press the A/C and
recirculated air buttons.
E293491
B
A Audio source. Select to choose

a different audio source.
B Presets. Swipe left to view more
presets.
You can access these options using the

touchscreen or voice commands.
435
SYNC™ 3
Sources Press this button to select the source of

media you want to listen to.
Menu Item
AM
FM
SIRIUS 1
CD
USB The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.
Bluetooth Stereo
Apps If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they
display here as individual source selections.
1 This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
AM/FM Radio Once you have entered the station's

call numbers, you can select:
Tuning a Station
Menu Item Action and Descrip-
You can use the tune or seek controls on tion
the radio bezel to select a station.
Enter Press to begin
To tune a station using the playing the station
touchscreen, select: you have entered.
Menu Item Cancel Press to exit

without changing
Direct Tune the station.
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in Presets

the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are To set a new preset, tune to the station
currently listening to. and then press and hold one of the
memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
You can press the backspace button to briefly while the system saves the station
delete the previously entered number. and then returns.
You may be able to add additional preset
pages using the settings option on the
feature bar.
436
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If For more information on extended

Activated) subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
Note: This feature may not be available in list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,
all markets and requires an active and other features, please visit
subscription. www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
E234451 at any time, with or without notice to you.
SiriusXM satellite radio is a Neither SiriusXM and its affiliates nor Ford
subscription-based satellite radio service Motor Company and its affiliates will be
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports, liable to you or any third party for any such
news, weather, traffic and entertainment modification, suspension or termination.
programming. Your factory-installed Note: This receiver includes the eCos
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes real-time operating system. eCos is
hardware and a limited subscription term published under the eCos License.
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:

Menu Item Action and Description
Browse Touch this button to see a list of available stations.

Direct Tune A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of
a station.
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
Enter The system tunes to the station you select.
Cancel You exit the pop-up and the current station
continues to play.
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous
number.
437
SYNC™ 3
Replay Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approx-
imately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to
the current station. Changing stations erases the previous
audio.
Live When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.
ALERT Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system
alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts.
You may be able to add additional preset

Memory Presets pages using the settings option on the
feature bar.
To set a preset, tune to the station then
press and hold one of the memory preset
buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the station and returns once
the station is stored.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Satellite radio signal Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interfer-
interference ence and the audio system may mute.
438
SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting Tips
Message Cause Action
Acquiring Signal Radio requires more than two No action required. This
seconds to produce audio for message should disappear
the selected channel. shortly.
Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module or If this message does not clear
system failure present. shortly, or with an ignition key
SIRIUS system failure cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.
Invalid Channel The channel is no longer avail- Tune to another channel or
able. choose another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
include this channel. 539-7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.
Satellite acquiring The signal is lost from the Siri- The signal is blocked. When
signal… usXM satellite or SiriusXM you move into an open area,
tower to your vehicle antenna. the signal should return.
Updating… Update of channel program- No action required. The
ming in progress. process may take up to three
minutes.
Questions? Call 1- Your satellite service is no Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
888-539-7474 longer available. 539-7474 to resolve subscrip-
tion issues.
None found. Check All the channels in the selected Use the channel guide or the
channel guide. category are either skipped or Sirius XM Settings tile to turn
locked. off the Lock or Skip function on
that station.
SIRIUS Subscription SiriusXM has updated the No action required.
updated channels available for your
vehicle.
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not

HD Radio™ Information (If available in all markets.
Available)
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
439
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio technology is the digital The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your station, and then changes to orange when
system has a special receiver that allows digital audio is playing. When this logo is
it to receive digital broadcasts (where available, you may also see Title and Artist
available) in addition to the analog fields on-screen.
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital The multicast indicator appears in FM
broadcasts provide a better sound quality mode (only) if the current station is
than analog broadcasts with free, broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
crystal-clear audio and no static or The highlighted numbers signify available
distortion. For more information, and a digital channels where new or different
guide to available stations and content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming, please visit: programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
Website multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
www.hdradio.com
Note: There is also an additional feature
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a for stations that have more than 1 HD
station broadcasting HD Radio technology, multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The
you may notice the following indicators on HD logo and Radio text appears as a button.
your screen: Pressing this button allows you to cycle
through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency. For example, if you are
on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing
the button repeatedly causes the radio to
cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic
increasing order.
E142616
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Message Action and Description
Presets Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.

Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2
or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.
440
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible

experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Issues Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or This is poor time alignment by No action required. This is a
repeat in audio. the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or The radio is shifting between No action required. The recep-
blending in and out. analog and digital audio. tion issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.
There is an audio mute The digital multicast is not No action required. This is
delay when selecting available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until the
HD2 or HD3, multicast broadcast is decoded. Once audio is available.
preset or Direct Tune. decoded, the audio is available.
441
SYNC™ 3
Issues Cause Action
Cannot access HD2 or The previously stored multicast No action required. The station
HD3 multicast channel preset or direct tune is not is not available in your current
when recalling a preset available in your current recep- location.
or from a direct tune. tion area.
Text information does Data service issue by the radio 1
Fill out the station issue form.
not match currently broadcaster.
playing audio.
There is no text Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form.
information shown for broadcaster. 1
currently selected
frequency.
1 You can find the form here:
Website
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under CD (If Equipped)

license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD Once you select this option, the system
and HD Radio logos are proprietary returns you to the main audio screen.
trademarks of DTS. The vehicle The current audio information appears on
manufacturer and DTS are not responsible the screen.
for the content sent using HD Radio
technology. Content may be changed,
added or deleted at any time at the station
owner's discretion.
The following buttons are also available:

Button Function
Browse You can use the browse button to select a track.

Repeat Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.
442
SYNC™ 3
Button Function
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Shuffle Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or Bluetooth® Stereo or USB
play buttons to control the audio playback.
Bluetooth® Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth® device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth® and USB:

Button Function
Repeat Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).
Shuffle Play the tracks in random order.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to

You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
provide 30-second skip buttons when you
play buttons to control the audio playback.
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
To get more information about the buttons allow you to skip forward or
currently playing track, press the cover art backward within a track.
or Info button.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
Button Function
Browse If available, displays the list of tracks in the

Now Playing playlist.
New Search This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
Play All
443
SYNC™ 3
Button Function
Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
Composers
A-Z Jump This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.
Explore Device If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
Select this option to play audio from your

USB Ports USB device.
Apps
The system supports the use of certain
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or Bluetooth®-enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 455).
Supported Media Players, Formats

and Metadata Information
E211463
The system is capable of hosting nearly
The USB ports are in the center console or any digital media player, including iPod,
behind a small access door in the iPhone, and most USB drives.
instrument panel. Supported audio formats include MP3,
This feature allows you to plug in USB WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives Supported audio file extensions include
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
support this feature. FLAC.
444
SYNC™ 3
Supported USB file systems include: FAT, You can direct air through any combination
exFAT, and NTFS. of these air vents.
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media Setting the Blower Motor Speed
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive Touch up or down to increase or
software identifiers embedded in the decrease the volume of air that
media files, provide information about the circulates in your vehicle.
file.
If your indexed media files contain no Setting the Temperature
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty Touch up or down on the left-hand
metadata tags as unknown. temperature control to set the left-hand
temperature.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10 Note: This control also adjusts the
devices. right-hand side temperature when you
switch off dual zone mode.
Touch up or down on the right-hand
CLIMATE temperature control to set the right-hand
temperature.
Touch the climate button on the
touchscreen to access the climate control Switching Auto Mode On and Off
features.
Note: You can switch temperature units Touch the button to switch on
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See automatic operation, then set
Settings (page 458). the temperature.
Accessing the Climate Control The system adjusts the blower motor
Menu speed, air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and outside or recirculated air
Touch the button to access to reach and maintain the temperature you
additional controls for the front have set.
E265038
climate system.
Switching the Air Conditioning On
and Off
Directing the Airflow
A pop-up appears on the screen
Touch the button to direct
to display the air conditioning
airflow to the windshield air
options.
vents and de-mister.
Touch the button to direct MAX A/C: Touch the button to activate
E244097 airflow to the instrument panel and maximize cooling. The driver and
air vents. passenger temperatures are set to LO,
recirculated air flows through the
Touch the button to direct instrument panel vents, air conditioning
E244098 airflow to the footwell air vents. automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
445
SYNC™ 3
A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning Switching the Heated Rear
on or off. Use A/C with recirculated air to Window On and Off
improve cooling performance and
efficiency. Touch the button to clear the
rear window of thin ice and fog.
Note: In certain conditions, such as E184884
maximum defrost, the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even Switching the Heated Seats On
though you switch off the air conditioning. and Off
Switching the Climate Control On Touch the button to cycle
and Off through the various heat
settings.
Touch the button.
Switching the Heated Steering
Wheel On and Off
Switching the Climate Controlled Touch the button.
Seats On and Off E256621
Touch the button to cycle

through the various climate Switching Maximum Air
E265282
controlled seat settings. Conditioning On and Off
Switching Dual Zone Mode On and Touch the button for maximum
Off cooling.
Touch the button to switch on Recirculated air flows through the

temperature control for the instrument panel air vents, air conditioning
E265280 right-hand side of the vehicle. turns on and the blower motor adjusts to
the highest speed.
Switching the Heated Exterior
Mirrors On and Off Switching Maximum Defrost On
and Off
Touch the button.
Touch the button for maximum
E266189
defrosting.
Switching the Heated Windshield Air flows through the windshield air vents,
On and Off and the blower motor adjusts to the
Touch the button to clear the highest speed.
windshield of thin ice and fog. You can also use this setting to defog and
The heated windshield turns off clear the windshield of a thin covering of
after a short period of time. ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
446
SYNC™ 3
Note: The heated rear window also turns Switching Rear Auto Mode On and
on when you select maximum defrost. Off
Note: Depending on your region, air Touch the button to switch on
conditioning turns on. rear automatic operation, then
set the temperature.
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off
Touch the button to switch PHONE
between outside air and
recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
compartment recirculates. This may and injury. We strongly recommend that
reduce the time needed to cool the interior, you use extreme caution when using any
when used with A/C, and reduce unwanted device that may take your focus off the
odors from entering your vehicle. road. Your primary responsibility is the
Note: Recirculated air may turn off, or safe operation of your vehicle. We
prevent you from switching on, in all air flow recommend against the use of any
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk hand-held device while driving and
of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on encourage the use of voice-operated
and off in various air distribution control systems when possible. Make sure you
combinations during hot weather to improve are aware of all applicable local laws
cooling efficiency. that may affect the use of electronic
Switching the Ventilated Seats On
and Off Check the compatibility of your device on
the regional website.
Touch the button to cycle
through the various ventilated Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
E268558
seat settings. First Time
Accessing Rear Climate Controls Go to the settings menu on your device and
switch Bluetooth® on.
Touch the button to access Select the phone option on the
additional controls for the rear feature bar.
E270447
climate system.
1. Select Add Phone.
Rear Climate Control Lock
Indicator Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your
vehicle on your cell phone.
Touch the button. 2. Select your vehicle on your cell phone.
When on, you can only operate
E265289 Note: A number appears on your cell phone
the rear passenger settings and on the touchscreen.
through the front controls.
3. Confirm that the number on your cell
phone matches the number on the
touchscreen.
447
SYNC™ 3
Note: The touchscreen indicates that you Phone Keypad

have successfully paired your cell phone.
Directly dial a number.
4. Download the phonebook from your
cell phone when you are prompted. Mute
Note: If you pair more than one cell phone, Mute the microphone when in a call.
use the phone settings to specify the
primary phone. You can change this setting Phone Voice Assistant
at any time.
Say a command to use the Google or Siri
Using Your Cell Phone (If Equipped) voice assistant available on your
connected phone to access supported
Recent Call List features.
Display and select an entry from a list of Text Messaging
previous calls.
Setting Text Message Notification
Contacts
iOS
Display a smart search form to look up your
contacts. Use the List button to 1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
alphabetically sort your contacts. phone.
2. Select Bluetooth®.
Change Phone
3. Select the information icon to the right
Display the list of paired or connected of your vehicle.
devices that you can select.
4. Switch text message notification on.
Phone Settings
Android
Change ring tones, alerts or pair another 1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
phone. phone.
Do Not Disturb 2. Select Bluetooth®.
Reject incoming calls and switch ring tones 3. Select the profiles option.
and alerts off. 4. Select the phone profile.
5. Switch text message notification on.
Using Text Messaging
Menu Item Description
Hear It Hear the text message.

View View the text message.
Call Call the sender.
Reply Reply to the text message with a standard text message.
448
SYNC™ 3
Apple CarPlay (If Equipped) 2. Switch Android Auto off.
1. Connect your device to a USB port.

NAVIGATION (IF EQUIPPED)
2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Note: For more information, refer to our
Note: Certain features of the system are website.
not available when you are using Apple
CarPlay. Select the navigation option on
the feature bar.
Switching Apple CarPlay Off
feature bar.
1. Select Apple CarPlay Preferences.

2. Switch Apple CarPlay off.
Android Auto (If Equipped)

2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Note: You might need to enable Android
Auto from the settings menu.
E297557
Note: Certain features of the system are
not available when you are using Android
Auto. A Map view menu.
B Zoom out.
Switching Android Auto Off
C Zoom in.
feature bar. D Route guidance menu.
E Destination entry menu.
1. Select Android Auto.
449
SYNC™ 3
Setting a Destination
Destination Entry Menu
Item Description
Search Enter a destination address.

Previous Destinations Display and select from a list of previous destinations.
Home Set your saved home address as your destination
Work Set your saved place of work as your destination.
Favorites Display and select from a list of favorite destinations.
Setting a Destination Using the Text You can search by entering all or part of
Entry Screen the destination, such as the Address, POI
Category or Name, Intersection, City,
Latitude/Longitude, etc. Tips: If you do
not specify a location, the system will
use the current vehicle location. You can
specify a location by address, city, state
or zip code. For additional search support,
please visit: support.ford.com.
Note: Press the button in the top right-hand
corner of the main map to display estimated
time of arrival, the remaining travel time or
distance to destination.
E297558
A Text entry field.

B Automatic suggestions based on
the text you enter.
C Information icon.
D Search.
E Keyboard settings.
Note: Select one of the suggestions to
copy the detail to the text entry field.
450
SYNC™ 3
Setting a Destination Using the Map Zoom

Screen
Display more or less detail on the map.
Note: Use pinch gestures to zoom in and
out. Place two fingers on the screen and
move them apart to zoom in. Place two
fingers on the screen and bring them
together to zoom out.
Route Guidance
E297559
A Re-center the map.

B Selected location.
C 3D map rotation. Swipe left or
right.
D Start route guidance.
E297560
F
E Destination name.
A Turn indicator. Select to hear the
Select the location on the map. last voice prompt.
Select Start to begin route guidance. B Point of interest.
Changing the Format of the Map C Estimated time of arrival,
distance to destination or time
Display the map in one of the following to destination.
formats:
D Current road.
• A two-dimensional map with the
direction you are traveling toward the E Mute guidance prompts.
top of the screen. F Cancel route guidance.
• A two-dimensional map with north
Note: To change guidance prompt volume,
toward the top of the screen.
turn the volume control when a guidance
• A three-dimensional map with the prompt plays.
direction you are traveling toward the
front.
451
SYNC™ 3
Route Guidance Menu
Menu Item Description
Screen View Adjust your map preferences for when route guidance is active.
Full Map View a full-screen map when route guidance is active.
Highway Exit Info View highway exit information for your current route.
Turn List View the turn list for your current route. Select a road to avoid
it.
Traffic List You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information
by pressing this button. This information requires an active
subscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link. When a route
is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays. When a
route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby
or on the route.
Navigation Settings Adjust navigation settings. See Settings (page 458).
Where Am I? View information about your current location.
Cancel Route Cancel route guidance.
View Route View the entire current route on the map.
Detour View an alternative route compared to your current one.
Edit Waypoints Change the order or remove waypoints.
Optimize Order The system determines the order of waypoints for you.
Go Go to the next screen and start the new route.
Note: The system mutes the next and all

Adjusting the Guidance Prompt future guidance prompts.
Volume
Adding Waypoints
Turn the volume control when a guidance
prompt plays to adjust the volume. You can add a waypoint to a navigation
route as a destination along your route.
Note: If you have inadvertently adjusted
You can add up to five waypoints.
the volume to zero, press the turn indicator
button to play the last voice prompt and 1. Select the search option on the map.
then adjust the volume to the desired level. 2. Set a destination.
Muting Guidance Prompts 3. Select Add Waypoint.
Select the mute option on the 4. Select Go.
screen to mute guidance
prompts.
452
SYNC™ 3
Canceling Route Guidance When you have selected a point of interest,

the location and information appear, such
Select the route guidance menu as address, phone number and a star
option on the active guidance rating.
screen.
Press More Information to see a photo,
Select Cancel Route. a review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
E294817 address. Hotel service icons include:
• Restaurant
Note: The route guidance menu option is
always in the bottom right-hand corner of • Business center
the main map. • Handicap facilities
cityseeker (If Equipped) • Laundry
• Refrigerator
• 24-hour room service
• Fitness center
• Internet access
• Pool
• Wi-Fi
Attractions include nearby landmarks,
E225487 amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
cityseeker, when available, is a service that such as star rating, reviews, hour of
provides more information about certain operation and admission price.
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.
Note: cityseeker information is limited to
approximately 1,110 cities (1,049 in the
United States, 36 in Canada and 15 in
Mexico).
453
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If The navigation system map data may
Equipped) contain inaccurate or incomplete
information due to the passage of time,
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available changing circumstances, sources used and
on vehicles equipped with navigation and the nature of collecting comprehensive
only in select markets. You must activate geographic data, any of which may lead to
and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic incorrect results. Inaccurate speed limit
and Travel Link information. It helps you information, turn restrictions and other
locate the best gas prices, find movie road attributes may affect the determined
listings, get current traffic alerts, view the route and associated guidance
weather map, get accurate ski conditions Annual navigation map updates are
and see current sports scores. available for purchase through your
The system calculates a reasonable dealership. Depending on your purchase
efficient route based on available speed agreement, you might be eligible for a free
limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may map update. You can choose to download
know a local shortcut that is more efficient the map data update onto a USB, order a
at a given time than the route provided by USB, or use Wi-Fi to deliver automatic
SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight updates. To update your map data over
difference in minutes or miles with the Wi-Fi, your vehicle must be connected to
SYNC 3 route. a Wi-Fi access point. Map data files are
large, so it is highly recommended to
Michelin Travel Guide (If Equipped) perform the update when free Wi-Fi is
available otherwise high data rates may
The Michelin travel guide is a service that apply. For USB updates, free map update
provides additional information about eligibility, and other details, contact
certain places of interest, for example dealers at 1-866-462-8837 in the United
restaurants, hotels and tourist sites. Points States and Canada or 800-557-5539 in
of interest that have Michelin travel guide Mexico or visit our local website for more
information display a button to show you information.
more information. Push the button to see
the additional information. If you have
paired your phone with the system, you ELECTRIC VEHICLE
can press the phone button to directly INFORMATION
establish a call with the selected point of
interest. Power Flow
Navigation Map Accuracy and The power flow information for
Updates your hybrid vehicle is available
E260071
through the home screen or
HERE is the digital map provider for the
under Apps.
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to www.here.com. HERE Vehicle Operational States
evaluates all reported map errors and
Power flows to or from the front and rear
responds with the result of their
wheels depending on the operational state
investigation by e-mail.
and the drive conditions.
454
SYNC™ 3
• Idling: The vehicle is running and in park • Battery Charging: The engine is on to
(P). The engine and/or the high voltage charge the high voltage battery. The
battery are on. vehicle returns to electric operation
• Electric Driving: The vehicle is running once the battery is charged.
and in drive (D) or neutral (N). The high • Low Gear: The engine is on because
voltage battery provides power to the the vehicle is in low gear. Shift out of
wheels. low gear to return to electric operation.
• Hybrid Driving: The vehicle is running • Normal Operation: The engine is on to
and in drive (D) or neutral (N). The optimize vehicle operation. The vehicle
engine and the high voltage battery returns to electric operation when
provide power to the wheels. possible.
• Regenerative Braking: The vehicle is • Engine Braking Active: The engine is on
running in drive (D) and is slowing to provide increased powertrain
down. Power captured by the braking. This can occur when you turn
regenerative braking system is sent on grade assist, when speed control is
back to the high voltage battery. on or when driving with your foot off
the accelerator pedal. Turning off
Engine On Due To grade assist or speed control may
allow the vehicle to return to electric
The following conditions help to explain operation.
why the engine is on, and what you can do
to allow all electric operation. • Battery Temperature: The engine is on
due to a high or low high voltage
• Drive Power: The engine is on due to battery temperature. This is a normal
accelerator pedal pressure or speed operating condition. The vehicle returns
control activation. Reduce pressure on to electric operation when possible.
the accelerator pedal or switch off the
speed control to return to full electric • Drive Mode: The engine is on due to the
mode. drive mode selection. Select an
appropriate drive mode for electric only
• High Speed: The engine is on because operation.
the vehicle speed exceeds the level for
full electric operation. Reduce the
speed to return to electric operation. APPS
• Heater Setting: The engine is on
because of the heater setting. Reduce The system allows you interact with select
or turn off the heater setting to return mobile apps while keeping your eyes on
to electric operation. the road. Voice commands, your steering
wheel buttons, or a quick tap on your
• Neutral Gear: The engine is on because touchscreen give you advanced control of
the vehicle is in neutral (N). Shift out compatible mobile apps. You can also
of neutral gear to return to electric stream your favorite music or podcasts,
operation. share your time of arrival with friends, and
• Engine Cold: The engine is on because keep connected safely.
it is cold. The vehicle returns to electric
operation once the engine is sufficiently
warm.
455
SYNC™ 3
When you start an app through the system Using Apps on an Android Device
for the first time, you could be asked to
grant certain permissions. You can review Select the apps option on the
and change the permissions that you have feature bar.
granted at any time when your vehicle is
not moving. We recommend that you 1. If your device is connected via USB,
check your data plan before using your switch Android Auto off. See Phone
apps through the system. Using them (page 447).
could result in additional charges. We also 2. Pair your device. See Phone (page 447).
recommend that you check the app
provider's terms and conditions and 3. Start the apps on your device that you
privacy policy before using their app. Make want to use through SYNC.
sure that you have an active account for Note: If you close the apps on your device,
apps that you want to use through the you will not be able to use them through the
system. Some apps will work with no system.
setup. Others require you to configure
4. Select Find Mobile Apps.
some personal settings before you can use
them. Note: The system searches and connects
to compatible apps that are running on your
Note: For more information about available device.
apps, visit catalog.ford.com.
5. Select the app that you want to use on
Using Apps on an iOS Device the touchscreen.
Select the apps option on the Note: Mobile Apps on your device use the
feature bar. USB port to establish a connection with
SYNC. Some devices may lose the ability to
play music over USB when Mobile Apps are
1. If your device is connected via USB, enabled.
switch Apple CarPlay off. See Phone
(page 447). Using Mobile Navigation on an
2. Connect your device to a USB port or Android Device
pair and connect using Bluetooth.
3. If prompted to enable CarPlay, select
Disable. 2. Switch Android Auto off. See Phone
(page 447).
4. Start the apps on your device that you
want to use through SYNC. 3. Switch on Enable Mobile Apps via
USB in the Mobile Apps Settings tile.
Note: If you close the apps on your device,
you will not be able to use them through the 4. Select the apps option on the feature
system. bar.
5. Select the app that you want to use on 5. Select the navigation app that you
the touchscreen. want to use on the touchscreen.
Note: Connect your device to a USB port if Note: When using a navigation app, keep
you want to use a navigation app. When your device unlocked and the app open.
using a navigation app, keep your device
unlocked and the app open.
456
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Equipped) Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
WARNING: Driving while distracted access and use these features. Go to
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
and injury. We strongly recommend that information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
hand-held device while driving and Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
encourage the use of voice-operated for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
systems when possible. Make sure you Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
are aware of all applicable local laws vehicles.
that may affect the use of electronic When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic
devices while driving. and Travel Link, it can help you locate the
best gas prices, find movie listings, get
Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may current traffic alerts, view the current
not be available in all markets. weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see scores to current sports games.
Traffic on Route Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite
Traffic Nearby places, if programmed.
Fuel Prices Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.
Movie Listings Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.
Weather Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Map Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.
457
SYNC™ 3
Area Select to choose from a listing of

weather locations.
Sports Info Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
Ski Conditions Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.
Driver Assist (If Equipped)

SETTINGS
Select this tile to adjust Driver Assist
Press the button to enter the features like Parking Aids, Lane Keeping
settings menu. System, Pedestrian Detection, and
E280315 Auto-Start-Stop.
Once you select a tile, press the Vehicle
button next to a menu item to
E268570 view an explanation of the Select this tile to adjust vehicle settings
feature or setting. like windows, alarm, lighting, and MyKey
settings.
Sound
FordPass (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust the sound settings.
Select this tile to adjust the FordPass
Clock settings
Select this tile to adjust the clock settings. General

Bluetooth® Select this tile to adjust settings like
language, measurement units, or to reset
Select this tile to switch Bluetooth® on the system.
and off and adjust the settings.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
Phone
Select this tile to switch 911 Assist on and
Select this tile to connect, disconnect, and off.
manage the connected device settings.
Automatic Updates
Audio
Select this tile to adjust the automatic
Select this tile to adjust the audio settings. update settings.
Mobile Apps
Select this tile to adjust permissions,
enable, disable, and update mobile apps.
458
SYNC™ 3
Display Seats (If Equipped)

Select this tile to adjust display settings Select this tile to adjust the lumbar
like brightness and auto dim. function and massage function of your
multi contour seats.
Charge Settings (If Equipped)
Message Center (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust the electric vehicle
charge settings. Select this tile to view vehicle messages.
Voice Control Personal Profiles (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust voice control Select this tile to adjust recalled memory
settings like command confirmations and features when using personal profiles.
displayed lists.
Valet Mode (If Equipped)
Select this tile to enable and disable valet
Select this tile to adjust navigation settings mode.
like map preferences and route guidance.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Select this tile to change the color or
intensity of the interior lighting.
459
SYNC™ 3
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Voice Recognition
The system does not under- – You might not be using supported voice commands.
stand what I am saying. • See Using Voice Recognition (page 429).
• For a complete list of voice commands, refer to our
website.
– You might be speaking too soon.
• Wait for the voice prompt before you speak.
The system does not under- – Device limitation. Bluetooth® does not support voice
stand the name of a track or commands.
artist. • Connect your device to a USB port.
• If you have an iOS device, press and hold the voice
control button on the steering wheel to use Siri to
play specific tracks.
– You might not be using supported voice commands.
• See Using Voice Recognition (page 429).
• For a complete list of voice commands, refer to our
website.
– You might not be saying the name exactly as it appears
on your device.
• Say the name of the track or artist exactly as it
appears on your device. Spell out any abbreviations
in the name.
– The name contains special characters, for example *,
- or +.
• Rename the files on your device or use the touch-
screen to select and play the track.
The system does not under- – You might not be saying the name exactly as it appears
stand the name of a contact on your device.
in the phonebook on my • Say the first and last name of the contact exactly
device and calls the wrong as it appears on your device. Spell out any abbrevi-
contact. ations in the name.
– The name contains special characters, for example *,
- or +.
• Rename the contact on your device or use the
touchscreen to select and call the contact.
460
SYNC™ 3
The system does not under- – You might not be saying the name exactly as it appears
stand certain names of on your device.
contacts in the phonebook • Say the first and last name of the contact exactly
on my device. as it appears on your device. The system applies
phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected
language to the names of contacts in the phone-
book on your device. Select the name of the
contact on the touchscreen and use the Hear it
option to get an idea of how the system expects
you to pronounce it.
The system voice prompts – Device limitation.

and the pronunciation of • The system uses text-to-speech technology and
some words do not seem to uses a synthetically generated voice rather than
be very accurate. pre-recorded human voice.
USB and Bluetooth® Audio
I cannot connect my device. – Device malfunction.

• Disconnect your device. Switch your device off and
on to reset it and try again.
– Cable connection issue.
• Correctly connect the cable to your device and the
vehicle USB port.
– Incompatible cable.
• Use the cable recommended by the manufacturer
of your device.
461
SYNC™ 3
– Incorrect device settings.

• Make sure that your device does not have an auto-
install program or active security settings.
• Check that your device is not set only to charge.
– Device lock screen enabled.
• Unlock your device before connecting it.
The system does not recog- – Device limitation.

nize my device. • Do not leave your device in your vehicle during very
hot or very cold weather conditions.
– Cable connection issue.
• Correctly connect the cable to your device and the
vehicle USB port.
– Incompatible cable.
• Use the cable recommended by the manufacturer
of your device.
The system does not under- – Device limitation. Bluetooth® does not support voice
stand the name of a track or commands.
artist. • Connect your device to a USB port.
• If you have an iOS device, press and hold the voice
control button on the steering wheel to use Siri to
play specific tracks.
I cannot stream audio from – Incompatible device.

my Bluetooth® device. • Check the compatibility of your device on our
website.
– Device not connected.
• Pair your device. See Phone (page 447).
– Media player not running.
• Start the media player on your device.
The system does not recog- – Missing or incorrect audio file metadata, for example
nize the music on my device. artist, song title, album or genre.
• Repair the files on your device.
– Corrupt files.
• Repair the files on your device.
462
SYNC™ 3
– Copyright-protected files.
• Use a device that contains files that are not copy-
right protected.
– Unsupported file format.
• Repair or convert the files to a supported format.
See Entertainment (page 435).
– Device indexing required.
• Re-index your device. See Settings (page 458).
– Device lock screen enabled.
• Unlock your device before connecting it.
Sometimes I cannot hear a – Device malfunction.

track playing on my device. • Disconnect your device. Switch your device off and
on to reset it and try again.
When I disconnect my iOS – Device limitation.

device the audio volume is • Turn the volume down on your device.
set to maximum.
The system does not play If the system does not play the tracks on your USB device
the tracks on my USB drive in the correct order, the following information could help:
in the correct order. – If you are selecting USB as the audio source when the
system is still indexing, SYNC plays tracks sorted
alphabetically by file name in the root directory.
– If you are selecting USB as the audio source after the
system has finished indexing, SYNC plays all tracks
sorted alphabetically by the title in the ID3 tag
regardless of where they are located. SYNC uses the
file name if the title in the ID3 tag does not exist.
– If you are selecting the option to play all tracks from
the browsing menu, SYNC plays all tracks sorted
alphabetically by the title in the ID3 tag regardless of
where they are located. SYNC uses the file name if the
title in the ID3 tag does not exist.
– If you are selecting a track when using the explore
device option, SYNC plays tracks sorted alphabetically
by file name in the folder you have selected. SYNC
then plays all tracks in any subfolders in the folder you
have selected.
463
SYNC™ 3
Phone
During a call, I can hear – Incorrect cell phone settings.

excessive background noise. • Check and adjust the audio settings on your cell
phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
During a call, I can hear the – Cell phone malfunction.

other person but they • Switch your cell phone on and off, and vehicle
cannot hear me. Bluetooth® on and off and try again.
– Cell phone microphone muted.
• Unmute your cell phone microphone.
– Privacy mode is enabled.
• Switch off privacy mode.
During a call, I cannot hear – System restart required.

the other person and they • Switch the ignition off and open the door. Close
cannot hear me. the door and lock the vehicle. Wait until the
touchscreen is off and any illuminated USB ports
are not illuminated. Unlock the vehicle, switch the
ignition on and try again.
I cannot download a phone- – Incompatible cell phone.

book. • Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
– Incorrect cell phone settings.
• Allow the system to retrieve contacts from your
cell phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
– Incorrect system settings.
• Switch automatic phonebook download on. See
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off and on to reset it and
try again.
464
SYNC™ 3
A message displays – Incorrect cell phone settings.

suggesting that my phone- • Allow the system to retrieve contacts from your
book has downloaded but it cell phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
is empty or it has missing
contacts. • Check the location of the missing contacts on your
cell phone. If they are stored on the SIM card, move
them to the cell phone memory.
– Incorrect system settings.
• Switch automatic phonebook download on. See
I cannot connect my cell – Incompatible cell phone.

phone. • Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
try again.
• Install the latest cell phone firmware.
• Delete your device from the system and delete
SYNC from your device and try again.
• Switch automatic phonebook download off. See
Text messaging does not – You might not have switched on text message notific-
work. ations.
• Switch text message notifications on. See Phone
(page 447).
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
try again.
I cannot hear text messages. – Device message sharing is not enabled.

• Check the permissions on your device to ensure
text message sharing is enabled.
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
465
SYNC™ 3
I cannot enter a street name – Incorrect entry method.

when I am abroad. • Enter the street name with the country.
The system does not recog- – Using the wrong coordinates format.
nize coordinates. • Use the format ##. #####, ##. ##### (for N/S ,
E/W). Add a minus before coordinates if the
direction is West and keep a positive value if the
direction is East, for example 12.5412 means East
and -12.5412 means West.
466
SYNC™ 3
Apps
The system cannot find any – Incompatible device.

apps. • You need an Android device with OS 4.3 or higher
or an iOS device with iOS 8.0 or higher. Pair and
connect your Android device to find compatible
apps. Connect your iOS device to a USB port or
pair and connect using Bluetooth®.
I have a compatible device – Compatible apps are not installed on your device.
and it is correctly connected • Download and install the latest version of the app.
but the system still cannot
find any apps. – Compatible apps are not running on your device.
• Start the apps to allow the system to find them
and make sure you sign in to any apps if required.
– Incorrect app settings.
• Check and adjust the app settings on your device
and allow SYNC to access the app if required.
I have a compatible device, – Apps failed to fully close.

it is correctly connected and • Restart the apps and try again.
my apps are running but the
system still cannot find any • If you have an Android device with apps that have
apps. an exit or quit option, use this and then restart the
apps. Alternatively, use the force stop option in the
settings menu on your device.
• If you have an iOS device with iOS 8.0 or higher,
tap the home button on your device twice and then
swipe the app upward to close it.
I have an Android device – An issue on some older versions of the Android oper-
that is correctly connected, ating system could result in apps not being found.
I have restarted my apps • Switch Bluetooth® off and on again to force the
and they are running but the system to reconnect to your device.
system still cannot find
them.
467
SYNC™ 3
I have an iOS device that is – Cable connection issue.

correctly connected, I have • Disconnect the cable from your device, wait for a
restarted my apps and they moment and then connect it again to force the
are running but the system system to reconnect to your device.
still cannot find them.
I have an Android device – Device volume is low.
running a media app which • Turn the volume up on your device.
the system has found but I
cannot hear the sound or
the sound is very quiet.
I have an Android device – Device limitation. If you have more apps running on
running a number of your device than the number of available Bluetooth®
compatible apps but the links, the system cannot find all of them.
system cannot find all of • Close some of the apps to allow the system to find
them. those that you want to use.
468
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Connectivity
I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi – Password error.

network. • Enter the correct network password.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
– Multiple access points in range with the same SSID.
• Use a unique name for your SSID. Do not use the
default name unless it contains a unique identifier,
for example as part of the MAC address.
The Wi-Fi connection – Weak network signal.

disconnects after successful • Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
connection. a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot – Obstructed network signal.

but the network signal • If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position
strength is weak. your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the
Wi-Fi hotspot.
but not on the windshield, position your vehicle so
that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or
open the windows that are facing the hotspot.
and the windshield, open the windows that are
facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the
garage door closed, open the garage door.
I cannot see a network in the – Hidden network.

list of available networks • Make the network visible and try again.
that I expect to see.
469
SYNC™ 3
I cannot see SYNC when I – System limitation.

search for Wi-Fi networks on • SYNC does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at this time.
my cell phone or other
device.
Software downloads take – Weak network signal
too long. • Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet
connection.
• Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.
The system seems to – No software update available.

connect to a Wi-Fi network – Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance
and the signal strength is of terms and conditions.
excellent but the software
does not update. • Test the connection using another device. If the
network requires a subscription or acceptance of
terms and conditions, contact the network service
provider.
Personal Profiles (If Equipped)
You might not have set up Personal Profiles.

You might have entered an invalid profile.
You might not have selected a memory button when
I cannot create a profile. prompted.
You might not have the ignition on or in park (P), or you
shifted out park (P) when creating a profile.
Personal Profiles has been switched off.
You might not have selected the lock button on the remote
control.
I cannot link a remote The remote control selected was already associated with
control. another profile and the system declined to overwrite.
The system performed a profile recall when linking a
remote control.
470
SYNC™ 3
You might not have the ignition on or in park (P), or you

shifted out park (P) when creating a profile.
You might be using the old linking method.
Personal Profiles does not support your unsaved settings.
My personalized settings do A different personal profile is active.
not save.
Another user changed the settings for the wrong personal
profile.
You might not have created a personal profile.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The profile you requested is already active.
You might not have linked the memory button you are
using to a profile.
My profile will not recall. You might not have linked the remote control you are using
to a profile.
You might be using the wrong remote control.
You might be pressing a button other than the unlock or
remote start on a linked remote control.
You might have deleted the personal profile.
My preset positions recall, Personal Profiles is turned off.
but my profile does not.
The vehicle is in motion.
My profile recalls but my
preset positions do not. The preset positions are the same as the guest or previ-
ously active profile.
Unlink and relink your remote control in the Personal
I lost a remote control.
Profiles menu. You may need to see your authorized dealer.
You might have erased and reprogrammed the remote
controls. This could happen if you let a dealership add a
I lost all profiles. new remote control to replace a lost one.
Someone performed a master reset.
471
SYNC™ 3
Resetting the System

1. Simultaneously press and hold the
seek up and the audio unit power
buttons until the screen goes black.
2. Wait three minutes to allow the system
to complete the reset.
3. Press the audio unit power button to
switch the system on.
Note: You can reset the system to restore
functionality that has stopped working. The
system reset is designed to restore
functionality and not delete any data that
you have stored.
Additional Information and

Assistance
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer or refer to our website.
472
Accessories
For a complete listing of the accessories For maximum vehicle performance, keep
that are available for your vehicle, please the following information in mind when
contact your authorized dealer or visit the adding accessories or equipment to your
online store web site: vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
Web Address (United States) passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
www.Accessories.Ford.com capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
Web Address (Canada) indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
www.Accessories.Ford.ca dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
We will repair or replace any properly Commission (FCC) and Canadian
authorized dealer-installed Ford Original Radio Telecommunications
Accessory found to be defective in Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
factory-supplied materials or workmanship of mobile communications systems
during the warranty period, as well as any that are equipped with radio
component damaged by the defective transmitters, for example two-way
accessories. radios, telephones and theft alarms.
We will warrant your Ford Original Any such equipment installed in your
Accessory through the warranty that vehicle should comply with Federal
provides the greatest benefit: Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
• 24 months, unlimited mileage. Telecommunications Commission
• The remainder of your new vehicle (CRTC) regulations and should be
limited warranty. installed only by an authorized dealer.
Contact an authorized dealer for details • An authorized dealer needs to install
and a copy of the warranty. mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
Ford Licensed Accessories are the operation of your vehicle, particularly
accessory manufacturer's designs. The if the manufacturer did not design the
manufacturer develops and therefore mobile communication system
warrants Ford Licensed Accessories, and specifically for automotive use.
does not design or test these accessories
to Ford Motor Company engineering • If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
requirements. Contact an authorized Ford any non-Ford electrical or electronic
dealer for the manufacturer’s limited accessories or components to your
warranty details, and request a copy of the vehicle, you may adversely affect
Ford Licensed Accessories product limited battery performance and durability. In
warranty from the accessory manufacturer. addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
473
Ford Protect
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING That means you get:

COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD • Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN. Lincoln dealership.
Ford Protect Extended Service • Repairs performed by factory trained
Plans (U.S. Only) technicians, using genuine parts.
Ford Protect extended service plan means Rental Car Reimbursement

peace of mind. It is the extended service
plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and 1st day Rental Benefit
provides more protection beyond the New If you bring your car into your dealer for
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for
you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford the day.
Protect extended service plans!
Extended Rental Benefits
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
One trip to the Service Center could easily repairs, you are eligible for rental car
exceed the price of your Ford Protect coverage, including warranty repairs, and
extended service plan. With Ford Protect Field Service Actions.
extended service plan you minimize your
risk for unexpected repair bills and rising Roadside Assistance
repair costs.
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle including:
Components • Towing, flat-tire change and battery
There are four mechanical Ford Protect jump starts.
extended service plans with different levels • Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for • Travel expense reimbursement for
details. lodging, meals and rental car.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most • Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
comprehensive coverage. With over coverage or other transportation.
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete it is probably easier to Transferable Coverage
list what is not covered.
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, Protect extended service plan coverage
and includes many high-tech items. expires, you can transfer any remaining
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components. coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
more peace of mind.
components.
Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.
474
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Ford Protect Extended Service

Vehicle Plan (CANADA ONLY)
Ford Protect extended service plan also You can get more protection for your
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
covers all scheduled maintenance, and extended service plan. Ford Protect
selected wear items. The coverage is extended service plan is the only service
prepaid, so you never have to worry about contract backed by Ford Motor Company
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance. of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
Covered maintenance includes: you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Rental reimbursement.
• Spark plugs.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
wear items.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Protection against repair costs after
• Shock absorbers. your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
• Struts. Coverage expires.
• Engine belts. • Roadside Assistance benefits.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and There are several Ford Protect extended
O-rings. service plans available in various time,
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if distance and deductible combinations.
equipped). Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
• Cabin air filter replacement every and rental. When you purchase Ford
20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric Protect extended service plan, you receive
vehicles only). added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
Interest Free Finance Options
Mexico, provided by a network of
Just a 5% down payment will provide you participating authorized Ford Motor
with an affordable, no interest, no fee Company dealers.
payment program allowing you all the Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada
security and benefits Ford Protect and the United States are not eligible for
extended service plan has to offer while Ford Protect extended service plan
paying over time. You are pre-approved coverage.
with no credit check or hassles. To learn
more, call our Ford Protect extended This information is subject to change. For
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377. more information; visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan Ford Protect extended service plan that is
P.O. Box 321067 right for you.
Detroit, MI 48232
475
GENERAL MAINTENANCE Our Genuine Replacement Parts

INFORMATION Dealerships stock our genuine
manufactured or our authorized
Why Maintain Your Vehicle? re-manufactured replacement parts.
These parts meet or exceed our
Carefully following the maintenance specifications. Parts installed at your
schedule helps protect against major repair dealership carry a nationwide 24-month
expenses resulting from neglect or or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and
inadequate maintenance and may help to labor limited warranty.
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for If you do not use our authorized parts they
completed maintenance with your vehicle. may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
We have established regular maintenance emissions compliance.
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you Convenience
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes: Many dealerships have extended evening
one is to maintain the reliability of your and Saturday hours to make your service
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost visit more convenient and they offer one
of owning your vehicle down. stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
It is your responsibility to have all from general maintenance to collision
scheduled maintenance performed and to repairs.
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
manual. See Capacities and or body shops. Please contact your dealer
Specifications (page 378). for details.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance Protecting Your Investment
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance. Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your reliability, durability and resale value. To
Dealership? maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
Factory-Trained Technicians make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
Service technicians participate in extensive
intervals.
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-Life
operation of your vehicle. Ask your Monitor system; a message appears in the
dealership about the training and instrument cluster display at the proper oil
certification their technicians have change interval. This interval may be up to
received. one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km), hybrid
vehicles may exceed 10,000 mi
(16,000 km).
476
Your vehicle can be driven in such a way We strongly recommend the use of only
that dilutes and increases the level of oil our genuine manufactured or our
by short trips that do not allow the engine authorized re-manufactured replacement
to get to operating temperature, extended parts engineered for your vehicle.
idling, and low speed driving for long
periods of time. Additives and Chemicals
When the oil change message appears in This owner's manual and our Workshop
the instrument cluster display, it is time for Manual list the recommended additives
an oil change. Make sure you perform the and chemicals for your vehicle. We do not
oil change within two weeks or 500 mi recommend using chemicals or additives
(800 km) of the message appearing. Make not approved by us as part of your vehicle’s
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life normal maintenance. Please consult your
Monitor after each oil change. See Oil warranty information.
Change Indicator Reset (page 320).
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
If your instrument cluster display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
should perform the oil change interval at normal operating characteristic and, by
six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from itself, does not necessarily indicate a
your last oil change. Never exceed one year concern or that the fluid needs to be
or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil changed. However, a qualified expert, such
change intervals, as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex performance that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
systems. Every manufacturer develops
immediately.
these systems using different
specifications and performance features. Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
That is why it is important to rely upon your fluids at the specified intervals or in
dealership to properly diagnose and repair conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
your vehicle. viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
We have recommended maintenance
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
intervals for various parts and component
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
systems based upon engineering testing.
as that required to fill and operate the
We rely upon this testing to determine the
system or using our approved flushing
most appropriate mileage for replacement
chemical.
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and Owner Checks and Services
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance information. maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
477
Check Every Month
Engine oil level.

Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
Check Every Six Months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.

Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Seatbelts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and seatbelt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
478
Multi-Point Inspection
Accessory drive belt(s) Hazard warning system operation

Battery performance Horn operation
Engine air filter Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exterior lamps operation Steering and linkage
1
Fluid levels ; fill if necessary Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
2
pressure
For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
Half-shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation
1
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
2
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
This means you do not have to remember

Be sure to ask your dealership service
to change the oil on a mileage-based
advisor or technician about the multi-point
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
an oil change is due by displaying a
way to perform a thorough inspection of
message in the information display.
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall The following table provides examples of
condition of your vehicle. vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
NORMAL SCHEDULED and generally decrease with severity of
MAINTENANCE use.
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™

Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor that determines when you should
change the engine oil based on how you
use your vehicle. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
479
When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message

1 Vehicle Use and Example
Interval
Normal
7,500–10,000 mi Normal commuting with highway driving

(12,000–16,000 km) No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5,000–7,500 mi Moderate to heavy load or towing

(8,000–12,000 km) Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3,000–5,000 mi Maximum load or towing
(4,800–8,000 km) Extreme hot or cold operation
Extended engine idling
1 Hybridvehicles may achieve longer distances between oil changes, but do not exceed
the 1 year maximum oil change interval. Remaining oil life can be accessed through the
information display. See Information Displays (page 110).
Normal Maintenance Intervals
1
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
2
Change the engine oil and filter.
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection, recommended.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the front axle.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
480
1
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension and the tire-rod ends.
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
1 Do
not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.
2 Reset
the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil
Check (page 319).
1
Brake Fluid Maintenance
Every Three Years 2

Change the brake fluid.
1 Perform this maintenance item every three years. Do not exceed the designated time
for the interval.
2 Brake fluid servicing requires special equipment available at your authorized dealer.
1
Other Maintenance Items
Every 20,000 mi Replace the cabin air filter.

(32,000 km)
Every 30,000 mi Replace the engine air filter.
(48,000 km)
At 200,000 mi 2
Change the engine coolant and motor electronics coolant.
(322,000 km)
Every 100,000 mi Replace the spark plugs.
(160,000 km)
Every 100,000 mi 3
Inspect the accessory drive belt or belts.
(160,000 km)
481
1
Other Maintenance Items
Change the automatic transmission fluid.

Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km) 4
Replace the accessory drive belt or belts.
1 Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil
and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2 Initial replacement at 10 years or 200,000 mi (322,000 km), then every 5 years or
100,000 mi (160,000 km).

3 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4 If not replaced within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km).
Perform the services shown in the

following tables when specified or within
SPECIAL OPERATING 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the message
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED appearing in the instrument cluster display
MAINTENANCE prompting you to change your oil.
• Example 1: The message comes on at
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any 28,750 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
of the following conditions, you need to 30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
perform extra maintenance as indicated. transmission fluid replacement.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally • Example 2: The message has not come
under any of these conditions, it is not on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi
necessary to perform the extra (48,000 km) (for example, the
maintenance. For specific Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset
recommendations, see your dealership at 25,000 mi (40,000 km). Perform
service advisor or technician. the engine air filter replacement.
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the instrument

cluster display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, service Inspect front axle.
as required
Inspect rear axle and U-joints.
Inspect half-shaft boots.
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Every 60,000 mi Replace spark plugs.
(96,000 km)
482
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
(Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery)
Short Trips that do not allow the engine to get to operating temperature causing fuel
dilution and an increase of the engine oil level
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the instrument

cluster display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, service Replace cabin air filter.
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Every 60,000 mi Replace spark plugs.
(96,000 km)
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions - Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads
Inspect frequently, service Replace cabin air filter.

as required
Replace engine air filter.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter.1
or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
1
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Oil Change
Indicator Reset (page 320).
Exclusive use of E85 - Flex Fuel Vehicles Only
Every oil change If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
483
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter
Replacement
The transfer case, front and rear axles in
your vehicle do not require normal The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
scheduled maintenance. Your vehicle is filter is dependent on exposure to dusty
electronically monitored and notifies you and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in
of required service by displaying a message these conditions require frequent
in the instrument cluster display. The inspection and replacement of the engine
transfer case, front and rear axles are more air filter and cabin air filter.
likely to require a fluid change if the vehicle
has experienced extended periods of
extreme or severe duty cycle driving.
Changing or checking the transfer case,
front and/or rear axle lubricant is not
necessary unless the unit has been
submerged in water, shows signs of
leakage, a message indicating required
service displays. Contact your authorized
dealer for service.
California Fuel Filter Replacement

If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals

Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 5,000 mi (8,000 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
3,000 mi (4,800 km).
484
ROLLOVER WARNING RADIO FREQUENCY

CERTIFICATION LABELS
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
significantly higher rollover rate than
SYSTEM SENSORS
other types of vehicles.
Argentina
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an

unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a E363578
seatbelt.
Belarus
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel
drive vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive E253816
at a safe speed.
Brazil
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
E340204
Canada
Short Range Radar Sensor SRR3-B
IC ID: 4135A-SRR3B
485
E351800
Djibouti European Union EU
E310043
E340826
486
Ghana Mauritania
E269695 E353342
Jamaica Mexico
E340517
Malaysia
E353300
Moldova
E269697 E337971
RALM/24A/0715/S(15-2272)
487
Pakistan Serbia
E352429 E340200
Paraguay Singapore
E337181 E339940
Russia South Africa
E253816
E269696
488
South Korea
E351001
Taiwan, China
E340203
489
Ukraine
E356737
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) United Kingdom
E362840
United States of America

E338020 FCC ID: OAYSRR3B
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION TO USERS
490
Changes or modifications not expressly BODY CONTROL MODULE

approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority Argentina
to operate the equipment.
Vietnam
E338547
E353397
Brazil
Zambia
E340499
Ghana
E340205
E341433
491
Jamaica Paraguay
E340500 E339812
Moldova 2019-01-I-000076
Serbia
E337971
Morocco
E341434
Singapore
E340501
E339940
492
South Africa United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: M3NA2C766336

E340510
IC: 7812A-A2C766336
Ukraine This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
interference, and
operation.
Vietnam
E269682
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)

TRA REGISTERED No: ER68566/19
DEALER No: DA37380/15
United Kingdom
E278262
E362840
493
Zambia Djibouti
E342394
Ghana
E340511
CRUISE CONTROL MODULE

Argentina
E340191
Indonesia
E308030
Brazil
E342395
Jamaica
E340518
E340118
494
Malaysia Morocco
E339836 E340192
RALM/61A/0318/S(18-0852) Pakistan
Mauritania
E342396
E340190
Paraguay
Moldova
E337971
E308039
495
Serbia South Korea
E308040 E339675
Singapore R-CMM-DLH-L2C0065TR
Syria
E342397
E340193 Taiwan, China

South Africa
E340195
E340194
496
Ukraine This device complies with Part 15 of the

interference, and
operation.
Zambia
E308043
United Arab Emirates
E340196
E308044 GARAGE DOOR OPENER
United States and Canada United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: NZLSAHL5E
FCC ID: L2C0065TR
IC: 4112A-SAHL5E
IC: 3432A-0065TR
497

interference, and
operation.
E339844
KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS

Argentina
E342143
E340316
E346171
E340119
498
Brazil
E340306
Ghana
E340121
E340317
E340120 E340307
Jamaica
E340318
E342144
Djibouti
E340308
E343017
499
F17000176
Mauritania
E340219
E340487
E340215 E340310
Moldova
E342145
Malaysia
E337971
E339836
500
Morocco
E339843
E343018
Paraguay
E340311
Pakistan
E339812
NR: 2016-9-I-000222
NR: 2016-9-I-000220
NR: 2016-9-I-000223
NR: 2017-10-I-0334
NR: 2018-07-I-000317
E337974
501
Serbia
TA-2016/2012
E340313
E269681
South Korea
Singapore
E339675
E339940 MSIP-CRM-TAL-A2C97102000
South Africa Taiwan, China
E343025 E340216
502
Ukraine
E340217
E269682
E342147
E340486
E342146
E340314
503

interference, and
operation.
E344043
Vietnam
Canada and United States of
America
WARNING: Changes or
that Industry Canada technical E278262
FCC ID: M3N-A2C931426

FCC ID: M3N-A2C931423
Zambia
FCC ID: CWTWB1U0009
FCC ID: N5F-A08TAA
IC: 7812A-A2C931426
IC: 7812A-A2C913423
IC: 1788A-FWB1U0009
IC: 3248A-A08TAA
E343026
504
Canada and United States of

America
WARNING: Changes or
E340315
FCC ID: OUC11545917

PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM IC: OUC11545917
Argentina This device complies with Part 15 of the
interference, and
operation.
E339818
Djibouti
Brazil
E339936
E339848
505
Ghana Malaysia
E340495 E339836
Indonesia CIDF18000209
Mauritania
E339937
E339938
Jamaica
Moldova
E274067
E337971
506
Morocco Serbia
E269681
E339939
Pakistan Singapore
E339843 E339940
Paraguay South Africa
E339837 E269667
507
South Korea Ukraine
E339675
E269682
MSIP-RRM-OAC-OUC11541917 United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)

Syria
E347099
E340498
Vietnam
Taiwan
E278262
E339847
508
RADIO TRANSCEIVER MODULE

Argentina
E340645
Mauritania
E339077
Brazil
E340530
10693-20-12270
E342393
Djibouti
E340531
E340642
Moldova
E340643
Ghana
E337971
E340644
509
Morocco South Africa
E340648 E340649
Pakistan Taiwan, China
E342392 E340641
Serbia Ukraine
E341434
E269682
510
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) This device complies with Part 15 of the
interference, and
operation.
Zambia
E340647
E340646
E340218
United States and Canada SYNC

Argentina
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: L2C0082R

FCC ID: L2C0083TR
IC: 342A-0083TR E339829
511
Brazil European Union EU
E339830
China
E310043
Ghana
E341500
Djibouti
E341502
Jamaica
E340519
E339941
512
Malaysia Morocco
E339836 E339942
RBAB/57H/0318/S(18-0624) Pakistan
Mauritania
E341519
E341583
Moldova Paraguay
E337971
E339812
NR: 2017-12-I-0000413
513
Serbia South Korea
E339831 E339675
Singapore MSIP-CMM-pAs-FA-170-BCAR-HS
Taiwan
E339943
E339833
South Africa
Ukraine
E339832
E269682
514
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
E340520
SYNC Version FCC Identification Number IC Identification Number
3.0 ACJ-SYNCG3-L 216B-SYNCG3-L

3.1 ACJ-FA-170-BCARHS 216B-FA170BCARHS
3.2 ACJ-FG-185-SG32MH 216B-FG185SG32MH
This device complies with Part 15 of the Vietnam

interference, and
operation.
E339834
515
Zambia United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: LHJ-FB40ND1

E339835
IC: 2807E-FB40ND1
TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
Brazil licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
interference, and
operation.
E364134 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM SENSORS - VEHICLES
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) WITH: 315 MHZ SENSORS
Brazil
E384579
E355570
516
Mexico Taiwan
E342359 E339821
Nigeria United Kingdom
E362840
United States and Canada

E337972
Singapore WARNING: Changes or

FCC ID: MRXAG2SM3

IC: 2546A-AG2SM3
E339944
517
This device complies with Part 15 of the Democratic Republic of Congo

and Economic Development Canada’s Agréé par l'ARPTC
subject to the following two conditions: N° d'homologation: HIR -0081/6/2018
1. This device may not cause harmful Date d'homologation: 18/6/2018
interference, and
2. This device must accept any Djibouti
AGREE PAR LE MCPT (REPUBLIQUE DE
operation.
DJIBOUTI)
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING Numéro d'agrément:

SYSTEM SENSORS - VEHICLES 045/DDTIC/2018
WITH: 433 MHZ SENSORS
Date d'agrément:
Argentina
06/05/18
European Union EU
E339822
Brazil
E310043
E339823
518
The RED 2014/53/EU (replacing R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC on 13 June 2016) explicitly
states that instructions for intentional radiators include reference to "(a) frequency
band(s) in which the radio equipment operates; and (b) maximum radio-frequency
power transmitted in the frequency band(s) in which the radio equipment operates,"
in addition to carrying over the general operational instruction and Declaration of
Conformity inclusion requirements from the R&TTE Directive.
Hereby, Schrader Electronics Ltd. declares that the radio equipment type AG2SM4 is
in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity
is available at the following internet address:
http://www.tpmseuroshop.com/documents/declaration_conformities
f=433.92MHz
P<10mW (e.i.r.p)
Schrader Electronics Ltd. 11 Technology Park, Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern
Ireland United Kingdom.
Ghana Israel
E341832 E385959
519
Mauritania Morocco
E339946 E339947
Mexico Nigeria
E342358 E337972
Moldova Oman
E337971
E341834
520
Pakistan Serbia
E337974 E364764
Paraguay Sierra Leone
E339812
E382724
NR: 2018-06-I-000224
TAN: 2018-002-0025
Customs Union (CU) - Belarus,
Kazakhstan and Russia Singapore
E253816
E339948
521
South Africa Ukraine
E339825
E385958
South Korea United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
TRA REGISTERED No:

ER97590/21
DEALER No:
DA37380/15
United Kingdom
E339675
R-CRM-SRD-AG2SM4
Taiwan
E362840
E339826
522
United States and Canada Zambia
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: MRXAG2SM4

E339828
IC: 2546A- AG2SM4
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science WIRELESS ACCESSORY
and Economic Development Canada’s CHARGING MODULE
subject to the following two conditions: Argentina
interference, and
operation.
Vietnam
E340521
E278262
C0170230620AF04A2
E363335
523
Brazil European Union EU
E340824
E310043
Ghana
E358713
E340522
Djibouti
E340823 E363336
Jamaica
E340523
E369022
524
Mauritania
E367941
Jordan
E340524
E340657
Malaysia
E363337
Moldova
E339836
SQASI/TA/19/4129
SQASI/TA/21/3832
E337971
525
Morocco Russia
E253816
Serbia
E340525
E340200
E363338
Paraguay
E364764
E339812
2017-10-I-0000333
2021-08-I-0489
526
Singapore South Korea
E339940 E273475
South Africa Taiwan
TA-2017/3167
E340658 E338220
E363339
E364896
527
Ukraine
E364895
E269682
United Kingdom
E362840
United States and Canada
E340526
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: L2C0066T

FCC ID: L2C0084T
FCC ID: L2C0074TR
E363340
FCC ID: L2C0084TR
IC ID: 3432A-0074TR
528

interference, and
E369444
operation.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
Vietnam
The following warranties may apply to your
vehicle:
• New vehicle limited warranties.
• Emissions warranties, if applicable.
(Note: Fully-electric vehicles are not
eligible for emissions warranties.)
• Other warranties, if applicable.
Detailed warranty information specific to
your vehicle can be found in the Warranty
E278262 Guide at www.owner.ford.com.
The following California Warranty
Statement, required by California
Zambia regulations, applies to vehicles certified to
California emissions standards and
registered in a state that requires California
emissions warranty. If applicable,
additional California Emissions Warranties
can be found in the Warranty Guide at
www.owner.ford.com.
CALIFORNIA EMISSION CONTROL

WARRANTY STATEMENT
YOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS AND
OBLIGATIONS
E340659 The California Air Resources Board and

Ford Motor Company are pleased to
explain the emission control system
warranty on your (year) vehicle. In
California, new motor vehicles must be
designated, built and equipped to meet
529
the State's stringent anti-smog standards. OWNER'S WARRANTY

Ford Motor Company must warrant the RESPONSIBILITIES:
emission control system on your vehicle
for the periods of time listed below - As the vehicle owner, you are responsible
provided there has been no abuse, neglect for the performance of the required
or improper maintenance of your vehicle. maintenance listed in your owner's
manual. Ford Motor Company
Your emission control system may include recommends that you retain all receipts
parts such as the carburetor or covering maintenance on your vehicle, but
fuel-injection system, the ignition system, Ford Motor Company cannot deny
catalytic converter and engine computer. warranty solely for the lack of receipts or
Also included may be hoses, belts, for your failure to ensure the performance
connectors and other emission-related of all scheduled maintenance.
assemblies. Where a warrantable condition
exists, Ford Motor Company will repair your - You are responsible for presenting your
vehicle at no cost to you including vehicle to a Ford or Lincoln dealer as soon
diagnosis, parts and labor. as a problem exists. The warranty repairs
should be completed in a reasonable
MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY amount of time, not to exceed 30 days.
COVERAGE: - As the vehicle owner, you should also be
(For 1990 and subsequent model aware that Ford Motor Company may deny
passenger cars, light-duty trucks, and you warranty coverage if your vehicle or a
medium-duty vehicles.) part has failed due to abuse, neglect,
improper maintenance or unapproved
- For 3 years or 50,000 miles (whichever modifications.
occurs first);
If you have any questions regarding your
1) If your vehicle fails a Smog Check warranty rights and responsibilities, you
inspection, all necessary repairs and should contact Ford Customer Service at
adjustments will be made by Ford Motor 1-800-392-3673 or the California Air
Company to ensure that your emission Resource Board at 9528 Telstar Avenue,
control system PERFORMANCE El Monte, CA 91731.
WARRANTY.
2) If any emission-related part on your
vehicle is defective, the part will be
repaired or replaced by Ford Motor
Company. This is your short-term emission
control system DEFECTS WARRANTY.
- For 7 years or 70,000 miles (whichever
occurs first);
1) If an emission-related part listed in this
warranty booklet specially noted with
coverage for 7 years or 70,000 miles is
defective, the part will be repaired or
replaced by Ford Motor Company. This is
your long-term emission control system
DEFECTS WARRANTY.
530
Appendices
ELECTROMAGNETIC Note: We test and certify your vehicle to

meet electromagnetic compatibility
COMPATIBILITY legislation. It is your responsibility to make
sure that any equipment an authorized
dealer installs on your vehicle complies with
WARNING: Do not place objects applicable local legislation and other
or mount equipment on or near the requirements. Installation of some
airbag cover, on the side of the front or aftermarket electronic devices could
rear seatbacks, or in areas that may degrade the performance of vehicle
come into contact with a deploying functions, which use radio frequency signals
airbag. Failure to follow these such as broadcast radio receiver, tire
instructions may increase the risk of pressure monitoring system, push button
personal injury in the event of a crash. start, Bluetooth® connectivity or satellite
navigation.
WARNING: Do not fasten antenna Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
cables to vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
brake pipes. telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the
WARNING: Keep antenna and following illustrations and table. We do not
power cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from provide any other special provisions or
any electronic modules and airbags. conditions for installations or use.
Car/SUV
E239120
531
Appendices
Van
E239122
Truck
E239121
532
Appendices
Frequency Band Maximum Output Power Watt Antenna Positions

MHz (Peak RMS)
1-30 50 1
50-54 50 2, 3
68-87 50 2, 3
142-176 50 2, 3
380-512 50 2, 3
806-870 10 2, 3
533
Appendices
END USER LICENSE Description of Other Rights and

Limitations
AGREEMENT
• Speech Recognition: If the
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER SOFTWARE includes speech
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) (If recognition component(s), you should
Equipped) understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) that recognition errors are inherent in
have acquired a vehicle having several the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
devices, including SYNC ® and various COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
control modules, ("DEVICES") that liable for any damages arising out of
include software licensed or owned by errors in the speech recognition
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates process. It is your responsibility to
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those monitor any speech recognition
software products of FORD MOTOR functions included in the system.
COMPANY origin, as well as associated • Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
media, printed materials, and "online" Decompilation and Disassembly:
or electronic documentation You may not reverse engineer,
("SOFTWARE") are protected by decompile, translate, disassemble or
international intellectual property laws attempt to discover any source code
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. SOFTWARE nor permit others to
• The SOFTWARE may interface with reverse engineer, decompile or
and/or communicate with, or may be disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
later upgraded to interface with and/or and only to the extent that such activity
communicate with additional software is expressly permitted by applicable
and/or systems provided by FORD law notwithstanding this limitation or
MOTOR COMPANY. to the extent as may be permitted by
the licensing terms governing use of
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
any open source components included
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
with the SOFTWARE.
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE • Limitations on Distributing,
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT Copying, Modifying and Creating
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, Derivative Works: You may not
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT distribute, copy, make modifications
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF to or create derivative works based on
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This permitted by applicable law
EULA grants you the following license: notwithstanding this limitation or to
• You may use the SOFTWARE as the extent as may be permitted by the
installed on the DEVICES and as licensing terms governing use of any
otherwise interfacing with systems open source components included with
and/or services provide by or through the SOFTWARE.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
534
Appendices
• Single EULA: The end user • Additional Software/Services: The

documentation for the DEVICES and SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
related systems and services may COMPANY, third party software and
contain multiple EULAs, such as service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
multiple translations and/or multiple its designated agent to provide or make
media versions (e.g., in the user available to you SOFTWARE updates,
documentation and in the software). supplements, add-on components, or
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you Internet-based services components
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of of the SOFTWARE after the date you
the SOFTWARE. obtain your initial copy of the
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
permanently transfer your rights under Components".) SOFTWARE updates
this EULA only as part of a sale or may cause you to incur additional
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you charges from your wireless service
retain no copies, you transfer all of the provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
SOFTWARE (including all component or third party software and services
parts, the media and printed materials, suppliers provide or make available to
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the you Supplemental Components and
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the no other EULA terms are provided
recipient agrees to the terms of this along with the Supplemental
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, Components, then the terms of this
any transfer must include all prior EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
versions of the SOFTWARE. COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
• Termination: Without prejudice to any discontinue without liability any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY Internet-based services provided to
may terminate this EULA if you fail to you or made available to you through
comply with the terms and conditions the use of the SOFTWARE.
of this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
535
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:

SOFTWARE may provide you with the All title and intellectual property rights in
ability to link to third party sites. The and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
third party sites are not under the limited to any images, photographs,
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, animations, video, audio, music, text and
its affiliates and/or its designated "applets" incorporated into the
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its materials, and any copies of the
designated agent are responsible for SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
(I) the contents of any third party sites, COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
any links contained in third party sites, SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
or any changes or updates to third not copy the printed materials
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
other form of transmission received and intellectual property rights in and to
from any third party sites. If the the content which may be accessed
SOFTWARE provides links to third through use of the SOFTWARE is the
party sites, those links are provided to property of the respective content owner
you only as a convenience, and the and may be protected by applicable
inclusion of any link does not imply an copyright or other intellectual property
endorsement of the third party site by laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates rights to use such content outside its
and/or its designated agent. intended use. All rights not specifically
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: granted under this EULA are reserved by
You recognize your obligation to drive FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
responsibly and keep attention on the and third party software and service
road. You will read and abide with the providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
DEVICES operating instructions services which may be accessed through
particularly as they pertain to safety the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
and you agree to assume any risk respective terms of use relating to such
associated with the use of the services. If this SOFTWARE contains
DEVICES. documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: such electronic documentation.
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip, acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or subject to U.S. and European Union export
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes applicable international and national laws
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
replacement copy for the existing as well as end-user, end-use and
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
this EULA, including any additional EULA other governments.
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
536
Appendices
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
you any rights in connection with any Information Read and follow
trademarks or service marks of FORD instructions:
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers. • Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are information provided in this end user
registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by following precautions found in the
Ford Motor Company is under license. Owner Guide can lead to an accident
Other trademarks and trade names are or other serious injuries.
those of their respective owners.
General Operation
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
• Voice Command Control: Certain
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
functions within the SYNC® system
provided in the documentation for the
may be accomplished using voice
DEVICES product support, such as the
commands. Using voice commands
vehicle owner guide.
while driving helps you to operate the
Should you have any questions concerning system without removing your hands
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD from the wheel or eyes from the road.
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, • Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
please refer to the address provided in the access any function requiring a
documentation for the DEVICES. prolonged view of the screen while you
No Liability for Certain Damages: are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD manner before attempting to access a
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY function of the system requiring
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, prolonged attention.
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO • Volume Setting: Do not raise the
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, volume excessively. Keep the volume
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL at a level where you can still hear
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN outside traffic and emergency signals
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR while driving. Driving while unable to
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS hear these sounds could cause an
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY accident.
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES • Navigation Features: Any navigation
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE features included in the system are
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW intended to provide turn by turn
VEHICLE. instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
537
Appendices
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of

features may require manual Risk
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to • You agree to each of the following:(a)
perform such set-up or insert data Any use of the SOFTWARE while
while driving can distract your attention driving an automobile or other vehicle
and could cause an accident or other in violation of applicable law or
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
and legal manner before attempting presents a significant risk of distracted
these operations. driving and should not be attempted
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any under any circumstances;(b) Use of
navigation features are provided only the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
as an aid. Make your driving decisions poses a significant risk of hearing
based on your observations of local damage and should not be attempted
conditions and existing traffic under any circumstances;(c) The
regulations. Any such feature is not a SOFTWARE may not be compatible
substitute for your personal judgment. with new or different versions of an
Any route suggestions made by this operating system, third party software,
system should never replace any local or third party services, and the
traffic regulations or your personal SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
judgment or knowledge of safe driving critical failure of an operating system,
practices. third party software, or third party
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route service.(d) Any third party service
suggestions if doing so would result in accessed by or third party software
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you used with the SOFTWARE (I) may
would be placed in an unsafe situation, charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
or if you would be directed into an area may not work correctly, on an
that you consider unsafe. The driver is uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
ultimately responsible for the safe may change streaming formats or
operation of the vehicle and therefore, discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
must evaluate whether it is safe to adult, profane or offensive content; and
follow the suggested directions. (v) may contain inaccurate, false or
misleading traffic, weather, financial
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps or safety information or other content;
used by this system may be inaccurate and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
because of changes in roads, traffic cause you to incur additional charges
controls or driving conditions. Always from your wireless service provider
use good judgment and common sense (WSP) and any data or minute
when following the suggested routes. calculators that may be included in the
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on software program are for reference
any navigation features included in the only, are not warranted in any way and
system to route you to emergency should not be relied upon in anyway.
services. Ask local authorities or an • When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
emergency services operator for these to be responsible for and assume the
locations. Not all emergency services entire risk to the items set forth in
such as police, fire stations, hospitals Section (a) – (e) above.
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
538
Appendices
Disclaimer of Warranty CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE

SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY, DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU. OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF • The laws of the State of Michigan
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY govern this EULA and Your use of the
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN SOFTWARE. Your use of the
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, SOFTWARE may also be subject to
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND other local, state, national, or
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY international laws. Any litigation arising
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES out of or related to this EULA shall be
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST brought and maintained exclusively in
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT a court of the State of Michigan
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY located in Wayne County or in the
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, United States District Court for the
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES consent to submit to the personal
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c) jurisdiction of a court in the State of
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE Michigan located in Wayne County and
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, the United States District Court for the
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE Eastern District of Michigan for any
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d) dispute arising out of or relating to this
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE, EULA.
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
539
Appendices
Binding Arbitration and Class Action the right to litigate (or participate in as a
Waiver party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
(a) Application. This Section applies to will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT whose decision will be final except for a
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO limited right of appeal under the Federal
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR, over the parties may enforce the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF arbitrator’s award.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. (e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
controversy between You and FORD forum will be conducted solely on an
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
exceptions listed above, concerning the MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this dispute heard as a class action, as a private
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort, attorney general action, or in any other
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other proceeding in which any party acts or
legal or equitable basis. proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a be combined with another without the
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY prior written consent of all parties to all
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”, affected arbitrations or proceedings.
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the (f) Arbitration procedure. Any
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the arbitration will be conducted by the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and American Arbitration Association (the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to “AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
resolve any dispute through informal Rules. If You are an individual and use the
negotiation within 60 days from the date SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days, if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may less whether or not You are an individual
commence arbitration. or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
(c) Small claims court. You may also Consumer-Related Disputes will also
litigate any dispute in small claims court apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
in your county of residence or FORD Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
business, if the dispute meets all request a telephonic or in-person hearing
requirements to be heard in the small by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
claims court. You may litigate in small involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
claims court whether or not You be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
negotiated informally first. good cause to hold an in-person hearing
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD instead. For more information, see adr.org
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
dispute by informal negotiation or in small commence arbitration only in your county
claims court, any other effort to resolve of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
the dispute will be conducted exclusively principal place of business. The arbitrator
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
540
Appendices
may award the same damages to You filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
individually as a court could. The arbitrator expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
may award declaratory or injunctive relief fees or expenses from you in any
only to You individually, and only to the arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
extent required to satisfy Your individual counted in determining how much a
claim. dispute involves.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives. (h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
• I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
by law, any claim or dispute under this
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
EULA to which this Section applies must
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
be filed within one year in small claims
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
d). The one-year period begins when the
COMPANY’S last written settlement
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
offer made before the arbitrator was
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
appointed (“last written offer”), your
year, it is permanently barred.
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an (I) Severability. If the class action waiver
“award”), and the arbitrator awards (Section e) is found to be illegal or
you more than the last written offer, unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you dispute, then that portion of Section e will
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of not apply to those parts. Instead, those
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your parts will be severed and proceed in a court
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
(3) reimburse any expenses (including in arbitration. If any other provision of that
expert witness fees and costs) that portion Section e is found to be illegal or
your attorney reasonably accrues for unenforceable, that provision will be
investigating, preparing, and pursuing severed with the remainder of Section e
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator remaining in full force and effect.
will determine the amounts.
Telenav Software End User License
• ii. Disputes involving more than
Agreement
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s Please read these terms and conditions
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. carefully before you use the TeleNav
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In Software. Your use of the TeleNav
any arbitration you commence, FORD Software indicates that you accept these
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA terms and conditions. If you do not accept
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or these terms and conditions, do not break
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the the seal of the package, launch, or
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
or brought for an improper purpose. In TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
any arbitration FORD MOTOR the privacy policy at any time, with or
COMPANY commences, it will pay all without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
541
Appendices
1. Safe and Lawful Use 2. Account Information

You acknowledge that devoting attention You agree: (a) when registering the
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
of injury or death to you and others in true, accurate, current, and complete
situations that otherwise require your information about yourself, and (b) to
undivided attention, and you therefore inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
agree to comply with the following when to such information, and to keep it true,
using the TeleNav Software: accurate, current and complete.
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise 3. Software License
drive safely;
• Subject to your compliance with the
(b) use your own personal judgment while terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
driving. If you feel that a route suggested hereby grants to you a personal,
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to non-exclusive, non-transferable license
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, (except as expressly permitted below
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs in connection with your permanent
you into an area that you consider to be transfer of the TeleNav Software
unsafe, do not follow such instructions; license), without the right to
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise sublicense, to use the TeleNav
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless Software (in object code form only) in
your vehicle is stationary and parked; order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
use the TeleNav Software only for your
or in any manner inconsistent with this
personal business or leisure purposes,
Agreement;
and not to provide commercial
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices navigation services to other parties.
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in 3.1 License Limitations
your vehicle so that they will not interfere • (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
with your driving and will not prevent the disassemble, translate, modify, alter
operation of any safety device (such as an or otherwise change the TeleNav
airbag). Software or any part thereof; (b)
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav attempt to derive the source code,
harmless against all claims resulting from audio library or structure of the
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate TeleNav Software without the prior
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving express written consent of TeleNav;
vehicle, including as a result of your failure (c) remove from the TeleNav
to comply with the directions above. Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)
542
Appendices
distribute, sublicense or otherwise is dependent on the accuracy of

transfer the TeleNav Software to navigation, as the maps or functionality
others, except as part of your of the TeleNav Software are not
permanent transfer of the TeleNav intended to support such high risk
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav applications, especially in more remote
Software in any manner that geographical areas.
I. infringes the intellectual property or • TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
privacy or other rights of any party, CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
regulation, including but not limited to laws WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
and regulations related to spamming, FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
privacy, consumer and child protection, OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
obscenity or defamation, or LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
obscene, libelous, or otherwise PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
otherwise permit unauthorized access by RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
third parties to the TeleNav Software SOFTWARE.
without advanced written permission of • Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
TeleNav. disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible 5. Limitation of Liability
pursuant to applicable law, in no event • TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
or agents or employees of any of the CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
foregoing, be liable for any decision OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
made or action taken by you or anyone BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
else in reliance on the information PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
provided by the TeleNav Software. INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
TeleNav also does not warrant the SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
accuracy of the map or other data used (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
for the TeleNav Software. Such data LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
may not always reflect reality due to, INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
among other things, road closures, OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
construction, weather, new roads and LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
other changing conditions. You are PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
responsible for the entire risk arising OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
out of your use of the TeleNav USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
Software. For example but without TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
limitation, you agree not to rely on the TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
TeleNav Software for critical POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
navigation in areas where the NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
well-being or survival of you or others THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
543
Appendices
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, to the exclusive jurisdiction of the

WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES courts of the County of Santa Clara,
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL California. The United Nations
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN Convention on Contracts for the
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING International Sale of Goods shall not
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE apply.
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS 7. Assignment
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT • You may not resell, assign, or transfer
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE this Agreement or any of your rights or
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES obligations, except in totality, in
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT connection with your permanent
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR expressly conditioned upon the new
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS to be bound by the terms and
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. conditions of this Agreement. Any such
6. Arbitration and Governing Law sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
• You agree that any dispute, claim or paragraph will result in immediate
controversy arising out of or relating to termination of this Agreement, without
this Agreement or the TeleNav liability to TeleNav, in which case you
Software shall be settled by and all other parties shall immediately
independent arbitration involving a cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
neutral arbitrator and administered by Notwithstanding the foregoing,
the American Arbitration Association TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
in the County of Santa Clara, California. any other party at any time without
The arbitrator shall apply the notice, provided the assignee remains
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the bound by this Agreement.
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered 8. Miscellaneous
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
8.1
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration This Agreement constitutes the entire
proceeding and the decision of the agreement between TeleNav and you with
arbitrator shall be binding upon both respect to the subject matter hereof.
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement 8.2
and performance hereunder will be Except for the limited licenses expressly
governed by and construed in granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
accordance with the laws of the State all right, title and interest in and to the
of California, without giving effect to TeleNav Software, including without
its conflict of law provisions. To the limitation all related intellectual property
extent judicial action is necessary in rights. No licenses or other rights which are
connection with the binding arbitration, not expressly granted in this Agreement
both TeleNav and you agree to submit are intended to, or shall be, granted or
544
Appendices
conferred by implication, statute, 8.6

inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
The headings in this Agreement are for
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
convenience of reference only, will not be
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
other than the licenses explicitly granted
and will not be referred to in connection
in this Agreement.
with the construction or interpretation of
8.3 this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
By using the TeleNav Software, you variations thereof, will not be deemed to
consent to receive from TeleNav all be terms of limitation, but rather will be
communications, including notices, deemed to be followed by the words
agreements, legally required disclosures "without limitation".
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices") 9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
other data licensed to Telenav by third
Website or by downloading such Notices
party vendors for the benefit of you and
to your wireless device. If you desire to
other end users. This Agreement
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
includes end-user terms applicable to
electronically, you must discontinue your
these companies (included at the end
use of the TeleNav Software.
of this Agreement), and thus your use
8.4 of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
TeleNav's or your failure to require with the following additional terms and
performance of any provision shall not conditions, which are applicable to
affect that party's right to require Telenav’s third party vendor licensors:
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of 9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any North America, LLC
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself. The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
8.5 resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
If any provision herein is held conditions which are agreed to by you, on
unenforceable, then such provision will be the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
modified to reflect the intention of the its licensors (including their licensors and
parties, and the remaining provisions of suppliers) on the other hand.
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect. © 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
545
Appendices
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from Restrictions. Except where you have been
the United States Postal Service® to specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
publish and sell ZIP+4® information. and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
with any products, systems, or applications
Prices are not established, controlled or
installed or otherwise connected to or in
approved by the United States Postal
communication with vehicles, capable of
Service®. The following trademarks and
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
registrations are owned by the USPS:
real time route guidance, fleet
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
management or similar applications; or (b)
ZIP+4
with or in communication with any
The Data for Mexico includes certain data positioning devices or any mobile or
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y wireless-connected electronic or computer
Geografía. devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2 computers, pagers, and personal digital
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd assistants or PDAs.
The data (“Data”) is provided for your Warning. The Data may contain
personal, internal use only and not for inaccurate or incomplete information due
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is to the passage of time, changing
subject to the following terms and circumstances, sources used and the
conditions which are agreed to by you, on nature of collecting comprehensive
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., geographic data, any of which may lead to
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including incorrect results.
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand. 20xx. All rights reserved No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
Terms and Conditions risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data guarantees, representations or warranties
together with the Telenav Software solely of any kind, express or implied, arising by
for the internal business and personal law or otherwise, including but not limited
purposes for which you were licensed, and to, content, quality, accuracy,
not for service bureau, time-sharing or completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
subject to the restrictions set forth in the use or results to be obtained from this
following paragraphs, you agree not to Data, or that the Data or server will be
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, uninterrupted or error-free.
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
portion of this Data, and may not transfer ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
except to the extent permitted by ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
mandatory laws. OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
546
Appendices
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR export laws, rules or regulations prohibit

NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, HERE from complying with any of its
Territories and Countries do not allow obligations hereunder to deliver or
certain warranty exclusions, so to that distribute Data, such failure shall be
extent the above exclusion may not apply excused and shall not constitute a breach
to you. of this Agreement.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND Entire Agreement. These terms and
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR conditions constitute the entire agreement
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT between Telenav (and its licensors,
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY including their licensors and suppliers) and
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE and supersedes in their entirety any and
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR all written or oral agreements previously
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR existing between us with respect to such
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH subject matter.
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR Governing Law. The above terms and
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR conditions shall be governed by the laws
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY where European HERE Data is used],
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR Convention for Contracts for the
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, International Sale of Goods, which is
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION [insert “The Netherlands” where European
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A HERE Data is used] for any and all
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS disputes, claims and actions arising from
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE or in connection with the Data provided to
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some you hereunder.
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or Government End Users. If the Data is
damages limitations, so to that extent the being acquired by or on behalf of the
above may not apply to you. United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
Export Control. You shall not export from those customarily claimed by the United
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct States government, this Data is a
product thereof except in compliance with, “commercial item” as that term is defined
and with all licenses and approvals at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
required under, applicable export laws, accordance with these End-User Terms,
rules and regulations, including but not and each copy of Data delivered or
limited to the laws, rules and regulations otherwise furnished shall be marked and
administered by the Office of Foreign embedded as appropriate with the
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and treated in accordance with such Notice:
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
547
Appendices
NOTICE OF USE B. Canada Data. The following provi-

sions apply to the Data for Canada,
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ which may include or reflect data from
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE third party licensors (“Third Party
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
60606 Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to 1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
these End-User Terms under which this agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data was provided. Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
If the Contracting Officer, federal licensors of such data, including Her
government agency, or any federal official Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
refuses to use the legend provided herein, make no guarantees, representa-
the Contracting Officer, federal tions or warranties respecting such
government agency, or any federal official data, either express or implied,
must notify HERE prior to seeking arising by law or otherwise, including
additional or alternative rights in the Data. but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
I. US/Canada Territory for a particular purpose.
A. United States Data. The End-User b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Terms for any Application containing Party Data licensors, including Her
Data for the United States shall contain Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
the following notices: shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license spective of the nature of the cause
from the United States Postal of the claim, demand or action
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® alleging any loss, injury or damages,
information.” direct or indirect, which may result
“©United States Postal Service® from the use or possession of such
20XX. Prices are not established, Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
controlled or approved by the United revenues or contracts, or any other
States Postal Service®. The following consequential loss of any kind
trademarks and registrations are resulting from any defect in the
owned by the USPS: United States Data.
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
548
Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with either express or implied, arising by

each copy of all or any portion of the law or otherwise, including but not
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client limited to, effectiveness, complete-
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the ness, accuracy or fitness for a
following copyright notice on at least particular purpose. The licensors,
one of: (i) the label for the storage including Her Majesty, Canada Post
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging and NRCan, shall not be liable in
for the copy; or (iii) other materials respect of any claim, demand or
packaged with the copy, such as user action, irrespective of the nature of
manuals or end user license agree- the cause of the claim, demand or
ments: “This data includes information action alleging any loss, injury or
taken with permission from Canadian damages, direct or indirect, which
authorities, including © Her Majesty may result from the use or posses-
the Queen in Right of Canada, © sion of the data or the Data. The
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada licensors, including Her Majesty,
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
Department of Natural Resources be liable in any way for loss of
Canada. All rights reserved.” revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
3. End-User Terms: Except as other- resulting from any defect in the data
wise agreed by the parties, in connec- or the Data.
tion with the provision of any portion End User shall indemnify and save
of the Data for the Territory of Canada harmless the licensors, including Her
to End-Users as may be authorized Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
under the Agreement, Client shall and their officers, employees and
provide such End-Users, in a reason- agents from and against any claim,
ably conspicuous manner, with terms demand or action, irrespective of
(set forth with other end user terms the nature of the cause of the claim,
required to be provided under the demand or action, alleging loss,
Agreement, or as otherwise may be costs, expenses, damages or injuries
provided, by Client) which shall include (including injuries resulting in death)
the following provisions on behalf of arising out of the use or possession
the Third Party Data licensors, of the data or the Data.
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan: 4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
The Data may include or reflect tion to all of the rights and obligations
data of licensors, including Her of the parties under the Agreement.
Majesty the Queen in the Right of To the extent that any of the provi-
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada sions of this Section are inconsistent
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”) with, or conflict with, any other provi-
and the Department of Natural sions of the Agreement, the provisions
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such of this Section shall prevail.
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
549
Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies

II. Mexico. The following provision applies of the Data and/or packaging relating
to the Data for Mexico, which includes thereto shall include the respective Third
certain data from the Instituto Nacional Party Notices set forth below and used
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”): as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or included in such copy:
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice: Country Notice
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)” Jordan “© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
III. Latin America Territory for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
Client or any of its permitted
of the Data and/or packaging relating
sublicensees (if any) fail to
thereto shall include the respective Third
meet such requirement,
Party Notices set forth below and used
HERE shall have the right to
as described below corresponding to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
included in such copy:
Data.
Territory Notice
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
Argen- IGN “INSTITUTO sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
tina GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL licensing and/or otherwise distributing
ARGENTINO” HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-
Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
AUTORIZACION N° IGM- in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
ENERO DE 2011” censees (if any) and End-Users are
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD restricted from using the Jordan Data in
TOPO ®” Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Guade- Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
loupe, Jordan-based customer. For purposes
French of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-
Guiana tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-
and ations, GIS applications, mobile business
Marti- “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto asset management applications, call
nique Nacional de Estadística y center applications, telematics applica-
Mexico Geografía)” tions, public organization Internet
IV. Middle East Territory applications or for providing geocoding
services.
550
Appendices
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior

V. Europe Territory written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe with respect to Data for the Territory of
1. General Restrictions Applicable to Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
and agrees that in certain countries of Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
the Europe Territory, Client will need Client is restricted from using Data for
to obtain rights directly from third the Territory of France to create paper
party RDS-TMC code providers to maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
receive and use the Traffic Codes in 1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
the Data and to deliver to End-Users from using any Data to create, sell or
Transactions in any way derived from distribute paper maps that are the same
or based on such Traffic Codes. For or substantially similar, in terms of data
such countries, HERE shall deliver the content and specific use of color,
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to symbols and scale, to paper maps
Client only after receiving certification published by the European national
from Client of its having obtained such mapping agencies, including without
rights. limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
2. Display of Third Party Rights Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
each Transaction that uses Traffic Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Codes for Belgium, provide the Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
following notice to the End-User: swesen of Austria, and the National
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are Land Survey of Sweden.
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Transports.” Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
license granted to Client relating to a direct action against Client to enforce
making, selling or distributing paper compliance with the OS copyright notice
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or (see Section IV(D) below) and paper
paper-like medium): (a) such license map requirements (see Section IV(B)
with respect to Data for the Territory of above) contained in this Agreement.
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
separate written agreement with the of the Data and/or packaging relating
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and thereto shall include the respective Third
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the Party Notices set forth below and used
OS any and all applicable paper map as described below corresponding to
royalties, and Client’s complying with the Territory (or portion thereof)
the OS copyright notice requirements; included in such copy:
(b) such license for selling or otherwise Country(ies) Notice
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
551
Appendices
Austria “© Bundesamt für Eich- Spain “Información geográfica

und Vermessungswesen” propiedad del CNIG”
Croatia Sweden “Based upon electronic
Cyprus, data © National Land
Estonia, Survey Sweden.”
Latvia,
Lithuania, Switzerland “Topografische
Moldova, Grundlage: © Bundesamt
Poland, für Landestopographie.
Slovenia E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
and/or acknowledges that HERE has not
Ukraine “© EuroGeographics” received approvals to distribute map
France “source: © IGN 2009 – BD data for the following countries in such
TOPO ®” respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
Germany “Die Grundlagendaten HERE may update such list from time to
wurden mit Genehmigung time. The license rights granted to Client
der zuständigen Behörden under this TL with respect to the Data
entnommen” for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
Great Britain “Contains Ordnance laws and regulations, including, without
Survey data © Crown limitation, any required licenses or
copyright and database approvals to distribute the Application
right 2010 Contains Royal incorporating such Data in such
Mail data © Royal Mail respective countries.
copyright and database
right 2010”
VI. Australia Territory
Greece “Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.” A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
Hungary “Copyright © 2003; Top- thereto shall include the respective Third
Map Ltd.” Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
Italy “La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
included in such copy:
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed Copyright. Based on data provided
al tratto prodotta e fornita under license from PSMA Australia
dalla Regione Toscana.” Limited (www.psma.com.au).
Norway “Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Portugal “Source: IgeoE – Portugal”
552
Appendices
Product incorporates data which is © DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED

20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd. EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE
addition to the foregoing, the End-User DATE THE CLAIM AROSE.
Terms for any Application containing (ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
shall contain the following notice: WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
“Product incorporates traffic location OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora- AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
tion Limited and its licensors.” INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY
AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY
Telematics Disclosure OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY,
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS (iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH DEVICE.
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE (iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF
AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL
UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF
UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL, SERVICES
EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT, THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE GUARANTEE ANY END USER
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
553
Appendices
MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR do not remove any copyright notices that
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, appear and do not modify the Data in any
SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS and may not transfer or distribute it in any
OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR form, for any purpose, except to the extent
OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B) permitted by mandatory laws.
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT, Restrictions
DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE Except where you have been specifically
PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR not (a) use this Data with any products,
TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING systems, or applications installed or
CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY otherwise connected to or in
CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN communication with vehicles, capable of
CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY, vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER real time route guidance, fleet
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL management or similar applications; or (b)
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END with or in communication with any
USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND positioning devices or any mobile or
HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER wireless-connected electronic or computer
HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY devices, including without limitation
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE computers, pagers, and personal digital
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES using this Data if you fail to comply with
PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER these terms and conditions.
OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE Limited Warranty
OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
CARRIER. perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
VII. China Territory period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
Personal Use Only provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
You agree to use this Data together with
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
[insert name of Client Application] for the
support engineers will make commercially
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
for which you were licensed, and not for
issues.
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
554
Appendices
Customer Remedies FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,

CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2 THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
resulted from accident, abuse, or WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
misapplication. Any replacement Data will LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
be warranted for the remainder of the POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
original warranty period or thirty (30) days, NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
nor any product support services offered EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
by NAV2 are available without proof of exclusions may not be permitted under
purchase from an authorized international applicable law, so to that extent the above
source. exclusion may not apply to you.
No Other Warranty: Export Control
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY You agree not to export to anywhere any
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT part of the Data provided to you or any
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 direct product thereof except in
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR compliance with, and with all licenses and
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM approvals required under, applicable
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, export laws, rules and regulations.
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A IP Protection
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
exclusions may not be permitted under suppliers and are protected by applicable
applicable law, so to that extent the above copyright and other intellectual property
exclusion may not apply to you. law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
Limited Liability: sale.
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY Entire Agreement
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR These terms and conditions constitute the
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT entire agreement between NAV2(and its
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY licensors, including their licensors and
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE matter hereof, and supersedes in their
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR entirety any and all written or oral
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR agreements previously existing between
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH us with respect to such subject matter.
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
555
Appendices
Governing Law. ("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform

other functions. You may use Gracenote
The above terms and conditions shall be Data only by means of the intended End
governed by the laws of the People’s User functions of this device. This device
Republic of China, without giving effect to may contain content belonging to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
United Nations Convention for Contracts restrictions set forth herein with respect to
for the International Sale of Goods, which Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising content and such content providers shall
from or in connection with the Data be entitled to all of the benefits and
provided to you hereunder shall be protections set forth herein that are
submitted to the Shanghai International available to Gracenote. You agree that you
Economic and Trade Arbitration will use the content from Gracenote
Commission for arbitration. ("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
Gracenote® Copyright the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
CD and music-related data from non-commercial use only. You agree not
Gracenote, Inc., copyright© to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
associated with a music file) to any third
Gracenote. This product and service may
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
practice one or more of the following U.S.
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459; GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
pending. Some services supplied under
HEREIN.
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523. You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
Gracenote.
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Gracenote® End User License Agreement Data, the Gracenote Software, and
(EULA) Gracenote Servers.
This device contains software from Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Emeryville, California 94608 Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
("Gracenote"). Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
The software from Gracenote (the Gracenote become liable for any payment
"Gracenote Software") enables this device to you for any information that you provide,
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
556
Appendices
including any copyrighted material or IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

music file information. You agree that MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Gracenote may enforce its respective PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
rights, collectively or separately, under this NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
agreement against you, directly in each GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
company's own name. THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
queries for statistical purposes. The
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
queries without knowing anything about
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
who you are. For more information, see the
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy. Radio Frequency Statement
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE This device complies with Part 15 of the
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, Canada. Operation is subject to the
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY following two conditions:
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE (1) This device may not cause harmful
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY interference, and
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT (2) this device must accept any
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT interference received, including
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE interference that may cause undesired
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF operation.
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARNING: Changes or
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER modifications not expressively approved
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE by the party responsible for compliance
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR could void the user's authority to operate
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE radio certification number only signifies
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR that Industry Canada technical
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE specifications were met.
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY The antenna used for this transmitter must
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES not be co-located or operating in
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO conjunction with any other antenna or
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE transmitter.
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
557
Appendices
Taiwan Territory
According to the "Technical Specifications Website
for Low Power Radio Frequency www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
Equipment" formulated by the National ditions/
Communications and Communication
Committee of the Executive Yuan: 3.8.2.
For the low-power radio frequency 1. Acceptance
equipment that has obtained the By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
verification certificate, the company, firm you will be deemed to have accepted and
or user shall not change the frequency, agreed to be bound by the terms and
increase the power or change the conditions fully detailed at:
characteristics and functions of the original
design without authorization. Website
The use of low-power radio frequency
equipment must not affect flight safety www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
and interfere with legal communications: ditions/
when the system detects interference,
immediately stop using it until there is no 2. Intellectual Property
interference. SUNA Products and/or Services are for
The aforementioned legal communication your personal use. You may not record, or
refers to the wireless communication retransmit the content, nor use the content
operated in accordance with the provisions in association with any other traffic
of the Telecommunications Management information or route guidance service or
Law. Low-power radio frequency device not approved by Intelematics. You
equipment needs to endure the obtain no right of ownership in any
interference of legal communication or Intellectual Property Rights (including
industrial, scientific and medical radio copyright) in the data that is used to
wave radiation electrical equipment. provide SUNA Products and/or Services.
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS 3. Appropriate Use

AND CONDITIONS SUNA Products and/or Services are
intended as an aid to personal motoring
By activating, using and/or accessing the and travel planning, and do not provide
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or comprehensive or accurate information on
other content or material provided by all occasions. On occasions, you may
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products experience additional delay as a result of
and/or Services), you must accept using SUNA Products and/or Services. You
certain terms and conditions. The following acknowledge that it is not intended, or
is a brief summary of the terms and suitable, for use in applications where time
conditions that apply to you. To view the of arrival or driving directions may impact
full terms and conditions relevant to your the safety of the public or yourself.
use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult: 4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
while driving
558
Appendices
You, and other authorised drivers of the 7. Please Note

vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or Great care has been taken in preparing this
Services are available or installed and manual. Constant product development
active, remain at all times responsible for may mean that some information is not
observing all relevant laws and codes of entirely up-to-date. The information in this
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only document is subject to change without
actively operate SUNA Products and/or notice.
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete
stop and it is safe to do so.
5. Service Continuity and Reception of
the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable
for technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
SUNA Products and/or Services at any
time.
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
the manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
any third party for any damages either
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
inability to use SUNA Products and/or
Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
has been advised of the possibility of such
damages. You also acknowledge that the
neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
guarantees nor make any warranties that
relate to the availability, accuracy or
completeness of SUNA Products and/or
Services, and to the extent which it is
lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
559
560
Index
3 Adaptive Cruise Control –

Troubleshooting........................................250
360 Degree Camera....................................237 Adaptive Cruise Control – Information
Messages.........................................................250
4 Adaptive Headlamps...................................89
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................335
4WD Adjusting the Set Speed
See: Four-Wheel Drive.....................................203 Tolerance.....................................................250
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
9 With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................79
911 Assist...........................................................55 Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
A Column............................................................79
AFS
A/C See: Adaptive Headlamps...............................89
See: Climate Control..........................................137 Airbag Disposal...............................................53
About This Manual...........................................9 Air Conditioning
ABS See: Climate Control..........................................137
See: Brakes...........................................................210 Air Filter
ABS driving hints See: Changing the Engine Air Filter - 2.3L
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock EcoBoost™......................................................321
Brakes..................................................................211 See: Changing the Engine Air Filter -
Accessories....................................................473 3.0L.....................................................................322
Accessories See: Changing the Engine Air Filter -
See: Replacement Parts 3.3L.....................................................................323
Recommendation............................................12 Alarm
Active Park Assist........................................230 See: Anti-Theft Alarm.........................................77
Adaptive Cruise Control.............................241 Ambient Lighting - Vehicles With: 10.1
Adaptive Cruise Control – Inch Center Display Screen......................91
Troubleshooting............................................250 Ambient Lighting - Vehicles With: 8 Inch
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators - Center Display Screen..............................90
Vehicles With: Intelligent Adaptive Anti-Theft Alarm.............................................77
Cruise Control............................................248 Appendices.....................................................531
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators - Apps.................................................................455
Vehicles With: Lane Centering............248 At a Glance.......................................................20
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators - At a Glance - ST.............................................20
Vehicles With: Stop and Go..................248 Audible Warnings and Indicators...........109
Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations - Audio Control...................................................81
Vehicles With: Lane Centering.............242 Audio System.................................................419
Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations - General Information..........................................419
Vehicles With: Stop and Go..................243 Audio Unit.......................................................419
Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions - Auto Hold.........................................................214
Vehicles With: Lane Centering..............241 Autolamps........................................................87
Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions - Automatic Climate Control.......................137
Vehicles With: Stop and Go...................241 Automatic High Beam Control..................92
Indicators........................................................93
561
Index
Automatic Transmission............................197 Changing the 12V Battery - Hybrid

Automatic Transmission Fluid Electric Vehicle (HEV).............................332
Check............................................................328 Changing the Engine Air Filter - 2.3L
Auto-Start-Stop............................................176 EcoBoost™..................................................321
Autowipers.......................................................83 Changing the Engine Air Filter -
Auxiliary Power Points................................164 3.0L.................................................................322
Changing the Engine Air Filter -
B 3.3L.................................................................323
Changing the Front Wiper Blades.........336
Battery Changing the Rear Wiper Blades...........337
See: Changing the 12V Battery - Excluding: Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)..................329 Name or Password...................................418
See: Changing the 12V Battery - Hybrid Electric Charging a Wireless Device......................166
Vehicle (HEV).................................................332 Checking MyKey System Status..............66
Blind Spot Information System.............259 Checking the Wiper Blades.....................336
BLIS Child Restraint and Seatbelt
See: Blind Spot Information System..........259 Maintenance.................................................43
Body Styling Kits.........................................346 Child Restraint Positioning.........................35
Bonnet Lock Child Safety......................................................23
See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........315 General Information............................................23
Booster Seats..................................................33 Child Safety Locks.........................................36
Brake Fluid Check........................................328 Cleaning Leather Seats.............................343
Brakes...............................................................210 Cleaning Products.......................................339
General Information..........................................210 Cleaning the Engine.....................................341
Breaking-In....................................................288 Cleaning the Exterior.................................340
Bulb Specification Chart............................412 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.........................343
C Cleaning the Interior...................................342
Cleaning the Wheels..................................344
Canceling the Set Speed..........................240 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Capacities and Specifications - 2.3L Blades...........................................................342
EcoBoost™.................................................384 Clearing All MyKeys.......................................66
Capacities and Specifications - Clearing the Garage Door Opener..........162
3.0L.................................................................391 Climate............................................................445
Capacities and Specifications - 3.3L, Climate Control..............................................137
Gasoline.......................................................398 Cold Weather Precautions.......................288
Capacities and Specifications - 3.3L, Collision, Damage or Fire Event.............295
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV).............405 Connected Vehicle.......................................414
Capacities and Specifications................378 Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Cargo Nets......................................................276 Network.............................................................414
Car Wash Connected Vehicle Data...............................17
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................340 Connected Vehicle Limitations...............414
Catalytic Converter......................................193 Connected Vehicle Requirements.........414
Changing a Bulb...........................................337 Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting -
Changing a Fuse............................................313 Vehicles With: Modem.............................415
Changing a Road Wheel...........................370 Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting -
Changing the 12V Battery - Excluding: Vehicles With: SYNC 3.............................416
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)..............329
562
Index
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags.........51

Network.........................................................414 Driving Aids....................................................254
Connecting FordPass to the Modem..........414 Driving Economically.................................288
Enabling and Disabling the Modem............414 Driving Hints..................................................288
What Is the Modem...........................................414 Driving Through Shallow Water.............289
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi DRL
Network - Vehicles With: SYNC 3........414 See: Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Coolant Check Configurable Daytime Running
See: Engine Coolant Check............................324 Lamps.................................................................88
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator........52 See: Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Creating a MyKey...........................................65 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)................88
Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot...........418
Cross Traffic Alert........................................263
Cruise Control...............................................239
E
Cruise Control Indicators..........................240 Electric Parking Brake...................................211
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise Electric Vehicle Information....................454
Control.............................................................81 Electromagnetic Compatibility...............531
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Stop and Emergency Call Limitations.......................56
Go......................................................................82 Emergency Call Requirements.................55
Cup Holders....................................................167 Emergency Call System Data.....................18
Customer Assistance.................................298 Emission Law.................................................192
Customer Information...............................485 End User License Agreement.................534
Radio Frequency Certification Engine Block Heater.....................................174
Labels...............................................................485 Engine Coolant Check................................324
Engine Emission Control............................192
D Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................77
Data Privacy......................................................15 Engine Oil Check...........................................319
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With: Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.3L
Configurable Daytime Running EcoBoost™..................................................319
Lamps.............................................................88 Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.0L..........................319
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With: Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.3L...........................319
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)............88 Engine Specifications - 2.3L
Digital Radio..................................................420 EcoBoost™.................................................378
Direction Indicators.......................................89 Engine Specifications - 3.0L, ST............378
Doors and Locks.............................................68 Engine Specifications - 3.0L...................380
Drive Mode Control......................................273 Engine Specifications - 3.3L,
Drive Modes..........................................................273 Gasoline.......................................................380
Drive Modes....................................................273 Engine Specifications - 3.3L, Hybrid
Deep Snow/Sand...............................................273 Electric Vehicle (HEV).............................381
Eco...........................................................................274 Entertainment..............................................435
Normal...................................................................274 Environment.....................................................19
Slippery..................................................................274 EPB
Sport.......................................................................274 See: Electric Parking Brake...............................211
Tow/Haul...............................................................274 Essential Towing Checks..........................285
Trail..........................................................................274 Event Data.........................................................16
Driver Alert.....................................................254 Export Unique Options.................................14
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................47 Exterior Mirrors - Excluding: ST.................95
563
Index
Exterior Mirrors - ST......................................96 General Information on Radio

Frequencies...................................................57
F General Maintenance Information........476
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Fastening the Seatbelts..............................39 Canada..........................................................301
Flat Tire Getting the Services You Need..............298
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................370 Global Opening...............................................95
Floor Mats......................................................289
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps........................................88
H
Ford Credit.........................................................12 Hazard Flashers............................................292
Ford Protect...................................................474 Headlamp Adjusting
Four-Wheel Drive........................................203 See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................335
Principle of Operation......................................203 Headlamp Exit Delay....................................87
Front Fog Lamps............................................88 Headrest
Front Parking Aid..........................................227 See: Head Restraints.........................................144
Front Passenger Sensing System............48 Head Restraints............................................144
Front Wiper Blades Heated Exterior Mirrors...............................142
See: Changing the Front Wiper Blades......336 Heated Rear Window..................................142
Fuel and Refueling........................................181 Heated Seats.................................................156
Fuel Consumption.........................................191 Heated Steering Wheel................................82
Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................183 Heated Windshield.......................................141
Fuel Filter........................................................336 Heating
Fuel Quality - E85.........................................181 See: Climate Control..........................................137
Fuel Quality - Gasoline...............................183 High Voltage Battery...................................196
Fuel Shutoff...................................................292 General Information - Hybrid Electric
Fuses................................................................305 Vehicle (HEV).................................................196
Fuse Specification Chart..........................305 Hill Descent Control....................................224
Hill Descent Control Indicator.................224
G Hill Start Assist..............................................213
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Garage Door Opener...................................160 Climate..........................................................139
Garage Door Opener Limitations...........160 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Garage Door Opener Precautions.........160 Brakes..............................................................211
Garage Door Opener Radio Hood Lock
Frequencies.................................................163 See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........315
Gauges - Vehicles With: 12.3 Inch Horn.....................................................................82
Instrument Cluster Display How Does 911 Assist Work..........................55
Screen............................................................102 How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With
Gauges - Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch Stop and Go Work.....................................241
Instrument Cluster Display How Does Drive Mode Control
Screen...........................................................104 Work...............................................................273
Gauges - Vehicles With: 6.5 Inch How Does the Garage Door Opener
Instrument Cluster Display Work...............................................................160
Screen.............................................................101 How Does the Rear Occupant Alert
Gearbox System Work...............................................158
See: Transmission...............................................197
564
Index
Hybrid Vehicle Frequently Asked Limited Slip Differential............................209

Questions - Hybrid Electric Vehicle Load Carriers
(HEV).............................................................180 See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers.............276
Hybrid Vehicle Operation - Hybrid Load Carrying.................................................275
Electric Vehicle (HEV)..............................178 General Information..........................................275
Load Limit........................................................277
I Locating the Wireless Accessory
Charger..........................................................166
Ignition Switch...............................................168 Locking and Unlocking................................68
In California (U.S. Only)............................299 Lug Nuts
Information Display Control.......................82 See: Changing a Road Wheel........................370
Information Displays....................................110
General Information - Vehicles With: 12.3
Inch Instrument Cluster Display
M
Screen.................................................................112 Maintenance...................................................315
General Information - Vehicles With: 4.2 General Information..........................................315
Inch Instrument Cluster Display Manual Seats.................................................146
Screen.................................................................115 Memory Function.........................................150
General Information - Vehicles With: 6.5 Message Center
Inch Instrument Cluster Display See: Information Displays................................110
Screen.................................................................110 Mirrors
Information Messages.................................119 See: Windows and Mirrors................................94
Installing Child Restraints...........................25 Mobile Communications Equipment......14
Instrument Cluster........................................101 Mobile Device Data........................................18
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................87 Moonroof..........................................................99
Instrument Panel.............................................21 Motorcraft Parts - 2.3L
Interior Air Quality.........................................143 EcoBoost™.................................................382
Interior Lamps.................................................90 Motorcraft Parts - 3.0L..............................382
Interior Mirror...................................................98 Motorcraft Parts - 3.3L..............................383
Introduction........................................................9 MyKey – Troubleshooting...........................67
MyKey™.............................................................64
J Principle of Operation........................................64
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................293 N

K Navigation......................................................449
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........479
Keyless Entry.....................................................71
Keyless Starting............................................169
Keys and Remote Controls.........................57
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................320
L Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check.......................................319
Lane Keeping System................................255 Opening and Closing the Hood...............315
Liftgate...............................................................73 Ordering Additional Owner's
Lighting Control..............................................86 Literature.....................................................303
Lighting..............................................................86 Overhead Console........................................167
General Information...........................................86
565
Index
Overriding Automatic High Beam Radio Transceiver Module.............................509

Control............................................................93 SYNC........................................................................511
Overriding Reverse Braking Assist..........217 Telematics Control Unit...................................516
Overriding the Set Speed..........................247 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Sensors..............................................................516
P Wireless Accessory Charging Module........523
Rear Axle........................................................209
Parking Aids...................................................225 Rear Occupant Alert System Audible
Principle of Operation......................................225 Warnings.......................................................159
Passive Anti-Theft System..........................77 Rear Occupant Alert System
PATS Indicators......................................................159
See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................77 Rear Occupant Alert System
Pedestrian Alert System.............................54 Limitations...................................................158
Pedestrian Protection..................................54 Rear Occupant Alert System
Perchlorate.........................................................12 Precautions..................................................158
Personalized Settings...................................117 Rear Occupant Alert System...................158
Personal Safety System™..........................45 Rear Parking Aid...........................................225
Phone...............................................................447 Rear Passenger Climate Controls..........140
Post-Crash Alert System..........................296 Rear Seats........................................................151
Power Door Locks Rear Under Floor Storage.........................275
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................68 Rear View Camera.......................................234
Power Liftgate..................................................73 Rear View Camera
Power Seats....................................................147 See: Rear View Camera...................................234
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................329 Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........85
Power Windows.............................................94 Rear Wiper Blades
Pre-Collision Assist....................................268 See: Changing the Rear Wiper Blades.......337
Programming the Garage Door Opener Recommended Towing Weights...........284
to Your Garage Door Opener Reduced Engine Performance...............288
Motor...............................................................161 Refueling - Excluding: Hybrid Electric
Programming the Garage Door Opener Vehicle (HEV).............................................185
to Your Gate Opener Motor...................162 Refueling - Hybrid Electric Vehicle
Programming the Garage Door Opener (HEV).............................................................188
to Your Hand-Held Transmitter............161 Remote Control...............................................57
Protecting the Environment........................19 Remote Start..................................................142
Puncture Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............344
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................370 Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................12
R Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................63
Radio Frequency Certification Replacing the Cabin Air Filter...................143
Labels...........................................................485 Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Blind Spot Information System Only)..............................................................303
Sensors............................................................485 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Body Control Module........................................491 Only)..............................................................303
Cruise Control Module.....................................494 Reprogramming the Garage Door
Garage Door Opener.........................................497 Opener...........................................................163
Keys and Remote Controls............................498 Resuming the Set Speed..........................240
Passive Anti-Theft System............................505 Reverse Braking Assist Indicators...........217
566
Index
Reverse Braking Assist Snow Chains

Precautions..................................................216 See: Using Snow Chains.................................363
Reverse Braking Assist................................216 Spare Wheel
Reverse Braking Assist – See: Changing a Road Wheel........................370
Troubleshooting.............................................218 Special Notices................................................13
Reverse Braking Assist – Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Troubleshooting.........................................218 Maintenance..............................................482
Reverse Braking Assist – Frequently Asked Speed Control
Questions.........................................................219 See: Cruise Control...........................................239
Reverse Braking Assist – Information Speed Sign Recognition...........................266
Messages..........................................................218 Stability Control............................................221
Roadside Assistance...................................291 Principle of Operation.......................................221
Roadside Emergencies...............................291 Starter Switch
Rollover Warning.........................................485 See: Ignition Switch...........................................168
Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................276 Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................169
Running-In Starting a Hybrid Electric Vehicle
See: Breaking-In.................................................288 System............................................................172
Running Out of Fuel....................................183 Starting and Stopping the Engine.........168
General Information..........................................168
S Steering...........................................................268
Steering Wheel................................................79
Safety Canopy™..............................................51 Storage Compartments.............................167
Safety Precautions.......................................181 Sunroof
Satellite Radio..............................................422 See: Moonroof......................................................99
Scheduled Maintenance...........................476 Sun Shades......................................................99
Seatbelt Extensions......................................44 Sun Visors.........................................................98
Seatbelt Height Adjustment.......................41 Supplementary Restraints System.........46
Seatbelt Reminder.........................................42 Principle of Operation........................................46
Seatbelts...........................................................38 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
Principle of Operation........................................38 and Off..........................................................245
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator Switching Automatic High Beam Control
Chime...............................................................41 On and Off.....................................................92
Seats.................................................................144 Switching Cruise Control On and
Security...............................................................77 Off..................................................................239
Selecting a Drive Mode..............................273 Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control
Service Data......................................................16 to Cruise Control.......................................248
Settings Data.....................................................17 Switching Hill Descent Control On and
Settings...........................................................458 Off...................................................................224
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Switching Intelligent Mode On and
Gap................................................................246 Off..................................................................250
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Switching Lane Centering On and
Speed............................................................245 Off..................................................................249
Setting the Cruise Control Speed..........239 Switching Rear Occupant Alert System
Setting the Hill Descent Speed..............224 On and Off...................................................158
Side Airbags.....................................................50 Switching Reverse Braking Assist On and
Side Sensing System..................................229 Off....................................................................217
Sitting in the Correct Position..................144 Symbols Glossary.............................................9
567
Index
SYNC™ 3.........................................................427 Vehicle Identification Number................383

General Information..........................................427 Vehicle Storage............................................344
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.....................460 Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot................................418
Ventilated Seats............................................157
T Ventilation
See: Climate Control..........................................137
Technical Specifications VIN
See: Capacities and Specifications............378 See: Vehicle Identification Number............383
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Voice Control....................................................81
Line Program (U.S. Only)......................300
Tire Care..........................................................349
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........364
W
Tires Warning Lamps and Indicators...............105
See: Wheels and Tires......................................347 Warranty Information................................529
Towing a Trailer............................................283 Washer Fluid Check....................................336
Towing the Vehicle on Four Washers
Wheels..........................................................287 See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................340
Towing.............................................................283 See: Wipers and Washers.................................83
Traction Control...........................................220 Waxing..............................................................341
Principle of Operation......................................220 What Is 911 Assist...........................................55
Trailer Sway Control...................................284 What Is a Connected Vehicle...................414
Transmission..................................................197 What Is Adaptive Cruise Control With
Transporting the Vehicle..........................296 Lane Centering............................................241
What Is Automatic High Beam
U Control.............................................................92
What Is Cruise Control...............................239
Under Hood Overview - 2.3L What Is Drive Mode Control.....................273
EcoBoost™..................................................316 What Is Hill Descent Control...................224
Under Hood Overview - 3.0L....................317 What Is Intelligent Adaptive Cruise
Under Hood Overview - 3.3L....................318 Control...........................................................241
Unique Driving Characteristics................176 What Is Reverse Braking Assist...............216
USB Port.........................................................425 What Is the Cabin Air Filter.......................143
Using Four-Wheel Drive............................203 What Is the Garage Door Opener..........160
Using MyKey With Remote Start What is the Rear Occupant Alert
Systems...........................................................67 System...........................................................158
Using Snow Chains.....................................363 What Is the Wireless Accessory
Using Stability Control...............................222 Charger..........................................................166
Using Summer Tires...................................362 Wheel Nuts
Using Traction Control...............................220 See: Changing a Road Wheel........................370
Using Voice Recognition...........................429 Wheels and Tires.........................................347
Using Winter Tires.......................................362 General Information..........................................347
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Technical Specifications.................................376
Program (Canada Only).........................301
V
Vehicle Care...................................................339
General Information.........................................339
568
Index
Wi Fi
See: Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Name or Password.......................................418
See: Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Network - Vehicles With: SYNC 3............414
See: Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot.......418
See: Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot.............................418
Windows and Mirrors...................................94
Windshield Washers.....................................84
Windshield Wipers........................................83
Winter Tires
See: Using Winter Tires...................................362
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................336
Wipers and Washers.....................................83
Wireless Accessory Charger
Precautions.................................................166
Wireless Accessory Charger.....................166
569

2023 Ford Explorer Owners Manual Version 1 Om en-US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023 Ford Explorer Owners Manual Version 1 Om en-US

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023 Ford Explorer Owners Manual Version 1 Om en-US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FORD EXPLORER Owner's Manual 2023

All rights reserved.

WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and

Introduction Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator

Environment Pedestrian Protection - Hybrid

Creating a MyKey ..........................................65 Lighting

Instrument Cluster Head Restraints ...........................................144

Climate Control Garage Door Opener

Auxiliary Power Points Refueling - Excluding: Hybrid Electric

Traction Control Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions -

Drive Mode Control Customer Assistance

Power Steering Fluid Check ....................329 Capacities and Specifications

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

WARNING: Driving while

Note: This manual describes product Air conditioning system

Note: Always use and operate your vehicle

Note: Pass on this manual when selling

Brake fluid - non petroleum Explosive gas

Brake system Fan warning

Brake system Fasten seatbelt

Cabin air filter Flammable

Check fuel cap Front fog lamps

Child safety door lock or unlock Fuel pump reset

Child seat lower anchor Fuse compartment

Child seat tether anchor Hazard flashers

Cruise control Headlamp high beams

Do not open when hot Headlamps on

Electric Parking brake Heated rear window

Engine air filter Hill descent control

Engine coolant Horn control

Engine coolant temperature Interior luggage compartment

Engine oil Jack

Keep out of reach of children Requires registered technician

Lighting control Safety alert

Low fuel level See Owner's Manual

Low tire pressure warning See Service Manual

Maintain correct fluid level Side airbag

Malfunction Indicator Lamp Shield the eyes

Note operating instructions Stability control

Panic alarm Stability control off

Parking aid Trail control

Parking lamps E67018 Turn Signal

Passenger airbag activated Windshield defrosting system

Passenger airbag deactivated Windshield wiping system

Power steering fluid Windshield wash and wipe

Power windows front/rear

Power window lockout

PERCHLORATE Scheduled Maintenance and

FORD CREDIT Genuine Ford replacement collision parts

SPECIAL NOTICES Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link

Using mobile communications equipment

• Events or errors in essential systems,

SERVICE DATA you, where permitted by law. For Canada

Note: Event data recorder data is recorded Entertainment Data

AT A GLANCE - ST • Optional ST braking system includes

GENERAL INFORMATION (CPST) to make sure that you properly

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children

Child Child Size, Height, Weight, or Age Recommended Restraint

Use a child restraint

When installing a child restraint with